5:^ .^^ J '^ >> ^ V .A' A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR GERMAN LANGUAGE By CHARLES FOLLEN, PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATUR* IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. SIXTH EDITION. BOSTON: BILLIARD, GRAY, AND COMPANY 1838. J Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1832, by HiLLiARD, Gray, and Co. in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts C AMBRIDGlJ: CHARLES FOLSOM, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. The language, of which this grammar contains the practical rules, is frequently designated by the name of the High Ger- man. This epithet was originally applied to the language in order to distinguish it from the Low German, which compre- hends all those dialects that are spoken in the level coun- tries of the north of Germany. But as the language which is called the High German, differs from the dialects of the south of Germany, as well as from those of the north, this name is now applied exclusively to that general language, which is spoken and written by all wellbred Germans. Accordingly it is more properly called the German language, without any other epithet. Among the various dialects which have existed and still exist in different parts of Germany, there is a characteristic difference between those of upper and of lower Germany. The dialects of the north of Germany are in general softer than those of the south, and the vowels are more protracted ; while the southern dialects are characterized by greater variety and energy. In all these various dialects we discover the distinct traces of one common and original language, of which each dialect may be considered a more or less perfect copy. But of the time when this original language may have been used as the common instrument of speech by the whole German race, we have as little knowledge, as of the primeval history of the nation itself If we examine the his- tory of Germany, and particularly the remaining documents of its language from the fourth century to the fifteenth, we find that at different periods one of the various dialects was more than the other employed for literary productions. Such a temporary ascendency was owing partly to the fact, that sometimes one of the German tribes happened to possess a greater • number of superior minds, and partly to j)olitical circumstances. As Germany was an elective kingdom, its government sometimes devolved on men of different German tribes, who had it in their power to increase the influence of tlieir native dialect, particularly if they promoted literature and science. Thus in the reign of the emperors from the house of Hohenstaufen, the Suabian dialect gained the ascen- dency, and becauie the classical language of the polite or, as it is commonly called, the romantic literature of Germany, in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries. In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, when the spirit of poetry died away, and writings in prose increased, the language also assumed a more prosaic character. This change was effected by various causes, as, by the language of the laws or customs, which were at that time committed to writing ; moreover by translations, and novels, and particu- larly by the writings of those religious philosophers, who are known by the name of mystics. Tauler, who lived in the fourteenth century, and whose works still belong to the most interesting documents of ancient German prose, is particular- ly celebrated among the German mystics. These thinkers in theology, although they were frequently led into error by their imperfect knowledge of natural objects and an aversion to the examination of facts, on the other hand distinguished themselves by their independence of established prejudices, and by intense thought, by which they strove to sound the essence of religion. Their merits in developing the German language cannot be doubted. They arose in different parts of Germany, and seem to have intentionally avoided such provincial expressions, as might have prevented their writings from being generally diffused ; and these writings could not but impress the minds of others with the difference between the general substance and the local ingredients of the Ian- PREFACE. VU guage. Thus one writing corrected another, and the language gained in generality, as well as in philosophical and grammati- cal exactness ; while it lost by degrees its ancient poetical flow and richness. This prosaic language, thus formed, is essentially the same which prevailed at the time of the Reformation in the six- teenth century, and which at present, with few alterations, is spoken and written by all wellbred Germans. It is a false notion which was first spread by Adelung,* that Luther, in his writings, and particularly in his translation of the Bible, availed himself of his native dialect of the Electorate of Sax- ony, which by the signal success of his books became the general language of Germany. Luther cannot be considered as the father of the general language of his country ; no more than he can be regarded as the father of the Reforma- tion. He found them both already existing, and promoted and modified them according to his own views. With re- spect to the language, he says himself, " I have not a distinct, particular, and peculiar kind of German, but I use the com- mon German language, in order that the inhabitants of both the upper and lower countries may understand me." But even without these express words of Luther, the above statement would be sufficiently evident from a considerable number of books which were published before, and at the same time with those of Luther, in all of which we find essentially the same language used for various subjects ; as, for example, by the painter Albrecht Dlirer for laying down the principles of geometry, drawing, and fortification. But the merit of Luther consists in his having written the com- mon language with particular propriety and grammatical pre- cision, and in having extended it more than any other author among the people at large. * This error has lately been repeated by Noehden in the Preface to his Grammar. Tin PREFACE. The poetic powers of this common language, which had been formed principally by prose writers, were developed by some eminent minds, in the seventeenth century, among whom we mention particularly Frederic a Spee, and Martin Opitz, the founder of the Silesian school of poets. But in the course of the seventeenth and the beginning of the eigh- teenth century, the language was adulterated by French ex- pressions and modes of speaking. From this debasement the language, as well as the literature of Germany, was re- deemed by the great authors who have distinguished themselves during the last eighty years. They have shown its suffi- ciency for every branch of literature and science, and have restored to it that most precious of all its properties, the power of being developed and increased out of its own sub- stance. The works of these authors, the history and the genius of the language, and the manner in which it is used by wellbred people in different parts of Germany, are the true standards for speaking and writing it correctly. There is no part of Germany where the whole population speak the language correctly. Neither the public of Dresden or Meissen, nor that of Hanover or Gottingen, can be looked to as filling the place of an academy of the classical German language. Slight shades of provincial dialects enter into the manner of speaking even of the best educated persons. Some faults in pronunciation, which are peculiar to different parts of Ger- many, may be mentioned here. Sometimes b is confound- ed with p, and d with t; a and 6 are pronounced like c, and M like i; g in the beginning of words is pronounced by some Germans like Tc, and by others like j. Sometimes s before t and p is pronounced like sh in English ; and sch when it stands before a liquid consonant is sounded like s ; final syllables in c (with or without other letters) are pronounced too short, and sometimes with a nasal sound. A gross grammatical fault consists in using the accusative PREFACE. IX instead of the dative, and the dative instead of the accusa- tive case. NUAfter these observations on the history and actual state of the German language, I will add a few on German gram- mar. It is reported of Charlemagne, that among other plans for the advancement of knowledge he conceived also that of inducing the learned men of that age to compose a grammar of the German language. But this project remained unexe- cuted. Some German grammars were published in the six- teenth century ; but none of great eminence until the eigh- teenth. During the first half of the eighteenth century, Gotsched wrote his grammar, which held the highest rank till, in the last half of the same century, that of Adelung ap- peared. Although the bad taste of Gotsclied did great injury to the literature of his country, yet his merit as a German grammarian cannot be denied. He was however far surpass- ed by Adelung, the author of the most complete dictionary of the German language in German. After that of Adelung a great number of German grammars were published in Germany, of which I shall notice three, viz. the historical grammar by Grimm, the grammar by Hannscli, and that by Heinsius. The grammar of Grimm exhibits a profound grammatical inquiry into the gradual formation of the Ger- man language. The grammar of Harnisch is characterized by its metaphysical investigation of the German language ; it abounds in deep and ingenious remarks, but sometimes runs into a sort of philological mysticism. The grammar of Heinsius, although it contains many general observations on the philosopl.lcal importance of each part of speech, is chiefly of a practical nature, and has on this account been introduced as a guide into most German schools. With respect to German grammars written in foreign lan- guages, I shall mention only two which are commonly used in England, and which have been employed in composing this grammar. I mean the grammar of Noehden (the fifth edition of which was published in 1827), and that of Rowho- tham (printed in 1824). These grammars contain many vahiable rules and useful directions, most of which are derived from German grammars, particularly that of Adelung. Noeh- den indeed not unfrequently pretends to originality ; but those passages of his grammar in which he speaks as the philosopher of the German language, and even those practi- cal parts which he most boasts of, as being of his own in- vention, are certainly the weakest in his book. While the rules are better expressed in the grammar of Noehden than in that of Rowbotham, the latter is more useful on account of the exercises which are joined to each rule. The principal defect of Rowbotham consists in particularizing too much ; of which method the natural consequence is, that many cases which belong together under the same general rule remain un- decided. In the Grammar which I now offer to the public, I have endeavoured to preserve all that is valuable in the two last mentioned grammars. I have altered wherever I thought it necessary, and will mention here some of the most impor- tant changes that have been made. 1. In the third chapter of Part First, Book First, I have tried to arrange the sounds of the German language in their natural order. In this arrangement I was guided by the excellent treatise of Mr. Duponceau on Phonology * in which he has laid down general directions for analyzing the sounds of every language, and then applied them to the English. In a few in- stances I have ventured to differ from the opinion of my learned friend, particularly with respect to the distinction between palatals and Unguals, and in regard to the consonants d and t, which I have not ranked with the lingua-dentals, or dentals (as the grammarians commonly do), but with the palatals. * Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, at Phila- delphia. Vol. I. New Series, No. xvii. PREFACE. XI I have thought it best to found the distinction between palatals and Unguals on the simple fact that some consonants are formed by a particular part of the palate being touched by the tongue, while others are produced by the position of the tongue when brought near the palate without touching it. Accordingly I and n have been ranked with the palatals, and r with the Unguals. In regard to d and t, it may be observed, that they are pronounced as well by persons who have lost their teeth, as by those who retain them. The tongue may in- deed touch the teeth in sounding these consonants, but if this circumstance had any influence upon their pronunciation, it would add a hissing sound to that of d and t, and consequently spoil the utterance of these letters. Accordingly I have ranked d and t among the palatal consonants. The limits of this grammar have not allowed me to give more than a general analysis of the sounds of the German lan- guage ; while a more minute investigation would have led to more satisfactory results.* 2. In representing the German declensions (which have cost so much trouble to all German grammarians) I have been principally guided by Heinsius, whose arrangement I have en- deavoured to render more complete and systematic ; so that there should remain no exception to the principles laid down.t * English students of the German language, as well as German students of the English, may be surprised to find, that the only sound which Walker, in his Critical Pronouncing Dictionary, characterizes as a German sound (I mean the hroad German a, as he calls it), does not exist in the German language ; that this sound is confined to some dialects, and is never heard from the mouth of a wellbred German. f There is no part of Noehden's Grammar of which the author boasts more than of his arrangement of the German declensions. To satisfy the reader in regard to the foundation of these preten- sions, it is sufficient to observe, that Noehden mentions only one Xll PREFACE. I have added a mode of signifying by two letters tne manner in which each noun is declined ; which method I should think would be of still greater use to the student, if in the dictionary also every noun were marked in this manner. 53. With respect to the German verb, I have thought it best to treat first of its original parts, i. e. of those which are form- ed by the addition of letters to the radical syllables ; and afterwards of those supplementary parts of the verb which are formed by njeans of auxiliary verbs. This distribution is evidently most congenial with the real nature of the German verb and its inflections ; but it presents the additional advan- tage, that the distinction between regular and irregular verbs can, according to this method, be placed at the head of this doctrine , instead of having the regular forms of the verb preceded by the irregular auxiliary verbs. Moreover this difference between regular and irregular verbs affects only the original parts of the verb, and has no influence upon those, which are formed by means of auxiliary verbs. But according to the common mode of mixing together the origi- nal and supplementary tenses (in order to make the German verb appear as complete as the Latin or Greek verb), the distinction between regular and irregular verbs is carried also through those parts of the verb which are not at all affected by this difference. 4. As the German language in this country, as well as in England, is studied by many persons particularly on account of the polite literature of Germany, I have wished to contribute to the enjoyment of lovers of poetry by giving (in the Third Book) as full an account of German versification as the limits of this elementary work would admit. I have availed myself of the opinions of Voss and Schlegel on German prosody, as characteristic of the fourth declension, viz. that it " comprehends all those masculines and neuters which are not included in the two foregoing declensions." PREFACE. Mil far as they coincided with those to which I was led in pursuing this study with particular and continued interest. To facilitate the pronunciation, I have marked the princi- pal accent on every word in this grammar ; and experience has already convinced me of the eminent usefulness of this method. This idea was suggested to me by my friend, Mr. Folsom, to whose excellent judgment I am gratefully indebted for a great number of valuable suggestions in the definition of principles and choice of expressions. In regard to orthography, which in some points is a matter of dispute among German writers, I have in general followed the principle of writing the words as they are pronounced, — a principle, which is generally acknowledged as correct, though with more or fewer exceptions. I have not adopted any mode of spelling in which I am not supported by some distinguished modern author. With regard to the letter t) {y), and the compound % (52), which some authors use more or less frequently, while others entirely reject them, I have made a few remarks on the former letter, on pages 6 and 8. As to %, it is to be observed, that whenever the J (2) mouifies the sound of the f (s), it is not pronounced as j, but as an addi- tional f, rendering the sound stronger and more acute. Ac- cordingly in this Grammar, whenever the ^ has iio effect on the pronunciation of the f, the j is omitted ; but whenever it modi- fies the pronunciation of that letter, (f is used instead of fj, except at the end of words, where f; is retained instead of f^, in the same manner as cf is used instead of f.* I will conclude this preface by adding a few observations on the manner in which I think this (or any other) grammar may be used to the greatest advantage by beginners. The * The % seemed preferable to f^, which is used by Harnish, sim- ply because the latter has rather an unusual typographical appear- ance. — In those German writings which are printed in Roman type, ss is generally used instead of sz. b XI? PREFACE. pronunciation ought, of course, to be first attended to* Then the beginner should acquaint himself thoroughly with all the ordinary inflections of articles, nouns, adjectives, pro- nouns, and verbs. I do not think it advisable to attend in this first study of the grammar to all the principles and minute observations which are contained in those chapters in which the grammatical forms are stated. It is sufficient, that the learner should be able to translate correctly and easily all the exercises which are added to illustrate those forms. — After having acquired this elementary knowledge, he ought to be- gin to translate some easy German book. For this purpose I published about two years ago a collection of extracts from the best modern German authors, under the title, " Deutsches Lesebuch fiir Anfanger," German Reader for Beginners^ Cambridge, University Press, 1826. This collection was made with the advice of my respected friend, Mr. Ticknor, who, being at the head of the department of modern langua- ges in Harvard College, has introduced and most effectually promoted the study of the German language and literature at this University. As the student is making progress in translating, he will himself feel the necessity of a more minute study of grammar. This study ought to consist, partly in the teacher's referring the learner to that particular passage in the grammar which will explain any difficulty he has met with in translating, — and partly in a gradual, thorough study of the grammar from the beginning to the end. During this study, the translating should be continued, and be accompanied with exercises in writing, in addition to those contained in the grammar. After having in this preface offered some views of the history and actual state of the German language and German * A correct pronunciation cannot be acquired by self-instruc- tion ; since all the means which are used to explain the sounds of one language by those of another, cannot effect more than an ap- proximation to the true pronunciation. grammar in general, and of the characteristics of this Gram- mar in particular, I present it to the public, with the assur- ance, that its severest critic cannot be more fully convinced of its imperfections, than THE AUTHOR. Harvard College, 10 May, 1828. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The increased number of students of the German language in this country has called for a new edition of this Grammar. In preparing it I have availed myself of the suggestions of others, as well as of those of my own experience in teaching, to improve the work, or at least to correct its defects. Every part of the Grammar in its present form will, I hope, bear witness to the earnest endeavour of the author to make it a more thorough, correct, and practical book. In the " Ele- ments," the German Verb in particular has been presented and explained in a somewhat different and, it is believed, more satisfactory manner. In the " Syntax," the combination of that part of it which treats of the agreement and government, with that which teaches the arrangement of words, will cer- tainly meet with the approbation of instructers. Before this edition of the Grammar could be prepared, a new edition of the " German Reader," was called for, and published, in German type, carefully revised and improved.* About the same time an excellent collection of German and English Phrases and Dialogues was published by Mr. F. Graeter.t This book has ably supplied a want which was equally felt by teachers and students. Some alterations in this edition have been suggested by a perusal of the German Grammar of C. F. Becker (published * German Reader for Beginners, — 2)i-Utffl>CS icfclnid) fuv 2(nfdn3er. Boston. Hilliard, Gray, Little, & Wilkins. 18.31. f German and English Phrases and Dialogues, &c., collected by Francis Graeter. Boston. Hilliard, Gray, Little, & Wilkins. 1831 PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. XVU in London, 1830), a work, which must be interesting and use- ful to those who, having acquired a competent knowledge of German, wish to extend their inquiries further, to the whole structure and philosophy of the language. C. FOLLEN. Cambridge, 10 Dec. 1831. h* PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. In preparing the third edition of this Grammar, I have en- deavoured to render it more valuable by such improvements as could be derived from a constant philosophical investigation of the language, combined with daily experience in teaching, from a continual study of the wants of learners, and from the observations of other instructers. Those who may take the trouble to compare this with the previous edition, will find here a number of corrections, and additional rules and illustra- tions, which I trust will prove useful both to students and teachers. I am now preparing for the press the Gospel of St. John in German, with a literal interlinear translation for beginners, on a plan somewhat different from the Hamiltonian method. I hope that this book, together with the Grammar and Reader, will form a sufficient preparatory course to enable the faithful student to enter upon a thorough and extensive study of Ger- man literature. C. FOLLEN. Cambridge, July, 1834. CONTENTS. BOOK I. ELEMENTS. PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. Page CHAPTER I. THE ALPHABET ... 1 CHAPTER II. USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. . 3 CHAPTER III. GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION 4 CHAPTER IV. THE SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE . 4 § 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS . . .4 <§ 2. CONSONANTS . . . . 7 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH. k CHAPTER I. ARTICLE . . . . . .11 CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN . . 12 i^i 1. GENDER ...... 12 ^ 2. DECLENSION ..... 13 A. Declension of Common Nouns . 14 B. Declaision of Proper Nouns . 25 CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES . . , . .34 ^ 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES . . 34 ^ 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTITBS . . 44 CONTENTS. CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS ..... 48 I. Cardinal Numbers . . . .48 II. Ordinal Numbers .... 50 III. Numerals of Proportion . . .52 IV. Numerals of Distribution . . 52 V. Collective Numbers . . . .53 CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS . . . . . 64 § 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS . . . .54 § 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS ... 56 ^ 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS . . 59 § 4. RELATIVE PRONOUNS ... 61 § 5. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS . . .62 § 6. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS ... 63 § 7. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS . . .65 CHAPTER VI. VERBS ..... 69 General Remarks . . . . .69 <§ 1. REGULAR VERBS .... 72 ^ 2. IRREGULAR VERBS . . . .74 § 3. MIXED VERBS .... 75 § 4. REFLECTIVE VERBS . . . .98 ^ 5. IMPERSONAL VERBS . . . 101 ^ 6. COMPOUND VERBS . . . 104 ^ 7. AUXILIARY VERBS . . . .114 A. Supplementary Tenses of Active and Neuter Verbs .... 127 B. Supplementary Tenses of Refiective Verbs 136 C. Supplementary Tenses of Impersonal Verbs 137 D. Supplementary Tenses of Compound Verbs 138 ^ 8. PASSIVE VERBS . . 139 CONTENTS. XXI CHAPTER VII. ADVERBS ..... 150 <§ 1. DIFFERENT KINDS OF ADVERBS . 161 § 2. FORMATION OF ADVERBS . . .156 A. Adverbs derived from Nouns or Adjectives .... 156 B. Compound Adverbs . . . 157 § 3. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS . . 159 CHAPTER VIII. PREPOSITIONS .... 159 CHAPTER IX. CONJUNCTIONS .... 160 CHAPTER X. INTERJECTIONS .... 161 CHAPTER XI. ON THE MODE OF FORMING NEW WORDS 161 <^ 1. MODES OF ENRICHING THE LANGUAGE FROM WITHIN ITSELF . . . 162 § 2. INTRODUCTION OF FOREIGN WORDS INTO THE LANGUAGE .... 170 BOOK II. SYNTAX. CHAPTER I. THE ARTICLE .... 174 CHAPTER II. NOUNS ...... 180 CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES .... 195 CHAPTER IV. PRONOUNS ..... 201 CHAPTER V. VERBS . . . • . . 210 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT . . 210 A. Persons and Numbers . . 210 B. Tenses 212 C. 3Ioods 215 D. TJie Passive Voice . . . 223 CONTENTS. E. The Auxiliaries . . 224 F. The Verb governing Cases . 225 § 2. ARRANGEMENT .... 234 A. Indicative Mood .... 234 B. Subjunctive Mood . . . 237 C. Imperative Mood .... 238 D. Infinitive Mood . . . 238 E. Participles . . . .239 F. Compound Verbs . . . 241 CHAPTER VI. ADVERBS ..... 242 CHAPTER VII. PREPOSITIONS .... 245 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS .... 251 CHAPTER IX. INTERJECTIONS . . . 259 BOOK III. PROSODY. CHAPTER I. DIVISION OF W^ORDS INTO SYLLABLES 260 CHAPTER I£. QUANTITY ..... 261 CHAPTER III. ACCENT ..... 263 CHAPTER IV. GERMAN VERSE .... 266 § 1. RHYTHM 266 1. The Ancient Metres . . 266 2. The German Rhythm 268 ^ 2. CONSONANCE ..... 273 1. Rhi/me 273 2. Assonance ... . 274 3. Alliteration .... 274 CONTENTS. XXIII APPENDIX. I. ACTS ix. 1-28, (in the German version of Van Esz) ..... 275 II. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES .... 277 III. GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS 282 NOTICE. In this Grammar, the principal accent in each word of several syllables has been marked by the sign (') ; as, 35cvc\'tt>cvf, mine. In German books in general, no ac- cent is marked. In translating the English Exercises, the student should omit the accents in writing. In the Exercises, those words which, though expressed in English, are to be omitted in German, are printed in common type and enclosed in parentheses ; thus, (which). Those which are omitted in English, but expressed in German, are printed in Italics : thus, (which). In those cases in which a different form of expression is substituted in German, the German idiom in a literal translation, enclosed and italicized, is added to the English text. The figures over the English words indicate their position in German. Words without figures Over them stand in the same place as in English ; they sometimes separate one series of figures from another, in the same sentence. Example : Had you been^ patient^ you would have'* known*' the^ truth^. The words in German are thus arranged. Had you patient been, you would the truth known have. In studying the Elements of the Adjective and the Numeral (before attempting to translate the exercises on pages 46, 47, and .53) the beginner should acquaint himself with the rules concerning the use of the declinable and indeclinable forms of them, contained in Book II. Ch III. § 1. Rules i, ii, iii, and IV. In the same manner, together with the Elements of the Pronoun, the rules concerning the use of the different relative and interrogative pronouns, should be studied, in Book II. Ch. IV. § I. Rule I. Obs. 6 and 7. GERMAN GRAMMAR BOOK I. ELEMENTS. PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. Letters. «, ^, . CHAPTER I. THE ALPHABET. Simple Letters. Uaual Names. . ah, . . . the French ai, . . bay, . . , tsay, day, . a, ef, . ghay, hah, e, yot, kah, English. A, a. A, a. B, b. C, c. D, d. E, 6. F, f. G,g. H, h. I, i. J, J. K, k. ORTHOGRAPHY. [bOOK I. I U ... el, L, 1. 50?, m, . . . em, M, m. 9t, U/ ... en, N, n. 0/ 0, .... o, O, o. 0, b, ... the French eu, . O, o. SP, p, ... pay, . . . . P, p 0, q, ... koo, .... a, q. §H, V, . . . . err, R, r. ©, f (6), . . ess S, s. 1, t, . . . . tay, T, t. U, u, ... 00, .... U, u. II, n, .... the French u, . U, ii. ^, \), ... . fow, .... V, V. '20, n), . . . way, W, w. 3E, j:, .... iks, .... X, X. 2?, 9, .... ipsilon, ... Y, y. 3/ J/ .... tsett, Z, z. Letters. IT ^, Compound Letter^. Usual Names. English. . tsay-hah, ch. tsay-kah, .... ck. . ef-ef, ff. pay-ef, pf. pay-hah, ph. ess-tsay-hah, . . . sch. . ess-ess, ss. ess-tay, st. . ess-tsett, sz . tay-hah, th. . tay-tsett, tz. Instead of H most authors write ct' ; and |, instead of JJ. & is used only at the end of words, either separate or in composition. fy is used in this Grammar only at the end of words, instead of f£^. (For the reasons, see page 8.) PART I. CH. 2.] USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 3 The following letters, from the similarity of their form, may be easily mistaken for one another. Capitals. Small Letters. 25 and ^, 6 and I), 3) and 0, f and f, e and g:, m and VD, (S and @, V and }:, ^, ^, and di, i). and X), sot and 2B, ■ ' and O.. CHAPTER II. USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. With respect to the use of capital letters, it is to be observed : 1. All substantives, as well as all Avords used substantively, begin with capitals, and also all sentences ; as, i»CV 'Jaoi, the day. fcic Q33oc()'C, the week. i>n QOBci'fc, the wise man. t>ic SOtci'ni^cn, my family. &a6 93tfi'uc, mine (my prop- t)rt6 icfcu, the reading. erty.) ©obalt)' t>U \)0n fccn lie'^en As soon as you learn any 5!Otcrui9CU (t'VDA^ Sdcu'Cg ' news about my dear crfa(}r|i', gicb miv fogtcicl)' friends, send me word im- Stacb'v I d)t. mediately. 2. The pronouns answering to 3/0//, t/oin-, &c. must begin with a capital, when they refer to the person whom we address ; as, ©ic, you ; 3;t)V, 3{}'vigc, your ; 3)u, thou ; 2)cin, thine, &L,c. ; but the pronoun id), I, is never w-ritten with a capital but at the beginning of a sentence, or when it is used as a sub- stantive, as, tag 3ct), one's self. The pronoun fic, when it answers to the pronoun fhei/, or she, is written with a small letter, unless it begin a sentence. 3. Every word begins with a capital, when a stress is laid upon it; as, the numeral Ctn in the sentence, (£s giett miv Si'ncn <5di)i\t^T(>(i\Vt, There is but one Shakspeare.* * Leaving a space between the letters answers the same purpose ; thus, e i n e n. 4 GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. [bOOK I. CHAPTER III. GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. ^ 1. In the German language each letter is pronounced in every word. Some exceptions to this rule are mentioned in Chapter IV. Part I. ; particularly with respect to double vowels, f (e) after I {i), and ^ (A) in some cases. § 2. Each sound is constantly represented by the same letter, and each letter has only one sound. Thus the letter a (a), which has in English four different sounds, has in Ger- man only one, and this one sound is never represented by any other letter than a. A few exceptions are marked in Chapter IV. Part I., par- ticularly in regard to the letters 9 (g), t {t), t) (w), and I) (y), in words taken from foreign languages. § 3. Words that belong to foreign languages preserve in German their original spelling and pronunciation. Thus the word Cambridge (Gambvibgc) is sounded in German as in English. The dead languages are pronounced according to the Ger- man idiom. The letters t) [v) and t (t) form exceptions ; for which see Chapter IV. Part. I. CHAPTER IV. THE SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. § 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. n. A. Vowels. The vowels in German are either long or short; which distinction does not (as in English pronouncing dictionaries) imply a difference in the sound of the vowel, but merely determines its relative duration. PART I. CH. 4.] VOWELS. 5 The vowels are a... an intermediate sound between a in father, and a in water; it is long in (gvag, grass ; ()a'bcn, to have ; short in QTTaiui, man ; ^at'je, cat. d* . . . nearly like a in fat ; it is long in 25aV/ bear ; ©UVfci', Glasses ; short in dl'tiT, older ; ifp'fcl, apples. e . . nearly like a in fate ; yet closer, and without the sound ot an c which is slightly heard at the end of long a in English ; it is long in @ce, sea; gc'fjcn, to go ; short in ^ttt, bed ; Cf feu, to eat. This vowel is in some words frequently pronounced like short e in English. But elegant pronunciation in Germaay seems to prefer in every instance the close and acute sound which is heard in @CC, and fcu't>cn, to send. The e after i in the same syllable is not sounded, bui merely protracts the sound of the i, as in iic'be, love, i, I) . . . like e in bee ; it is long in miv, to me ; 55evUu', Berlin ; short in gifd), fish; SDtit'te, middle. . . . like in promote ; it is long in ©tVOin, river ; ?fiO'^(, rose ; short in fHo^", horse ; 0}f>'f(V, sacrifice. 6* . . . like the French eu in peur, which has no corresponding sound in English ; it is long in fc()6u, fine ; '3;6'1K, sounds ; short in ^op'fc, heads ; £>tf' UUncj, aperture. U . . . like 00 in moon, and u in full ; it is long in gut, good ; ^Shl'tUC, flower; short in @c()Ug, protection ; ^ilt'ttt, mother. * That a, h, and ii, are simple sounds, and not diphthongs composed of ae, OC, and Uf, is evident ; for it is impossible to produce these three sounds, by any combination of other vowels, however rapidly pronounced. It is therefore better to write Itpfel, apples; £>i(, solitude; Utniug, exercise; in- stead of 2tepfcl, Otit, Uebuug; and (S6tt}C, instead of ®CC(I}C. Two dots on the- top of rt, o, U, viz. n, 0/ it/ or ci, ij, it, signify the same sounds as the small t on the top of the same letters, 4, &, ft. 1* 6 DIPHTHONGS. [bOOK I. ft*; V} .. .like the French u in vn, to which there is no corre- sponding sound in English ; it is long in 'il^uv, door ; mil &C, tired ; shorf in tuiiu, thin ; J^iit'tf/ cottage^ Observation. The letter IJ, which some German authors retain in more or less words, and others entirely reject, has no peculiar sound of its own. It has the force of i in all words that are originally German, as well when sounded by itself, ex. 'itil'Il), Tilly, a proper name, as in the diphthongs, (see B.) ex. fc^U/ to be ; SOiai), May. In words derived from the Greek, in which V repre.sents the letter v, ■ it is commonly sounded like u, as in ©lijtcm'/ which is pronounced as if written @ii)lcm' ; and this mode of writing is also preferred by several modern scholars. — Some grammarians retain this letter wherever it serves to distinguish different words, which are spelled alike in every other respect, as ffl)U/ to be ; and fcin, his. But this reason seems insufficient, as the significa- tion of all such words is determined by the sense they have in the sentence in which they occur. Therefore, according to the general rules above stated, (Chap. III. § 1. and 2.) it seems proper to retain the I), only 1. In proper names, particularly names of persons, where the mode of writing them has an importance of its own separate from that which consists in their sound, as in J^Cl/nC, inytm ; 2. In words derived from foreign languages, where the t) has the sound of the foreign letter it represents ; for example, ©l)nom)'mit, pronounced ©UUOUll'mif ; ^OXi, pronounced 3iCvf. (The sound of the consonant 3 is given, § 2. A. 4.) In all other cases the \) should be given up, and the simple i substituted, as in fciu, to be ; ?CflCiX), May. B. Diphthongs All diphthongs are long. Ci, (ci>) . . .like i \njine; ex. ^fci'()cit, freedom ; metu, mine, fti, (a^) . . . nearly the same sound as ei, only a little ipore open ; ex. J^aiu, grove ; SD?ai, May. "' " See note on preceding page. PART I. CH. 4.] SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 7 Oi, (oi)) . . . nearly as oi in moist ; it occurs only in a few words, particularly proper names, as, <50l/CV. nif (ui;) . . . nearly as tve ; it very seldom occurs ; ex. ^fui ! fy ! au. . . nearly as ou in month (as the Scotch pronounce it) ; ex. J^aug, house ; ^vaitf, herb. eu . . . has no corresponding sound in any modern language ; it comes nearest to the sound of oi in voice, ex. gcu'Cl*/ fire ; gveunt), friend. Q,\X. .. nearly the same sound as cu, only a little mor* open ; ex. J^aU'fCf, houses ; ^'vdll'tCV, herbs. There are no triphthongs in German. § 2. CONSONANTS. A. Simple Consonants. There are in German five sorts of consonants, according to the different organs which are particularly employed in form- ing them. 1. Labials. |>...likep; ex. spcv'te, pearl; phlttlV/ clumsy. 6 . . .generally like h ; as in 55ut'tCV, butter; but at the end of words like hp, as in iaub/ foliage. m . . . like m. ; ex. SOTailU, man ; ^amitt, comb. Xt) . . . nearly like w, (omitting the sound of oo with which w begins) ; ex. QGBiut), wind ; we'ljeu, to blow. 2. Lahio-dentals. f, to, pi} . . . like /,- ex. gclg, rock; |Uif, stiff; tood, full; spt)i[ofopf)', philosopher. spi^ is not originally German, but chiefly intended to represent the Greek qp, for which some modern authors substitute f, and accordingly write §ilofof/ instead of 8 SIMPLE CONSONANTS. [bOOK 1. ^ and f have in all genuine German words the same sound.* ■JJ has the English sound of v only in words belonging to foreign languages, in which this letter is sounded as in English. 3. Palatals. ' (...like t; ex. 'itllV'tcUaubc, turtle-dove; matt, faint. i .. . generally like d; as in 2)u't)C(f(lcf/ bagpipe ; but at the end of words it sounds like dt ; as in 35ai), bath, n . . . like n ; ex. WiWX, no. — 91 becomes a nasal sound, when followed by 9 or f" (as in English) ; ex. (Scfaug'/ song ; 2)anf, thanks. I... like I; ex. ix'ik, lily ; 15aU, ball. 4. Linguals.i f . . . like the Irish r ; ex. vol'tcu, to roll ; ^MX, motionless. f (1^) . . . like s ; ex. ©ei'tc, side ; 9flcl6, rice. @ is never pronounced like z, neither has it the sharp hissing sound of the English s, as this is commonly pro- nounced. The J is sometimes used as an addition to the f (^), but then the j is never pronounced ; it is sounded in some in- stances like ^$, as in ^5(lf^/ or g, as in J^aug. * As f and to have the same sound, they seem to require only one sign, and f has already taken the place of b in sev- eral words, as in t)C|t/ ®l'(l\), which are now written fc|l, firm ; ©Vrtf, count. But it seems as yet too bold a step, to dispense with the \> altogether. t The organic difference between Unguals and palatals consists in the latter being formed particularly by that part of the palate to which the tongue is applied, while the former are produced by the position of the tongue, brought near the roof of the mouth without touching it. PART 1. CH. 4.] SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 9 fc() . . . like sh ; ex. @fl)U'(e, school ; 23llfc(), bush. The soft sound zh is heard only in words taken from the French language ; as ®cuii" genius; '^A%Z, page, d) . . . when it is preceded by c, i, d, 6/ \\, or a consonant, is not a guttural, but a lingual, formed in the fore part of the mouth. There is no sound corresponding to it in English. Ex. *Sdc()'C/ rivulets; iecl)'cr, holes; 35lV(l)Cl\ books; SKcc()t, right; id), I; SOtilcl), milk, j .. .like y in year; ex. ja, yes; 3[rtl)V, year. 5. Guttural. i, q, and in some instances, C, and d) . . . are pronounced like k; ex. ^av(, Charles; Ojict'lc, source. S^ is pronounced like Ic, when it stands before ft, 0/ \X, or a consonant, as in SaUO'uicu^, prebendary ; Svefcit'/ credit. £() also, is in some cases pronounced like f, as in S^iV VftC'tCr, character ; £l}VO'nif, chronicle. Many German authors make use of i, instead of C and c(), when these letters are sounded like i, particularly in those foreign words which are considered as naturalized in German. Accordingly they write .^ve&it, ^avaftev. g ... in the beginning of words, like g hard ; as in ©a)l, guest ; at the end, and sometimes in the midst of a word, it has an intermediate sound between g hard and the lingual c() ; ex. "Jag, day ; SKc'gCU/ rain ; after n, at the close of a syllable, it sounds like g in sitiging ; ex. fiug'Cil/ to sing. cf) . . . when preceded by a, 0, or U, is formed in the throat, and sounded like ch in the Scotch word Loch ; ex. 95rtct)/ rivu- let ; ii>d), hole ; *Suc(), book. 1^ . . .like li, when it begins a syllable, as in <^6't)f, height; after a vowel, in the midst or at the end of a syllable, the I) is silent, and merely protracts the sound of the preceding vowel, as in SOcO^U, poppy ; fl'Ol}/ joyful ; and it is silent and entirely lost, after t or v, as in VCjUW, to do ; IH^ciu, the Rhine. 10 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. [bOOK B. Compound Consonants. The most remarkable are I', f^, or cf^, and sometimes cl).i5 . . . like ^.s', (never like gz) ; ex. Ztjtt, ax ; jh'acfe?, straight on. £(}6 is sounded like ]C, when it belongs to a word in its simplest form, as in tCV 3)acb^, the badger. But when the final 6 is added merely by a change of termination, as in fcvt^ Sad), the roof, genitive, 1>C6 2)ad)S, of the roof, the original sound of d) is preserved. J, §, t^, and in some instances C and t . . , are pronounced like ts (not ch) ; ex. 3^^^"/ tooth ; htXixW , already. 6) is pronounced like j {ts), when it precedes C, i, d, h, \\, or X) ; ex. O'ccan, ocean ; Sd'fav, Caesar. % is commonly pronounced li"ke J, in words of Latin origin, when the t is followed by i and another vowel ; ex. D^ation', nation. Many authors write J, instead of C or t, when these let- ters are pronounced like J, particularly in words which are considered as naturalized in German ; as STajion', O'jcail. f II . . . both letters are sounded ; as in Sfua'bc, boy. gn . . . both letters are sounded ; as in (^ntl't»C, mercy. p|I . . . the three letters are sounded ; as in spjian'^C, plant. fd)l...the two sounds of fd), and { are pronounced; as in @d)(cu'fe, sluice. (d)n) ... the two sounds, fd), and ro, are uttered ; as in ©d)tra('= ht, swallow. Observations. The doubling of vowels, when it does not create two syllables, protracts the sound, as in ©CC, sea. The doubling of consonants renders the sound stronger and more acute, as in 23on'llCVWCttei", thunderstorm. There is a slight difference in the manner in which cer- tain sounds which are essentially the same in both lan- guages, are pronounced in German and in English. Those German sounds which correspond to the English t, d, I, r, s, sh, viz. t, t, i, V, f, ^d), are formed in the forepart of the mouth, i. e. nearer the teeth than in English ; also g (g) hard and k (f) are not formed so deep in the throat as in English. PART IX, CH. 1.] PARTS OF SPEECH, II PART 11. PARTS OF SPEECH. There are ten parts of speech, viz. Article, Substantive or Noun, Adjective, Numeral, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposi- tion, Conjunction, and Interjection. Several of them, viz. tho Article, the Substantive, the Adjective, some of the Numerals, the Pronoun, and the Verb, admit of inflection, that is, of a change of termination, indicating the principal relations of that which is expressed by the word inflected. The other parts of speech are not inflected. The inflection of Articles, Substantives, Adjectives, Nu- merals, and Pronouns, is called Declension, and that of Verbs, Coiyugation. Declension comprehends two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, and each number four Cases, or re- lations, which- are indicated by certain changes of termina- tion. While in English the Accusative or Objective case is generally like the Nominative, and the Genitive and the Dative are commonly indicated by the Prepositions of and to, the German language expresses the same relations by chang- ing the termination of the Nominative case. That relation which in the Latin Grammar is denominated the Ablative case, is in German expressed by the Dative, and is generally preceded by the Preposition Von, from ; as, ijott tern '33ft'tCl% from the father. The Vocative is nothing else than the Nominative, as used in an address or exclamation ; ex. '^(X'tZX ! O father ! CHAPTER I. ARTICLE. There are two articles, viz. the indefinite, CtU, a or an, and the definite, tcr, the ; which are declined in three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. 12 NOUN. GENDER. [bo (Ein, a, is thus declined Mase. Fern. Neut. Norn. citt, ti'nt, ein, a. Gen. ci'ue^, ci'iicv, ei'ueg, of a. Dat. ti'mm, ci'ncv, ei'nem, to a. Ace. ci'ucu/ ei'ue, ein, a. S)CV, the, is thus declined Singular. Norn. Ht, i»ic, bag, the. Gen. U&y i>(x, bee, of the Dat. l>em, Dcv, bem, to the. Ace. tm, fcie, t)CV, of the. Dat. ben, to the. Ace. t)ie, the. CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE, or NOUN. § 1. GENDER. All substantives, or nouns, are either masculine, or feminine, or neuter. The gender of most nouns is determined by the following rules. 1. Of the masculine gender are The names of male animals, and most nouns which convey the idea of superior power and energy ; as bei* SOtaun, the man ; bet* SBa'ter, the father ; bCV ic'we, the lion ; bCV 55a«ltl, the tree ; bei* J^am'mcv, the hammer ; ber '^^yixxt^, courage. 2. Of the feminine gender are a. Most of the names of female animals, and most nouns which express what is tender and delicate ; as, bic §rau, the lady, or wife ; X)U SOtut'tev, the mother ; bie Xmfht, the dove ; PART II. CH. 2.] GENDER. 13 bic S5(u'mc, the flower; Die Sia'DcO the needle; Die ilt'bif love. 6. All proper names of countries and places made by the affix ei ; as, Die 'luvfct', t>ie QBa(Iacl)ei' ; and the following, Die iau'ft^/ Die ^falj, Die ©c()it>eij. 3. Of the neuter gender are a. The letters of the alphabet ; as, Daj? 2(, ^^X'o 25. h. All diminutive nouns ending in d)t\\ or (eiu ; as, DdS spfei*D'd)CU, the little horse ; Dag '^ud)'lcin, the little book. c. All infinitives used as substantives ; as Da6 Sf'fcit/ the eating ; M€ "ilviuf'CU, the drinking. d. The proper names of countries and places, which are not comprehended under 2. b., and the gender of which is not otherwise determined by the following rule. 4. The gender of compound substantives is determined by the last word which enters into the composition, expressing the general idea of the word ; as, Da^ sp{(^'tinabei'9lT>evf, the platina mine; from Die ^U'tiua,/. platina, Dcr S&iX%, m. the mountain, and Da^ 'SDerf, w. the work ; — Die 'vIDct'terfatjlie,/. the weathercock ; from Da6 "^Bet'tei*, n. the weather, and Die §a(}'ue, /. the banner ; — Dei* @teu'ermanu, m, the steersman ; from Da6 ©teu'er, n. the helm, and Dev CDTauu, m. the man. For the same reason all proper names compounded with kuw^t n. land, and with SKeid)/ n. kingdom, are neuter ; such as, 2)eutfc()'lanD, Germany ; Sus'lanD, England ; graut'veid), France; b'^'uid), Austria. Some nouns vary their gender, according to their significa- tions ; as, Dei* 35auD, the volume, Dag 25anD, the ribbon ; Dev 23imD/ the alliance, Da6 S5unD, the bundle ; Der Sv'be, the heir. Dag Sf'be, the inheritance ; Dei* ©ei'fcl/ the hostage. Die ®ei'fe(, the scourge ; Die SDtavf , the mark, boundary. Dag 3)?ai*f , the marrow ; Dei* SKcig, the rice, Dag ^q'\&, the twig ; Dei* ©ee, the lake, Die @ee, the sea ; Dci* ^^01*, the fool, Dag XijOX, the gate. § 2. DECLENSION. In many cases, a, o, and u are, in the plural number, changed into the corresponding vowels d, h, and u ; and the 14 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [bOOK I. diphthong an into the corresponding au; as, ^()al, valley, j)Iur. 'iija'ln, valleys ; ©01)11, sou, pliir. @61)'UC, sons ; 35vu'-' fcCV, brother, plur. ^^xh'tiV, brothers ; J^am?, house, jjlur. ^AU'^iV, houses. The endings of the nominative singular are various, and cannot be brought under certain rules. The nominative, genitive, and accusative plural, have the same ending in all the declensions, and are distinguished only by the article ; as. Me 25vu't>cv, the brothers, gen. Dcv ^^inVtCV/ of the brothers, ace. l»ic ^^vu'Dci", the brothers. The dative plural, in all the declensions of nouns and ad- jectives, as well as of the article, ends in u; ex. 'i»llt'6e, dove, dat. plur. ^au'bcu; DJii'ufcl), man, dat. pliir. 9}lcu'fc()cu ; %^m, animal, dat. plur. ibic'VCll. All those nouns, which make the nominative plural in il, or cn, retain the same termination in all the other cases of the plural number, without an additional n in the dative plural ; as, 'iaukn, doves; ^luVbcu, boys; 2111 gen, eyes. The mode of declining common nouns is different from that of nouns proper. A. Deelcnsion of Common Nouns. The principal changes of termination in common nouns, are comprehended under three declensions. The characteristic of each declension is the genitive case singular. In this case some nouns retain the ending of the nominative, as, X>'\Z ^hl'me the flower, gen. bei* 35hl'me, of the flower ; while other nouns receive an additional n, as t>ev ^na'be, the boy, gen. be^ ^na'ben, of the boy ; and others take an additional g, as, Dag ie'6eu, the life, gen. t)e6 ie'ben^, of the life. First Declension. The first declension comprehends all those nouns which remain unchanged in the genitive singular. These nouns retain the termination of the nominative through all the cases of the singular number ; but they differ in the nominative plural, where some of them keep the ending of the singular, as, bie 9}?Ut'tei*, the naother, nam- plur. Me PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 15 SOTut'tcr, the mothers ; while others add C, as, fcie ^cfOVg'ni^, the apprehension, nom. plur. t>ie 23c|'0Vg'ui|]C/ the apprehen- sions ; others \\, as, fcie SShl'Utf/ the flower, nom. plur. t)ie 35Iu'mcil, the flowers ; others cil, as, t»ie §vau, the lady, nom. plur. i>K ^iMU'cn, the ladies; others UCU, as, fctC gvciUl'Diu, the female friend, nom. plur. Die §l'euu'&inuCtt, the female friends. Accordingly the first declension contains only one form of the singular, but five forms of the plural number. All nouns of the, first declension are femininz; and all femi- nine nouns belong to the first declension. Second Declension. The second declension comprehends all those nouns which form the genitive singular by adding to the nominative a final \X, cither tvith or ivithout another letter. If these nouns in the nominative singular terminate in e, they receive only an additional u in the genitive, as, tcv ^Uil'be, the boy, gen. X>t^ ^mVbcn, of the boy ; but if they end in any other letter, the genitive is formed by adding Cll to the nominative, as, t)ei* §cl^/ the rock, gen. &Cg gcl'feU/ of the rock. With the exception of the nominative singular, all the cases of the singular and plural are like the genitive singular, and therefore always end in Cll. Accordingly, the second declension comprehends only one form of the plural, but two forms of the singular number : the genitive singular being formed by the addition sometimes of 11/ and sometimes of Cll. All nouns which belong to the second declension are mascu- line ; and all masculine nouns belong either to this or to the third declension. Third Declension. The third declension contains all those nouns which form the genitive singular by adding to the nominative a final 6, either tvith or toithout other letters. This declension comprehends four forms of the singular, and five of the plural number. Singular. Some nouns receive in the genitive case merely 16 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [bOOIC I, an additional i>, as, tier ^XBau'^Cl•Cl^ the traveller, gen. teS •IDau'bci-CVtv of the traveller ; others C^, as, X>CI* (Scl>au("C, the thought, gen. ^C^ CSctaut'Cllg, of the thought ; and one noun, tatt J^Cl'3, the heart, makes the genitive in t\\^, ^Cg J^cv'jcn^, of the heart. Plural. Some nouns retain the termination of the singular nominative, as, &CV 'IDau'tCVCV, nom. lAur. t)ic ^an'bCl'Cl* ; other nouns add C, as, fca^ ^fci'&, the horse, nom. plur. l»ic spfcrbc; others u, as, bfV ®C^anf'e, the thought, Jinm. plur. tic (Scfcaut'en; others en, as, t>n ^taat, the state, nom. plur. in ^taa'UM ; and others Cf, as, ba^ ^clt), the field, nom. plur. ik §cl't>CV. All neuter nouns are of the third declension. The following table exhibits the endings of nouns in each declension in all the cases except the nominative singular. The different declensions are marked by the figures, 1, '2, 3: the different forms of the singular by Roman letters, a, b, c, d, and those of the plural by German letters, a, b, C, b C. TABLE OF THE DECLENSION OF GERMAN COMMON NOUNS . ;^ i-> ;^ rTj rf. rr. «j I I I I ^ o ^^ o I I I I I I I I <^ ^ s» ^» '^i A ^O JC» <_^ciCi^ & -5.-N esse ■2^s s s s ^^ c^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^« « s s ja *• ^ JT ** a ^ ^ ^ C> (D 0) -C rC ^ -c \^ \a ^i-^ *- j-i fei;i5Q^ fei^ci^ 1^ "s O '^ ^ci c 5 S s ^■2^ JO =r ~ • 2225 '^ ^^*> S s ^^ c^ ^^ ^ iC» A» i& 4C^ ^ci^cS-ri 'i^ !i > ^ s s s S S -^3 «3 s s s: i^cjci^ o m o Q Q t— 1 a § 8 ^1 1^ "^ "-I ^ 3 ^ <1> ■^ C if ^ — i« •«> ^ Is s i t^ ^^ .gl 1^ hc; so 1 CD m o l^ *» s: s ±5 » . o o o o ■S . >* v* tJ tt *^ ■«> ■*!> S ''■* » ft Si Si Si ^» «rf ** «» Ci* «** Crf «,* 1 1 r 1 '^ «- «* . . ^ v** ■? ^'^ ^ %> ei_^ >a^ d-k a-* tm . ss ;s s; S 1 " ;g ;§ ^ ^ 1 1 1 1 Si Si « St ^ ^^ c^ ca ^.k '4-t> "A.^ "A^ :;» x> jO "<* S 2 2 ■E-^ 2 S 5 S 1 1 1 1 «rf O ** «i* A A> A A S S H 2 1 1 1 1 ^ :^ si «>> A A A A» i < • ;^ ■>Si Si a m «: 2^1 25 «> A Ad Xd Ad cu'^** ** ? »^ "Cl^ ^* ^* Si ^* fi ti Si n 5Q CO CO n 20 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOIJNS, [bOOK I. Observations on the first Declension. 1. a. — There are only two nouns which retain in the nomina- tive plural the termination of the singular, viz. SSfint'tit, mother, and 'iocl)'tev, daughter. 1. b. — The plural in C occurs particularly in those words which end in ft, |l, and Jlifj ; as, ^XAft, power ; ^uufl, art; 95ctl'u[vni|5, sorrow. 1. c. — The plural in n belongs to feminine nouns which end in C, C(, and cu; as, S(}vc, honor; *^i'bcf, bible; @c()mcf''' UX, sister ; plur. Slj'fcn, '35i'bc(u, ©cl)mcf' tcun. 1. J). — The plural in CU is to be found in most words which end in ei (ci^), CUfc, l}cit, fcit, \d)A^t, uug, It, andrt; as, gifc()CVCt', fishery ; 'iu'C(CUb, virtue ; §vci'(}cit, freedom ; S'lDtgfcit, eternity; §l'CUUl)fc()aft, friendship; 2(r()'tung, esteem ; QBclt, world ; TXxt, manner ; di-c. 1. e. — The plural form UCU is peculiar to those feminine nouns, which end in in, and have the accent not on their final syllable ; as, (Sat'ttn, wife ; i5'n)iu, lioness. This form was originally no other than the preceding 1. &., the nouns in in being formerly written with final nil, as, Oat'tinu, &c. But this practice of doubling the u in the singular, is retained by few modern authors. Some nouns of the first declension, as, ^X^W, lady ; ©on'nc, sun ; @ce'Ic, soul ; Sv'fce, earth ; are, according to an old usage, still sometimes inflected in the genitive singular, as, gvau'cn, ©on'ucu, @ce'Icu, ®r't>en. EXERCISES. To the actions, J^aut'luug, Of the Grecian women, (Sl'iC'cl)in. The forks, (Ba'bef. To the sciences, QDDif fcnfc()aft. The daughters, ^Oc()'tCl'. Of the balls, ^u'gcl. To the pens, gc'fcCV. Observations on the Second Declension, 2. a. — The termination of the genitive in n is common in masculine nouns which end in e ; as, ^zt ih'xoz, the lion ; PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION Ot' COMMON NOUNS. 21 ^Cl• ^o'te, the messenger. The names of nations which end in e, are inflected in the same manner ; as, t>CV (Svic'cl)e, the Greek ; liCl' ©cut fcl)C, the German. 2 b. — The genitive in in is common in masculine nouns not ending in c; as, in SOtcnfcl), man; fcci* iBiU*/ the bear. lu some cases euphony demands the omission of the C ; as, tCV J^CVV, the master, gen. t>Cn §cl^/ 2. b. the rock. Observations on the Third Declension. a. & b. — It depends on euphony whether the genitive sin- gular ends in h or C0. Nouns of more than one syllable, which end in one of the unaccented syllables c(, CU, Cf, and Iciu, take only an g ; as, glu'flicl, wing ; 3Q'?di)'c()CU, girl ; ^a'tcv, father ; SO?dnu'Iciu, little man. But all those nouns of the third declension which end in g or j, make their genitive singular in C^ ; as, SHcfj, steed, gen. IHoffe^/ of a steed ; @a^, sentence, gen. ©a§'C^, of a sentence. Those nouns of one syllable which terminate in any other letter, make their genitive singular in the same manner, by adding Ci? ; but this is frequently contracted into g; as, t»Cf IJBe^, the way, gen. J>Ci? ^Cgc^, or "^Dcgg, of the way. These rules apply also to some proper nouns ; as, 3)c= ccmbev, 3. a. a. ; tev SKbcin, 3. b. b., the Rhine. It depends on euphony whether the C which is added to nouns of the second form of the singular in order to form the dative case, be omitted or retained. Ex. bciu CSol'fcC, or @oli», to the gold ; t»fm ©tuv'mc, or ©tiiftn, to the storm. The C is generally omitted when the noun, pre- ceded by a preposition, and without an article or adjective or pronoun before it, is used in a general and indefinite signification, in the place of an adjective or an adverb, to express either the material of which a thing consists or the manner in which something is performed. Ex. ciu §Hiug \)on (Soit>, a ring of gold ; mtt @tunn cin'iicljmcn, to take by storm. But if the noun be rendered more definite by 22 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [bOOK I. an adjective or pronoun before it, tlic regular ending in C is used, unless euphony should require its omission, par- ticularly for the purpose of avoiding the monotonous re- currence of the same sound. Thus we say,, ciu §Hiug \>cn ticfcm ®o('^e or (Soft, a ring of this gold ; iu ^cm cu'|lcu ©tltv'mf or @tuvm, in the first storm. The accusative of those nouns which have 6 or e^ in the genitive, is always like the nominative case. 3. c. — The addition ofif^o in the genitive is peculiar to those nouns, the nominative of which formerly ended in (n, but is now commonly spelled without the final ll, as, gric'tC (gric'Dcu), peace; guiif'C (gunt'cu,) spark ; gu^'tlapfc (^ut^'jtavffu), footstep; ©lau'bc (®(au'bcu), belief; J^au'fc (J^aii'fcu), heap ; Sda'mc (STa'nicu), name ; ©aa'me (@aa'mcu), seed ; ©d)a'tc (@c()a'l>cu), damage. But the old termination in cil is not yet entirely out of use. Some nouns of the second declension are sometimes, though not properly, inflected according to the form 3. c. ; as, tcv ^JUVbc, the boy, gen. t>C^ ^"na'tcu^? ; properly, t)Cg ^Tnabcu. If the genitive is formed by adding u6 to the nomina- tive, the dative and accusative singular always end in CU. 3. d. — The substantive J^CVJ, heart, is the only noun which forms its genitive by adding CU^ to the nominative. The nominative formerly was ba^ ^tv'^Q, which is still used in poetry. 33u(()'1tat\ letter, is declined either according to 3. b. i., or according to 3. c. C, and in this case the nominative is ^uc(i'|labc. 3. a. — The nominative plural is like the nominative singular in almost all those nouns masculine and neuter, which end in el, en, cr, and kin; as, tcv ©d)tuf|'cl, the key; t±S3^ESS&S OF COXKOS J»0CX=. 21 m£ am by yHr»^ a to the wnimam^e ^sfiilar. 3. fc. — Tkere sue ocflEiiHrs::" - '- ^ ? few :a>irQ5 of titE de- cJf»siQia, 'sriiich Jorrz; t: dt adding rm; as, ri5 izrr, :h: irin: tn ^:.^-^ Liie scaae: Kx ©cratif tbe : 1 ; ? : .- J " : liie ear. : . — T. _ _- <;;" :':, :>5e imk^s, wiaick ^ake tiev bob- m— ^ rr. is decked aiooapdatf to tfae ^-. ; : iLe iizizuiii, a, k : as, MT 2Bail, the Ks 2?ii fCr. la tbe same msBaa are r^ jfcU,J, dre^; <&riJ, xDooej : int, body: . ' Of tbe swords, £\ '^y:^. Of tbe floweret 35lS.m Icia. Tbe borses, spfrrh Tbe =paxks. ^amf c Of tbe treas^ire. @rbi?. Same ■cNms kare so plaral nnmber; for example^ wxaj " 'tires wkich are used — dres. This pecslisrirf thK GncEunar, marker ^g tbe Gen&an lerter i: j TXiicb the form of tbe pluril :i __.:i:ed; as, tos \iis csi, a. Otber noons hare do sinrolai. Th ■ -inr is oa^ed bj omrtthig the Roman lener wbicb .. :^e Ssrra of t^ singnlar: as. He ilmn. 3. C, tbe pareais: tu Ks re, 3. t., T^eople ; lie ic iauMcutC, country people ; bcv gu(}l-'mami, the wag- goner, plur. Mc ?5uln-'lClltC. So form the pkir;il of 2(C'fcvinann, husbandman ; S '^Clmau^, nobleman ; JPianpt matui, captain ; 5?auf mv\un, merchant. But the plural of DCV S IjCmaUH, the husband or married man, is Die S'ticmdlinci', tlie husbands or married men ; S iHiciltC, means married people. In some nouns the dillerent formation of the plural, or the change of rt, D, U, into h, h, and il, expresses a different signi- fication ; as, Phiral. Mc ?35du't)C, the volumes. i)ie 35dn'l)CV, the ribbons. l>ic S3au'l)e, the bonds. t)ic 55du6'C, the benches, liie ^auf'eU/ the banks, tie SSau'cvu, the peasants. Me ^^au'cr, the cages, bic ^.So'gCU, the sheets of paper. Me 555'.^cn, the bows. l»ic ®cficl)'tc, the visions. t)ic ®efld)'tfV, the faces. bic ia'^cu, the shutters, tie ia'ten, the shops. l>ie ©cHl'De, the shields. Me ©cl)il'bev, the signs, tie ©tvau'feii/ the o.striches. tic ©tvdu'fc, the nosegays. tic "J^tjo'vcn, the fools, tic "i^o'V, the gates. With respect to those common nouns which are derived from foreign languages, the following particular rules are to be observed. These nouns either retain their original termination, as, gifCUg, "J^e'tna, S^o'ftJ?; or take a German one. This is done, either by retrenching their foreign ending, as in C'CCrtU (oceanus), ocean ; 2)iptom' (diploma) ; or by transforming it into another more idiomatic termination ; as, tic fHc'gcI (reg- ula), rule ; tie ©l)l'be (syllaba), syllable. The rule is, — that all those foreign common nouns, the endings of which bear a similarity to German nouns, are de- clined like these, in the regular way. Thus : Singular. tcr 53aut, the volume, or binding, ta^ *^aut, the ribbon. ta6 25aut, the bond, tie ^^aut, the bench, tic SBanf, the bank, tei* ^^au'ev, the peasant. ta^ 33rtU'Cl*, the cage, tev ^O'gcn, the sheet of paper, tei* ^^O'c^eu, the bow. ta^ ®cflct)t', the vision, tag (ScjUt)!', the face, tei* ia'tcn, the shutter, tev ia'tcn, the shop. tcr ©cl)tlt, the shield, tag @c()ilt, the sign, tev ©tvaug, the ostrich, tev @tvaug, the nosegay, tev '^(}0V, the fool, tag %^0X, the gate. PART II. CH. -2.] DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 25 1. All foreign common nouns feminine belong to the first declension, and add in the nominative plural either n or en ; as, J^ie 2i'nc, 1. C, the tune; tk gov'mcj, 1. C, the formula; &ic ^OCftC', 1. £>., the poetry; Eiic SpcvfOll'r 1. t>. ; t)ic SHcpiU Hit'', l.t». ; ^ic "Jrraimci', 1. t)., the tyranny. 2. Most of those foreign nouns masculine which end in ant, avfl), At, ft, it, and C0|, are of the second declension, 2. b. ; as, 2(Djutant', ^atviavd)', 2(M>0CvXt', ^oct', evcmit', ^t}cclog'. 3. Most of the foreign nouns neuter or masculine which end in cv, (i, a(, an, in, on, av, at, cm, am, amm, om, ov, belong to the third declension; as, StjavAC'tiT, 3. a. t\; £av>i'tcl, 3. a. a., chapter; spovtat', 3. b. t\ ; g^apcKan', 3. b. (\, chap- lain ; Jt amiu', 3. b. b., chimney ; ^Oj^illon', 3. a. b. ; Sji-cm-' TpUxx', 3. b. l\, specimen ; SQJagilU'at', 3. b. t\ ; S)iat>cm', 3. b. i\ ; 25al'fvim, 3. b. b. ; ©pigvamm', 3. b. b. ; 2)iplom', 3. b. b. ; spvofiffov, 3. a. i>. B. Declension of Proper Nouns. Proper names terminating in one of the unaccented sylla- bles ag, eg, ig, og, or ng, such as SSav'fag, SEcv'jrcg, Ql'Iig, 2i'mOi?, (Eopev'nicng, do not change their termination in any case of the singular or plural. If the connexion in which they occur does not indicate the case or number in which they are used, the definite article, or a preposition is used to express the relation in which they stand. Ex. 2)ag @l)|tem' beg £0= ^ev'nicug, or von Sopcv'nicng, the system of Copernicus; fag ®efcl)(cc()t' t)CV ''^avtag {plur.), the family of (the) Barcas. Most proper nouns,* particularly names of persons and coun- tries, are declined either tcith or without the article ; and this circumstance has an influence upon the declension of the singular number. Singular. If the proper name is declined with the definite or indefinite article, the article alone is inflected, the noun itself remaining unaltered ; as, t>cv @cl)Ie'get, gen. l>Cg @c'o[e'= gel, &c. ; tie %n'm, gen. tn 2tn'na, &.c. ; ein Ca'to, gen. ci'neg QJa'to. If proper nouns are declined without the article, they com- monly take, in the genitive singular, an additional g or eg. * Some proper nouns are declined like common nouns. Page 20, under 2. a. ; and page 21, under 3. a. &, b. 3 20 DECLENSION OP PROPER NOUNS. [bOOK I. In some nouns, particularly those which end in ff, fj, ^, fd), ]C, and feminincs in C, the genitive singular is formed by adding Clli? or \i6 to the nominative. In the dative and accusative, they commonly remain unaltered, or take u or CU. Singular. N. @(()fc'ctcl %n'm kib'ui^ Sa'to G. ©c()Ic'^cUt ■ 2(n'natt ieib'ui^cu^ Ca'tos „ ( @([)U'^ci or ) i lin'.ndor \ i icib'ui^ or ) ^ ^- \ @c()lc'o(chi ] \TX\\'\m\ ] Xiiii^'iimx ii ^^^^ . i ©cl)(c'9c( or i i lin'm or » i icib'ni^ or ( ^ ^- } ©c()(c'9ctu i lliw'mx i\Uib'm^(n] ^^^^ itli'fc and other nouns in c, are declined like icib'lli^, with- out an additional C ; as, iui'fc, gen. hli'fcili?, dat. & ace. iui'fc or iui'fcu. Even the geni.tive, dative, and accusative cases of those nouns which end in a are sometimes formed in CU6, and cil, the a being dropped ; as, Sia'na, gen. X»ia'uag or 2)ta'ncug, dat. & ace. Sia'ua or Sia'ucn. It seems better not to change the ending of the noun in the dative and accusative, except for the sake of distinctness. Thus we say, SOtilvi'c frt^ hii'ff/ Mary saw Louisa; but if the order of the nouns be inverted, we say, hti'fen fal) aTiavi'c, Mary saw Louisa. Names of countries compounded with iaut/ land, or §Hcicl), kingdom, are declined only in the genitive case, in which they take an additional g; as, 25ciltfct)'Iaut6, of Germany; gfailf'-' VCic()g, of France. Plural. In the plural number, proper names are generally declined like common nouns, whether they be preceded by the article or not ; sometimes they preserve their foreign ter- mination entirely or in part, as, Plurcd. N. Die ©cl)fe'9cl 2tn'nen kib'nigc | ^lll'l^^' } G. m ©c()rc'9cl Hn'nm Uib'xxi^t | |;J[e'||nr } D. Den @cl)[e'ge[n Tixx'mxx ieib'ni^eu Sato'ncn A. Die ®dmd Zxx'xxax ki[>'nt?e { |;'[o'neir } Observations. I. The mode of declining proper nouns with PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 27 the article, is the same, whether the noun stands alone, or is preceded by an adjective or pronoun. Accordingly we say, t>ag '3?crt>ten|l' ^af(}'iugton^, the merit of Washington ; but l>a^ ^cv&ien)V bc^ QBaft}'tngtou, or, beg gro'fen (of the great) ^aft)'ingtou: and bic 2)an6 6v%vfcit SOTari'ag, the gratitude of Mary; but t>ic Saut'bavfcit tiV fi'om'mcu (of the pious) 50Tavi'a. If the name of a person is immediately preceded by a com- mon noun, expressing the office or character of that person, the proper noun alone is declined, if the common noun is not preceded by the definite article; as, 2)0C'tCV gvanf'liu^ ®r- flU'Mmoicn, the discoveries of Doctor Franklin ; ^o'llig hlt» -' IDlgg "iob, the death of King Louis ; but if the definite article precedes, the common noun is declined, and the proper noun . remains unaltered; as, l»cr*^Ob t>Cg S\6'nig^ htb'Jt>ig ; t>ic ©V-- fiu'liuugcn teg 3)DC't0i-g granf'liu. The same is true of names of places, towns, or countries, being used without the article and preceded by a common noun which serves to define the proper name or is defined by it ; as tH ©cfcl)icl)'te t»C5 ^'o'nigl'Ctc()g SiTea'pcl, the history of the kingdom of Naples. If the name of a person is preceded by one or more chris- tian names, none of these is declined, if they have the definite article before them ; as, bic @c(;vtf ton bc^ 3ol;auu' 3a'fob 9iouf' fCdU, the works of John Jaques Rousseau : but when they are not preceded by the article, the family name of the person is declined, the christian names remaining unaltered ; as, 3ol^ann' Sf?vif'top() 2I't»cfimgg @vn-a({)1c(;i-c, the Grammar of John Christopher Adelung. But there is an exception to this rule, when the family name is separated from the christian name (or names) by a prepo- sition, particularly by t>OU (being commonly the mark of noble • descent) : in this case the christian names alone are inflected ; as, Itic @ct>id)'tc Jpciu'viit^ V>on Dftcfbingcn, the poems of Henry of Ofterdingen ; t>cv D^'fcvtob Tir'nclbg ©tnitt'bau^ i)Cn ^infcllicb, the sacrifice of Arnold Strutthan of Winkel- ried. But even in this case, if the genitive precedes the sub- stantive by which it is governed, the family name alone is inflected ; as, ^ol^anucg ))0n 9}?ll('Icvg QOBcv'fC/ the works of John of Muller. II. It was formerly usual to decline nouns of Roman origin according to the rules of the Latin Grammar ; but this mode of declining has gone out of use, except in a few instances , as, S^vif ti (S>ebmV, the birth of Christ. 28 DECLENSION OF NOUNS, [book I. Promisnwus Exercises on the Declensions of Nouns. The following list of nouns possesses the advantage of having the gender and declension marked, the former by the let- ters, 711. f. n., and the latter by the numbers, 1, 2, 3 ; with the different forms of the singular and the plural number, those of the singular being denoted by Roman, and those of the plural by German letters. The asterisk (*) prefixed to a noun in the singular, signifies that a, 0, ll, are in the plu- ral changed into a, 6, u. If more than one of these letters, or any one of them more than once, should occur in the same noun, that one alone is changed which occurs last ; as, IXlUVC', plur. 'Ztltare: the diphthong (X\\ excepted, in which the a, and not the U, is olfcinged, whenever an aster- isk is prefixed to the noun. Of the eels, The evening, (Ace.) To the abbots, Of the field or acre, Of the fields, The shoulders, Of the nobility, To the ape, To the apes, Of the altars, To the age. Of (he antiquities, To the blackbirds, The offices, The ants, The nurses, Of the devotion, The preparations, To the replies, 2trt(, m. 3. b. b. eel. 2t'bcut>/ m. 3. b. C\ evening. *2(t>t, m. 3. b. l\ abbot. *2tc'fev,t "*• ^- a- ^' field or acre. lXd)'\d,f. 1. C. shoulder. 2t'fccl, m. 3. a. nobility. 2tf fC/ m. 2. a. ape. *2titai-', m. 3. b. (\ altar. 2tl'tcr, n. 3. a. a. age. *'Ztl'fCVt{}um, n. 3. b. e. antiquity. 2tm'fc(,/. 1. C. blackbird. *2(mt, n. 3. b. c. office. ■Ztmciff, /. 1. c. ant. IXm'xm, f. 1. c. nurse. IXn'Mihi,/. 1. devotion. Ttn'llalt, /. 1. X). preparation. 2(nt'»t»ovt,/. 1. l>. reply. t The beginner must not forget that the asterisk being pre- fixed to a noun signifies that a change of vowels takes place only when the noun is in the plural number, as, of the acres, be I* 2(cf Cl* ; but not when it is the singular number, as, of the acre, l»eS 2(cfcvef. PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 29 Of the labors, To the eyes, Of the oyster, The brooks. The path, Of the ball. To the ribbons, To the ideas, Of the mountain, To the bed, To the beds, Of the proofs. To the pictures, Of the pears. Of the flowers. To the letters, The breasts, To the books, The books. To the canals. To the cardinals. To the roofs. Of the badgers, The dikes. To the thumbs, Of the swords, To the poets, To the villages, To the heirs. The eggs. To the fables. Of the threads, Of the barrels. To the fists, • Of the enemies. To the fields, Of the rocks, To the fetters. Of the plains, To the rivers, The wives. Of the female friends, To the feet, 3* liv'bdtff. 1. t). labor, itu'gc, n. 3. a. c. eye. 2tu'|h'V/ /. 1. C. oyster. *25ac(), m. 3. b. (>. brook. 25al}n,/. 1. &. path. *^:Ba((, m. 3. b. b. ball. *>8au&, n. 3. b. c. ribbon. iBegvitf' , m. 3. b. 6. idea. S5ei'g, m. 3. b. 6. mountain. S3ett, n. 3. b. b. bed. 35e»ei6', w. 3. b. 6. proof 35i[t), 71. 3. b. e. picture, ^^ivu,/. 1. t>. pear. Slu'mc,/. 1. C. flower. .35l-icf, m. 3. b. b. letter. *25ni|t,/. 1. b. breast. *'^Ud), w. 3. b. c. book. *£anrt(', ?H. 3. b. 6. canal. *£avtiina(', m. 3. b. b. cardinal. *S)acb, 71. 3, b. c. roof. *S)acl)g, 771. 3. b. b. badger. *2)ainin/ 771. 3. b. b. dike, ^au'men, m. 3. a. a. thumb. 3)C'geU/ m. 3. a. (I. sword. Sicl)'tci*, 7/1. 3. a. rt. poet. *2)orf, 71. 3. b. C. village. <£v'bt, 771. 2. a. heir. St, n. 3. b. e. egg. gtt'bcf,/. I.e. fable. *§a'l>en, m. 3. a. a. thread. *§af5, 71. 3. b. c. barrel. *grtU|];/. 1. 6. fist, gciut)/ 771. 3. b. b. enemy, gelb, 71. 3. b. c. field, gcfg, jn. 2. b. rock. §crfc(,/. 1. C. fetter, gluv,/. 1. t). plain. *glU^', 171. 3. b. b. river, gvau,/. 1. t>. wife, gvcun'bin,/'. I.e. (female) friend. *§Ug, /«. 3. b. b. foot. 30 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [book I. The forks, Tile geese, To tlie guest, Tlie prayers, XDf the dangers, Tlie countries, The spirits, Of tlie money, The ghosts, To the conversation. To the limbs. The gods. The graves. Of the count, The property, The cocks, Of the hands. Of the skins. Of the heroes. Of the master. To the wood. To the fowl. Of the hats. Of the islands. To the year, Of the Jew, Of the boy. To the calves. To the children. Of the churches, To the coats. The cloisters. Of the buttons. To the heads. Of the salmon, To the countries, Of the burdens, To the holes. ©a'bcf, /. 1. C. fork. *®aue, /. 1. i\ goose. *(Sa|l, ni. 3. b. b. guest. ®cbct', n. 3. b. b. prayer. (Scfal^v', /• 1. D. danger. CSc'j^CllD, /. 1. I), country. (gci|l/ »i. 3. b. C. spirit. Cgli^, n. 3. b. c. money. ®cfpcu|t', n. 3. b, c. ghost, ©cfpvad)', 71. 3.b.b. conversation. @licl>, n. 3. b. C. limb. *(Sott, m. 3. b. C. God. ' *®vab, n. 3. b. e. grave. (Svaf, m. 2. b. count. *<55ut, 71. 3. b. C. property. *^A\:in, 771. 3. b. b. cock. *J5auD,/. 1. b. hand. *J5k^ut, /. 1. b. skin. J^clt), ?«. 2. b. hero. J^fVV/ m. 2. b. master. *JPio(j, 77. 3. b. C. wood. *JDlll}n, 71. 3. b. e. fowl. *.^Ut, 771. 3. b. b. hat. 3n'fef, /.I.e. island. 3^1)1*/ n. 3. b. b. year. 3u't)e, 771. 2. a. Jew. 3una'e, 771. 2. a. boy. *italb, 71. 3. b. e. calf, ^iu^, 71. 3. b. e. child. ^'iv'cl)e, /. 1. C. churcn. ^(ciJ), 71. 3. b. C. coat. *^lo'|Tci% n. 3. a. a. cloister. *5iuopf, 771. 3. b. b. button. *£0Vf, m. 3. b. b. head, iacl)^, 771. 3. b. b. salmon. *ianb, 71. 3. b. b. &i. c.t country. ia|t,/. 1. t). burden. *iOcfe, n. 3. b. c. hole. t The a in ianb is changed into d, and the in Ott into (in the plural number), only when these nouns are declined according to 3. b. c. ; but they preserve their original vowels, when declined according to 3. b. b. PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OP NOUNS. 31 Of the maids, To the almonds, Gf the mice, Of the mothers, To the nightingales, Of the fools, The nuts. Of the places, To the popes. Of the path. The plants, Of the jaw, The borders, Of the rank, The spaces. The riches, To the judge, To the juices, To the songstresses, The troops, Of the shadow, The treasures. To the ships. The shields, To the serpents. The castles, The debts, The swallows. Of the soldier. Of the looking-glass. The storks, The stockings. Of the actions. To the daughters. To the dreams, The cloths, Of the virtues, Of the watches. The nations. To the forests, *CDta9t), /. 1. h. maid. 50tan'l>el/ /. 1. C. almond. *CDTrtUg,/. 1. b. mouse. *93lut'tCl-, /. 1. a. mother. ?ftad)'ti$M, f. 1. 1). nightingale. 9lavi% m. 2. b. fool. *DZu^, f.l.h. nut. *£>Vt, m. 3. b. h. &ij C.t place. *^ap1l, m. 3. b. 6. pope, spfafc, m. 3. b. b. path, spfaii'jc,/. 1. C. plant. SKacl)'cn, m. 3. a. a. jaw. *Sflanl>, m. 3. b. c' border. SKang, m. 3. b. rank. *9laum, m. 3. b. b. space. *9lci(()'t^um, m. 3. b. c. riches. SHicb'tcv, m. 3. a. 0. judge. *©aft, m. 3. b. b. juice, ©dng'eviu,/. 1. c. songstress. @d)artV,/. 1. t>. troop. @&)<{t'U\\, m. 3. a. d)'ttx,f. 1. a. daughter. *^vaum, m. 3. b. b. dream. *X\\d), n. 3. b. e. cloth. 3:u'9enb,/. l. b. virtue. Ul)V*,/. 1. b. watch, *3SDlf, h. 3. b. c. nation. *^alb, m. 3. b. e. forest. t See note on preceding page. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. [book I. Of the walls, Of the women, Of the worlds, Of the wind. The wishes. The worms. Of the numbers, To the tooth, To the times, To the tents, Of the circle, The tolls. The aims, Of the onion, Of Catherine, Of the Hague, Of Huss, Of the Indies, To the Netherlands, Of the Sibyl, *QOBanfc,/. 1. k wall. •^Bcilv «• 3. b. e, woman. ^Clt,/. 1. D. world. •^Diul*, m. 3. b. t\ wind. *QODunrc^, m. 3. b. t». wish. *^iivm, 7«. 3. b. c. worm. ^Atjl,f. 1. t. number. *3^^t?'l/ >n- 3. b. b. tooth. 3cit,/. 1. i). time. ^tlt, n, 3. b. l\ tent, ^iv'fef, 771. 3. a. a. circle. *3o(I, 771. 3. b. {\ toll. 3n>ccf, 771. 3. b. l\ aim. Bn)ic'bcl,/. 1. c. onion. ^atljrtvi'ua, Catherine. 2)ci- -Ortrtg, the Hague. •Ou^', Huss. Sn'Difn, 71. India. 2)ic 9tic't>ei-(anbC, the Neth- erlands. ©ib^rte, Sibyl. Recapitulatory Exercises. 3)ic ^6'9e( flie'gctt itt Dcv iiift. £>ie §ifrl)'c fc()wim'ttten in l>cm QODaf'fcv. 2)ie 251dt'tcv fdu'feln \\\ tern '2Bin'&e. J)ic @cl)mct'terlin9c tl^^t'tcvu ttm iu S51u'itten. 2»ic ^ic'ncu fam'mchi J^o'nig t)on Dcu 35Iu'men tint ttra'gen il)n luid) Don 25ie'uenf6v()cn fiU- i^'vc ^d'Un. 2)ie ©pcv'Iitigc k'fm J^al'mc auf unD bau'cn Sleftev ffir i^'ve 35rut. 2)ie 3u'gctt& ijl tie gtul^'Iing^jcit te^ ie'bcne. *35o'fl|e(, m. 3. a. a. bird, fic'c^cn, fly, in, in. (Dot.) *iuft,/. 1. b. air. gifd), 771. 3. b. 6. fish. fcl)n?im'mfn, swim. Gaffer, n. 3. a. a. water. *a3tatt, n. 3. b. e. leaf. fdn'fefn, rustle. 'IBlnl), m. 3. b. 6. wind. ©(tmet'terling, m. 3. butterfly, fat'tcvn, flutter, nni/ about, ('^cc.j 25(ume,/. 1. c. flower. SBie'ne,/. 1. c. bee. b. 6. PART n. CH. 2.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 33 fam'mcln, collect. O^CV'linfll, m. 3. b. h. sparrow. J^O'uioi, m. 3. b. t>. honey. U'\m-On, from. (Dat.) J^alttt/ m. 3. b. b. straw. unt>, and. bau'cn, build. ttd'oieU/ carry. 9tc|l, 7i. 3. b. c. i^ui it. 25i-ut, /. 1. brood. md), to. (^Z>rt<.J ^ie 3iu'9cul>,/. 1. youth. *^^\i ucnfovb, w. 3. b. 6. bee- ijl, is. hive. gvut)'Uuggjeit, /. 1. &. spring- fflV, for. (Ace.) time, i^'rc, their. tiag ic'bcu, n. 3. a. a. life. M'U,f. 1. C. cell. The hen sees the kite in the air, and gathers her chickens under her wings. Fire has its uses and its dangers ; we call it a good servant, but a cruel master. The Thebans, under the command of Pelopidas and Epami- nondas, freed themselves from the yoke of the Spartans. By a sloop we understand a boat with one mast, and four or five sails. Truth triumphs over superstition and skepticism, by means of investigation and reflection. The whole earth appears, to the philanthropist, as one fam- ily mansion. hen, J^cn'nc,/. 1. c. we, mv. sees, fict)t. call, ncu'ncn. kite, ®ci CV, in. 3. a. a. it, C6. in, in. (Dat.) good, gu'tcu. air, *iuft, /. 1. l\ servant, ©ie'ucv, m. 3. a. 0. and, UUt». but, a'bci'. gathers, vcrfam'inctt. cruel, grau'fvitncu. her, ib're. master, ^CVT, m. 2. a. chickens, ^uc()'lcin, n. 3. a. a. Theban, 'It}cba'nCf, m. 3. a. 0. under, un'tCV. (Dat.) command, 'Hu'fut}VUng, /. 1. her, ib'rcu. of, clef. art. sing. wing, glu'gcl, m. 3. a. 0. freed, bcfvci'teit fire, t>AfS gcu'CV, n. 3. a. a. themselves, fid). has, l)at. from, i)OU. (Dat.) its, fctnc. yoke. 3i0cb, n. 3. b. b. use, ^OV tt^cii, tn. 3. b. b. Spartan, @pavta'UCl', m. 3. a. 0. danger, (Sefat^v', /. 1. D. by, uu'tct. (Dat.) 34 ADJECTIVES. [book I. sloop, @d)afuv>'pc,/. 1. c. we undjerstand, \)Cl-)lc'^Cn mv. boat, §vlt?v'JCUg, ra. 3. b. b. with, mit. (Dat.J one, ci'nctn. mast, WllA\l*m. 3. b. t\ four, l>ici*« or, O'DCf. five, ffuif. sail, @C'9C[, n. 3. a. a. truth, Die QGDabv'()cit,/. 1. &. triumphs, tviump^ivt'. over, u'ber. (Acr.) superstition, 2t'bcvglau6e, m. 3. c. skepticism, 3wci'feffuc()t,/. 1. by means, mit bcr -Oul'fc of, t>OU. (Dat.) investigation, Untlvfu'c()UUg, /• 1. &. reflection, 9tac()'l»cuhu, n. 3. a. whole, ciaii'jc. earth, Sv'DC, /. 1. C. appears, cvfc()ciut'. to, (Dat.) philanthropist, CDTcu'fcfjetU fl'CUni), m. 3. b. (>. as, af^. one, Sin. family mansion, *@tamm'' {)^\\Xi, n. 3. b. e. CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES. The Adjective appears in its simple or adverbial form, when its termination is not affected by gender or declension ; as, 2)ic ^iiU'SCf, ^\Xt m\t) fvci, The citizens, good and free. <§i 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives are declined by adding certain letters to their simple form. For the use of the simple and the declinable forms see Book II. Chapter 3. § 1. Rules i. ii. and iii. Every adjective is declined in three different forms. First Declension. Adjectives are inflected according to the first declension, when they are not preceded hy an article or a pronoun. The form of this declension is nearly like that of the article, tCf/ l)ic, Da^. The adjective gut, good, for example, is thus declined : PART II. CH. 8.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 35 N. G. D. A. Masc. gu'tciv gu'te^, or gu'ten'* gu'tem, gu' ten, Singular. Fern. Neut. gu'tc, gu'tcg, gu'tev, o^w'tt^, or ^M'tix, gu'tem, gu'te, gu'te£5, gu'teu/* good, of good. to good, good. Plural for the three genders. gu'te, good, gu'ter, of good, gu'ten, to good, gu'te, good. The following is an example of an adjective in the first de- clension, as joined to nouns of different genders : Singular. Masc. N. gu'ter ^XBein, G. gu'ten or gu'teg QDDei'neg, D. gu'tem '2Dci'ne, A. gu'ten '^mx, Fern. N. gu'te gvuc()t, G. gu'tei* ^x\id)t, D. gu'tev gvuc^t, A. gu'te §vuc()t, Neut. N. gu'teg SSvofc, G. gu'teg or gu'ten SSvo'be^, D. gu'tem SSvobe, A. gu'tee 35i-oD, good wine, of good wine, to good wine, good wine. good fruit, of good fruit, to good fruit, good fruit. good bread, of good bread, to good bread, good bread. Plural for the three genders. gu'te ^ei'ne, gvucfc'te, 25fol)e, good wines, fruits, gu'tev ^ei'ne, ^ru(t'te, SSvo'be, of good, &c. [loaves, gu'ten QDBei'nen, gvucfe'ten, Svo'ten, to good, &c. gu'te ^ei'ne, gruciyte, 25ro'l)e, good, &c. So decline gro'fev *SO^ann, 3. b. e., great man ; Xtxx^'xt ®e* fcfeic^'te, 1. C, true history ; iit'U^ I^iul), 3. b. e., dear child. N. G. D. A. • The use of the one or the other of these two forms (gU'te^/ gu'ten,) depends on euphony alone. 36 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [bOOK I. Second Declension. Adjectives are inflected according to the second declension, when they arc preceded by the definite article, tCV, Mc, l>rti> ; or by a demonstrative or relative pronoun ; as, tic'fcv, tliis ; jC'ncV, that; Dcr'icuioic, that; tCrfcCbc, tlie ;^amc ; \rcI'Cl)CV, who ; or by the indefinite pronouns, JC'DCV, jCg'licUcv, jCb'WCtff; every, (the last three having no plural.) Ex. Singular. Masc. Fern. Neui. N. bcv gu'tc, Me gu'tc, fcae gu'te, the good. G. t)t& gu'tcn, x>n gu'tcn, l»cg gu'tcn, of the good. D. tmc^n'tm, txt gu'tcn, txm ciu'tcn, to the good. A. tm gu'ten, bic gu'tc, MS gu'te, the good. Plural, for the three genders. N. t)ic gu'ten, the good. G. bev gu'ten, of the good. D. ten gu'ten, to the good. A. Die gu'ten, the good. 3)et: S^'U, with a masculine noun, is thus declined : Singular. N. Der gu'te SOTann, the good man. G. teg gu'ten a}?an'ne6, of the good man. D. t>em gu'ten 5[)?an'ne, to the good man. A. ben gu'ten 5X)tann, the good man. J)ie gu'te, with a feminine noun, is thus declined : Singular. N. Die gu'te ^ViXn, the good woman. G. Dei* gu'ten grau, of the good woman. D. ttv gu'ten ^fic gu'tcn a3?^n'ner, gvau'cn, QODci''fe, the good men women, works. G. l»cf gu'teu SDtau'nci*, grau'cn, ^ci-'fc, of thegood,«fec. D. ten gu'tcn SOtdn'ucvu, gvau'cu, IDev'fen, to the good, &c A. l>ie gu'ten SDIau'nev, gvau'en, ^cv'fc, the good, &c. So decline, tev Uzi'M ^na'6e, 2. a., the little boy; fete Hu'gC gvau, 1. b., the prudent woman ; t)a6 fki'lie 93?vXt)'(l)CU, 3. a. (U, the little girl. Third Declension. Adjectives are inflected according to the third declension, when they are preceded hy the indefinite article, ciu, ci'UC, ciu ; or by a personal or a possessive pronoun, as, id), I ; tU, thou ; ev, he, &c. ; mein, mine ; t>m\, thine ; fciu, his, &c., or the indefinite pronoun fciu, none. This declension is like the first in the accusative and nominative singular, and like the second in the genitive and dative singular and in all the cases of the plural. The declension is as follows : Singidar. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. mein gu'tcv, mci'nc ^\x'u, mcin gu'te^, my good. G. mci'ncg gu'tcn, inci'nev gu'ten, iitei'nce gu'tcu, of mygood. D. mci'ncm gu'tcu, mci'ncr gu'tcu, mci'ucm gu'teu/ to my good. A. mci'ncn gu'tciiy meine gii'tc, mcin gu'tc^, my good. Plural for the three genders. N. mci'ne %\\:tm, my good, G. mci'ncv gu'tcn, of my good. D. mci'nen gu'ten, to my good. A. mci'nc gu'tcn, my good. 95lcin gu'ter, with a masculine noun, is thus declined : Singular. N. mein gU'tCV ^ru'bcv, my good brother. G. mci'neg gu'tcn 35vu'bCV^, of my good brother. D. mei'ncm gu'tcn 35vu'l>cr, to my good brother. A. mei'nen gu'tcn aSru'bcr, my good brother. 4 38 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [bOOK I- QKci'nc ^li'te, with a feminine noun, is thus declined : tSingular. N. inei'ne gu'te ©dnpcftcr, my good sister. G. mei'nev <\n't, my good child. G. mci'ncg gu'tcn ^"in'bce, of my good child. Z>. mci'ncm gu'tcn S?in'i>c, to my good child. A, mciu gu'tce ^inl>, my good child. Plural for the three genders. N. mci'nc gu'tcu 35nVbcv, ©cfewef tcvu, ^iu'Dcr, my good brothers, sisters, children. G. mei'nev gu'ten 25vu'&cr, @(()it>cftcvu, ^in'fcev, ofmy, &c, D. mci'uen gu'ten 35vu bevu, ©rfweftcrn, ^iu'teru, tomy,&c. A. mei'ne gu'tcn 35nVtier, ©c()n.H'f tcuu, ^"in'bcr, my, &,c. So decline, cin wei'fer *?OTann, 3. b. c., a wise man ; ei'ue fcl)5'ne grau, \.t>., a fair lady ; ciu tfci'ucg J^aue, 3. b. e., a small house ; tei'nc ttrcu'e §rcuu'l)in, 1. C, thy faithful (female) friend. The following table exhibits the terminations of the adjec- tives, according to the three declensions. First Declension, like gu'tCV. SINGULAR. 1 PLURAL. Masc. Fem. Neut. Norn. it e eg C Gen. eg or en cv eg or en ei* Dat. cm er em cn Ace. Ctt c eg e Second Declension, like tev ^w'tt. SINGULAR. PLURAL Masc. Fem. \ Neut. 1 en Norn. C 1 c 1 e Gen. Ctt en en cn Dat. en en en tn Ace. cu e 1 e en Third Declension, like mein gu'tcr. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. cv C eg en Gen. en cn en cn Dat. en en en en Ace. en e eg cn 40 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [book I. Promiscuous Exercises on the A(^ectives and Nouns. Of the fine children. To a fine child. Of happy days. Of good men. The ignorant people. The liquid air. The industrious maid. An easy work. Of hard labor. My frugal meal. Tali firs. Of the hard oak. A shady elm. Of hard iron. The early lark. An unknown land. Of the Trojan hero. Of civilized Europe. Free America. To the fiery Hecla. Of the fair Helen. The chaste Diana. The geographical miles. Terrible thunder. The Olympic games. Of distant valleys. Of fine flowers. To my pious father. To fresh butter. To a red coat. Black bread. fcl)6n. QHt. un'Yt)i\Jmt>. fluf'fig. teicl)t. fcljwci-. fpav'frtm. ev^a'ben. I?avt. fcl)rtt'tici. ijrtvt. fvnt). uu'bcfanut. troja'nifft). gcfit'tct. ^•ci. feu'vig. f'cufd). fct)rc(f' lid). clt^m'pifd). eiufcnit'. fd)5n. fromm. fi-ifcfe. VOtl}. fd)n>ai-j. ^"inl», n. 3. b. f. %ac\, m. '■>. b. b. *3}Iauu, VI. 3, b. f. icii'tc, /«. 3. b. *iiift, /. 1. b. *30taflb, /. 1. 6. m- belt, /. 1. b. byia^i'idt, f. 1. b. §id)'tc, /. 1. c. ei'd)c, /. 1. c. Ill me, /I.e. €i'fcn, n. 3. a. a. ifv'd)c, /. 1. c. *iaut), n. 3. b. b. & e. J^clb/ m. 2. b. guvo 'pa, n. 2(me'rita, n. jQd'U, m. J^c'lcna,/. S)ia'na, f. ^i\'U,f. 1. c. S)on'ncr, m. 3. a. a, ©picl, n. 3. b. b. *^l)al, n. 3. b. c. 351u'mc, /. 1. c. *^a'tei*, 711. 3. a. it, 25ut'tcv, /: 1. ^'Icib, n. 3. b. c. 23voI>, «. 3. b. b. Observation I. When several adjectives are, one after another, joined to the same substantive, they are generally declined as each of them would be, if it stood alone, according to the above rules. Thus, in the example, mciu gu'tcr al'tfl" gfCUUb, my good old friend, both adjectives, gu'tCl* and al'tCV, are inflected according to the third declension ; in l>ic tvcirc jdrt'lidjc SOTut'tCU, the faithful, tender mother, both adjectives are inflected according to the second declension ; only when adjectives are put together without being preceded by an PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 41 article or pronoun, as, gu'tCl* VO'tt^Cf ^ciu, good red wine ; ^U't( XO'tijt grtV'be, good red color ; gu'tCg VO'tljCti ^uct), good red cloth, the first adjective is inflected according to the first declension, while the subsequent adjectives may be inflected either according to the first or third ; except the genitive case singular of the masculine and the neuter genders, in which the subsequent adjectives must be inflected after the third declension. The following examples exhibit these two modes of declining. Masculine. Singular. N. ^u'tn- vo'tiju "^Bctn, 6r. gu'tee or flm'tcu* vo'r()cn 'UDei'nc^, D. gu'tcm vo'tbemor ro't^cu "IDci'iic, A. gu'tcu vo't^'cn -SStin, Feminine. Singular. N. gtt'te fo'tt)c ^avU, G. Qu'tn vo'ttjn or ro'tl}cn gav'k, D. o^u'tn vo't^ci- or ro't^cn gav'k, A. gu'te fo'tl}e gav'be, Neuter. Singular. N. Qu'U€ vo'.tijt^ ^n^, G. gu'tcg or ^w'tm* vo'tf)cu %\\'<^i^, D. gu'tcm ro'tl^cm or ro't^en ^u'c()e, A. gu'tcfi fo't^cg ^ucft, good red wine, of good red wine, to good red wine, good red wine. good red color, of good red color, to good red color, good red color. good red cloth, of good red cloth, to good red cloth, good red cloth. * The difference between c^ and CU in the genitive singular of Xhe first adjective masculine or neuter, has nothing to do with the two modes of declining here exhibited, but is a matter of euphony, as has been before observed, page 35. But the genitive of the subsequent adjectives never ends in C6, accord- ing to the first declension, but always in cn, according to the third. Thus we cannot say, gll'tCS v 0' 1 1) C ^ ^ti'\U&, but we must say, QWU^ (or gu'tcn) xo'tijtn 'JBti'mS, 4* 42 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [dOOK I. Plural for the three genders. N, gu'tc vo't^c or vo'tl)cn '^Dci'nc, gar'bcu, ^u'ctcv, good red wines, colors, cloths. G. ciu'tcvvo'tt}ci-orvo't()cu'^ci'iic, gavbcn, 'Judder, of, &c. D. iAu'tcu vc'tf^cn '^Bct'ncn, gvw'bcu, ^ucbcvu, to, &.c. A. gu'tc vo'tl}c or vo't^cu ^ci'nc, gav'bcu, 'iu'c()ei', fine,&,c. In good writing and speaking, the choice between these two modes of declining an adjective when subsequent to an- other, though frequently depending on euphony, is sometimes determined by the degree of importance assigned to the sub- sequent adjective. Thus, in speaking of " good domestic cloths," we may design either to distinguish good domestic from gooA foreign cloths, or good domestic from bad domestic cloths. The first meaning is expressed in German by inflect- ing the subsequent like the preceding adjective, according to the first declension ; as, gu'tCf cin'^cinufc()Ci' 'iu'c()cr/ of good domestic cloths : but in order to express the last mentioned meaning we decline the subsequent adjective according to the third declension ; as, gu'tCV ciu'^cituifcljeu '5:u'cl)CV, of good domestic cloths. The above observation concerning the declension of an adjective subsequent to another, applies also to adjectives pre- ceded by the indefinite pronouns, tncl}'VCVC, several ; fi'uigc, some ; Ct'Iic()C, some ; »T'Cl'cl)C, some* ; man'cl)C, some ; it>C'-- nigc, few ; t)ie'k, many ; af'Ic, all. Thus to distinguish " all good men," from all that are not so, we say, rtl'Ic gu'tc SDTcu'- fcl)Cn; but in order to distinguish " a// good men " from some good ones, we say, al'fc gu'tcu 9[)tcn'fd)CU. Observation II. When indeclinable words precede, wheth- er numerals, adjectives, or adverbs, they have no influence upon the adjective ; as, St'rcag gu'tci* QBciu, some good wine, ^iel fl'ifdj'C ?0^tfd), much fresh milk. 'ilBc'nig faCtee '^Daffcv, a little cold water. @C^V gu'tc SOten'fcl)en, very good men. * This indefinite pronoun is not to be confounded with the relative, n)c('c()Cl', WfI'cl)C, n>cf'd.)eg, who, which. If the latter precedes an adjective, this is always inflected according to the second declension, as has been remarked, page 36. PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 43 SBiCV baa'vc 'Jf)a'(cv, four dollars in cash, gfmf lang'C Sal^'VC, five long years. ^ad) JCI)U lang'CU 3af;'l-eu, after ten long years. But the adjective is declined according to the above rules concerning subsequent adjectives {Obs. 1.), when it is pre- ceded by jjr»ei or Dvci, as these two numerals may be declined in the genitive and dative. Examples : G. ^mi'n fang'et* or lang'cn ^a'^c, of two long days. 6r. ©vei'ei* taa'vcuor baa'rcu XijA'Ux, of three dollars in cash. D. Svci'Ctt gU'ten 2}?eu'fc()CU, to three good men. Observation III. If an adjective in its simple form is put before another adjective, the termination of which agrees with the following substantive, in gender, number, and case, the first adjective is not to be considered as denoting a quality of the substantive, but as an adverb, qualifying the adjective after it. The following examples will explain this difference. Sin gan'je^ mu'eS ^MI^, a whole, new house. ©in ganj mu'(& J^au^, a house wholly or quite new. Qin neu'eg ein'aebunDneg V5ud), a new book, bound up. Sin nen cin'gcbnnfcneg ''^nct), a book newly bound. Sin i;a['teg gcbva'tcnc^ ^nljn, half a roasted chicken. Sin ^alfc» gcbra'tencg -^"IjU/ a chicken half roasted. Observation IV. In familiar language, and in poetry, the termination of an adjective, when it precedes a neuter noun, is sometimes dropped in the nominative and accusative case singular, and its' simple form alone is retained; as, fd)5n ODBet'tev, fine weather, instead of fd)5'nc6 ^ct'tci* ; ein fvcl; ®C'f(c()t, a cheerful face, instead of ein fro'l}C^ ®e[tct)t'. Observation V. When two adjectives of the same termina- tion come together, coupled by the conjunction nn^/ and, it is usual in familiar discourse, to drop the termination of the first ; as, ein VOtI}-- nnb tt>etf'fc6 ®ef(cl)t', a red and white face ; ein genug'; unt) ai-'beitfvxmev 90?enfd), a contented and industrious man. Adjectives may be used as substantives, both in the singular and plural ; as, t»ev '^Ceif'e, the wise man ; tie 'ilBci'fe, the wise woman ; t)ie "2Bei'fen, the sages ; M^ Svt?ft'bene, the sublime; fccv (Se[e(}V'te, the learned man; tit ©c()5'ne, the fair woman ; fcet 35efann'te, the male acquaintance ; tie 35e= fann'te, the female acquaintance ; Hx ^evwanb'te, the male 44 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [book 1. relative ; Me '33cr»raub'te, the female relative ; im'fcrc 25c- fann'ten imb 35cvir>aut)'ten, our acquaintances and relations. ^2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. The degrees of comparison are the positive, the compara- tive, and the superlative. The comparative is formed by adding v or CV, and the superlative by adding |l or e|l, to the end of the simple word, or positive ; as, Positive. ^ffin, little ; "IDei'fC/ wise ; 2)vei|l, bold ; Comparative. f (ei'uev, less ; ttJCt'fft'/ wiser ; t»vei'|lcv, bolder ; So form : Superlative. iUxW^, least. tt)Ci'ff|^/ wisest. DfCi'ltctt,* boldest. ^0^1, hollow. Vaul^, rough. \>[cv TOci'fe|U SHatl), the wisest counsel ; feiu t)l*ci'|1cllc^ Uut{l*nc()'men, his boldest enterprise. PART II. CH. 3.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 45 *gVOt\ coarse. *fc()tt)adj, weak. *dVO^, great. *|laff, strong. Some adjectives form their comparison irregularly ; as, Positive. Comparative. Superlative. gut, good ; U^'^tX, better ; 6cjl, best. ^ocf), high ; ^6'liev, higher ; (^Dcl)|t, highest. ttft'^C, near ; luVt^Cl', nearer ; lldd)|l, nearest. toicf, much ; mcljv, more ; mci|^, most. Tiie comparative and superlative of adjectives are declined like the positive. The adjective vciu, pure, comparative VCi'lieV/ superlative VCin|l, is thus declined in its comparative degree : First Declension : Masc. Fern. Neut. vei'ncrev, vci'nevc, vci'neveg, purer, &-c. Second Declension : ter vei'nere, tie rci'nevc, \>a^ vcin'jie, the purest, &c. Third Declension : mcin vein'titcv, mci'itc rcin')ltc, mcin vcin'jlcg, my purest, &c. Thus inflect through the three declensions : Sin efc'fcvcv *30Tann, 3. b. c, a more noble man. ^.Scf'tCf gveuufc, 3. b. t\, best friend. 2)ic n^dv'mcre *inft, 1. b., warmer air. £Dietn juncj'CVC^ ^int), 3. b. e., my younger child. 2)ag fl-Ci'ltc *ianl>, 3. b. c, the freest country. 46 RECAPITULATORV EXERCISES. [bOOK 1. Observations on the Comparison of Adjectives. I. The c is often dropped in the comparative of adjectives ending in c(, CU, and CV ; as. Positive. Comparative. C'bef, noble; Cblcr, nobler, (for c'Dflcv.) ftdycv, safe; ftd)'l'Cl-, safer, (for ftd/CVCV.) t)Ollf Om'mCU, perfect ; VoUf omm'ncr, more perfect, (for vclltom'mciicv.) II. Most primitives change their vowels in the comparative and superlative ; as, jlavf, strong ; jldft'Cl*, stronger ; l>ci' lUrf'lU, the strongest ; hlVJ, short ; hu-'jcr, fcCf fuv'iC|tc. But the following are exceptions, as well as some others previously noticed, (page 44) ; falfd), false ; gera'bc, straight ; l)olt', affectionate ; lo'fc, loose ; glatt, smooth ; matt, faint ; UAcf t, naked ; runl), round ; iTumpf, dull ; ^fatt, flat ; fatt, satiated ; fc^laff, slack. Derivatives never change their vowels ; as, Iaftcrl)aft, vicious; laf'tcv^aftcv, more vicious; fcec Uftev^af; tC|U/ the most vicious. Recapitulatory Exercises on Adjectives. 2)ic Statuv' jctv^t un^ fd)5'ncvc ®e'oicn|laul>e a(6 l»ic Stun)?. J)ic l>fr3'id)tcn CSc'gcnfccu ftnl> an'c\cnc^mcr c(n fja'bcu ci'nen ffi'ncvcn (Scfc^mcirt' a(g tie 2)ic giguv' ^e6 ^h'Ul^ i)l tie t)o(Ifom'mcn|lc tmtev ten gc- omc'ti-ifd)Cu gigu'rcu. 2>ic ®i-ic'd)cu n?a'vcn eiu gcbiCtcm-c^ '33oIf ale Die §H6'nicv. £)ci' ti-etf1id)e SOTann fanb uii'tcv '2Di('t)en ei'ue fvcunt'Uc^eve 2tufnat)mc aU in tern gcftt'tetcu Suvo'pa, t)ic 3tatur, nature. fdlt), are. jcigt, exhibits. au.qcnc(}in, pleasant, ung, to us. cbcn, plain. fd)6u, fine. 'iXBoilc, wool. *®cc(cn|lattD, object. fdd)f(fd), Saxon, al^, than. ©d)aaf, sheep. X>'\Z ^unjl, art. i)l, is. bcvo(icl)t, mountamous. fciii, fine. (Segcufc, country. cnglifd), English. PART n. CH. 3.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 47 a3tant)el, almond. l)abeu, have. feefct)marf, taste. SJlug, nut. giguv, figure. 3iffc(, circle, tollfommcu, complete. UntCV, among, gcometrifcf), geometrical, tev ®viC(tc, the Greek. watrcil/ were. gcCn(t)Ct/ cultivated. '33oIf, people. tn SH6mei% the Roman, tretfllcl), excellent. SOtciuu, man. fanfc, found, roifti, savage. freuutUd), friendly. 2tiifu(ll)me, reception, geftttct, civilized. The English and the German are kindred languages. These little things are great to little men. His style, though uncultivated, is the richest and boldest in (the) modern literature. The strange man gave the cloak to me, poor forsaken child. This gentleman possesses the choicest collection of ancient and modern historical works. You find in this public library a smaller number of volumes, but a larger number of excellent old manuscripts than in the other. To whom belongs the glory of this wonderful discovery ; to Leibnitz, or to Newton? English, cn'gUfc^. and, mxi>, German, bCUtfc^. are, ftnt>/ kindred, toeVWailfct'. language, ©pvft'C^C,/. 1. C. these, Cie'fc. little, Umu thing, 2)ing, n. 3. b, 6. are, f(nb. great, gvog. to, fuv. (Ace.) man, 50Tcufc^, m. 2. b. his, fei'ne. style, @c()rcit>'att, /. 1. b. though, rou'vDoijl uncultivated, ttU'^HIfcCt. is, i|i rich, teic^. bold, fu^H. in, in. (Dat.) modern, ncit'ev. literature, iitn, n. 3. b. e. this, Cic'fcv. gentleman, ^(tt, m. 2. possesses, beft^t'. choice, aug'fflcfen. collection, ©amm'fttng/ /. 1. ^ of, (Gen.) ancient, ait. a. 0. b. 48 NUMERALS. [book I. historical, gcfc^ic^t'Itct). work, aBci-t/ n. 3. b. b. you, iJ)r. find, fin'^ct. in, in. {Dot.) this, fcic'fcr. public, 6ffcnt(icft. library, 55ibllOtt}cf',/. 1. t. small, gcriug'. number, 2(n'jaf)I,/. 1. of, t)On. {Dat.) volume, *25anfc/ m. 3. b. 6. but, a'bcr. large, *gro6. excellent, tvejf fi(^. old, aft. manuscript, ^iCi\\)'^d)n^,f. 1. D. than, aU. in, in. {Dat.) other, an'Dci*. to whom, trcm. belongs, c;cf}5l*t'. glory, SKuljm, m. 3. b. of, {Gen.) this, l»ic'fcv. wonderful, TOun'bCvbar. discovery, ^nffcccfung, /. 1. &. to, {Dat.) or, O'fcCV CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS. The numbers are divided into cardinal, ordinal, proportion' al, distributive, and collective. I. The cardinal numbers are as follows : (SItnll or 3c'V0, nothing.) Sin or cin^, one. 3wct (or jn)Ci>), two. 2)l-ci (or H'CPJ, three. SBicv, four, gunf, five, ©cd)^, six, ©ie'ben, seven. Tid)t, eight. 9Teun, nine. 3e'l)cn or jcl^n, ten. Slf (or tilf), eleven. 3n?5(f, twelve. £>vei'jct)n, thirteen. 23ifl- je^n, fourteen, gnnf jc^n or fiinf jcl^n, fifteen, ©ccfe'je^n, sixteen. @ie'bcnjcl}n or ftcb'jcl)n, sev- enteen. 2(c()t'jc{}n, eighteen. S(tcnn'jct)n, nineteen, ^wan'jig, twenty. €ni nn& jwan'jig, one and twenty. $xt)(i unl» jwan'jig, two and twenty, fcc. J)vci'|l9, thirty. Sin un& trei'ftg, thirty-one, d6C. '35icv'jt\t ei'ne, bag ci'ne, the one ; gen. t)c6 ci'nen, bcv ei'ncii, bee ci'ncu, of the one ; &c. 3. SOIetn ei'nev, mci'ne ci'uc, mein ei'ne^, my one ; gen. mci'ncg ei'neu, mci'nev ei'nen, mci'iic^ ci'nen, of my one ; &c. 3tt>ci* and i»rci make jroei'cv and brei'CV in the genitive, jirci'cn and Dvci'en in the dative (see page 43) ; most of the other numerals admit of declension in the dative only, by adding Ctt, as, \)ie'fcn, ^m'fcn/ &,c. Observations' on the Cardinal Numbers. 1 . Sin is joined to the noun ; as, cin 30?ann, one man ; (i'M §l*au, one woman ; and in order to distinguish it from the article, it is pronounced with a stronger accent. Si'ncv is used when the noun is understood ; as, l}icv i|^ ci'ncv, here is one, (that is, one man, or one thing, understood) &c. ; \j\(t ijl ci'ne, here is one, (that is, one woman) &lc. Sin'lttdt cin6 ijl eing, once one is one. J^a'ben @ie ein 50?cf fCf, have you a knife ? tjici* i|l ci'nc^, here is one, (that is, one knife.) 2. The cardinal numbers are converted into substantives, by the addition of Cf, and in ; as, cin §nnf jigCf, a man of fifty ; ei'nc 3)vci'ft9einn, a woman of thirty. 3. The ordinal numbers are formed by adding it to the cardinal ; except, t)Cr cr'jlc, the first ; \>(X t>X\t'i(, the third ; but after the number nineteen, |le is added. * The cardinal number, yctiti, two, admits of three genders ; as, Masc. jTOCCn, Fern. JTOO, Neut. jwci, two. But, in modern German, jTOCi is commonly used for all the genders. 5 50 NUMERALS, II. The ordinal numbers are as follows : [book I, 25cf Cv'ltc, the first. 2)cr Jirci'tc, the second. 2)cL- M'it'tc, the third. 2)ci- t>ici-'tc, the fourth. 2)fi- funf tc, the fifth. 3)er ferf)'|le, the si.xth. £>Cf fic'bcutc, the seventh. 2)fi- ac()'tc, the eight. £>Cr nCUU'tC, the ninth. ®Cf jcl^u'tf, the tenth. 2>cv fiftc or cilftc, the elev- enth. 25CL- jw6(f tc, the twelfth. Scv ^l•ci'JCl^nte, the thirteenth. 3)Cf \)icv'jc|;iite, the four- teenth. 2)cr fimf^ct}utc or funf jcljntc, the fifteenth. 2)ci- fcd)'jcl}ntc, the sixteenth. 2>ci- fu'bcujcl^ntc or f(c[vjcl}nte, the seventeenth. 2)ci- act)t'je^utC, the eigh- teenth. 2)ci- ncun'jcl}ntc, the nine- teenth. 2)cr j«?an'ji|?|tc, the twentieth. 2)ci- ciu unb jwan'jioifU, the one and twentieth. 2)ci' jn)ci unb jn)rtu'jig|le, the two and twentieth. 35ci* brci unb jwan'jigjtc, the three and twentieth. 2)cv t>vci'ftg|le, the tliirtieth. X>cv ciu unb bi-ci'ftg|k, the one and thirtieth, &c. 2)cf incv'jigltc, the fortieth. Scv funf jigjlc or fituf Jtflllc, the fiftieth. 2)CU fccl)'jioi|k, the sixtieth. J)cr ftc'bcnjigjU or fict'jigf^e, the seventieth. £>CV ad)t'ji3|1c, the eightieth. SDcv ucuu'jig|tc, the ninetieth. 2)CV l^un'bCVtjIc, the hun- dredth. 2)ci' jirci ()un'bcvt|k, the two hundredth. 2)ci- brct ()nu'bcvt|U/ the three hundredth, &c. 2)ci- tau'fcnblUc, the thou- sandth. 2)cv' jn?ci tvtu'fcub|1c, the two thousandth. 2)ci* bvci tau'fcnb|lc, the three thousandth, &lc. In compound numbers the last only assumes the form of an ordinal; as, bcr tau'fcnb ac^t t)uu'bcvt unb incv unb jinau'jigllc, the one thousand eight hundred and twenty-fourth. These adjectives may be declined in all three forms. 1. Without the article ; as, N. G Masc. jroei'tetr, \ or JTOCt'tcn, Fern. ycoii'tz, jroci'ter, Neut. JTOCi'tCg, Cjrcci'tcg '> J or jroci'ten, 5 second. of a second, &/C. PART II. CH. 4.] NUMERALS. 51 2. With the definite article ; as, N. tn- pei'te, t)ic jwci'tc, H^ jvrci'te, the second. G. t»c6 jTOci'tcU/ in jraci'ten, t>cg jwci'ten, of the second, &c. !J)CI' an'i)CVe, the other, is used as synonymous with l»Cl" JWCi'tC, where there are only two persons or things spoken oi". 3. With the indefinite article ; as, iV. etn jiuei'tcv, ci'nc pci'te, ciu jn)ci'rcg, a second. G. (i'm^ ^voti'tm, ei'tttv jwei'tcn, ei'nc^ jroci'tcn, of a second, &c. The Germans always say, fin un^ jWftu'jigjk, one and twentieth ; jn)ci lint) l»rci'f(9|te, two and thirtieth, and the like ; but never, as in English, jraau'jig CV'lle, twenty-first; t>vci'fi.c\ ■^VOU'U, thirty-second, &c. Observations. Partitive and fractional numbers are formed by a composition of ordinal and cardinal numbers, with various words or letters. 1. Withljalt (half), thus: 2(n't)cvtl)a(l>,* (for jwci'tctjaltv) one and a half. 2)fit'tct}ar(), two and a half ^jev'te^alb, three and a half guuf te^alb, four and a half @CCl)')tC^a(6, five and a half. ©ie'6entcl}ai[>, or f(ctt'tc()aU>, six and a half. ^djn'Uijali), nine and a half, &c. Examples. '35cv an'l>CVtl)al6 3a{)'ven/ a year and a half ago; in &rit'tcl)alb ©tun'ticn, in two hours and a half; but in speaking of the hour of the day, the Germans say, ^alb ctn6, half past twelve ; l)Alb JtDCi, half past one, &c. 2. With tijiil (part), as : 2)ag T^xit'ttjUl, the third or third part. 2)a^ '33icr'tljeif, the quarter or fourth part. Sag gunf tt)ci[, the fifth or fifth part. 3)iig 25ici-'t{)ci( <^un't>evt, or bag ^icv'td J^nn'tcvt, the quarter of a hundred, &,c. * This mode of compounding seldom exceeds jn)5Iftc()a(6, eleven and a half 52 NUMERALS, [bOOK I. In the above compound words, ti)ti[ is frequently contracted into tcl ; as, Sill 3)vit'tcl, a third part, or one third. Sin ^icv'tcl, a fotirtli part, or quarter. Sin gunf tef, a fifth, or one fifth. ©in ©Ccl)'fUt one sixth. ^ Sin $(i^n't(i, one tenth. ■ Sin 3'^*^»'ji3|tf0 one twentieth, &c. " So in the plural, as : 3»»ci 2>vit'tcl, two thirds. Svci '^icv'tef, three fourths. ^icv ©ic'kutcl, four sevenths, &-c. These are regarded as substantives, and of the neuter gen- der; but '5;l)cil, when used separately, is masculine. III. Numerals of proportion are : Sin'fad) or ciu'fditig, single. ^mei'facf) or jtrci'fditig, double. 2)i-ci'facl) or M-ci'fv\(tig, treble. '35icv'fac() or t>icv'fii(tig, fourfold, &,c. J^UU'bCVtfvtd) or (}UU'^Cl•tfdUi9, centuple, or a hundred fold. 'iau'fenl>fvtcl) or tau'fcntfditig, a thousand fold, d^c. The above numerals, in frtcl)/ or fdf'ttg, are regularly de- clined, like other adjectives. IV. Numbers of distribution are thus formed : Sr'ftcng, or Cf|V(icl), fir&tly, or in the first place. 3n)ci'ten6, or jum an'^cvn, secondly. X)vit'tfn^, or Jiim ^vit'tcn, thirdly. '33icv'tcui?, or jutn toiev'teu, fourthly. Sin'jcin, singly, or cin ttuD cin, one by one. 3wei init) jiDci, two and two, or two by two. 2)vci uub bvci/ three and three, &-c. sp*av'n)eifc, in pairs, &c. To denote the same thing, or different sorts of things, (vUt is added to the cardinal numbers ; as, Si'ucvtci, of one sort, or the same. 3wei'cv(ci, of two sorts, or two different things, &c. 3e ein^, ;e jwei, jc ivti, one, two, three, at a time. PART II. CH. 4.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. S3 V. Collective numbers are : 2)icJ^aiftC, the half. Sin ^aaV/ a pair, or couple, a few. ©in XlUt'jenl), a dozen. Sin (jaf'beg (or l)a(b) 2)ut'jcnl), half a dozen, ei'ne 3Dtfttt't>cl, fifteen, &c. The English word, time, or tiines, is expressed by the ter- mination ttlfll* ; as, ©in'mal/ once. 9Dtancl)'maf; many a time. ^VOii'moX, twice, &lc. Dft'maf, oftentimes. ^X\\ an'ticrmal, another time. ^JicI'mal, many times. S)ie'fc6ma[, this time. SIDie \)icrmal?how many times 'I ^iev, twice two are four (that is, literally, two times two are four) ; trci mat tret ftnfc UCUU, three times three are nine, &-c. Recapitulatory Exercises on the Numerals, &c. One and one make two. Ten times ten make a hundred. A Roman legion consisted of six thousand six hundred and sixty-six soldiers. Germany Avas divided^ into' ten- circles^. America was discovered by Christopher Columbus in the fifteenth century after the birth of Christ. Vienna, the capital of Austria, lies in the sixteenth degree of {the) longitude, and forty-eighth degree of {the) latitude. Your friends live seven miles and a half from this place. The meat weighs four pounds and three quarters. One half of this apple is mellow, but the other is still hard. He wore a treble coat of mail. I saw three kinds of roses on one bush. times, mo{)'nfn. into, in. (Ace.) mile, ?Oln'U,f, 1. C. circle, ^vti^, m. 3. b. b. from, t)Dn. (Dat.) divided, getl)ci(t'. this, Mc'fcm/ America, Zmt'xxh. place, *^la^, m. 3. b. b. was, TOUV'tf. meat, glcifcl), n. 3. b. discovered, Clttbcctt'. weighs, wicgt. (-4cc.) by, l>cn. pounds, Spj^uut). Christopher Columbus, C^rtf'-- of, {Gen.) topt} Cohim'lnie. this, Mc'fcm. in, in. {Dot.) apple, *'i(p'fcf, m. 3. a. 0. century, 3al)V^nn'^Ct:t, n.3.b.t). is, i)l. after, nad). mellow, weicf). Christ, ei)rif tug. but, a'bcf. birth, (Scbuvf, /. 1. b. (See other, an'ber. page 27J is, ift. Vienna, ^icn. still, nod), capital, J^aupt'jlafct//. 1. b. hard, ^avt. of, i)on. „ he, cr. Austria, jOjVvcicl). wore, tXU^. lies, licgt. coat of mail, span'jcr, w. 3. in, in. {Dat.) a. rt. degree, ®va&, »i. 3. b. b. I, ic(). longitude, idng'C,/. 1. C. saw, fa(). latitude, 35rci'tc,/. 1. c. rose, SKo'fe, /. 1. c. your, 3[t)'re. on, an. (Dat.) friend, greunb, m. 3. b. b. bush, *25ufc(), 3. b. b. CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS. There are seven kinds of pronouns, viz. personal, possessive, demonstrative, relative, interrogative, indefinite, and substan- tive. ^ 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. In German, as in English there are five personal pronouns ; viz. id), I ; bu, thou ; tx, he ; \it, she ; t$, it ; with their plurals, tcir, we ; i(}V/ you ; fie, they. The personal pronouns are declined as follows : PART II, CH. 6.] PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 6i First Person. Singular. Plural. N. id), I. iV. wiv, we. G. mtx'xm or mciU/ of me. G. un'fet, of us. D, mil*/ to me. D. wig, to us. A. mid), me. A. m\$. us. Second Person. Singular. Plural. N. ^v^, thou. N. i(?V/ you. G. lici'ncv or t>ti\\, of thee. G. cu'cr. of you. D. \>ix, to thee. D. cud). to you. A. bid), thee. A. n\d). you. Third Person. Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. eV/ he. ftc, she. eg, it. G. fci'jicu or fcirt/ of him. i^'ver, , of her. fci'nev or fciil. of it, D. \\)m, to him. i^v, to her. i{}Xt\, to it. A. iiijXi, him. fte, her. eg, it. Plural, for the three genders. N. ftc, they. G. i^'tef, of them. D. i^'ncu, to them. A. fie, them. The personal pronouns, in the genitive, dative, and accusa- tive cases, are used also as reflective pronouns, particularly with reflective verbs, as, idj Uc'be micb, I love myself; bu flei't>e1l Did), thou dressest thyself. The personal pronouns when used with reflective verbs, are declined in the same manner, except in the dative and accusative cases, singular and plural, of the third personal pronoun. In these cases the reflective pronoun fid) takes the place of the datives, i^lU, i^r, i(}m, and i^'nen, and of the accusatives, il)n, fte, eg, and fte. Ex. ev, fie, or, eg txUwxht' fid) {dat. sing.), he, she, or it permits himself, herself, or itself; fte erlau'6eu fid), {dai. plur.) they permit themselves ; ev, fte, or fg (ie6t fid) (ace. sing.) he, she, or it loves himself, herself, or itself; fte 56 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. [book I. lic'bfU ftcf) {ace. plur.) they love then^selves. — In the plural number, reflective pronouns are also used to signify a recip- rocal relation. Thus, ftc (ic'bcil ftc(), may mean, thei/ love themselves (reflective), or tJici/ love one another (reciprocal). But in order to prevent confusion of ideas, the adverb ciuau'^C^•, one another, is frequently put instead of ftc() ; as, ftc (ic'tcu ciimn'tcr, they love one another. Sometimes, to give a greater stress to the meaning of a personal pronoun, or noun, one of the indeclinable words, feltfl, or fct'bcv, is added ; as, id) fc(b|1 (or fcl'bcv), I myself; fci'ncr fclbjt, of himself ; xcix fcU>)l, we ourselves; ftd) fc(b|1, to himself, or, himself; to themselves, or, themselves, (as the sentence may require) ; Cd'fav fclb)^/ Caesar himself. § 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Possessive pronouns are either conjunctive, or absolute. Coty'unctive Possessive Pronouns. The conjunctive possessive pronouns, which are formed from the personal pronouns in the genitive (or possessive) case, are as follows : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern, Neut. ' M. F. 4- N. mein, ttiei'ne, mein, mci'iK/ my. t)ein, t>ci'ne, l>eiu/ tci'uc, thy. fein, fei'ue, fcin, fei'ue/ his, its. i^f/ ilj've, il)r, il?'i-e, her. utt'fev, uu'fci-c or un'fvc, un'fcv, iiu'fevc or unfvc, oUr. eu'er, cu'cfc or cu've, cu'ci-, i\\!iKi or cu'vc, your. i()v, it)'vc, il)V/ i^'i-c, their. These pronouns are declined in the singular like the article Ciu, a, and in the plural like the adjective gut, good, in the first declension ; as, Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. M. F. ^ N. N. mcin, mci'nc, tncin, mci'nc, my. G. mci'ue^/ mei'iicv, mei'nce, mci'ucr, of my. D. mci'uem, mci'uev, mn'ixtm, md'nm, to my. A. tnei'neit, mei'ne, mm, mei'ne, my. PART II. CH. 5.] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 57 These possessive pronouns are called conjunctive, because they are joined to substantives. The pronouns fciU/ X^X, eu'ev, &c., agree in gender, respectively, with the possessor ; but the termination must agree in gender, number, and case, with the thing possessed. According to this rule, the following examples may be easily declined ; mciu 25vu'tCV, m. 3. a. a., my brother ; mci'UC @c()«>cf tCV, /. 1. C, my sister ; mcin *55ucl)/ n. 3. b. e., my book ; l)cin '33et'tCV, m. 3. a. C, thy male cousin ; fei'UC 55a'fc, /. 1. C./ his female cousin; i()l* g^reuut, m. 3. b. b., her friend; un'fev 9Tcf fc, m. 2. a., our nephew ; CU'VC £Uic()'tC,/. 1. C, your niece ; i^x *^(XU$, n. 3. b. C, their house. Absolute Possessive Pronouns. They are called absolute possessive pronouns, because they stand for some noun, which precedes them, expressed or understood, and with which they must agree in gender, num- ber, and case. They are inflected like adjectives. In most cases they are preceded by the definite article, and on this account inflected according to the second declension, like tCt* gu'tc, t>ie $n'tt, M^ QH'U. So decline the following : Masc. tn tttfi'itigc/ Ux fcci'nigc, t>tx fei'nigc, t>ev if^'figc, fccv un'fvtac, t(x eu'rtgc, iitx i^'vigc, Fern. b'H mci'ntge, bie bei'nige, Mc fci'itigf/ bic il}'fige, tic un'fvige, bic eu'vigc, t>ic i^'vigc, Neut. i>vig ii^'vigc, mine, &c. thine, &-c. his, its, (fee. hers, &c: ours, &-C. yours, &Z.C. theirs, &c. Plural. bic mci'nigcn, i)ic bei'uic^cu, Die fci'uigcn, tic it^'figen, tic uii'fvigcn, J)ic eu'vicicn, Die i()'vigen, mine, &bc. thine, &c. his, its, &,c. hers, &c. ours, &c. yours, &c. theirs, &/C. 68 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. [book I. The substantive ^Ut, hat, with a conjunctive possessive pro- noun before it, and an absolute possessive pronoun after it, is thus declined : Singular. N. fciu J^ut unl» t)cr mci'nige, G. fci'nce J^u'tce lint) I'Cg mci'ni.qen, D. fci'nem JDu'te "»^ t»cm mci'uioicu, A. fci'ucn J^ut «nl> fccu mci'uigcn, Plural. N. fci'nc J^u'tc un6 Mc mci'nigcn, G. fci'uci* Jpu'tc unl) t)cv mci'nioicn, D. fci'ucu -OiVtcu tml> ten mci'nigeu, A. fci'nc J^u'tc nut) i)ic tnci'nigcu, So decline : tncin gvcimb tint ^cl• fci'tiigc, fci'uc gvcun'biu nut) Mc mci'uigc, his hat and mine, of his hat and mine, to his hat and mine, his hat and mine. his hats and mine, of his hats and mine, to his hats and mine, his hats and mine. my friend and his. his (female) friend and mine, their brother and thine, my brother and yours, my sister and his. his sister and hers, her mother and mine. my bouk and his. our country and theirs. their country and ours. iijx 25vti'bci- unl> fccv bci'nigc, mcin ?5ru'l>cr iml> l>cr cu'rigc, mci'uc @(()wcf'tci- nub tic fci'nigc, fci'nc ©d)n)cf'tci- unb t>k it^'rigc, iij'vt SOTnt'tci- unb tic mci'nigc, mcin 25uil) uiil! l-ae' fci'nigc, im'fcv ^a'tcvlanl) nnt) Dag itj'vige, if}v ^a'tcvUnt) xuxi bag nn'fvigc, Instead of the pronouns, l»cv tnci'ntgc, t)tc mci'nigc, bagmci'-- nigc, mine, the Germans make use, also, of the pronouns, J)Cl' nici'nc, l>ic tncl'nc, Dag nici'nc, as synonymous terms, declined in the same manner. In the same way the pronouns, DCV Dci'nc, Dcv fci'nc, Dcv i^'vc, Dcv un'fcvc, Dcr cn'rc, Dcv il)'i'C, are used instead of the complete forms, DCl* Dci'nigC, DCV fci'nigC, t)ci* it^'vige, Dci* nn'frigc, Dci- cn'vigc, Dci- it)'vigc. There are also absolute possessive pronouns, not preceded by the article, and consequently inflected according to the first declension. Such are the followinof : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. M. F. 4* N. inci'ncv. mci'nc, mci'ncg. mci'nc, mine. Dei'net, Dei'ne, txi'me, Hi'nt, thine, PART II. CH. 5.] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, 59 fci'ncv, fci'nc, fu'nts, fei'ne, his, its. xtj'vtv, ii)'X(, i^'vcg, il}'ve, hers, im'fcvev or ) uu'fcrc or ) uu'fcrc^ or ) un'fcvc or ) ^^^^ uu'fi'cr, i mi'\v(, ) un'ffce, j un'ffC/ ) eu'cvci- or ) cu'cvc or ) cu'cveg or ) cu'eve or ) ^^^^ iij'vet, iij'vc, ilj'vte, iij'vc, theirs. The absolute possessive pronouns are always used without a noun, the noun being understood or referred to ; as, That is my hat, 3)ag i|1 mciu J^Ut ; No, it is mine, D^ciit/ eg ijlt ttici'nev, or, tn mci'ne, or, fccf mei'nigc. The pronouns, mci'UCl% mine ; tci'ltCV, thine, &c., are de- clined like gu'tci', gu'tC/ gu'tcg, according to the first declen- sion ; and t>cv mcrnc, fccf tci'iK, &c. like tcf gu'tc, iu flu'te, tA& gu'tc, according to the second declension. Observation. In addressing a person, where in English the pronouns, i/oii, your, and yours, are used, the Germans, in speaking to intimate friends, make use of tu, thou ; l»ciu, thy ; fcci'UCr, thine ; but in addressing others they employ the plural of the third person, ©ic, which in this case does not mean tTiey but you. This alteration of the original meaning of the pronoun, is denoted by writing it with a capital letter (see p. 3.) in all its cases; as, Nom. Sf Ace. @ie, you ; Gen. 3it)'VCl*/ of you ; Dat. 2i^'Jlftt/ to you. The same remark applies to the corresponding possessive pronouns, 3f}V, 3^'V*C/ 3^V, your ; 3t?'vcr, 3;t}'i-e, S^'vcg, or Dev 3;()'i-igc, Die 3^'vige, fccig 3t}'vige, or t>cv 31) vc, Die 3l)'ve, Da6 3tf)'re, yours. Ex. ©ie you ftn6 are 3(}l* your ei'gcuer own S^nx master. In the old German language, the pronouns 31)1', you, Sll'ei*, your, were used to address a person in a dignified manner, and this mode (which corresponds to the English), is still sometimes used in poetry. But in common life this mode of addressing persons is rarely used, except in speaking to infe- riors in rank, for which purpose, also, the third person singu- lar, cv, he, or ftC/ she, is sometimes employed. § 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. The demonstrative pronouns are those which point out the persons or things spoken of They are declined generally like adjectives ; and as most of them are not preceded by the 60 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. [bOOK L definite article, they are inflected according to the first de- clension. Ex. Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut, N. bie'fctr, bic'fc, bic'fe^ or fcice, this, &c. Plural, for the three genders. N. Dic'ff, these, &c. So decline the following : Masc. Fern. Neut. Plural. je'ncv, jc'nc, je'ucg, that; fe'nc, those. fef'lngcV/ fel'lngc, fcl'tngee, fcl'bigc, the same, fol'cfecv/ fot'cfee, foI'd)cg/ fot'cl)c, such. The demonstrative pronouns, like adjectives, are joined to substantives with which they must agree in gender, number, and case. So decline the following : S)ic'fci' ^na'bc, m. 2. a., this boy. 3c'neg 93?dt)'clKn, n. 3. a. a., that girl. . 3fC'ncv *25n^^Cl^ m. 3. a. a,, that brother. @ol'c()C 9(lacl)'fic()t, /. 1. t>., such a report. @ol'ct)C6 ^Ct'tev, n. 3. a., such weather. The pronoun t)Cv')enica|fc('be, bicfeCbcn, the same, or he, she, it, — they mfel'bige, feicfel'tige, fcaflTel'fcige, t)iefel' bigen, the same, &c. PART II. CH, 5.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 61 So decline the following : 2)ei'fe['6c *iOTann, m. 3. b. c, the same man. ©ev'jenigc *2r>taun, that man. Sie'jcnigc 'iu'0|Cll^,/. 1. fc., that virtue. SicfcCbe '^U'gCUt), the same virtue. S)a6'jeui9C/ *25ucl), n. 3. b. t,, that book. 2)a|fel'bCy *^\xd), the same book. The demonstrative pronoun l»Cf, that, is declined in a peculiar manner, nearly like the article t)CV'/ the : Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. fcev, tie, bag, that. G. t)c§ or t)cf fen, tcv or bc'vcn, bc^ or l»ef'fcn, of that. D. bem, l>cf, l>Mn, to that. 4. ben, i)ic. Dag, that. Plural, for the three genders. N. t)ic, those. G. Wux or bc'veu, of those. D. bc'uen, to those. A. bic, those. § 4. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Relative pronouns relate to some word or phrase going before, which word or phrase is called the antecedent . They are declined in the following manner. 'SBel'c^ei*, who, is declined according to the first declension of adjectives : Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. wel'c^cr, wcl'c^c, wel'djee?, who, which, or that, &c. Plural, for the three genders. N. Wel'c^e, who, which, or that, dtc. 6 62 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN'S. [nOOK I. The relative pronoun, tcv, Me, tag, that, is declined like the demonstrative pronoun, tcv, l»ic, M^, that. Q33cr, who, and ira^, what, as relatives, are used in the singular only, and are thus declined : Masc. ^ Fern. Neut. N. WCl', who, whosoever, which, N. Y0<\^, what. he who, she who. G. njcf'fcn, wt%, of whom, of G. n>cffcn, mc^, of wLc?. whomsoever, of which, &c. D. went, to whom, to whomso- D. Wetn, to what. ever, &.c. A. n>eu, whom, whomsoever, &-C. A. TOag, what. Observations. xIBer and i»a6 are sometimes relative and sometimes interrogative pronouns. '2Dcr, is sometimes Englished by he who, or tchoever ; as, QODcr il)n teunt, Hett il)U, whoever knows him, loves him. 'JBag, is sometimes Englished by that tchich ; as, xIBag iff) flrfacit' tja'be, i)! watjr, That which, or what, I have said, is true. The ancient relative fo, which, who, is indeclinable ; ex. 2)ic §reuul>'f(baft fo iljr mir benjte'feu ()abt. The friendship which you have shown me. For the use of the different relative pronouns, see Syntax, Book II. Chapter 4. § 1. Obs. 6 and 7. § 5. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. The interrogative pronouns are, XOtt, who? XS)ag fur eitt, what sort of? or, xtxx^ ffir, what? The interrogative m['&>ix, is declined like the relative wef's c()er. QBer, VDaS, are thus declined : PART II. CH. 6.] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 63 Singular and Plural. Masc. Sf Fern. Neut. N. ton, who? N. iDvXg, what? G. njfffen, it>eg, whose? G. i)on roag or rao^on', of what ? D. \m\n, to whom ? D. ju irag or jroju', to what ? A. ircn, whom 1 A. was, what ? ^\K^ fur eiU/ what? or, what sort of? is thus declined : Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. j»ag fur ciu or \ ^ ■ i was fur cin or ci'nci?,* Ci'ncr.* / ^^^ ^^^ " "'^' ) what ? or what sort of? G. xta^ fiir ei'nce, was fur ei'ncr, was fiir ci'ucs, of what? D. was fiir cfncnt/ was fiir ei'ncr, was ffir ei'nem, to what ? ^. was fur ei'ncn, was fTir ei'ne, was fiir ein or ei'nes, what ? Plural, for the three genders. N. was fur, what? or, what sort of? No genitive. D. was fitr, to what ? A. was fiir, what? Instead of waS ffir fin, the synonymous pronoun wcfd) ein is used, and declined like the former ; ex. SIDctd) ci'nC %\}e ? What picture? or simply, ^^BaS fur ei'UCS if Which one? 64 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. [book I. one; hi'wtV, no one, &:-c. ; others distributive; as, jc'tcr, each, every, &c. These pronouns are generally declined like adjectives, in the first, the second, or the third declension, according to the general rules. So decline the following : Masc. Ui'nn, foI'cl)cr, cin'jiacv, ci'nigcf, ttifln'ct)cv, (ii'ln, je'tn, ei'ncv/ fold) (i'mxi ci'nev \)ou 6et't>cu/ Fetn. fci'ne, foCcljc, cin'jigc, ci'nigc, man'cl)C, al'k, ci'uc, fold) ci'uc, ci'uc t)ou bci'bcu/ fci'ucv ^ou 6ci'l>cu, fci'ucl)ou bci'bcu; Neut. fci'uc^, no one or none. foI'd)Cg, such. Ciu'ji<\c6, only. ci'uic^c^, some or any. mau'd)C^, many a one. aCIc^, all. jc'^Ct', every or each. jc&'n:)Ct>C6, every. |eg'lid)Cg, every. ci'UC^, one or some one. fold) ci'UC^, such a one. d'm^ i)OU bd'Mn, ei- ther. fci'ucg i)Ou 6ci't>cu, neither. Plural for the three genders. fci'uc, none. foI'd)c, such. ciu'jigc, only. ci'uigc/ some or any mau'd)c, many. al'lc, all. 3c'l>cr, ict)'trct»cv, jc9'Uc()cv, ci'ucf, ci'ucv fcou bci'bcu, and tci'UCf VOU t'Ci't>CU, have no plural. The plural, bci'Dc, both, is declined like that of fci'ucr. The singular of that pronoun is used only in the neuter gen- der ; viz. N. lKi'l>ci?, both ; G. bci'&c^, of both ; D. bci'&cm, to both ; A. hix'U^, both. Some of these pronouns are declined as adjectives, with ciu orfccv. Thus, ciu jC'Dcr, ci'uc JC'DC, ciu jc'l>c6, each, is inflected according to the third declension, and in the singular number li PART II. CH. 5.j SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 65 only. 2)cv ei'ne, tit ct'nc, tat? ci'iic, is inflected according to the second declension, singular and plural. So decline : Masc. Fern. Ncut. ctu an'M'Ct, ci'nc an &vc, " ctn au'bve^/ another. t)cv an'M'C, Hi an'l>re, M^ au'fcvc, the other, ciu ciu'jigcV/ ci'nc ciifjigc, clii ciu'jictc^, an only one. j)Ci* ciu'jigc, t)ic cin'jigc, t)ai> cin';^tgc, the only one. ctn ei'nigci*, ci'nc ci'nigc, cin ci'nigc^, an only one. J)CV ci'nigc, ^ic ci'nigc, M^ ci'nigc, the only one. ctn jcb'n?cl>cv,* ci'nc ;ct)'>T)cbc, cin jcb Jfctces, every. m\ jcg'Iiitcv, ci'nc jcg'ticbc, cin jcg'licl)C!S, any, every one. The indefinite pronoun fcin, fci'nc, fcin, which is joined to substantives, like the conjunctive possessive pronouns, mcin, tcin, I'cin, ^c, is also declined like them. § 7. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. The substantive pronouns, ^f'WWnb, some or any body ; fyiic'inanC', nobody, are used in the singular only, and are declined both as adjectives and as nouns, as follows N. je'mant), somebody. G. jc'invint)6 or jc'inanDc^, of somebody. D. jc'manl) or jcinanbcm, to somebody. A. jc'tnant* or jc'tnantcn, somebody. N. nic'manl), nobody. G. nic'manbS or nic'inantc^, of nobody. D. nic'inant or nic'manDcm, to nobody. A. nic'manb or nic'mvinfccn, nobody. 3c'&CVin(in, every body, is declined as a noun. N. jc'bcvinan, every body. G. ic'Dcvmanis, of every body. D: jc'tcvman, to every body. ^ A. jc'bctman, every body. # * 3cl»'n)Ct)Ct is generally used without the article, and is then inflected like jc'bcr/ or fci'nCf, according to the first do- elension. G6 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. [bOOK I. The substantive pronouns, man, one ; Ct'irrt^, something ; and nic()te<, nothing, arc indeclinable. 9}?an/ one, we, people, they, &,c., like the French pronoun, 071, is used only in the third person singular ; ex. 93iau f^gt, bcr ^'vicg fei gccn'fcigt, people say the war is ended. Recapitulatory Exercises on all the Pronouns. <2Bii- fint) SO?cu'fcl)cn un^ wiv jtnb tlcvt'Iirf). ■Jl^o'vcn, tit i()v fcit), inl>cm' il)v (}offct, fcafj it}i* o^'nc cuct) 5V)?ii'hc ju gc'bcn, c\c(ct}vt' un^ trci'fc wcv'tcn t'5n'nct. ©o'fvatc^ faci'te eft ju fci'ncu gvcun'l'cu: SOIciii ie'bcn ijl mil' nic()t fo fdnaft'bav alss tic '5:u i^cn^. SDTcin ©cfcfcmarf' ij^ iiicl>t tcv tci'nic t)u, an (Scmdl't>fn an^ l>cv 3:talid'nifcl)cn. lIDol^cv' ^ic'fcv nn'tcvfct)icfc ? fca ^oc() foni^ mci'nc Stci'sung mit tcv ^ci'nt9cn bcina'l^c ganj fibcrciu'llimmt. ©in ;c't>cr fct)cpft ang ^cv Oncl'Ic fei'nev iei'l>cnfc()aftcn, fcin (Slucf o'fccr Un'glucf. 3(() frag'tc nad) jc'man^, frtnl> a'bcv nic'manl>cn ju ^aii'fe. 3[c'Dcg ianfc l}at fci'ne cl'd)c man fovg'fdftig bcvbivgt'. ftni), are. al^, as. jlcvblid), mortal. t)tc ^ngcnt, virtue. %t}cv, fool. ®cfd)mad', taste, fcib, are. finbc ^cvgnngcn an, am pleas- intcm if)v boffct, to hope. ed with, ta^', that, t»ag ®cmd(liC, picture, oljnc JU gcbcu, without, giving, an^, (out) of. SOiii^c, trouble. nicbcvIduMfd), Flemish, trcvtcn f6nnct, can become. ©d)n(c, school. gflct)vt, learned. itallduifd), Italian, rrcifc, wise. WOljCV, whence, fagtc oft, often said. Uutcvfd>ic&, difference. jn, to. ^ M bod)/ since, g^rcnubffriend. fonjl, otherwise, icben, life. SKcigung, inclination, ijl uid)t fo fcfed^bat, is not so bcinaljc ganj ubcvcinflimmt/ valuable. coincides almost entirely. PART II. CH. 5.] RECAPITULATORT EXERCISES. 67 fc()opft, draws. ian^/ country. an&, from. ()rtt, has. CimlU, source. (Scbvaud), custom. ieil»cnfd)aft, passion. StJ giebt/ there are. (BIM oDcr Unglucf, good or gc^lcv, fault, ill fortune. Ieicl)t, easily, fragtc, inquired. f(ct) bCTOufft tttivt), becomes con- nftd), after. scious. fmi), found. fOVgfattig, carefully, ju -^aiifc, at home. iJCvbivgt, conceals. I know him. He knows them. She knows us. You know her. They know them. He gives it to them. We give it to him. She gives it to me. They give it to us. Tell it to him. He told it to them. Take pity on (of) me. He is ashamed [shames himself) of thee. We remember {ourselves of) you. There are ten^ of ^ us^. There are six^ oH them^. Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself. I deny it to my- self. He was not^ master^ of 1 himself 1. When thy days are^ dark,i then^ thy^ falses friends''' deparf* from^ thee^, but thy true friends forsake thee not. They gave it not to my friend, but to thine. We owe it not to your desert, but to theirs. This is not thy lot but mine. I mean this house. This is the man (this man is it) of whom I speak. Thou must do^ this,^ but nof^ leave^ that^ (undone). This is his own estate. He does as those people of the torrid zone, who shoot^ arrows! at^ the^ sun'*. Who is the most estimable among men ? The most vir- tuous. What (which) man can promise^ himself ^ constant'^ happi- ness^ ? Which season is the pleasantest? know, teu'ne. told, fag'te. knows, tciint. take pity, nbdX'mtt .. you — know, f en'net. ashamed, fc()dmt. ^ they — know, f eu'ncil. remember, cviu'necn, gives, giebt. there are, c6 ftttl). give, ge'bcn. shalt, foUjl. tell, frt'ge. love, lu'b(XU RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. [book I. neighbor, 9lacVf)ilV, m. 3. a. c. as, n)if. deny, Vcvfa'gc. was, roav. not, nic()t. master, Jpew, m. 2. b. when, iDcmt. day, "iag, m. 3. b. b. dark, t»imt'ei. are, fint). then, &auil. depart, n)ei'(i;cn. false, falfd). friend, §vcun&, m. 3, b. b. from, t)ou. (Dat.) but, a'bcv. true, »t>al)r. forsake, tocvUffcit. gave, gvl'beu. but, fon'Dcni. owe, \)ci*l>anf'cn. desert, ^cvDicnl^', m. 3. b. b. lot, ioo^/ n. 3. b. b. mean, mei'uc. house, *J5au6, n. 3. b. t. man, 9}?aun, m. 3. b. e, is, i|t. of, i)OU. (i>a«.) speak, VC'DC. must, mu|]t. this, (^cc. Neut.) do, tljun. but, a'bcv. that, {Ace. Neut.) not leave, nictjt laf fen. own, ci'gen. estate, *©Ut, n. 3. b. e. does, macl)t c^. as, n)ic. people, *^otf, ?i. 3. b. c. torrid, {)ei§, zone, 3o'nc,/. 1. C. arrow, spfeif, m. 3. b. b. at, gc'gen. sun, ©ou'nc,/. 1. c. to shoot, ab'fcbicfciu estimable, fc()d^'bav. among, uu'tfl". (Dat,) man, Del* COTenfct), ?«. 2. b. virtuous, tu'gcub^aft. can, faun. himself (Dat.) constant, beftdu'big. happiness, ®(ucf, w. 3. b. promise, l)CVfprcc()'en. season, 3ftf)v'jcit,/. 1. t>. pleasant, au'gCUCbm. Many persons suffer themselves to^ be^ deceived^ by^ no- body2 except^ themselves'*. Apply thyself to virtue ; this will never^ forsake^ thee^. Whoever is^ not^ diligent^ in^ his^ youth^, wilP not^ know^ (how) to'' employ^ himself^ in^ his^ manhood^. Who did {has^ done^) that^? his brother or your sister? His sisftr and mine. Wl||jh house (do) you^ mean^ ? What book is this? Who will get3 the^ prize^? my cousin or his? Judges must be^ just' towards^ every one^, even' toward** their^ enemies^. PART II. CH. 6.] VERBS. Put these coins again in their places. I know no one who is^ so^ happy^ as he. (We must give) to every one his own. person, £0?fnfc(). suffer, (affcii. by, toon. {Dat.) except, au'fev, to be deceived, bCtVlVoicn. apply, bcflci'ftgc. to, {Gen.) virtue, ^ie^u'c^fn^,/. 1. 1>. will, mxX). never, nif. forsake, tofvlaffcu. in, in. {Dat.) youth, 3;u'gcnt),/. 1. not, nicl)t. diligent, fici'fioi. is, ifl. will, irir^ manhood, 93Tau'ucgaltev, m. 3. a. to employ, ju bcfd)df tigcu. know, ID if fen. has, t}at. that, fcafif. done, gettjan'. brother, *'i8vn'^Cl^ m. 3. a. a. or, o'bcr. sister, @rf)tt>Cf'tCl-,/. 1. C. mean, mci'nct. what, iDag fiiv Ctn. book, *35uct), n. 3. b. C. will, tt>irl>. ■prize, 5prci^, m. 3. b. b. get, tatoon'tvrtgcn. cousin, ^ct'tCf, m. 3. a. C. judge, Siid^'tCV/ m. 3. a. fl. must, miif ffU. towards, ge'cicn. even, fc(b|it. {Ace.) enemy, gcint), m. 3. b. 6. put, (c'get. just be, cicvcc()t' fcln. coin, grHun'jc, /.I.e. again, »ric't)CV. in, rtnf. {Ace.) place, *Spia^, n. 3, b. 6. know, fen'ne. happy, g(nrt'Iifl). as, alg. his own, M^ fei'nige. CHAPTER VI. VERBS. General Remarks. Verbs express the connexion between subjects (nouns), and qualities (adjectives or adverbs). The various modes in which qualities are connected with subjects, are expressed by different kinds of verbs and the different parts of each verb. I. Verbs are divided into neuter, active, reflective, and pas- sive. Some verbs are defective, as the impersonal verbs. A complete verb comprehends, besides the participles, four moods, 70 VERBS. [book I. the infinitive, the indicative, the subjunctive, and the impera- tive ; and these principal parts of the verb contain different tenses ; with the exception of the imperative, which has only the present tense. Each tense contains two numbers, and three persons in each number. II. Some of the different forms of the verb are original, and others supplementary . The original forms are the infinitive present of the active or neuter verb, and all those parts which are formed from the infinitive mood, by altering, increasing, or diminishing it, viz. the Present, Imperfect, Imperative, and the Participles. Thus from the infinitive Itc'bcu, to love, is formed the imper- fect, let licb'te, I loved. The supplementary forms are made by joining the past participle, or the infinitive mood, to an auxiliary verb ; as, i(() l)a'bc gclicbt', I have loved; id) »t»Cf'E»C lie bcu, I shall love. III. In their original forms, all German verbs are active or neuter ; except the past participle, which, when it stands by itself, has (as in English) a. passive meaning ; as gclicbt', loved. This passive meaning is preserved when the past participle is joined to the auxiliary VDCV'DCU/ to become, which in this in- stance is Englished to be, and forms the passive voice ; as, id) Von'H gelicbt', I am loved. But the past participle takes an active signification when it is joined to the auxiliary i)A'b(n, to have ; as, id) ijA'bt gcUcbt', I have loved. The indicative and the subjunctive contain two original tenses, the present and the imperfect. There is no difference between active and neuter verbs with respect to the original tenses. IV. The verb is inflected by adding certain letters to the substance of the verb. The substance of the verb consists of those letters which, in the infinitive mood, precede the final letters eu (or the final letter n, in those which do not end in CU). Thus the substance of the verb lic'bcn, to love, is (icb ; that of ci'ttJCi'tcni, to enlarge, is eviDfi'tCV ; and that of tt}un, to do, is tijU. V. The additional letters, by means of which the verb is inflected, are joined to the end of the substance of the verb ; as, id) licb'-C, I love ; fcu [ifb=C|l, thou lovest ; id) (icb=ctc, I loved, &,c. But in the past participle most verbs have also the augment, i. e. the syllable gc, prefixed to the substance of the word ; as, Uc'beil, to love, past. part. gcUc6t', loved ; fed)'; ten, to fight, past. part. gcfod)'tCU, fought. PART II. CH. 6.] VERBS. 71 VI. The augment gc is not prefixed, when the verb is com- pounded with be, cmp, mt, ev, tCV/ jev, or gc, which are fre- quently prefixed to it to express particular modifications of the original meaning of the verb. Thus, the past participle of the regular verb, gclo'bcu, to vow (derived from (o'bcu, to praise), is not gcgetobt, but gclobt'. But when the above- mentioned syllables are not prefixed by way of composi- tion, but are part of the original verb itself, the syllable ge is prefixed ; as in be'ttn, to pray, past. part, gcbc'tct, pray- ed ; and in the irregular verb, gc'ben, to give, past. part. gegc'ben, given. VII. All the original forms of the verb which are made of the infinitive, are either regular or irregular, or partly regular and partly irregular.* This variety of forms, though it is found in all parts of the verb, occurs particularly in the form- ation of the imperfect tense and the past participle. Upon this difference three modes of conjugation are founded, the regular, or modern, the irregular, or ancient, and the mixed conjugation. VIII. A verb is regular, if, in its conjugation, the letters of the substantial part remain unchanged, and if, at the same time, the imperfect tense, in the first and the third person of the singular number, ends in tc or etc, and the past participle in ct, or t ; as, lie'beu, to love, imp. id) (or er) lieb'fe, or lie'betc, I (or he) loved ; past. part. gcUCbct, or gelicbt', loved. A verb is irregidar, if, in its conjugation, one or several of the substantial letters of the word are changed, and if, in the first and third person singular of the imperfect tense, the letters tC or etc are not added, and the past participle ends in cn or n ; as, fiic'l^cn, to flee, id) (or cv) fiol), I {or he) fled, gcllo'^eu, or geflo^n', fled. A verb is mixed, if, in its conjugation, one or the other of the substantial letters is changed, but at the same time the imperfect and the past participle are formed in the regular way, in tt, and t; as, brtng'eu, to bring; id) (or ev) hx. Past, gc — et or t. en et or t en Infinitive. Present, en. Observation. The choice between the endings \l and t\t, t and et, te and ete, tt]\ and etejl, UW and eten, tet and etet, depends on euphony. Thus, in the imperfect tense of the verb (o'ben, to praise, we may use either (ob'te, or io'Utt ; but in ve'l)en, to speak, we must say, ic() te'bete, I spoke, and not veb'te, because, in pronouncing, this could not be distin- guished from the present, ic^ Xi'ttt, I speak. I*AKT II. CH. 6,] REGULAR VERBS. 73 Conjugation of the Regular Verb, lit'ben, to love. Infinitive. lit'Un, to love. Participle. Present, ik'ktni), loving. Past. QiliebV, loved. Indicative. Singular. Subjunctive. Present. Singular. id) ixt'hi, I love, do love, or id) (ic'6e, I may love. am loving. . tu lict>1t or fic'bc|t, thou lov- Mt nc'tcjt, thou mayst love. est, dost love, or art loving. cr, f(c, or es (icbt or (ic'bcr, CV lic'be, he may love. he, she, or it loves, does love, or is loving. Plural. Plural. XOK {ic'ben, we love, do love, n)iv Ue'bcn, we may love. or are loving. i{)f Uebt or lie'bct, you love. it)u liCbct, you may love, fie lie'ben, they love. ftC lic'beu, they may love. Imperfect. Singular. Singular. id) iicb'te or lic'bete, I loved ic^ lie'bete, I might love. or did love. tu lieb'tcll or lie'bctejt, thou t)U (ic'bctcj^, thou mightst love lovedst. CI* ticb'tc or lieb'etc, he loved. er lit'bUi, he might love. Plural. Plural. tt)ii* Iteb'ten or lic'beten, we ydxv lic'bctcn, we might love loved, i^r lieb'tct or tic'betet, you i()t: lu'btUt, you might love. loved. f(e iitb'tm or [it'bttm, they fie lu'bctm, they might love. loved. 74 IRREGUI^AR VERBS. [rOOK I. Imperative. Singular. li«'6c (bu), love {thou). Uc'be CV, let him love. Plural. lic'ben »t>ir, let us love. lu'Ut or lid^t {xi)v), love (i/ou) or do (t/ou) love. lic'ben ftc, let them love. So conjugate, (o'ttCU, to praise ; gtau'6cu, to believe. § 2. IRREGULAR VERBS. The change of letters in the substantial part of irregular verbs commonly affects only the vowels; and, in this case, the first and the third person of the imperfect indicative end with the final letter of the substantial part ; as, fprillg'fU/ to spring, imperf. indie, ict) fpvvUlg, I sprang; ev fpvailg, he sprang ; past part. 9Cf|)VUn9'cn. But sometimes the change affects also the consonants ; as, fctnci'I>cn/ to cut, imperf. id) fc()nttt ; fciu, to be, pres. id) bill/ imperf. icfe war ; past part. geiDe'fen.* The imperfect subjunctive is formed by adding e to the imperfect indicative, and is inflected like the present subjunc- tive ; as, fpriug'cn, to spring, imperf. indie, ic^ fpvaug ; imperf. subj. id) fprdiig'e, ^c. When either of the vowels rt, 0, or U, occurs in the imper- fect indicative, they are changed into d, h, or ft, in the sub- junctive ; as, flie'gcu, to fly ; imperf. indie, ic^ flog ; imperf subj. id) tl6'ge. * The different tenses of the substantive verb, ffin, to be, are, in German, as well as in English, composed of three distinct verbs, which have ceased to exist, except in those tenses. PART II. CH. 6.] MIXED VERBS. 75 Conjugation of the Irregular Verb, fUtg'eu, to sing. Infinitive. Participle. Present, ftug'cu, to sing. Present, fiug'cnfc, singing. Past. gcfinig'en, sung. Indicative. Singular. Plural. 1. fdig'e. ftna'cn. 2. ftug'ctl. ftn<^'ct. 3. ftng'ct. ftn9'cn. Singular. 1. fang. 2. fang'ejh 3. fanQ. Plural. fang'cn. fang'ct. fang'cu. Present. Subjunctive. Singular. Plural. ftng'c. finoi'en. fdigelt. fing'et. fdig'e. fiug'cn. Imperfect. Singular. fdng'c. fdu9'c)t. fdng'c. Imperative. Singular. I 2. ftng'e (fcu). 3. fing'e cv. Plural. fdug'cu. fdng'ct. fdng'eji. Plural. ftug'cn wtf. ftng'et (il)i-). fing'cn ftc. §3. MIXED VERBS. The conjugation of the mixed verb is like that of regular verbs, with regard to the endings of the imperfect tense and the past participle, and it resembles that of the irregular verbs as to the change of letters in the substance of the verb. Conjugation of the Mixed Verb, t)Cnf'cn, to think. Infinitive. Participle. Present. fcCuf'CU/ to think. Present. iiwi'iW^, thinking. Past. 9Cl>acl)t', thought. 76 IRREGULAR AND MIXED VERBS. [book I. Indicative. Singular. 1. beuf'c. 2. Dcnt'cjl. 3. fccuf'ct. Singular. 1. udytc. 2. fcacb'tcjt. 3. l)acl)'tf. Plural. ben fen. tenf'et. tenfen. Plural. t»rtf()'ten. i>atl)'tet. i>a(l)'ten. Present. Subjunctive. Singular. benf'c. Denf'elt. Itent'e. • Imperfect. Singular. bdclvte. l»dc()'teth bdcb'te. Imperative. Singular. I 2. imt't (bn). 3. Dent'e ev. Plural. benf'en. bent'et. benf'en. Plural. l)dcl)'ten. l>dcl)'tct. t)dcl)'ten. Plural. benf'en wiv. brntct (it}r). tJcnf'en fte. A List of all the Irregular and Mixed Verbs. The following list of irregular and mixed verbs exhibits in alphabetical order all the anomalous forms of each. Those parts of the verb which are not given, are regular, except when the sign "&c." is put after the first or second person of a tense, to indicate that the other persons of that tense are formed in the same irregular way, according to page 75. If for the same tense or person, two or more forms are set down, the first of them is to be considered as the most usual; and when the regular form is also in use, it is inserted in a parenthesis. This table is complete in regard to simple verbs ; but of the compound verbs it contains only such as either occur very frequently, or are not easy to be traced to their origin, or differ in some respect from the simple verbs from which they are derived. (The section on Compound Verbs, containing a list of the particles with which simple verbs are most frequently compounded, will enable the learner to trace any compound verb to the simple one from which it is derived, and by this means to find out any irregularity of the former by referring to the latter in the following list.) PART 11. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 77 Past Participle. «5 a. O JO .- . «» . cr. ^^ o >-> S I— 1 s •"• 6 6^ ^ ^ - 2> »e ^ ■^ JD sg o -— -»3-g ^ 6 6 ,^ --S i*' '^"^ 2. «:.^^ t* •^ -g-g d d 0^ J O «» sg^Sj ^ ..g ^aj} &fl .g^a -g ^1 , (I 6 •^6 ^^ 5 a3 « o • ,il ■ ^ JO . .ii . s jO •.0 .~. >-> JO •2 S « .& So .S 15 bn oj 3 8 % ^ 2 2 8R »g^ 3 « r*-> 7* 78 IRREGULAR VERBS [book I. to 1 as t-* JT '" s£i rJl- <3D a*. <5^ fJi ^ ^ n ^ C' «^ «X <3J <»3 O .a 1^ 4^ «1 ^ «^a^ : ^ x; ^ x; ^ -e 't: ? ^ ? p., a o "^ >- 5 j; O ^ — OJ »; 0) o .S c -a o ^ -^ -" -o ^ 2 o _o c ^ S 2 S ?i be O 22 o — .» .,ti t* 2 -a o fl'l %i J =3 o _r = \ ^ H — ft* »* »-< .5 2 2 n ^ ^^ ^^^ ^g^^ gig^g? ^ B B PART II. CH/e.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 79 ^* «-» s .^ ^ _ -, ** •S-"^ <^ 2^ 1- ** S •-• <2 S s-> s-> s {:>_ fi- ;:t- i-> ^-. o o €€ JO H B H ■<-» ..ij -a^ ^ S ^ ;^ :^ <3D «3D M u. -^"^ • • o • o ^ • • • O » >— 'JO . . ^ • . • . . ^ . ^-N «^ <-t- ^^O- 0-5 s J- • ^s"•JO C «» JO j* JO JO . . :-> :^ JO «^ O «rf ^ — -. >-i I-. o 0,^^0 d d d d d . . o o ^ o o d «^ "?. ^. -? -^ ■?* ^ ^ „P 'jO "5 1^ /^ ►S^ CD ^•^ «^ ti «5 ^ rt-j"^ Ti ^ •« il CD S S g iC^ ^ — ya --C. «- JO «S JO «■»' C^ <^ ^# *^ «-* ■t^ «i* «« ii v> tJ- -e-e-^ JO .g JO JO ^ JO •^ "6" "S^ '^ ^ °:g:g:§ •«-* ■■*^ ■ f.. -.-* •*^. • ^- • •■^ ••- : )-< h< ll )-l o o O O O d d d d o o o=« o o --CO d »^ ^»^ 4 ^ =<3 d . d il « ^ S JO o ^jO S JO S si jb g Z "^ i: t 'C k. .> }J t* ;-) ■^■e o JO -.g JO JO •^ JO ^ ■^ •^ o ^ *» o •g''^ ^ .«-* ••* •** *•-* ••* ■•^ •^* ■♦.* .*« .«^ .*^ g-i JS S e '^^ o o -o ■ o o o .s" -a W CO 1 a. 2 'S o a> hi o o o 0) It o o o grow pal choose to becom "^ o 2 o 2 O "?D JO ^ ^ o ^ *t. - ^ tr ^-o X c e «i> ji 3 i?--o •^ a) ^ s. 3,s g .£1 a E a n «^ « Q (^ B) B) (i) (i) (i)li)(i) 80 IRREGULAR VERBS. [book I. ^ o i^ 1 V.J ri fS rt O 5* ^-^ ^ «* igf a. trf w <3D » • 4^ <*- '^— ^*-^ "^*-^ o «^ d d «j «^^ 0^4 '"^ d ,\ d ^'S' dog d 'J ■ d ^ "7 £" d d 4 =g •vC» -^ •-• ^ X^ '- <^ c^ ?-" tT 'X 'J- |-^^=-| «5 ^ 2Q t: J. o t: ^ If «rf .— ^ L^ p. o ^ d d o s ^S •^•3i. o *-* S 2"^'^i* rfc* *-» ^- - — N .£^ ^ ^ «rf j^ «<* :-► "s ■ !rr MS f« < /a > — ^ a s t: bfl Ui o »-> ^ 3 o en .2 bJO O « o o 2 o 13 ■> J2 55 o 13 (JO'-tiH ""^ * o '^ o 4 s JS o 2 o22 2-. 2 *" S £ 1 t s ^ s « .2: Si es >* >* *^ v« t__ ^ fS f5 Crf^ {5) (ft) ti) © 9D90B090 j»^ «0 HO PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 81 ** ss js si ^* St ^* S 53 ^^ •^ ^ CD S Ci. c^ c^ <^ <^ (^ tyj "^x «go >-l QJ O) ^ > _o bJ3 ?* t* s g S ^ I; 20 a'^ o 0) - t3 »\-k «ii* Cii c^ tfi s ^ 2 f»^ ^ {» © ® ® ® ®®©® ® 8-2 IRREGULAR VERBS. [book I. ^ ^ 5 e - 2 «- S *= 1^ si t>* o" 4^ C^ 1 \ 2^ o a. «» «^ «^ «> <-> «rf rT) cci en <33 <30 <3j «X «3 «; «< m m ^— ^ .--^^ >-i )-i ■% o ^ o ^a • • • • 1^ ' r-g • • • <3D <3:) . . . • • "•»—«' d d d «j 1 VJ 6 d d - cJ" d d d^_i OO 0^ ^ g ^ .^ /O ^ « d <•* is «'* £$ t- ^vC. "^ il'ui ► «j '^■' CTi w, «j '3:' u. c ^'€''6" 0) ■ •^ .X «•* ■•^ -4-^ ■ ^* -*•* ■«-* • •-• --^ t- Oh S d 6 11 C "^ d d J u •5a ■^ fi ^ ^ -& ^.o >e o-e .■§:§:§^ ■e« ^^e 1 ^ ■2> c^ •^ ■i-i a 4J 'Pi* <3D m u o ^ i* nC- ^ t^ O rfc* J^ «<♦ ^ u^ ^^ ^ ^*^^ ••^ i* «s v«»5 '^ «-> a '. S S 3 JO o* A i> o J5 .a o bc ^- a. c ^ -^ a, n a ,«•* CD Cj -r" ;r~ B •= 2 s S S .2 be " ■-5 o o -^ bj) ^-^•^ o o o *- 11 § 5 t: 'sr-a S; s .ii "^ 5 '-H "So 2 S So « "5 3 ® ®® ® ® ®®S) ®® «a_t .a.^ ssuk c^ ^> c^ o «i <«) *^ °^ Vj.^i 0^ ^ o •^ ^1 i3 O St «5 6 ^ •^^.C-Q'Q.Ci- d a-> 4.> >u i_ ^ 6 ei • o s «>* ■J_J ss ^ c o s « g. ^ J3- n ^ a . )^ A . s c O •£ s s S^ *^ 4.» V^s . s A »g^^ ja JCt .^^ v 0) 5^ .'2 § «-« a o c ^ 1 o i^S 22 2 o -2 *^ ^ j; '»5 illl - B B o 8 tt, l,(£,V ^^ tn (^(i«;(i«s«( (i»;(£^ (J*; ^ 84 IRREGULAR VERBS. [book I ! .^ J* Past articip o 4-> JO {^ » c* «.» «> ^ «^ t^ «.» «* T) <» ^ a "^ e • O 1 v.»^> ^^ ^ 6 d .» « s o3 1 1 1 Jlj d d o3. s /O "*^ 'J>;>» "— ^ ^-* w^ w ^ e ■^ ^ •g- ■^■^■^ •e-g- •e sx S H-( d d - «3 d d J |J| d d ^ ^ ^ s^ i •^ £;ff JO 1 ^ ■e ^ ^ ^-^^ ■^-S" ■^ •»^ -— ■•-. ••— -•— •*. -a^ • *^ ■^-» •*^ *- x — s s >-' >-< _.>—^ r^ i~* jo O -3- ' ■ • X-i ^o O I-, ■«-» ^,,m-^^ >s..-^^ ■II ^ it* ^j- ^ ti^ WS » ^ » ss'"' s'^ SJ . . » . JO , iO A iO A A cd IM 0) 4^ •*0 tJ 11, to run n, to suffer n, to lend , to read C S Is •Si fe? O o i 2 t, to loa It, to let n, to lie 11, to lie sehood ^ -Si PART n. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 85 o t^ •—• «.♦ gl CR 5 "St) u-a- o o z ' ' M <>* •-tc is- . . «1* ^ «* CD ^ 6 4 •«■ ■e-g- o-g- o tj =^0 c ■^ ,; il 6 ^c^ CU> c^ ISE v^_X? b= 1% «< s -S S S B ■es •^ ■e^e ^ SO <-► e . 'O^ l^_ ■«> iti. S g Si 6 '4 S ■ Si 6£^ J •e ^-e o-e <« a '^ ^ ■CT's S «« 5 s •— S ~ S S ** s-g -g ss ■5 ■5 1 o a> hJD en •* ;j^ ^ ■-5 Q) o ° o-Q 0} e> ^2< Q) 43 p ^'^ Q) ■5 -S 2 go's 0) CO c 2 •3 « 2 2 2 S s: a S.2 ^«. Hs, S2 g) 65 g^©- 9- 9 86 IRREGULAK VERBS. [book I. ^^ ^ <^ HO Si. --ScsS:lj Si^5 S a — O fc- c U> O •■ n U4 -^ i^ i-t -^ i-t t^ i-f tJi (5. i^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ■^ «-«*<-► «^ «< «rf cr. "^ <*. M p 1 ci " ,■; o o E -H -!S ^ PL, ^ «» A a. ■^s^ 2 ■g c TS "^•i 1 S) fc>D C 0) 'tl)en, to advise 'ben, to rub f'fen, to tear 'ten, to ride I'nen, to run 'cfeeu, to smell ig'eu, to wrestle I'nen, to run, to of fluids) 'feu, to call ■^ a »« ^ '^ '^ Ji 3 .2: .Z .S >— ' sS rS S <« ^ ^^^^^ £$S>^ w (S) ts> PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 87 ^ 2i £1 p S ^^ y^— xi -^ »S3 CJ!) CTi <*) "SS d O d O " '^ ^ •s .,0 1:' — •— »« "O .;c, s^ vo ,2 ^ -^ — c:; ^ -^ S ^ -c ^-t; "t: o <^c^ ^ JO *- "J— fXi .g ^■>: 4 sS- ^S3- .C? s «* ^ «.» fc- «> -5^ -S o 2 o -id -a CO c 2 o 2 o «2. ^ O '^ '^ Q.'^ 'crf Q c* 5i ^ , ^ "^ ^^ \i c/j Ti ~ t/2 7i ~ CO ®® ® ® ® ® ® ®® ®® ®® ® ® IRREGULAR VERBS. [book I. .si .ij "i^ "i. i* "o "^ o **=* '-s 3 s s 5, ^ s ^ o 'r: r; 'H & e g "S" ^•^^ ~ >2-^~^5 ■£ >2--— " •:; ^ .g ^ ^- S ■.f? — 5i iX. «^ a. <3j O <»- ^ rs; O ^ ^^ — ^ «D «"J _ • S o 'S ^ ^ ^ . •^ "»■ • ^'•'^^ S o 2^ 1 1: £ J £ « . d o tf' ^ 4-. t* "o. "ij j_. "O d •^ ^ s s !^ o H ? ^ e e 3 ■£3* ,,^ . ^~> ■•^ ^ *''*' ■ *""> ■ *^^^ . ^7- . ^"^ ■i.G' •S* ■^ ^ Oi. Oi-^w t^ 0^ •^ ^'S' ^c^^^i"^ ^^^^ •S" a; ^ ^ a. «- ^& o S 6 <5D >* 2 . =^ " 5S ^..C^a d • o d d '■*^'r? '^ ^-^ il s p O .M o t^ «-•!-> O o '^ ^ B B "S'S'S t e e kg *"> h£7 *£^' . j-^ .c * ,,£J. ^» s Oi- w ^-» d d .i-^^— ^ Oi-*i-0i- ;^ (3 •^* ^ « ^ t 03 Wl ■^ ^ ■ s . s s JO iO 1 o c 1 > ^ »J" _aj 1 1 1 ^ 1 ^ is o - a 1 "So 0) Q) 2 'tn 1 * ,i3» .,*'•> >,y-> ,^y« 3 . ^^ ■ '"^ CAi •_, ® ®® ® ®® ^©'iS® _(S) ® . PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 89 o s: s o s j- S S V.3-. f= ^ I* ,^ o .^* • d «!" d J- J- d e d d .. e^- d i* -r^ aO S s. ^ _ fc» _ ■g o ^ d e d d o d - ^ "^ "^ K) • n S - ^ c3 " • d « g « 5 o ^»3 0:1 w 0:1 Oi- 0:^2.2- S •^ o ^ sc- .» 0^-.s- ^c "^ ^ ^ "^ <^ '^ . t) s-».e a. ^-gS 2 :§ o E 09 be c ink, liged o > •Jl o 10 £5^ ^"-^- °.tj ^ o S o .-; .b *J 01 O, ss ^ ^ O) w ^ !» to O -^ XS M S s e Jo o 0) O 2 o II •2 2 "^ 2 o 2 2 P «^ — -5 S c 3 *- ^ •^ ■^ x* ^* S o .5.= .= E.tioS. ^ (5) ^ (i) © t^ ®® ®®® ®®® 90 IRREGULAR VERBS. [ BOOK I. ^iciple. II- 1 1:1 O OS 2» s ^ i Si- A- a- o 5 o — o 0, <^ «rf c^ «> t» o <^ A Si. • • ^ He . *i— ,,— ^ >-. I-. , . d fe o s -5 -s^ O .^ ^ ^ •-' ^-' "i^ ^ =« d ^ -^ d o ^ ,£«-,»- «S: »S:»^ ■"^ "iL ry ,'i^ ^'> ^^ ^^3- '^S-^£^ •.^? >^ r di..i=- r*-* ^> **-* ■ v"^ -.i^ •"r*" cs r-» ^^ — »-. \^ 0) '.O' :-> ;^ a. « O S d . i di d =0 — og ^^ d ^ 2 '.££; S o 5 ^'r3 — - ^ >^ »2:«2: ♦S: »2:«2: r2 C^ "iL s -" """ f^ ■ ^-> »••> •g" ^^ •^ •€, ? •.£* sS- w ^_ § ^ 'i* -•-> i~ -^ 0) VJ «» v» - . St CM ^ ^ St . . o o O ♦-> -<-> „ fcj 4^ s .5 to a, ■" o o -^ I 11 a o " ^^ 2 Kl o 13 1 1.2 2 2-2 03 3 t ^ S-^l; a- clS-S <-> P t. i; VC " ®® ® ®® s ^ ® ® ®® ® I PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 91 "■ «»«;«) rfi ^ • ■(-» ^— ^ ^J1 d ^ 0^ d d d d d «iL» t^ ,££■ ir^ •u> ^.^ ■•ij o <3:) ia-» »« .— n >* "r ■'? ■r "^g "P sS=-^S-.S- „£S. .»-;. .<-? .^ ■JV ■I'V .'-^ -•-> sC- 6 6 ^^ o 2 IJ4 r*-> r^ -t^ o r»-» J " ^^c^ •? ? d o O 5 >e«^ sSJ- ■^ ■^^ ^S-'.C- •^ -e sg- o -g" •*^ • •«» ■ •-■ -*-»■ -«A -^-^ ••* ••^ ■■'-* ST ^* A S i- sJ S -•£> i; ^ c ^ 2 0) C -fi M a •^ in M 3 O o o ^ol- c"2 o ^ f^ o -a o — ' o Q s «-.; s Nr> SI'S •? .S o ** •rr 'o -r; 0) a B .•2 (?fy &^ &^ fH fff iff &* '2 8 92 IRREGULAR VERBS. [book . "2^ t s ^ ^ c» ^ 2 g 4-. Ui g ^i i: en ^.J2^^ s^ •iL s '-' 'Ty Jt c I-> :-> :-> ^ ^ ;-> ^^ i; c* t^ __^^ «» «^ c^ ^ u %« «.. iCi p* Si «.. » » % -» ^ ^ ii ^ J^ p» 5i _£» fc« 11 - — ■ ■ ^ — * • ^^-^ ^* Xi e •:^ ^^ .... ^ ^ * -i* !-> ~. »-- Si. « ■ ^ r* "^ ^ ■ «:> «■ »^ s: ii xj . . . «^* • .■; . *> <1* «>« >♦ "Lk V £> «^ ^ 6 d 11 J -^l -t2 »5 d ^^ -.— «-► &» ^ «.» •— ^ • •-• ^^ « ir^ ^ ^^» ,c* :».^ ^^:S .^« S s. S .— "i- ** «> •— s :5^ ill «;S^^5 5 S ^ S ""^ d <-» ^ <** S-» c» «»* 4^ ^ ^ » ^ «rf <» ^ ij ii » ^. p> d d « 5> o ^ -e^o 1^ ^ '£^^'^■-2^'^ «««^ ^^ ^^t ^ -«-» -«-^ «« • •-» -^^ ■ — * ••^ •...* E d d d ? 5 d «j ^ ^ ^ o ^ J=> ■ •- t-» ^ J^ ^— ^ c 3 iO •^ A «-J cr^r:.^^ s: ^ ^ ^ — ■ )-i c^ <^ i* «i* "^^ Si ^ ,» Si S' Si "^ I- ^ «■ d » ^^ s ^^««^«^ ^•g"^ •e^ ^^«3 ^ ••^ -•^ -•* -•^ •*^ • sS ^« ^ •e= • • ii ^ ^ "S3 u j:> , » . . 4J _g ^ irf c •C . ** . • % t'. S * .0 ■ t2 * ' ^ w . «» . . >» A « « "to 1 /a Ci« x> /O 3 i. >< ^.1 ?! So, si 't, 't, 't, '-c ^ x: G ^^ J ?? r^ 0^ 0^ 0^ g^^ ?i B' B PART ir. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 93 ^ ,^^^ ' Si s o ti ^ ^ #rf p; ^ e* 5 ■■'^ >5- '^ - ? . <3D «". ry. cr. «"j cr; CD < n CT CD ^ ^— »^ >-i ,^-^ • o 55 • O j5 • * ■ — iO ' A . . <*- g f^ '"'-^ u* (_ o d "^ o d 6 d'T^ dog 0^ d d d og d og d d S eg d eg uS Cr; S t: .-g :'x .5 &■■« I*— «« fe: fi S &:-;&&£ ^ ft V 'S e = & g 'g .£?^S3- ^ 1 g >p >ii .p o Z £ ^J3- ..£? e^ ^ ■^ .•^ -*^ ^ .^ .*^ -^ .^ ■ ^ ■ ^^ i* •'^^ f-M •— ^ d ^ i d c ^ d iO d eg d •3| o i: ^ «- ^ cJ" d ft s ft s d d en s eg «rf e e e.i* & e ^ c s 1 ^ ~i b s g g e •8^ J e^^^ ^^e S-- e e^ sS^ '■£3' ;§• -«-* -*-fc ••^ -#i* • •^ * ••* *^ «i rocs •i^^ . g'^ *c? ^ »*-» . . i^ «_ o — - ^ «« *T^ A ^ e "g e gg ^ s S <*- e JO JO g'e S iO JS a » •"S'^S' -C "^ & — 0) Ti S ^ _b D C ^'i O rt §22 & c ill 2 o 2 03 3 CO O o o HI o >-< ^^ o o O 0) $ «rf SJ «> «rf - 5 ' jj ill Is 1 ess 1 '8 1 1 ^g. §8 94 IRREGULAR VERBS. 5J *-* *. -^ Si — "m to ^ ^1 ^% 2 •.^0 e V «■*=. '■io wo rs-j •T> «: ^m-^ . ' )-i • •kj 5^ cJ",S~ * d •2 H =^ ■♦"J !0 «^ «s «3 C-* "^ ■-s> ^%, «5 , ^5 -^ '^ e 20 ♦'^O *'0 ^^-s ^-» ^W *w . d ti =^ ■u^ "ii- ^'>'. ^~^ ^ ' ■— 5 c •♦-i • rio d 4 • Ph s* ^2 ^ S . ,£i- si? «*=, — V ss k- s eJo • JO ■ — " ■ — ; 3 ■^ %- "^ 3 > .■C • t 4 ° 2 S "a; ^ ^ ^c* ci. C s ^<5j g ^r-^ 5 5 F* '-* S-? nana nn .-S TS •-"-r^ ^ o" C 'r' be £3 I- bJD D- 3 E be & -3 3^ 5 S o 13 O ^ bj) tS ."i- •^ BOOK I. -3 CS ^ r 3 ^ c " -3 .i- ^ — ' <-• Ti "C cd 7= « 5;, 3 c .. •; j^^ 3 3 QJ 3 x^ 5 Jii - o X rf e P« 3 — 3 IX 3 ^ bD O O „ « " '-s o >, 3 o ■ — >- 3 fc^ ojj ^ ■ bC cj ^ .:0 ^ 0^ (D CO -3 n w 3 O t« S to -3 -5 n J^ P 3 Q o OJ en ^ 3 i ., _ O — C J P f § o -5 M -5 :S' rt ;? o ^7 QJ ft* 3 £ S PART 11. CH. 6.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 95 The following verbs, which are similar to each other, are to be distinguished. ©rtu'gcn, to suck, irr. ©cf)n)im'mcu, to swim, irr ©iut'CU/ to sink, irr. ©pring'CIl/ to spring, irr. ^Vinf'eU/ to drink, irr. @du'9Cn, to suckle, reg. @ct)n)cm'mcn, to wash away, reg. @cnf''cn, to sink, let down, reg. ©pvcng'cn, to sprinkle, reg. ^vdiif'CU, to give to drink, reg. Promiscuous Exercises on the Irregular and Mixed Verbs. When the verb to do is an auxiliary to another verb, the auxiliary is not expressed in German. Thus the phrases, do yon know 1 or do you not hioic ? are expressed in German as if the English were, hioic you 1 or knoio you not 1 wif fct il}l* ? or tt>if fct il}V uict)t ? The position of the negative uidjt is immediately after the verb, except with the infinitive and the participles, where it stands before the verb ; and in questions, where it stands after the pronoun. Ex. I am not, id) Inn uid)t; are you not? fell) i^v nid)t ? not to be, ttiri)t fcin ; he might not come, ev fd'me nid)t. Indicative. Present. I know. May I ? I must not. Wif'fcn. fcuv'fcn. Can I not ? f6n'ncn. Thou fallest. faClen. Dost thou catch ? fang'en. Thou dost not hold. ifal'ttn. Dost thou not hang ? You must. May he ? He does not let, ^dus'cn. muf'fen. m5'flcn. laf'fcn. Does he not sleep? She advises, fcfela'fen. 96 RECAPITULATO] RY EXERCISES. [book 1 Does she go ? fvxf^'rcn. She does not dig, giM'bcn. Does she not strike 1 fcb(a',c»cn. It grows, ifarb'fcn. Does it see ? ff'l}en. It does not eat. cf'frn. Does it not happen 1 8cfft)C'{jcn. We give. gc'bcn. Do we step ? tvc'teu. We do not forget, t)crc\ff'fcn. You read, Ic'i'fn. Do you measure 1 tuff'fcn. You do not hew. I^au'cn. Do you not carry ? ti-a'gcu. They are, fciu. Do they remain 1 blci'bcn. They do not seize, ftvcrfcu. They do not go, gc'ljcn. Imperfect. I might, m5'3cn. Did I eat? cf'i'cu. I did not dig. Sra'bcu. Did I not step 1 trc'tcn. Thou reraainedst. bict'bcn. Didst thou lend ? tci'ljcn. Thou didst not avoid, mci't)cn. Didst thou not fight 1 fedytm. He induced. bcwc'gcn. Did he heave, or lift? ^c'bcn. He did not conceal. bcr'gctt. Did he not take ? nct}'mcn. He commanded. bcfclj'Icn. Did she speak ? f|)VCCl)'Ctt. She did not write, fa)vci'bcn. We nominated, cvncn'ncn, It bit. bcif'fcn. Did it glide ? glci'tcn. He did not think, fccnt'en. PART II. CH. 6.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 97 Subjunctive. Present. I may fall, I may not be able, Thou mayst not, Thou must, He may be willing. We may beat, They may not bear. Imperfect. I might dig, He might not bring. Thou mightst break. Thou mightst not command, He might conceal. She might not help. It might eat. He might not, We might not lose, You might not creep, They might not contuse, They might not spoil. faCfcii. Bii'ncn. ittuffni. it>o(1cu. gva'ben, In-ing'cn. h-c(l)'cn. kfci}1cu. bci-'j^eu. I}cl'fcn. cffeu. vcvlic'vcn. h-ic'(()eii. t)cnt>iv'vciu Dcvt>ci-'bciu Imperative. Read (thou). Ic'feit. Give, flic'bcn. Take, lie I) 'men. Do not step, tre'tcu. Eat, or do you eat, ff'fcn. Do not forget. Dcvgcffcw. Let him come. foin'tnen. Let him not give, gc'bcu. Let us go, gc'^eu. Speak, or do you speak, fpvccft'ciu Let them enjoy, gcnic'fcn. Do not speaic, fprec^'ea. 9 98 REFLECTIVE VERBa. [bOOK I. Past Participle. Begun, bcflilu'ucn. Spoken, fpvcc()'cn. Not deceived, bctiic'gCH. Fled, fiic'()cn. Flowed, jliefcu. Not sheared, frf)C'VCll. Burnt, toCltu'CU'ttClU Recommended, cmpfci}'(eu. Brought, h-ing'cn. Valued, fliet't'ni. Given, ge'beu. Helped, ^cCfcii. Requested, bit'ten. Called, ^ci'fen. § 4. REFLECTIVE VERBS. Active verbs, when they reflect upon the agent, are called reflective verbs. They are formed with the pronouns inic^/ i)id), (or miv, \>\X,) fid), \X\\^, eud), f(d), answering to the En- glish pronouns, myself; thyself; himself, herself, itself; our- selves ; yourselves ; themselves. They are conjugated like active verbs, and are either regular or irregular. Conjugation of the Reflective Verb, ftf^ (ic'bcn, to love one's self. Infinitive. Present. ftc^ lie'beit/ to love one's self. Participle, ftd) Iie'6ent>, loving himself, herself, or itself. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Singular. Singular. id) ixt'hz mid), I love myself. id) (ic't>c mic^, I may love myself. X)\x licbjl bic^, thou lovest thy- tu Uc'be)l tict), thou mays* self. love thyself. PART II. CH. 6.] REFLECTIVE VERBS. 99 tX, fie, or C6 Ikht ftcl), he, she, tv, ftC, or C6 lit'hc ftcl), he, it loves himself, herself, or she, it may love himself, itself. herself, or itself. Plural. Plural, mv Ik'bm Utt$, we love our- VOiv Ik'Un \m&, we may love selves. ourselves, i^r iu'Ut end), you love your- ibr Ite'bet euc^, you may love selves. yourselves, fic ncbcu f(c^, they love them- fU licbcii ftd), they may love selves. themselves. Itnperfect. Singular. Singular. tcft litb'tt mid), I loved my- id) lic'bctc mid), I might love self myself tu litb't(\l Mel), thou, &c. t>n lic'bcte)! bic^, thou, &c. Plural. Plural, rciv Ileb'tcu uiig, we loved wit lie'Utm un$, we might ourselves. love ourselves. \i]t licb'tet cud), you, &c. i!)i- lie'fcefet cuc^, you, &-c. Imperative. Singular. Plural. ixt'Un wiv tme, let us love ourselves. lie'be l»ic^, love thyself lieht or lie'bct cud), love your- selves, lle'te ev f(c^, let him love him- fic'ben fte ftc^, let them love self. themselves. Exercises on the Reflective Verbs. Indicative. Present. I am ashamed, fid) fcfed'tttCU, to be ashamed. He blames himself, f(cl) ta'Dclu, to blame one's self. We unite together, fid) tJCVCi'uigeu, to unite. You forget yourselves, fid) i)ergcf' ffll, irr. to forget one's self. 100 REFLECTIVE VERBS. [bOOK I. Irtfperfect. We rejoiced, ftclj frcii'cn, to rejoice. He betook himself, [tcl) bcgc'bcn, irr. to betake one's self. They heloed themselves, ftcl) l)cl'fcu, irr. to help one's self. Imperative. Do not offend, [■((() i)cv<^c'I)CH, irr. to offend, to fail in one's duty. Grieve not, |icl) grd'ntcii, to grieve. Do not complain, fid) bctla'c^cil, to complain. Do not burn yourself, fid) Itabrai'llCU, mix. to burn. Be not afraid, fid) fiivd)'tfU, to be afraid. Observations on the Reflective Verbs. 1. There are many reflective verbs in German, which are not so in English; as, fid) cvbav'mcu, to pity ; fid) frcu'cu, to rejoice ; and many others, as in the above exercises, are em- ployed only in the reflective form ; as, ftd) bcgc'bcn, to repair to. fid) civd'mcu, to be grieved, flc^ bcmdd)'tigcn, to get pos- fid) bcvnlj'mcn/ to boast one's session of self, &/C. ftd) bct>anf cu, to thank. 2. All active verbs, if the sense admits of it, may be used as reflective verbs, by the addition of the reflective pronouns ; in which case they frequently assume an intransitive meaning ; as, fiivd)'tcn, act. to fear ; and fid) fuvd)'tcn, to fear, or to be afraid. Some verbs, howeverj are employed in both forms ; as, iv'vcn, to err, or ftd) ivi'CU; to be mistaken. IJailf'CU, to quarrel, or fid) jant'Cll/ to embroil one's self. fd)CU'cn, to sliun, or fid) fd)Cll'cn, to be shy. ;3. Most reflective verbs take the pronoun in the accusa tive; as, id) crbai'me mid), I pity; id) In-fin'ue mid), I reflect; but some few require the pronoun in the dative ; as, id) ina'fc mil* nid)t m\, I do not assume; id) tnl'De mir uirljt cin, I da not imagine. PART II. CH. 6.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 101 § 5. IMPERSONAL VERBS. A verb is called impersonal if, in those tenses which com- monly have three persons, it is used, in its proper and peculiar sense, only in the third person singular, with the pronoun C^ be- fore it. Thus the verb Q,t'b(\\, v. a. irr. to give, which is a com- plete verb, has a peculiar meaning when used impersonally ; indie, pres. c^ gictt, there is ; imperf. et? grtb, there was or were. Ex. S^ gictt SO(en'ff()C»/ there are men {literally, it gives men). Most impersonal verbs, though genially used as such, are sometimes employed as complete verbs, particularly in a poetic sense. Thus the verbs tou'ucvn, to thunder, Hit'jcn, to lighten, are commonly used as impersonal verbs ; as, (6 ton'ncft, it thunders; Cl? Hit'JCt, it lightens; but sometimes as complete verbs ; as, t»ic -O^'^fU t>cn'UCl'U, the heights thun- der ; fci'UC 2(tt'C|fU blilS'tCU, his eyes threw out lightning. Impersonal verbs are either intransitive, or active, or re- flective, as they are used either by themselves, or with a personal, or a reflective pronoun afl;er them. I. Conjugation of the Impersonal Intransitive Verb. Conjugation of the Regular Impersonal Verb, vcg'uctt/ ' to rain. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. eg VCg'net/ it rains. eg veg'ne, it may rain. Imperfect. t€ VCg'nctC, it rained. eg veg'ucte, it might rain. The following verbs may be conjugated in a similar manner fcon'ncvn, to thunder. Mit'jfu, to lighten, fcftnei'di/ to snow. tl^au'cu, to thaw, ^a'gclu, or fct)loffcn, to hail. ta'geu/ to dawn. 9* 102 IMPERSONAL VERBS. [bOOK 1. Conjugation of the Irregular Impersonal Verb, fi'ic'veu, to freeze. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. i^ ftici't, it freezes. C6 fvie'l'f, it may freeze. Imperfect. C6 fl'Or, it froze. C6 fv6'vc, it might freeze. II. Conjugation of the Impersonal Active Verb. Conjugation of the Regular Impersonal Verb, dv'cjcrn, to vex. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Singular. Singular. t€ av'<3icrt mid), or micf) av'-- eg di-'.ACi-cmic(),or mic() di-'geve, flci't, I am vexed. I may be vexed. eg ttv'gcrt i\d), or l>ic() dv'gcvt, c6 dv'cjcvc i\d), or Mrft dv'gcre, thou art vexed. thou mayst be vexed. eg dr'gi'vt ibii, or ilju dv'o(cvt/ eg di-'gevc il;u, or il)u dv'gere, he is vexed. he may be vexed. Plural. Plural. eg dv'gcrt img, or ung dv'gcvt/ eg dv'gcve img, or img dv'geve, we are vexed. we may be vexed. eg dv'gcvt eiich, or end) dv'gevt, eg dv'gcvc cud), or end) dv'geve, you are vexed. you may be vexed, eg dv'gcvt fie, or fie dv'gcvt, eg dv'gcve fie, or fie dv'geve, they are ve.xed. they may be vexed. Imperfect. Singular. Singular. eg dv'gcvte mid), or mid) dv'; eg dv'gcvtc mid), or mid) dv'* gcvte, I was vexed, &c. gCVtC, I might be vexed, &c. The personal pronoun is generally in the accusative, but sometimes in the dative case. Thus the verb gcfal'lcit, v. n. irreg. to please, is used impersonally, with the personal pro- noun in the dative case ; as, eg gcfdift' miv, or miv gcfdilt', I am pleased, &-c. ; eg gcjtel' miv, or miv gefiel', I was pleased, &c. PART II. CH. 6.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. Exercises on the Impersonal Active Verb. Indicative. 103 I am hungry. Thou art cold, We are thirsty, They are sleepy, He is pleased, It seems to me, We were grieved, You were grieved. They were discomforted, He was displeased, Present. f^nuci'cru, to be hungry. flic'l'CU, irr. to freeze. Dur'ltCil, to be thirsty. fcl)la'fcru, to be sleepy. gcfaCicn, irr. to please, (Dat.) Imperfect. fciUif'i'U, to seem, (Dat. or Ace.) gra'mcn, to grieve. V>CVbl'lc'|'cn, irr. to discomfort, mii^fal'lcu, irr. to displease, (Dat.) In all the instances mentioned under II, the personal pro- noun in the accusative or dative case is evidently governed by the impersonal verb, which is governed by the pronoun t^, it, expressed or understood. In other cases, C6 is an expletive which does not govern the verb, and is either not translated or answers to the English there; ex. i€ fcuut i()ll lUC'niailfc, there is no one that knows him ; C5 fa'cjcu Otc icu'tc, people say. III. Conjugation of the Impersonal Reflective Verb. Conjugation of the Irregular Impersonal Verb ^t-VjIc'tjCtt/ to understand. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. fg iJCVjIcbt' ftd), it is under- eg l>cr|Ic't)C ftd), it may bo stood [literally, it under- understood, stands itself) Imperfect. t$ ^n\Hnt>' ftc^, it was under- C£j \)CV|Un't>C ftfl), it might bs stood. understood. 104 COMPOUND VERBS^ [bOOK I. Exercises on the Impersonal Rejlectivt Verb. Present. It is becoming, f(cl) fr{)ic'{'cn, to be becoming. It is not* proper, fid) 9cl)6'vcn, to be proper. It is evident, ftcl) Cfgc'bcu, irr. to be evident. Imperfect. It came to pass, fid) fu'c^cii/ to come to pass. It subsided, fid) flC'bfU, irr. to subside. It was protracted, fid) iJCrjic'^cU/ irr. to be pro- tracted. § 6. COMPOUND VERBS. Simple verbs being regular or irregular, their compounds are the same. Compound verbs are compounded either with separable or inseparable particles. Those which are compounded with inseparable particles, are conjugated like the simple verbs without the additional particle ; except in the past participle, in which they do not receive the augment ge. Thus the verb cvfut'lcu, to fulfill, is conjugated like fill'U'U/ reg. to fill ; except the past participle, which is cvfullt' (instead of gccvfidlr). The separable particles are joined to the verbs in the infini- tive and participle, except when the conjunction JU, to, is added to the infinitive, which is then put between the particle and the verb; as, ailf l)itltcu, to detain ; he endeavoured to de- tain him, cf fud)'tc i()u auf ju l}al'tcu (or aufjut^altcu). — In the original tenses of the indicative and subjunctive, and in the imperative, the separable particles are separated and put after the verb ; except when for some reason (to be stated in the Syntax) the verb must be put at the end of the sentence. Ex. you detain, jf}i- t?a('tct auf ; take care that you do not detain me, fe'^ct ju, l)at5 i^x mid) nic^t auf Ijaltet. * The negation is to be put after the reflective pronoun. PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. 105 Conjugation of the Separable Compound (irregular) Verb.. AUf ^altCU, to detain o?- stop. Participle. Present. auf^attCUb, detaining. Past. auf gcl^altcn, detained. Present. Infinitive. auf ^altCU/ to detain. Indicative. Singular. ic^ ^al'tc auf, I detain, am id) Ijai'ti auf, I may detain, detaining, or do detain. 6U f^dftjl rtllf, thou detainest. tu f)a('tc|t auf, thou raayest de- tain. cr, fie, or eg ^dft auf, he, she, ev, fie, or eg (jat'te aiif, he, she, or it may detain. Subjunctive. Singular. or it detains. Plural. VOiV l?al'ten auf, we detain. i^f ^af'tet auf, you detain. fie f)ftl'te« auf, they detain. Plural, Xoiv ijai'tcn auf, we may de- tain. li)V l}a('tct auf, you may de- tain. fie l^al'tcu auf, they may de- tain. Imperfect. SinsuMr. Singular. id) ^ieft auf, I detained. id) ^ieCte auf, I might detain. i)U ^ie['te|l auf, thou detain- t>u t^icrtejlt auf, tliou mightst edst. detain, ei* ^iett auf, he detained. ei* t)ict'te auf, he might de- tain. Plural. Plural. \X)'vc l^ief'teu auf we detained. Yo'xx t)icf'teu auf, we might, &c. i()V \)\d'Ut auf you detained. it)v l)ic('tct <\\\^, you might, &;c. fie l)iel'ten auf, they detained, fie l)iel'teu auf, they might, &c. 106 COMPODND VERBS. [book I. Imperative. Singular tj^i'tt (bu) auf, detain (thou). ^al'te tx auf, let him detain. Plural. Ijdl'tcn If ir auf, let us detain. ijiil'ttt (iljr) auf, detain (you). l;al'tcn ftc awf, let them de- tain. So conjugate : auf uef)incu,- irr. to take up. we^'gcbcU/ irr. to give away. ab'ijoim, to fetch. au6'fprf cficit/ irr. to pronounce. Vor'fommcU/ irr. to come be- fore. Cin'briugen/ mix. to bring in. Exercises on the Separable Compound Verbs. Indicative. Present. I take off, Thou acceptest, It devolves, We give up, You except, They assist. I presented, Thou rannest off, He took in, We pursued, You sent home, They came hither. Look (thou) to, Keep (i/ou) back, ab'ncf^mcn, irr. to take off. au'uct}mcu, irr. to accept, an^cim'fallcn, or Ijcim'f^llcn, irr. to devolve, auf flcbcu, irr. to give up. aud'ucljmeu, irr. to except. fcci'ftcljCU, irr. to stand by, to assist. Imperfect. tav'rcicf)Cn, to present. bva\)0u1aufcu, irr. to run off. Cin'uel)mCU, irr. to take in. fort'ffftcu, to pursue. i;cim'fcbicfcu, to send home, ijcr'tommcu, irr. to come hith- er. Imperative. JU'febcU/ irr. to look to. juvuct'tjaltcn, irr. to back. keep PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. 107 Composing, Composed, Participles. jufam'mcufc|cu, to compose. Observations on the Compound Verbs. 1. The compound verbs generally follow the conjugation of the simple verbs, some of which are regular, and others irreg- ular ; thus, au'rci»cu, to address, and bci'C't>CU, to persuade, from ve'Dcn, to speak, are regular; anffd)V(ib(i\, to write down, and bcfdjvci'bcu, to describe, from fdn'Ci'bcu, to write, are irregular. But fcl)affcil/ to create, is irregular, and toerfc^affcn, to procure, rc^M/ar; I5fc()'cn, to quench, regular, and crl6fcl)'cn, to become extinct, irregular. 2. All separable particles have a distinct meaning, when taken by themselves, and are therefore easily distinguished when used in composition ; as, ah, off, or down. an, on, or at. auf, up, or upon. au6, out of. bet/ at, by, near. Mi', there, chl, in, or into. JTCi, free. mit, with. ncKl), after. Examples. Zh'^tf^m, to depose, 2(n'fprec()cn, to address, 2Cuf jltc^Ctt, to arise, lin&'^e^tn, to expose, 35ei'jk^eu, to assist, to stand ©iu'fcfelicfcn, to inclose, §rci'fpvcc()cn, to acquit, 9)tit'gcf)Ctt, to accompany, ?Sta<^'fol$m, to succeed. from fCt'jCtt/ to put, and ah, down. fprecl)'en, to speak, an, to. ftc'ijm, to stand, auf, up. fet'jeu, to put, aug, out. jlc'^eu, to stand, hn, by, or near. fc()Uc'fen, to lock, tin, in. fprccl)'cn, to speak, frci, free. Qt'iftn, to go, mit, with. fol'gcn, to follow, na^, after. 108 COMPOUND VERBS. [bOOK I. Jjpin, tliither, or tJicrc, and (}Cf, hither, or here, are oftener employed in German than in English. Both express motion towards an object ; but 1}CV, when used in opposition to ijxn, denotes a motion towards the place where the person who speaks actually is, and l}iii a motion towards another place. Thus, l}tu'tcmmfu, signifies to get or arrive there, in opposi- tion to Ijcv'tommcn, to come hither ; as, 3ct) (oun'te \nd)t ijin'tommiw, I could not get there ; ^om'mcu @ic ^cr, Come here. 3. The inseparable particles, as their name announces, are used only in composition. Of these, the following are the principal : 23f, (1.) in composition with verbs, denotes an expansion of the action over an object, or its influence upon it ; as, bcitrtcf)'; fen, to overgrow ; bclU'CU'CU, to bestrew ; bcidu'cbcrU/ to be- smoke or smoke. By the use of this particle, many neuter verbs are changed into active ; as, ar'bcitcil/ to work, tin ©tlicf ^olj bcav'bcitcii, to work on a piece of wood ; vei'tCU, to ride, cill spfcvD bcvei'tcn, to train a horse ; fci'.^CU, to follow, ci'ncii 9*latl^ bcfol',c\cii, to follow counsel ; fpi-cd)'cn, to speak, ct'lPvXg bcfpvccl)'cn, to bespeak a thing, &,c. (2.) In composition with nouns and other parts of speech, it denotes a communication of one object or quality to another ; as, bcflu'vichl, to wing, or provide with wings, from glil'cicf, a wing ; bcbrtU'Dcvn, to adorn with ribbons, from ^.Saut, ribbon ; bcau'gcn, to give an eye to, from lin'c^f, eye ; bctau'bCU, to cover with leaves, from iaub, leaf; bcrci'cl)Cni, to enrich, from void), &c. In the application of this particle, there is but little difference between the two languages. Smp, which occurs only in three verbs, stands instead of tnbc (in, in, and the particle bc), and signifies that the action, which is expressed by the verb, is of an internal nature ; as, jtn'Dcu, to find, Cmp^U'tfU [to find inwardly) to feel ; frtng'CU (or fkVt}cii) to catch, cmvf'Ui.q'cu, to receive; bcfcl}'(cn/ to com- mand, or commend, cmpfcljlcu, to recommend. Sut denotes (1.) removal from a place, and nearly corre- sponds to the English from, or ate ay ; as, CUtjliC'gcn, to fly away; cutfev'UCil, to remove; cntlaf'fcn, to send away or dismiss. PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. 109 (2.) Deprivation; as, cntcl)'l'Cn, to dishonor ; CUtbiu'bCll, to unbind ; Clltfcf fchl, to unfetter ; CUt^aup'tCll, to behead mti)Wkn, to unveil. (3.) It sometimes denotes the commencement of an action; as, CUtbvcn'ncu, to kindle ; cntJUll'DCU, to set on fire ; CUt|'cl)(a': feu, to fall asleep ; CUtfpfiug'fn, to spring ; cutjtc'ljeU/ to arise. Si* denotes (1.) elevation, in the sense of the particle auf, up ; as, cvI)C'tcil, to elevate, or lift up ; cvtniU'CU, to build up ; cvjic'^cn, to bring up ; ei*»t>ac()fcn, to grow up. (2.) Obtaining by means of exertion, or trouble ; as, Qvftd)': ten, to obtain by fighting ; cvfdnuei'cbcdl, to wheedle ; crftfcl)'-- Cn, to fish out ; crai-'baten, to work out ; cvfau'fcil, to pur- chase ; cvfa[)'vcu, to learn by experience ; thus, Si* crfDd)t' Ci'ucil ©iCOj, He obtained a victory ; Qv i)At fci'ne ©UUll cr-- fc()mci'c()C(t, He has wheedled himself into his favor, &/C. So likewise in regard to mental exertions ; as, cvflu'uCU/ to devise ; fl'fcCUf'CU/ to contrive ; ei'|iu'l>cn/ to invent, &c. (3.) Taking out, bringing out, coming out, in the sense of the particle m^, out ; cvit>al}'lcu, to elect, or choose out of; cnicu'ucu, to nominate ; cr^iCfcu, to flow out ; cvtaf'fcii, to issue ; cvfcl)6p'fcn, to exhaust ; CvLH'C(l)'fU, to break open, or break out from. (4.) A bringing or coming into a condition, which is indi- cated by the words with which it is compounded ; as, fl'irci'; tcvn, to enlarge, from VOtit, wide or large ; Ciwdv'meu, to warm, from warm, warm ; cvgvau'cu, to grow grey, from o^vau, grey ; evt^av'tCll, to grow hard, from t^avt, hard ; Cl*b(ci'c()CU, to turn or grow pale, from bfcicl), pale; fvblin'bCll, to grow blind, from hlini>, blind ; crfat'teu, to grow cold, from t"'a(t, cold; CVl*6't(}Clt, to redden or blush, from vDtt), red ; Cl'av'mcu, to grow poor, from avm, poor ; cvf Id'ven, to explain, or clear up, from Uav, clear ; CVfvic'VCU, to freeze, from fric'vcil, to freeze ; Cl'JUf'nen, to make angry, from ^OUX, anger ; tv\\(t': 6cn, to expire, from |kl*'bcn, to die, 6lc. (St gives simply an extension or force to the primitive ; as, (H*au'c()CU, to use, 9ct)l*au'cl)en, to employ ; Dcn^CU, to think, gcli«U^en, to think of, or bear in mind ; firie'rcn, to freeze, 10 no COMPOUND VERBS. [boOK 1, ^ffric'lTll, to become frozen ; tuCtcu, to bear, f(cb oiCtuCfcCU, to endure, or have patience with ; laug'Cll, to reach, gclrtjlg'Cll, to arrive at, or come to, &c. ■^^CV denotes (1.) removal, answering to the particle away ; as, VClja'^CU, to drive away ; l>Cl'fcl)Cnt'CU, to give away ; \)CV= ^■•llan'^cn, to transplant; i)Clfft'jCU, to transpose; \>cvvrccl)'fcln, to change ; Vcvt'au'fcu, to sell : or atcay, as implying waste, loss, or consumption ; as, Vcrtviuf'CU, to drink away, to spend by drinking; \)evfpic'Icn, to game away; \)Cl'(ic'l*Cn, to lose; i)CVav'tcitC)i, to work up ; l>cvbhVt)en, to fade away ; \)Cl'Vau'= clicn, to evaporate ; l>cvfct)macl)'tcu, to pine ; V)CVbIu'tcn, to bleed to death ; VCVWCl'feil, to wither away. (2.) Putting out of order, or doing wrong, answering gene- rally to mis; as, VCVlc'gCU, to mislay ; t>Cl*fut)'VCU, to seduce; i)CVfc()l-ei'beu, to write wrong ; Vcrt)VC'(}CU, to pervert ; 'OCxfaV- fcl)Cn, to adulterate ; i)cvfal'jcu, to oversalt ; Vcvgcf'fcu, to for- get ; i)CVfcl)ic'bcn, to dislocate ; VCVlia(l)'Iaffl9CU, to neglect ; tofVVCclj'nen, to miscalculate ; t)CVVUC'h'U, to derange. (3.) Putting in the way, obstructing; as, iJCl'bic'tCU, to forbid; t)CVfvi'3CU, to deny; i)CVbit'tCU/ to refuse; Vcnrd^Vfii, to prohibit ; \)Cl•(}ill'^CVU, to prevent ; \)Cffd)nc'fcU/ to lock up ; Dcrt)dm'mcu, to dam up ; \)cvf(c'gc(ii, to seal up ; VCVf|."'Cf'; veil, to bar up or out ; i)CVlliau'CVll, to wall up, &c. (4.) Putting or coming into a condition ; as, i)Cl*aI'tCU, to grow obsolete, from alt, old ; Vcvfdllg'iTll, to lengthen, from laug, long ; VCl-fuv'Jcn, to shorten, from hu'J, short ; VCVvU''; men, to grow poor, from avill, poor ; VCVC'Dclu, to ennoble, from t'tti, noble ; VCrgot'tCVU, to deify, from ©Ott, God ; i)CvbviV« Dri'll, to fraternize, from 'i^ni'l>Cl*, brother, &bc. Sometimes it adds force to the primitive; as, t)CVCf)'l'Cll, to venerate, from Cl}'icu, to honor ; Vcvfpot'tCU, to mock, from fpot'tCU, to jeer ; bCVlad)'Cll, to deride, from lad)'CU, to laugh : VCVlci'()C)l, to grant, from Ifi'^CU, to lend, &c. 3fV denotes a thorough separation of the parts ; as, jevbvcd)'s eil, to break in pieces; jcvfct)nict'tevil, to dash in pieces; JClVUt'teu, to shake in pieces ; jcrjU'CU'CU, to dissipate ; jCVjU': veil, to destroy ; JCVfcl)iici't)Ctl, to cut to pieces. The particles tt)i'l)CV, against, and ^iu'tfV, behind, though inseparable in composition, are employed as distinct words. PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. Ill Verbs compounded with mi^, which answer to the English mis and dis, commonly take the augment gc before the partici- ple, and the preposition ju before the infinitive ; as, inietnl'; ligcii, to disapprove, gemietil'ligct, disapproved, ju niisbiin'' gcu, to disapprove ; mietn'au'cbcil/ to misuse, gcutiiS'bvaucbt, misus^ed, ju miebvau'dKU, to misuse. Some few neuter and active verbs drop the participial aug- ment gc; as, titigfal'Icu, to displease, eg l}rtt mil* miefallcu, it has displeased me : miglci'tCU, to mislead, misSlci'tCt, misled ; mi^ling'cn, to fail, c6 i\l mii^hmg'cu, it has failed ; iuigva'r{}cii, to miscarry, eg i|l migva'tt}CU, it has miscarried ; mi6'\)CV= iitijtn, to misunderstand, tuau ^at eg nU6'i)CV|tant>en/ it has been misunderstood. 4. Some prepositions are both separable and inseparable, as, t>uvcl), through; nut/ about; u'bfV, over; to which may be added wie'teV/ again. The first three are separable in the intransitive, and inseparable in the transitive sense of the verb. Thus, lillVCl)'tn'ed)CU/ intrans. sep. to break through ; ev tn*ic()t Dlivd), he breaks through ; l»urd)'gebvOfl)Cn, having broken through : but Ct'TOrtg t)UVd)bvcd)'CU, trans, insep. to break through a thing ; ei* t>lird)bvid)t' ci'llC 93?aiicr, he breaks through a wall ; t)UV(|l,n'Od)'eu, being broken through. Thus, iimlaufeU/ intrans. sep. to go or run round ; ev Iduft \\m, he runs round ; um'oielailfeu, having run round : but et'inag um= lail'fen, trans, insep. to run round a thing ; ei* iimUuift' l\t ©tatt/ he runs round the town ; umlau'fcn, being run round. Thus, iVbevfc^en, intrans, sep. to leap or pass over ; ev fc§t n'OfV, he leaps over; U'bevgefe^t, having passed over: but ubcrfet'jeu, trans, insep. to translate ; er ubcvfe^t' l>ic a('tcu ©d)fift'fh'llei*, he translates the ancient authors ; ubevfefit', translated. *3Die'bev in composition is separable in the proper sense, but inseparable in the figurative sense ; as, n)ie't)evt)o(eU/ prop, sep. to fetch back ; ui) i)o('te eg TTie'fcer, I fetched it back : but u>icbevt)0'(en, ^^wr. insep. to repeat; id) n)iet>evt)o('te bie "IDov te, I repeated the words. In the above verbs the accent is laid upon the particle when it is separable, but upon the verb when it is inseparable. 112 COMPOUND VERBS. [bOOK I. 5. Verbs compounded with nouns or adverbs are mostly inseparable ; but take the augment C|C in the participle ; as, Infinitive. Prcs. Ind. Participle. SHatfj'fctlagcu, to consult, icb ratlyfcblagc. gcratb'fc'Dlagct. 2(nt'w)0vtcu, to answer. id) aut'iDOvtc. gcant'iDCvtct. So the following ; 2(rci'wo^ucn, to suspect. Cuacffalbcni, to quack. §rol}(oc't"cu, to exult. 9lat»'ln'Cd)ru, to break on the §vul}'|lud-'cn, to breakfast. wheel. gucl)^'fd)»t»dnjcu, to fawn. §Hcd)t'fcvtiaifn, to justify. J^au^'l}at''CU, to handle. llr'ttjoilcii, to judge. J^crvvttt)cu, to marry. lU-'hniI>cn, to testify, iicb'dllgchl, to ogle. -IDciffkUKll/ to pro[)hesy. iicb'fofcii, to caress. ^ctt'cifeni, to emulate. SOZutl/mafcn, to conjecture. SlJBllIfal/vcn, to gratify. Verbs compounded with IJOH, drop the augment gc ; as, bOllen'tCU, to finish ; imp. id) \)OlIcu't»CtC, I finished ; part. t>ot= leu'fcct, finished : so, i)0Ubriu3'CU, to bring about ; VOlIjic'^CU/ to execute; \)0(I)U'CC'fcn, to accomplish; bollffi^'rcn, to con- summate. List of the principal Particles with which Compound Verbs are formed. 1. The following particles are generally inseparable from the verbs. aftcv as, af tcvvctcn, to backbite, be bc^cu{"cn, reflect, consider, cmp cmpf»^ii)?'f»/ receive. (Ut CUt)lc'(;cu, arise. ev crjin'tcu, invent. <\Z 0{(t(i'l)tn, prosper, t^intci* tjiutcrblci'bcU/ remain behind, mis mietfal'lcu, displease, vcr i)cvjcl)'i-cu, consume. l>crab i)crab'fplca\)ou' tarun'tci* fcurcl) foi't ()eittt t)(vun'ta' ^iuftb' iu'nen tlie'^ev II be vein' ijoviVbci* wie'l»a* an aug Dftfltt' cin fiitr i}in ^evbnvd)' ^evu'bei* ^evDov' ^inan' ^iniVbcr mit Ob un'ter tjovan' t)Ofki' anljeim' bei, tabei' t)at)ov' bapifcl)'eu eiuljei-' gteic^ ^evan^ herein' ^evnm' t)in,ju' nacl) u'bcv 1)0(1 t)ora«^' njcg jUTOi'fcei* These particles have a meaning of themselves, independ- ent of the verbs with which they are connected ; some of their meanings may be seen in the following examples ; 2(b'fc(n*eibcn, to copy, from fd)vei'ben, to write, ab, from. 2tug'j\()i^ciben, to extract, fct)vei'ben, to write, an^, out 2lnf bauen, to erect, 9?ad)',qetjen, to go after, SDTit'net^men, to take along with, S(lie't)eiTcnncn,torun down, J^ei-'bvingen, to bring hither or here, of, or from. ban'en, to build, auf, up. aie't}en, to go, nad), after, ne^'mcn, to take, mit, with. vcn'nen, to run, nic'ter, down, brinoi'cn, to bring, l;ev, hither. 10* 114 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book I. ^crfeor'bvingcn, to bring forth, J^iu'l^clfcn, to forward, JpiiuVbcvtommcu, to come over, Uu'tevftnfcn, to go to the bottom, li'fccvtficfcn, to overflow, ^ov'tommcu, to occur, ^ovaii'):cv't)Cn, to become, are the three most important auxiliary verbs. '^Bcr'Dcll/ isused a^ail auxiliary with every verb; ^a'bcU/ with all the active ap^dt-most of the neuter verbs ; and fciu with many n$at€T"Verbs. .^^. ■ These auxilinry "verbs are also used as such with one an- other, to form the supplementary tenses of each of them ; and their supplementary as well as their original tenses are used with other verbs. Thus the future of (}a'bcn, id) Xta'U t^a'bCU/ I shall have, is a simple supplementary tense, formed by joining the present id) ircv'bc, to the infinitive l}rt'bcii; and this future of (^a'bcil used with gclicbt', loved, the past partici- ple of lic'bcu, to love, forms a compound supplementary tense, the compound future of lie'beu, id) TOcr'Dc gclicbf ^a'bcn, I shall have loved. By thus joining the auxiliary verbs to others, the following supplementary tenses are formed : 1. The two supplementary past tenses, viz, the perfect and the pluperfect. 2. The two future tenses, viz. the simple and the compound. PART n. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 115 3. The two conditional tenses, viz. the simple and the compound. 4. All the tenses of the passive voice. The perfect is formed by joining the past participle of the verb to the present, and the pluperfect by joining the same to the imperfect, of the auxiliary l^a'bcu, or the auxiliary fciu ; as, ic() ^a'be gclictit', I have loved ; id) ijAt'u gelicbt', I had loved ; and id) Hll gci'Ciir, I have travelled ; id) n>A\: gercifV, I had travelled. (The auxiliary fciu, in all neuter verbs, is Englished to have.) The simple future is formed of the present indicative or subjunctive of ^rcv'fccn, joined to the present infinitive of the verb ; as, id) WCV'be Uc'bcu, I shall love : and the simple conditional is formed of the imperfect subjunctive of WCV'bCn, joined to the present infinitive of the verb ; as, id) Vohv'H iu'bcxx, I should love. The compound future is formed of the simple future of (^a'bcu, or of fctll, joined to the past participle of the verb ; as, id) \V(X'tC gcliebt' Jja'tKU, I shall have loved ; id) W(v'H gcvcijl' fcin, I shall have travelled : and the compound conditional is formed of the simple con- ditional of tjiX'heiXf or of fciu, joined to the past participle of the verb; as, id) vom'tic gcUcbt' ^a'6cu, I should have loved ; id) n)uv't»e gefCifl' fcin, I should have travelled. The different tenses of the passive are formed by joining the past participle of the verb to the original and the supple- mentary tenses of WCf'tCU, which then is Englished to be ; as, id) mx'ti gcticbt', I am loved ; id) )Vm'H gcUcbt', I was loved. The following paradigms contain the original and the sup- plementary tenses of Ija'bcu, fciu, and WCr'Dcu. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, ^d'hm, to have. Infinitive. Participle. P}-es. l)a'[>cn, to have. Pres. i)a'btn1>, having. Per/, ^tijabt' ifiX'bm, to have Past, ge^abt', had. had 116 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book 1. Indicative. Present. Singular. icft ^U l)ki|l, thou hast. n, fte, C6 ^(Xt, he, she, it has. Plural. XOXX ^a'bcu, we have. [{jX f;abt or Ijrt'bct, you have. fte ^a'bcn, they have. SuhjuiiQtive Sinmdar. id) ^a'6e, I may have. Du ^a'bc|t, thou mayst have. CI*, f(C, esS ^a'tc, he, she, it may have. Plural. Wiv ^iv tt)ev't)cn ^a'bcn, we shall mx xtwam ^^'Uw, we shall have. have, i^f roev'fcft l}a'bcn, you will il^v jt»er't)tt (;a'bcu, you will have. have, fic n)ci-'&cn ^a'bcu, they will fie jncv'fccn l^vi'bcu, they will have. have. Compound Future. Singular. Singular. ic()tt>cr'bc,(\cl;abt'I;a'bcn, Ishall id) xan'U gctjabt' ^a'bcn, I have had. shall have had. bu n)iv|l gel}ab£' \:jui-'t>c|lt (;a'bcu, thou im n)uv'J)C|i gcl^abt' l;ft'6en, wouldst have. &c. cr iDuv'lie t?a'beu, he would have. Plural. it>iv TOiir'fccn l)a'bcu, we should have. it)V wfiv'bet ()a'bcn, you would have, fte ItiUV'bcn \:iCihm, they would have. 118 AUXILIARY VERBS. [bOOK I. Imperative. Singular. Plural. ^a'bcn Wiv, let us have, ^a'bc (t»u), have (thou). ^abt or l^vVbet (il)l*), have (you), or do (you) have. ^a'6e er, let him have. (^a'bcu ftc, let tliem have. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, ^a'bCU, to have. This verb, as well as all others, may be conjugated in four forms ; that is, Affirmatively , i(() l)a'bc, I have. Negatively, tc() tja'bc uicl)t, I have not. Interrogatively, t}a'be id) ? have I ? Negatively and interrogatively ^ (ja'be id) nid)t ? have I not? So likewise through all the tenses, as in the following exercise. Pres. Ind. Have I ? Have I not ? He has not. Hast thou? She has not. Have we? We have not. You have not. Have they ? They have not. Have they not ? Imp. Had I? He had. Had she not? Had we not? Had you not ? They had. Had they not ? Perf. Have I had ? Hast thou not had ? Has he not had ? Have you not had? She has not had. Have they not had ? We have not had ? Have they had 1 They have not had. Pluperfect. I. had not had. Had I not had ? Hadst thou had ? She has not had. Had he not had ? Had we had ? They had not had. They had had. Had they not had ? Simple Put. Shall I not have ? Wilt thou have ? I shall not have. We shall not have. Will you not have ? You will not have. Compound Put. He will have had. They will not have had. Will they not have had ? We shall have had. Will you not have had ? PART n. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 119 Simple Cond. Should I have 1 Thou wouldst not have. Would he not have ? We should not have. Should we have 1 Should we not have ? You would not have. Would you not have ? They would not have. Would they not have ? Compound Cond. I should not have had. Would he not have had ? We should not have had. Would you have had ? They would not have had. Pres. Subj. I may have. I may not have. Thou mayst not have. We may have. We may not have. They may have. They may not have. Imp. Thou mightst not have. Hadst* thou not. Had we. Had we not. Had you not. Had they not. They might not have. Pe7'f. Thou mayst not have had. We may not have had. You may have had. They may not have had. Plup. I might not have had. Thou mightst have had. He might have had. He might not have had. We might not have had. They might not have had. Imper. Have (thou). Let us have. Have (ye). Let them not have. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb @CiU/ (©C^u), to be. Infinitive. Participle. Pres. feiii/ to be. Pres. fci'cnb, being. Perf. gctre'fcn fcin, to have Past. gc»t»e'fen, been, been. * The phrases beginning with the verb are not interrogative in the subjunctive mood, but have the same meaning as when preceded by if. 120 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book I. Indicative. Singular. ic^ 6in, I am. Mt bijt, thou art. cir, ftc, C^ i|l, he, she, it is. Plural. XDIV fUlt, we are. i()V fcil>, you are. f(C ftut), they are. Subjunctive. Present. Singular. id) fei, I may be. tn fci'C|l, or fcij^, thou mayst be. . tv fci/ he may be. Plural. »T»if fcl'cn, or fein, we may be. it}r fci'ct, or fcit», you may be. ftc fci'cn, or fcin, they may be. Imperfect. Singular. Singular. id) wav, I was, id) wd'VC, I might be. Mt tt>ar|l, or wa'vejlt, thou wast, fcu tt»d'vcjt, thou mightst be. Cr WAV, he was. Cf JDd'VC, he might be. Plural. voiv wa'vcn, we were. i^V it>a'vct/ you were, fte wa'vcn, they were. Plural. Wiv wd'vcn, we might be. i^r rod'vet, you might be. ftc wd'vcn, they might be. Perfect. Singular. Singular. id) bin gcwc'fcn, I have been, id) fci gcwc'fcu, I may have been. t)u bijt gcmc'fcn, &c. in fci'cjl gcwc'fcn, dtc. Pluperfect. Singular. Singular. id) war gcwc'fcn, I had been, ic^ wd're gct»c'fc«/ I might have been. t»tt njatllt gcwc'fcn, &c. bu n)d'vc|t gcmc'fcn, &c. PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 121 Simple Future. Singular. id) WCV'be fciu, I shall be. &U Jt5ir|l fciu, thou wilt be. cr TOifJ) feiu, he will be. Plural. Singular. id) VDti'H fciu, I shall be. t)U it>cv't)C)t fciu, thou wilt be. cr n)ev'i>e fciu, he will be. Plural. XO'VC WCV'bCU feiu, we shall be. TOll* IDCV'tCU fciu, we shall be. il^f rocr'Det fciu, you will be. ifjv wcf'tct fciu, you will be. ftc roa'Den fciu, they will be. fie Mjev'teu fciu, they will be. Compound Future. Singular. Singular. tc^ wev'be gewe'fcu feiu, I shall id) von'M gewe'feu fciu, I shall have been. have been. M mv]l gewc'feu fciu, &-c. in wci-'bcjl gcrcc'fen {tin, &c. (Conditional Tenses.) Indicative and Subjunctive. Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. Singular. ict) TOiiv'be feiu, I should be. X)n n)uv't>e)lt {nn, &c. Singular. id) roui-'te geiDC'fcu feiu, I should have been. t>u n)fiv'l)e)l gcwefeu feiu, i&c. Singular. fei (DU), be (thou), fei er, let him be. Imperative. Plural. fei'cu, or fciu voix, let us be. feil> (ibr), be (you), or do (you) be. fein or fei'en ftc, let them be. 11 122 AUXILIABY VERBS. [bOOK I. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, ©ciU/ to be. Pris. Ind. Art thou 1 Is he not? We are not. Are they not? They are not. Are you not? You are. Are we not? Imp. Was I ? Thou wast not. It was not. She was. Were we ? Were we not ^ Were you not ? You were not. Were they ? Pcrf. I have been. Have I been? I have not been. Have I not been 1 Hast thou been ? She has been. Has she not been? It has been. He has not been. Have we been ? Have you not been ? They have been. They have not been. Have they not been ? Plup. Had I been ? I had not been. Thou hast been. She had not been. Had he not been ? Had he been ? You had not been. They had not been. Had they been ? Had they not been ? We had not been. Had we not been ? Simple Fat. I shall not be. Wilt thou not be ? He will be. Will she not be ? It will not be. You will be. Will you not be ? Shall we be ? We shall not be. They will not be. Will they not be ? Comp. Put. Shall I not have been ? Wilt thou not have been. He will have been. Will she not have been? It will not have been. We shall have been. Shall we not have been ? You will not have been. Will they not have been ? Simple Cond. Should I be ? Wouldst thou not be ? It would be. Would she not be ? He would not be. We should not be. Would you not be ? You would not be. Would they not be ? They would not be. Comp. Cond. I should not have been. Would it not have been ? Should we not have been ? We should not have been. Would you not have been ? They would not have been. Pres. Subj. I may not be. Thou raayst be. It may not be. He may not be. We may be. You may not be. They may not be. PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 1^ Imp. I might not be. She might be. It might not be. We might not be. You might be. They might not be. Perf. I may not have been. Thou mayst have been. ...ay have been. It may have been. We may not have 1 You may have been. They may not have been. Plup. I might not have been. Thou mightst have been. She might not have been. We might have been. You might have been. They might not have been. Simple Fut. be. It will be. will not be. I shall not be. Thou wilt be. He will not We shall not be. You will not be. They Comp. Fut. I shall not have been. She will have been. We shall not have been. You will not have been. They will not have been. Imper. Be (thou). Let him be. Let him not be. Let us not be. Be, or do (you) be. Do (you) not be. Let them not be. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, '2Bcv'l)Cn, to become. Infinitive. Participle. Pres. WCf'bcn, to become. Pres. trcf'tcnti, becoming. Perf. geirot'Dcu fciii, to have Past, gcirov'fccu, become, become. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Singular. id) TOCV'tie, I become, fcu >Dir|t, thou becomest. Singular. ic^ WCV'bC, I may become. l)U Wcv'lie)l, thou mayst be- come, cv, ftc, eg Wivb, he, she, it Cf, f(C, eS n)Cl•'^C, he, she, it becomes. may become. 124 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. Plural. Plural. tt)iv rocr'^CU, we become. wii* wev'bcn, we may become. i^V iDCV'fcCt/ you become. it}l' WCV'Dct, you may become, jlc n)Cl•'^cn, they become. fte n)Cl*'&CU, they may become. Imperfect. Singular. Singular. \(\) rour'be, or XOAxX), I became. ic() n^Uf'bC, I might become. Ml »t»lU*'t'C|t, or Jtiart|l, thou t)U n)UV'l>C|t, thou mightst be- becamest. come, cc tDUi-'Dc, or tt»ai'6, he be- cv iriiv'DC, he might become. came. Plural. Plural. mil* WUV'bcn, we became. »t»iv wfiv'bcu, we might be- come. i^r rruv'bet, you became. 'x\}X il>uv'Dct, you might bo- come. ftc WUV'tcn, they became. fie n)fiv'l»cU/ they might be- come. Perfect. Singular. Singular. id) bin gCWOV'bcn, I have be- irf) fct 9Ctt)0V'l»cn, I may have come. become. bn U]\ gcwor'Dcn, &c. t>u fcijl gcwov'fecii, &c. Pluperfect. Singular. Singular. id) wav gcnjov'licu, I had be- id) trd'vc gcrooi-'bcu, 1 might come. have become. l>u Mja'vcjl gcwor'bcu, &c. i)u wd'vejl gfiroi''l>cn, &,c. Pirst Future, Singular. Singular. id) xt>n'U wcv'bcn, I shall be- id) wcv'bc wcv'tcn, I shall be- come, come. Du njivjl n)cr'l>cn, &-c. fcu wcc'bell iDcr'ben, &.c. PART II. CH. 6,] AUXILIARY VERBS. 1*25 Second Future. Singular. Singular. ic6 rctx'U gcwov'ben fein, I id) roa'U gcvt»oi-'t>cn fein, I shall have become. shall have become. Du »t)ivjl gcroov'Dcu feiu, &.c. Du it>ci-'De)t gen?oi-'J)Cu fciu, &c. (Conditional Tenses.) Indicative and Subjunctive. Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. Singular. Singular. id) vonv'H Yozv'tcn, I should id) miv'ix oicit>ov't)en fciu, I become. should have become. i)U wfiv'fcell n)cv't)cu, &c, t»u TOfll•'^c|t gwov'Den fcin, &/C. Imperative. Singular. Plural. WCV'fcCU voiv, let us become. WCf'fce (bu), become (thou). tt)CV't>Ct (il)V)/ become (you) or do (you) become, wev'fce CV, let him become. WCl*'t»en fiC, let them become. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, '^JBcv'bCU, to become. Pres. Ind. Does he become ? Does she not become ? Thou dost not become. Do we become ? Do you not be- come ? They do not become. Imp. I did not become. Did I not become 1 Did we be- come 1 She became. She did not become. Did we not become % Did you not become ? They did not become. Perf. I have become. Have I not become 1 Hast thou not become ? She has not become. Have we not become t Have you not become ? Have they become ? 11* 126 AUXILIARY VERBS. [bOOK I. Plup. I had become. Had I become ? Had I not be- come 1 I had not become. Hadst thou become ? He had not become. Had she not become? Had we become? Had you not become ? They had become. They had not be- come. Had they become ? Had they not become ? Simple Fut. Shall I become ? Shall we become ? Wilt thou become? Wilt thou not become? He will become. She will not become. Will you become ? They will not become. Comp. Fut. I shall have become. Will he have become ? Shall we have become? You will not have become. Will they have become ? They will not have become. Will they not have become ? Simple Cond. Should I become ? Wouldst thou become ? It would become. Would he not become ? We should not become. Would you become? They would not become. Comp. Cond. I should have become. Would it have become ? Should we have become ? We should not have become. Would you not have become ? You would have become. Would they have become ? Pres. Subj. I may not become. She may not become. Thou mayst become. He may not become. We may not become. They may become. Imp. I might become. Thou mightst become. She might not become. We might not become. You might become. They might not become. Pcrf. I may have become. He may not have become. You may have become. They may not have become. Plup. Thou mightst have become. She might not have become. It might not have become. You might have be- come. They might not have become. Imper. Become thou. Become (you) not Let them b^ come. Let them not become. PART 11. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 12T A. Supplementary Tenses of Active and Neuter Verbs. 1. Supplementary Tenses of a Verb conjugated with J^^^'l^^tl Injin. ixt'hiW, to love. Pres. id) lic'tic. Imp. id) licb'tC. Imperat. Ue'bc t>lU Pres. Part. [\i'U\VC>. Past Part, gctiett'. Infinitive. Perfect. geliebt' ^a'6cu, to have loved. Indicative. Subjunctive. Perfect. id) ^rt'be gelicbt', I have loved. u\) l)a'bc geliebf, I have loved. t)u (^ajl gelicbt', ifec. fcu ^a'bejlt gelicbt', &c. jP/wpcr/ecZ. ic^ f^at'fe gcUcbt', I had loved. \d) \:}ht'U geficbt', I had loved. l>u ^at'tcjl gcliebt', «fcc. x>\i [jWu^ gcliebt', &c. Simple Future. i^ fotx'U ncben, I shall love, id) wev'lic lie'ben, I shall love. i>u wiv|lt (ic'bcn, &.c. bu n)n''i)c|t Ue'bcu, &c. Compound Future. id) wet'fcc cjclicbt' ^a'bcu, I id) wei-'be getiebt' t^ci'bcn, I shall have loved. shall have loved. Du n)ir|t gdicbt' (ja'ben, &c. t)u n)cv'be|l gclicbt' ^cCUn, &c Simple Conditional, icfe wfit'te lic'beu, I should love. Dtt wiir'fcejl lie'ben, &.c. 128 AUXILIARY VERBS, Compound Conditional. [book f. ic6 wiif'te gelicbt' (;a'(>cn, I should have loved. Du TOuv'fccjl geticbt' ^a'bcn, &,c. 4 Exercises on Active and Neuter Verbs conjtigatcd with J^^^'bcu. I have hoped, Have I been zealous ? I have not seen, Have I not trembled ? Thou hast quaked, Thou hast not praised, Hast thou not finished ? It has thundered, Has he not mentioned ? Has she inquired 1 Has she not been penurious ? We have adorned, Have we not slept ? Have you not suffered ? You have not lived. They have not blossomed, Had I not starved ? Hast thou pined ? Thou hast not found, It had been worth. Had she known. He had not stood, Had he not sat ? It had not frozen, We had not dreamed. They had been called. They had not grown old. Had they demanded 1 ^of fen, to hope, ci'fcvu, to be zealous. fc'()cn, irr. to see. jit'tcrn, to tremble. i>C'[>CU, to quake, to'bcu, to praise. en'^l'n, to finish. t)Ou'ncrn, to thunder. fi-iral)'iicu, to mention. fov'fd)fU, to inquire, far'cjcil, to be penurious. fclnttuc't'CU, to adorn, fcblci'fcn, irr. to sleep. Ici'tcn, irr. to suffer, (c'tcu, to live. bhVt^CU, to blossom, bav'bcu, to starve. fcl)mrtc()'tcu, to pine. ftn'Dcn, irr. to find. tkiu'gen, to be worth. Wifffll, 7nix. to know, jlf'^cn, irr, to stand. f(t'jcn, zVr. to sit. fi'ic'rcn, irr. to freeze, ti'au'mcu, to dream ^ci'fcn, irr. to be called, al'tcvn, to grow old. fo'tCfU, to demand. FART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 129 2. Supplementary Tenses of a Verb conjugated with ©eitt. Infill. SJtci'fcu, to travel. Pres. ic& rei'fe. Imp. id) VCi'|ltC. Imperat. tci'fc l)U. Pres. Part, tei'fcnl'. Past Part, gcvcill'. Infinitive. Perfect. gereilV fcin, to have travelled. Indicative. Subjunctive. Perfect. icb bin gcfcill', I have travel- id) fci gCl'Ci|V, I have travel- led, led. l>u bi|l gcreijl', &c. bu fci'c|l 9Cvci|V, &.c. ic& t»ai* gci*ci|V, I had travel- id) md've gercifV, I had travel- led, led. l)U n)a'vcjl 9cvci|l', &,c. tu wd'vcil gereijV, &c. Simple Future. \d) VDCV'bC fci'fen, I shall travel, id) von'tt fci'fen, I shall travel. l)u wii*)l vci'fcn, &c. tn von't)(\'t rci'fcU/ &i>c. Compound Future. id) xtm'iic gcrei|F fcin, I shall id) tDev'fce gcrcijt' fcin I shall have travelled. have travelled. bu wivfl 9ci-ci|t' fcin, &.c. in mx'i>e\l Qnti\V fcin, &c. 130 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book I. Si7nple Conditional. id) iDur'tc I'ei'fcn, I should travel, bu irui-'t»c|t rci'i'cu, tStc Compound Conditional. id) wuv'bc gCl*ci|V fciU/ 1 should have travelled. l>tt n)uv'Dc|l geveilV fcin, Ai-c. I Exercises on the Neuter Verbs conjugated icith ©cill. I have stayed, Have I not stayed 1 I have not stayed, Hast thou run I Thou hast not climbed, Thou hast travelled, He has stumbled. Has he sailed ? He is not come, Will they not have gone ? Has she followed ? It will have burst, We have proceeded. Have we run I We have not wandered. Have we not sliddcn ? You have swum. Have you swum ? You have not crept, Have you not embarked? They have ridden. Have they ridden 1 They have not ridden. Have they not ridden 1 I had walked, Had I drawn near ? We should not have fled, Would you have fallen ? Thou hadst slipped. 6Ici'6cu, irr. to stay. I'Cll'ncn, mix. to run. Him'mcu, irr. to climb. vei'feU/ to travel. |io('^.''Cni, to stumble. fc'cichi, to sail, fom'mcn, irr. to come. gC'l^CU, irr. to go. fo('0|i*ll, to follow, bcv'ltcu, irr. to burst, fovt'fal^vcn, irr. to proceed, iau'fcu, irr. to run. iDau'DCfil, to wander. ^Ici'tCU, irr. to slide. fd)wim'mcu, irr. to swim. f'l'tc'd)CU, irr. to creep. ciu'fd)ittcn, to embark. VCi'tcn, irr. to ride on horse- back. gC'l}CU, irr. to walk. nd'l}cv vuc'fcu, to draw near- |Iic'l}CU, irr. to flee, faf'lcu, irr. to fall. fd)lltp'fcn, to slip. PART II. CH. •] AUXILIARY VERBS. 1^1 Wouldst thou not have sunk 1 Thou hadst not penetrated, He had departed, Had he not departed ? It would have darted, Had it not sHpped 1 We had not pressed. You had not recovered, They had not slunk. fdlfetl/ irr. to sink. k'ing'CU, irr. to penetrate. fdjci'tCU, irr. to depart. fc()ic'fen, irr. to dart, fcbliip'fcu, to slip. DVilig'CU, irr. to press. gCUC'fcn, irr. to recover. fcl)tei'cl)eu, irr. to slink. 3. List of the Neuter Verbs conjugated with ^(ChttU Regular Verbs. dc^'jcn, to groan, rtl'tevn, to grow old. ang'cfn, to angle. ani'cni, to anchor. (Xt\)'imil, to breathe, ftd) baf'gcii, to fight, be'ten, to pray. htt'tdn, to beg alms. bUu'Jcn, to blink. bllVljClt/ to bloom, bntm'mcn, to grumble. 6uv'gcu, to bail. biVfcu, to suffer for. fcau'cvn, to last, to endure. tOJl'UCVU/ to thunder. i)ltv'|lcu, to be thirsty, or to thirst, ei'fevil/ to be zealous, ei'lcn, to hasten. ei'Uxn, to suppurate, cntfa'gcn, to renounce. CV'bcn, to inherit, fau'Icn, to putrefy. fct)'fcn, to fail, jicc'fcn, to stain. jlu'du'U, to curse. for'f(l)Cn, to inquire, funf'cln, to glimmer. gdt^'ncn, to yawn, gau'fcin, to juggle, gei'jen, to covet. ^rtn'^e(n, to trade. ^(IV'ven, to wait for. ^anlitl^ie'vcn/ to trade, to bus- tle. (^aufi'l'Cll/ to hawk about. [)CV'fc()CU, to govern, ^inf en, to limp. ^oi''c()cn, to listen, l^imci'cni, to hunger, ^up'fcn, to leap. ^U'llCH/ to cough, ir'vcn, to err. ;aurl)'jcn, to shout, fal'bcn, to calve, fdm'pfcil/ to combat. kav'^in, to be penurious. tti'mcn, to shoot out, or bud. liv'rfii, to coo, or creak, f (af fen, to cleave, fla'gen, to complain. ftat'fcl)en, to clap, to applaud fle'ben, to cleave, or stick, fin'gein, to refine, tnac'fen, to crack. tmx'Xtn, to creak. 132 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book I hlic'fcni, to haggle, to act niggardly, fni'cn, to kneel, foMcvu, to be unruly, to roll, frd'tjcii, to crow, fva'mcu, to trade, frant'cn, to be ill. fvcb'l'cii, to catch crabs, tvic'gcu, to wage war. lad)'cu, to laugh. Un'^cn, to land. IttV'mcn, to make a noise, (au'eni, to watch, lau'teii, to sound. When, to live. mau.Ji'cIu, to want, mci'iicn, to mean, muv'mcin, to grumble. OV'gcIii, to play the hand-organ, va'fcu, to be mad. vaf'tcu, to rest. tau'cl)cn, to smoke. VrtU'mcn, to remove, van fd)cu, to rush, raii'j'pcru, to clear the throat. VCcl)'llCU, to reckon. vect)'tcii, to right, to go to law. VC'&cn, to speak. VCi'fcu, to ripen, vei'mcu, to rhyme. ^•u'^cnl, to row. fdu'mcu, to tarry, fau'fcu, to whiz. fcl)a'Dcu, to hurt, jkl) fdid'ntcn, to be ashamed. fd^^u'^Cl•u, to shiver. fd)cv'^cn, to joke. fd)im'mclu, to mould, fc^luc'fen, to swallow. fd)mad)'tcn, to languish, fdnnat'^cn, to smack. j'd)mdt}'lcn, to scold, fdnnau'fcu, to feast, fdniiut'jcii, to soil, to dirty, fd)nd belli, to bill. fdMiai-'d)cn, to snore. fd)nat'tci-n, to gabble, fdnrdr'mcn, to swarm. fd)it>iu't'C(n, to grow giddy. fd)itiit'jcu, to sweat, fc'gcln, to sail, fcuf jcn, to sigh, fov'cien, to care, fpic'lcn, to play, jlcu'cin, to steer a ship. jhiM'i-cii, to study. jKlf'mcu, to storm, itnt'jcn, to butt at. fu'DcIu, to soil, fum'mcii, to hum. fiiu'Digcn, to sin. tap'pcil, to grope. tijXO'mn, to be enthroned, to'bcu, to rage, to'ucn, to sound. tVAd)'tCU, to endeavour, tvau'cni, to mourn. tvimnpbi'ren, to triumph. tv5't)clu, to deal in frippery. n>art)'cu, to wake, or to be awake, irei'ucu, to cry. iridfaiyvcn/ to comply. ja'c^Cn, to despair, to despond, janf'cn, to quarrel. jic'Icn, to aim. jot'tcln, to stagger, juv'ucn, to be angry. I PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 133 Irregular Verbs. fief) befleifeu, to be studious. fcc()'tcn, to fight, gcfvil'leu, to please. 9tct'c{)en, to resemble. ^ei'fen, to scold, ^ting'en, to sound, (ci'i'cn/ to suffer. VCi'ten, to ride. Ving'cn, to wrestle, fau'fcn, to drink hard fcl)Ci'ucn/ to appear. fcl)Ia'fcn, to sleep. fc()uau'6cn, to snort. f(()VCi'Cii, to cry. fclwci'gcn, to be silent. fc()it»tm'mcu, to swim. fcl)irin'ticu, to be reduced, to dwindle away. ("(tmo'VCU/ to swear, ftn'ncn, to think, to meditate. fit jcn, to sit. |U*ei'tcn, to combat. i)cvtu*cc()'cn, to commit a crime. 4. List of the Neuter Verbs conjugated with @eiu. Regular Verbs, au^'avtcn, to degenerate. bcgcg'ncn, to meet, bc^av'veu, to continue. Cl•Htn'^cn, to grow blind, evoivim'mcu, to grow angry. Ci'fval'tCll, to grow cold. CVjtav'VCU, to be chilled. Ci'jtau'UCU, to be astonished, fat'tcni, to flit, to flutter, gelaua'cn, to get, to attain. gCTOO^'ncn, to be accustomed, flct'tcni, to climb, tci'fcu, to travel. VCn'ncU/ mix. to run. fe'gclu, to sail, fpaji'ven, to take a walk, jlot'pevu, to stumble. |ll•all'^CU, to strand. jh-aii'd)clu/ to trip, jliit'jeii, to start, tva'bcu, to trot, tocval'tcn, to grow old. l>crav'mcii, to grow poor, tcrfrum'mcti, to grow crooked. i)evla()'mcu, to grow lame. t)Cvfau'CVU, to grow sour, to sour, fecvihitn'mcii/ to grow dumb. i)Cl-lt»C'fcu, to decay. tJCnttil'fccvn, to grow wild. Dcr^a'ACU/ to despond. ittau't»f(u, to walk. lt»au'l>cvn, to wander. Irregular Verbs. ab'faflcn, to fall down. bcv'llen, to burst. blci'6eu, to remain. 12 frfrie'rcU/ to freeze to death. Cfffl)af'ffn, to resound. evfcl)vec'fett, to be terrified. 134 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book I. fa^'reu, to nde m a vehicle. fuplcn, to fall, flif 'j^cn, to fly. flic hen, to flee. fiic'i'fH, to flow, fvic'rcn, to freeze, gcbci'l^cu, to prosper. 9C'l)cn, to go. gcncfcn, to recover, glci'tcn, to slide, to slip, fliin'mcn, to climb, tomnifu, to come. fric d)(n, to creep. (rtU'fcu, to run. I'Ci'tcn, to ride on horseback, rin'nen, to leak, to run. fc()lci'cl)Cn, to sneak. fd)VCi'rcu, to stride. fcl)J»cI'lcu, to swell. fcbtrim'mcn, to swim. fcl)n)iu'l>cu, to shrink, to dwin- dle. fit'jjcn, to sit. fpvmoi'cu, to jump. jtc't^CU, to stand. jlci'^CU, to mount. jtcr'bcn, to die. ^crblci cbcii, to grow pale. i)CV(6fclycn, to become extin- guished. Verfcbiriu'Dcn, to disappear. tradi'fcn, to grow. VDti'cijin, to yield. rocr'Dcu, to become. Obs. Those verbs which occur in both lists are sometimes conjugated with (ja'bcU/ and sometimes with fciu. (See under the next head.) 5. Of Neuter Verbs conjugated with either J^a'fcctt or ©cill/ according to their signification. 1. Some take (ja'fccu, to denote the completion of an ac- tion or a state, and fciu to denote the condition of a thing ; 2)aS gcu'ev f^at au^'gcbrannt, the fire has burnt out. 2)att Stamiu' i|l aug'.Actn'annt, the chimney is burnt out. 3)ic JR'olyleu ija'bcn aue'c^cfampft, the coals have done smoking. 2>ie gcuc()'ti)^fcit \\\ au6'cvimpft, the damp is evaporated. 5)ic Sr'DC i|l <\cfi"0'l'cn, the earth is frozen. 'QOBiv l)a'bcu .qcfro'vcu, we have been frozen. Cg ijat gcffO'vcu, it has frozen. 2. Verbs expressive of motion take fcill, when the place, or the manner of the motion, is referred to ; but take ^a'bCU, when the simple action is designated, or whenever they are used as reflective or reciprocal verbs ; as, 3cl) bin in l»ie gclan'fcn, we have run. 2)aiS ^al5 t;at gcfau'fen, the cask has leaked. 3)ic 'jbvd'ncn fuit) gcjlof'fcu, the tears have flowed. 2!)ie 5Kcl}'vc l;at gc|iof'fen, the pipe has leaked. ®l- ifl it)m gcfolgt', he has followed him. Sr l)at inci'ncn kt)'vcn gcfolgt', he has followed my precepts. £icr §cin^ i|l in bic @tabt get»rung'cn, the enemy has pene- trated into the city. Sr {)(xt in mid) gebvnng'cn, he has urged me. "^Bir f(nt) fovt'gcfa()rcn, we have left or gone on in a vehicle. "jODii- l}iV6en fovt'gefd^vcn jn ar'bciten, we have continued to labor. 136 AUXILIARY VERBS. [book I. B. Supplementary Tenses of Reflective Verbs. ®\dj Ut'biM, to love one's self. {Seepage 98.) Infinitive. Perfect. fid) gcdebt' ^a'6cn, to have loved one's self. Indicative. Subjunctive. Perfect. ic^ ^a'bc tnirf) gelicbt', I have id) fja'bc micft gclict^t', I have loved myself. loved myself. Ml t}a\l Did) geliebt', &lc. t»u i}id) gelicbt', «fcc. Pluperfect. id) i}ic() lie'bcn, &c. Compound Conditional. t(^ TOuv'be miffe geHcbt' t^a'beU/ I should have loved myself. J)U tt)uv't>e|l Met) gelietit' tja'bni, &,c. C. Supplementary Tenses of Impersonal Verbs. The supplementary tenses of impersonal verbs are formed exactly like those of complete (active or reflective) verbs ; as, SKcg'ncn, to rain. {See pa^e 101.) Indicative., perf. t€ I)at gci'Cg'uct ; pluperf. c6 ^C>,t'ti ge^ reg'nct ; simp. fut. c6 xo'\x\> rcg'ncn ; comp. fut. c6 wivl) ge^ trcg'uct Ija'ben. Subjunctive, perf. C^ ^a'bc gcvcg'UCt ; PLUPERF. c6 ^dt'tc gcrcg'nct ; simp. fut. c^ vt>cv't>c vcg'ucn ; comp. fut. eg xon'H gcvcg'nct ^a'ben. SIMP. coND. eg wuv'fce teg'nen ; comp. cond. eg wuv'De ge* veg'net ()a'ben. 2(v'gcvn/ to be vexed. {See page 102.) Indicative, perf. eg I^at ttiid) gedv'gevt ; pluperf. eg l^af te mic^ gcar'gevt ; simp. fut. eg it>irt mid) dv'gern ; comp. fut. eg tt»irl) mid) gedv'gcvt (}a'beii. Subjunctive, perf. eg ba'be mid) gedv'gei't; pluperf. eg (;dt'te laaid) gedv'gcvt ; simp. fut. eg loev'te mid) dr'gevn ; comp. fut. eg rocv'&e mid) gedv'gevt t)a'ben. simp. cond. eg rofiv'l>e mic^ av'gevn ; comp. cond. eg wuv'De micfe gedr'gevt ^a'beii. 12* 138 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. ©icfe feei'lTe'^cn, to be understood. (^See page 103.) Indicative, perf. c^ fjAt fid) lKV|tan'^cn ; PLUPERF. fg ijat'u fid) iKvllau'tcn ; simp. fut. ccf \v'wl> ftcl) vcvjlcbfu ; comp. FUT. c6 mvi ftct) vcr|Tan't>cu l;a'[vn. Subjunctive. perf. c^ l;a't>C ft(() \)Cr|tau'l)CU ; PLUP. C6 ^dt'te fid) i)cv|lau't>cu ; simp. fut. cj? rtn'tx fid) Vtcv|lc'l)en ; COMP. FUT. c6 irev'l>c f(c() i^crtlan'tcu Ija'fccu. SIMP. coND. eg iruv '^e ftct) toevjU'l^cu ; comp. cond. c6 voxxx'H fid) i)n\Uwt>(n i)e auf fatten; comp. cond. id) xs>\\x't)i aufge(;alten ^A'bcn. 55c^a('tcn, to retain. Infinitive, perf. tc^aCtcil l)a'bcn. Indicative, perf. ic^ ^a'be bel)a('teu; pluperf. ict) {jCit'tt * The reason is obvious ; since all the supplementary tenses are formed by joining the auxiliary verb either to the infinitive mood or to the past participle ; in neither of which does such a separation of the simple verb from the preposition take place. I PART II. CH. 6,] PASSIVE VERBS. 139 be^al'ten ; simp. fut. tc() wcv't>e kf^af'ten ; comp. fut. id) mx'ie bei}n'i>t bc^al'tcn; comp. fut. id) totv'tt bc^al'teu ^a'bcn. SIMP. coND. id) wuv'te be^al'tftt; comp. cond. ic() wfiv'te § 8. PASSIVE VERBS. The passive voice of active verbs is formed by joining the past participle of the verb with the different moods and tenses of the auxiliary ircr '^cu ; with only this difference, that the first syllable, gc, of the past participle geiDOV'tCU/ is dropt in all its combinations with the verb. Thus we say, id) bin gcUebt' nJOV'fccn, I have been loved, (instead of id) bin geficbt 9en5ovl»en.) Conjugation of the Passive Verb, (ScUebt' TOWbni/ to be loved. Infinitive. Participle. Pres. gclicbt' tncv'ben, to be gelicbt', loved loved. Perf. gcliebt' wov'ben fcin, to have been loved. Indicative. Present. Singular. id) von'H geliebt', T am loved. Dn Wivfl gelicbt', thou art loved. n, fic, or t$ nJivb geficbt', he, she, or it is loved. ^ Plural. YOiv TOCt'bCn gelicbf, we are loved. if)U mx'itt gelicbt', you are loved, fte mx'Hn Qtii(bt, they are loved. 140 PASSIVE VERBS. [bOOK I. ■ Imperfect. Singular. ic^ rour'bC or XOMt) gelicbt', I was loved. l»u wur'fccl^ or wait)]! gclicbt', thou wast loved. er ww'be or marl* gcUebt', he was loved. Plural. I wir wuv'fccn gcficbt', we were loved. i^V iruv'bct %d\zht', you were loved, fie n)Ur'l>eil gcliebt', they were loved. Perfect. Singular. ic^ bin getiebt' WOV'tcn, T have been loved. t)U bi|l gcllcbt' roov'Deu, thou hast been loved, ev i|l gclicbt' WOV'ben, he has been loved. Plural. Wiv jtnb geliebt' WOV'&Ctt, we have been loved. i^V fcit) gcliebt' WOV'tCU, you have been loved, fie ftttfc geliebt' WOV'fceU/ they have been loved. ■ Pluperfect. Singular. m id) war geficbt' wov'ben, I had been loved Du mav]} gcfiebt' n)Ot:'&CU/ thou hadst been loved. tt war gclicbt' roov'l>cu, he had been loved. Plural. voxv wa'un gclicbt' TOOv'licn, we had been loved. iifv voa'tct gclicbt' trov'bcn, you had been loved, fte wix'vm gclicbf mor'beu, they had been loved. PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 141 Simple Future. Singular. ic^ n)CV'6C 3Clict>t' Wev'bCU, I shall be loved. X>\x wirll ciciiebt' n)cv'l»cn/ thou wilt be loved, er \X)\Xt gcIUOt' W)Cl-'i»en, he will be loved. Plural xc'xx votx'ttw gclicbt' wcv'bcn, we shall be loved. \[jX n)Cl*'Dct gclicbt' IDCV'^CU/ you will be loved. fte n)cv't>eu gcliebt' n)cv't)cu, they will be loved. t Compound Future. Singular. id) Xon'U 3C(tebt' WOV'bcn fein, I shall have been loved. t)U xo'xx'^ gclicbt' wov'tcu fciil, thou wilt have been loved, ei* voxxt gclicbt' roor'teit fcin, he will have been loved. Plural. voix \X>n'i>(n geUcfct' Wor'tcn fcin, we shall have been loved, i()V irev'tct gcUcbt' wov'bcu fcin, you will have been loved, fie wcv'beu gciicbt' WOV'ten fcin, they will have been loved. Subjunctive. Present. Singular. id) mx'H gcliettf, I may be loved. l»n Wcv'l'Cjt gcUcbt', thou mayst be loved. CI* n)Cr't>C gclicbt', he may be loved. Plural. mx wcv'bcn gclicfct', we may be loved. if)V ircv'ltet gclicbt', you may be loved, fte WCV'bCn gclicbt', they may be loved. 142 PASSIVE VERBS. [book I Imperfect. Singular. tc() Wuv'bC gelic6t', I might be loved. bu wuv'l>C|l gclifbt', thou mightst be loved. it TOiil-'De gclicbt', he might be loved. Plural. XOVC WllV'&en gelicbt', we might be loved. i^X n)Ul''l>Ct gcltett', you might be loved, ftc TOilv'ben gelicbt', they might be loved. Perfect. Singular. id) fei gcliebf WOV'tCtt/ I may have been loved. Ml fei|l gcliebt' WOV'bCU, thou mayst have been loved. Cf fei gctiebt' WOV'ben, he may have been loved. Plural. Xt)\x fci'en geliebt' WOV't)Ctt/ we may have been loved. i(}V fci'ct geliebt' iDOv'bcn, you may have been loved, ftc fei'cu gcliebt' JDOV'bcn, they may have been loved. Pluperfect. Singular. tcfe lt>d'trc geliebt' WOV'ben, I might have been loved. bu tt»d'rc|t getiebt' njou'ben, thou mightst have been loved. n* Xok'Xt geliebt' WOv'bCU, he might have been loved. Plural. »if wi'rcn gelicbf WOV'ben, we might have been loved. tl;v rod'rct gelicbt' IDOV'ticn, you might have been loved. fie JDa'ren gelicbt' n)0l"l>cn, they might have been loved. I PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 14S Simple Future. Singular. •^ tcfe mx'H geltcbt' wci-'ben, I shall be loved. t)u tt)er'l)c)l gclicbt' trcv'Deu, thou wilt be loved, cr VDtt'H gclicbt' n)cr'i>en, he will be loved. Plural. toit WtV'Hn gcliebt' WCf'fccn, we shall be loved, i^v wcf'bct gcficbt' tt»cv'6cn, you will be loved, fte rocr't>cn Qdkbt' Yoa'txn, they will be loved. Compound Future. Singular. icfe mt'tt gefiebt' wov'tcn fein, I shall have been loved. l)tt wev't)C)l gcUcbt' rcov'tcu fciU/ thou wilt have been loved, ei* WZX't)t geliebt' IDOV'fcen fcilt/ he will have been loved. Plural. Wiv wev'bcn ,qelicf»t' WOV'bcn fcin, we shall have been loved. i^V i»ev't)Ct gelicbt' nJOV'bCU fciU/ you will have been loved, fte Wff'beu gclicbt' WOV'fcen fciu, they will have been loved. Simple Conditional. Singular. icfe witr'bc gelicbt' wcv'bett, I should be loved. bu n?fiv'be|^ gcliebt' wci-'ben, thou wouldst be loved. tx Vom'U gcliebt' raev'bCU, he would be loved. Plural. mx wfiv'bcn gcfiebt' wev'ben, we should be loved. i^x wuv'bet gi'Iicbt' trev'bcn, you would be loved, fte ttjuv'ben getiebt' wcv'bcn, they would be loved. 144 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK I. Compound Conditional. Singular. tc6 wftV'tC gclict»t' WOv'ten fcin, I should have been loved. btt n)Ui*'t)C|l oicltcbt' iror'fen fcin, thou wouldst have been loved. ei* WUV'fcC gclicbt' IDOV'DCH fcin, he would have been loved. Plural. mx wfit'fcen geliebt' wor'bcn fcin, we should have been loved. X^X roxxx'Ut ^tinht' X&OX'XXW fcin, you would have been loved, fie JDUV'liCU geliebt' tt»OV't)en fcin, they would have been loved. Imperative. Singular. XOtx'U (t>U) gcftcbt', be (thou) loved. XOtx'U ev gcUcbt', let him be loved. Plural. Xt>tX%m mx gcficbt', let us be loved. tt)CV'i>Ct (i^v) gclicbt', be (ye or you) loved. »t>ei''t)Cn fte gclicbt', let them be loved. Observations. I. The past participle of the verb is pre- served throughout the passive voice, whether that participle be regularly or irregularly formed. There is, accordingly, no difference between regular and irregular verbs in regard to the formation and inflection of their passive voice. Thus the passive of the irregular verb fc'f}Cn, to see, is formed in the same manner as that of the regular verb (ic'bcn, to love, by joining the past participle gcfc'l)Cn, seen, to the auxiliary verb wcv'bcn ; as, gcfCljcn n?cv>cn, to be seen ; id) n)CV't)C gcfc't^cn, I am seen; icf) bill gcfc'^cn WOV'DCU, I have been seen, &c. II. The verb fcin, to be, with the past participle, must not be confounded with the passive voice. In the former case the past participle is used as an adjective, expressing the actual condition of a thing, -while the passive voice signifies a state of PART IT. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 145 being acted upon. Ex. 2)a6 J^auS i)l ,^c6aut', the house is built; Dag J^aufi mx'i> j^cbaut', the house is building; Dag Sf'fcn WAV aufgctvagen, the dinner was served up; Dag Sffcu WUV'De aufgCttagCU, the dinner was serving up (or being served up). I Mu -zeroises on the Passive Verbs {regular, irregular, and mixed.) Indicative. Present. Am I not praised 1 Is it not lost ? Are they not rubbed ? You are called, Was he not beaten ? We were not taught, Were you not preferred ? They were read, lo'ben, to praise. i)CV(ic'vCIl, irr. to lose. VCi'6cn, irr. to rub. ncu'ncn, mix. to call. Imperfect. fc()(a'gcn, irr. to beat, fe^'reu, to teach. i)Oi''jiet;cn, irr. to prefer. Ic'feU/ irr. to read. Perfect. Thou hast been blamed, He has been bitten, You have not been punished, Have they been loaded 1 ta'bc(tt, to blame, beiffcil, irr. to bite. jH'vl'fcil, to punish. la'DeU/ irr. to load. Pluperfect. Had it been measured 1 We had been hindered, Tliey had not been given, You had been misunderstood, mt^'^tn, irr. to measure. ^in'bCl'U, to hinder. gC'beil/ irr. to give. i)?rfcn'ncn, mix. to misunder- stand. Futures. I shall be weakened. Shall we not be seized ? Will they not be washed ? 13 fc()tt)dc()'cn, to weaken. gVCi'fcn, irr. to seize. n>afc()'en, irr. to wash. i6 PASSIVE VERBS. [book 1. You will have been seen, Will they not have been warded ? fe'^en, irr. to see. belot;'nfn, to reward. Subjunctive. Present. He may be used, They may be borne. You may not be sent, bfau'dKU, to use. tva'gCU, irr. to bear. fcu'bCU/ mix. to send. Imperfect. Thou mightst be honored, It might be excused, We might be overtaken. They might be written, ef^'ven, to honor. entfcl)ul'I)i3cn, to excuse. eiu'l}Olcu, to overtake. fct)VCi'teu, irr. to write. i Pei'fect. They may have been found, It may have been brought. You may have been chosen, ftu'iicn, irr. to find, bl'iug'cn, mix. to bring, wd^'kn, to choose. Pluperfect. It might not have been felt, We might have been absolved. Thou mightst have been es- teemed. Cttipfiu'ben, irr. to feel, lo^'fprfc^cn, irr. to absolve, rtcl) 'teU/ to esteem. Futures. We shall be asked. It will not have been denied. Thou wilt be justified, fra'gen, to ask. icug'ncu, to deny. vec()t'fcvti9en, to justify. Conditional Tenses. Should I not be shunned ? He would not be revenged, Would it not be stolen 1 mei'ben, irr. to shun. tdcft'cn, reg. 4* «"•• to revenge. tUi^'tetl/ irr. to steal. PART II. CH. 6,] PASSIVE VERBS. 147 Should we not have been faug'Cil/ irr. to catch. caught 1 You would not have been tev'gcu, iVr. to hide. hidden, They would not have been l^CVbl'eu'UCIl/ mix. to burn. burnt, Let them be judged. Let it be repeated, Be (thou) not driven, Imperative. vic()'tcn, to judge. jr>ict)crl)o'len/ to repeat. tl'ei'kU/ to drive. Promiscuous Exercises. ^a'citu^ cvjd{}(t' Don Xxn aVttxx 3)cut'fri>eu, „f(e cilaii'bcn, bajj eg i)cv* Srt)a'bcnt}cit5 l)imm'(ifc(Ha-'^ QGBe'fcu''' niitt^ airgcmcifcn^ fci^ t>u^ @6('tcr* in-^ '^du'&c6 ciu^ ju^ fcblie'l'cu^, o'tv: fic^ in'' mcu'fdjcuai-tigci-^ ©cjlvift's mv- ju^ jicllcu^. ©ie l}ei'lioicn '^Ddl'Dci- im& J^ai'nc nut) mit 9Irt'mcu t)ou ®6t'tcvn bcjcicl)'-- ncu2 ftci &ag cict;eiin'ni|5\)o(le "vIBc'fen, )t>crd)cg f(c nuv in 2(n'-- Md)t fcbau'ciL" @ie jcicf)'neten ftcl) ms Mtvcl) gvfi'()eit6Uc6c unb ^vcu'e ; Mc gvau'fu roa'rcn bei il^'ucn tib'ijn cicacl)'tct al^ bci t»cu welt gcbil'tctcrcu ®ric'fl)eu ittib SHo'mcrn ; l»ic S'l)cn roui-'fccu ^ei'= (ig 9ct}al'tcu : nut ^u'te ©It'teu gal'tcii bci il}'ncn mct^v ai& an'Dcvwdvt^ ,qu'tc (Sefct'jc. 2tuart)av'fig Uxdyu aU n fa() m« ©o'fou f(c() bemul}'te fcic^ llu'gcvcc()tiv)fcit4 unbs .^abfucbt^ fci'nev'' sX)tit'buvc\ci-8 ixwdf g e f cb V it' be n (^° ® c f c t' j c^^ ju^ Dcrtvci'bcn-. 2)ic'fc fc() ic- noii il;m tcw^ ©piu'ucuc^ciucbcn^ dt^u'ficb^ jui fcius, t»c('cl)c fcag^ ©d)M)a'cl)c3 uu&^ ^hu'iie^ ^a65 ftcb^ in? nynm^ ttug'c^ fejlE'.- t;ic(fcu^ voii^ tt'ii^ ©far'tcns iinD^ ©rCfni^ a'bcv-i jcfiffcii'' wur'Dcn^. 2)avauf foll^ ©o'foiii gcant'inovtet i)a'bcu, tie SOTcn'-- fcl)eu i}\tl'ttn iiyvt ^^iiut)'ni|fe, iticun eg fci'uem^ \)ou'* beiteu-'' ^t}ei'(cu6 nu§1id)2 feii f(c9 ju? bred)'eji8; unfc n vool'k fei'nes (Sefet'jc^ fo4 ju'trdglict)^ fui-o fci'nc' 25ur'i\ev8 mad)'cui, t>a^ eg fur'' ;e'i»eu5 bef'fei-^ fcin^ fot'Iei fie" ju^ tjat'teu^ alg^ ju9 ubei-.' tve'teiiio. '23or(e irag Mi hm\\}, fo tanni? fcu \x>as txi mU\\. 148 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. [book I. erjd^Ien, to relate. alt, ancient. tCUtfcl), German. glauln'u, to believe. k\t5, that. angcmcjfcn, becoming. Srl}abcut)cit, dignity. i?immlifcl), heavenly. ^Cfcn, being. (gott, god. ciurcl)licfen, to inclose. Q33au^, wall. O^Cl•, or. l)ai-|lclleu, to represent. mcufcl)cuavtlg, human. ©cttalt, form. Ijciligcn, to consecrate. QOBall>, wood. J^aiii, grove. mit, by. Sdamc, name. bcjcid)uen, to signify. gC^cimni|3\)0((, mysterious. fcl)aucn, to contemplate. nur, only. 2in^vlcl)t, devotion. augjcicbncU/ to distinguish. Dunl), through. gvciiji'lt'olictn', love of liberty. $VCUf, faithfulness. gl'v^u, woman. bci, among. ufbtcii, to esteem. l?orb, high. kxI^, than. wdt, far. ):^cbil^ct, cultivated. Stie, marriage. I}aitcu, to hold. I)fi(i3, sacred. ©ittc, custom. flcltcn, to have effect. ®cfc§, law. aut)crv»dvt^, elsewhere. Iacl)eii, to laugh. a(6, when. fet)cn; to see. wit, how. ftc() bcmufjCU; to exert one's self. \)Cftrcit>cu, to expel. Unncrccbtigfcit, injustice. J^rtbfucbt, avarice. 9)?itbiU"gCf, fellow-citizen, fcbvcibcn, to write. fcl)cincn, to appear. dt}n[id), similar. ©^Miincngcircbc, cobweb, fetib^^if'"' t<5 arrest. fc()rracb, weak. Heiii, small. ftcb fv^ilgCll, to be caught, abcr, but. jfvrfiifcn, to tear, jlavf, strong, gvo^, great, fcavauf, thereupon, foil (from fol'lcu), is said, antirovtcn, to answer, baltcn, to keep. 35uutuit5, bond. tt?cnn, when. iiu^Iirb/ profitable., 'Xticilf party, brccbcn, to break, trcllcu, to will, macbcii, to make, jutfaglicb, advantageous. 23uvsKV, citizen. C6 fofle (from follctt), it shall, fi'ir, for. ubcvtrctcn, to transgress, wollcn, to will, fonucu, to be able, fo, thus PART II. CH. 6 •] PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 149 It is reported"! ^fi ^\^q2 Sybarites^, that they killed^ alP (the) cocks^, that they might^ dreara^ out^ their^ morning^ dreams^ without^ disturbance^. The philosopher Bias being asked, what animal he thought^ (for^) the- most^ hurtfuP, replied, " Of wild creatures, a tyrant ; and of tame (ones), a flatterer." Praise, like gold and diamonds, owes its value only to its scarcity. The Tears.- Hillel was walking in a moonlight night with his disciple Sadi, in the gardens of the Mount of Olives. Sadi said, " See yonder, that man in the light of the moon, what is he about (begins he) ? " Hillel answered, "It is Zadoc ; he is sitting by the grave of his son weeping (atid weeps)." " Canhiot^ Zadoc^ then^," said"* the^ young^ man,^ " mod- erate^o his''' griefs? The people call him the just and the wise." Hillel replied, " Shall he, on this account, not^ feeH the^ pain2 ] " "But," asked Sadi, "what advantage has the wise man over the fool ? " Then his- teacher-^ answered^, " Behold, the bitter tear of his eye falls to the earth, but his countenance is turned^ to- wardi heaven^." of, l>cn. {Bat.) the Sybarite, tcv ©i;6(Wri'tC, 2. a. to report, crjdtj'lcu. that, t>Afy cock, *^Atj\X, m. 3. b. 6. to kill, toD'tCll. that, l)amit'. morning dream, *93?0f'gcnj trauin, m. 3. b. 6. without, 0I)'UC. disturbance, @t5'l*UnC|,/. 1. t). to dream out, aug'tvdumeii. I may, id) faun, mix. {Subj.) philosopher, spt)ilofoV^'/ m. being asked, translate, when he was^ asked^ ; when, t>rt, to ask, fva'gcn. 13* what, Wcf'd)Cg. animal, "ill^icv, n. 3. b. 6. for, ffiv. {Accus.) hurtful, fcl)dt>'(irl). to think, (}al'tfn. (Subj.) to reply, aiU'WOVtCtt. of, Ull'tcr. (Dat.) wild, YOiii). creature, (Scfc()5^f , n. 3, b. b. tyrant, '$i)rann'/ m. 2. b. tame, jatjm. flatterer, @cl)mcicl)'tcr, m. 3 a. a. praise, ioh, n. 3. b. like, wit. gold, ©otD, n. 3. b. ^ and, unl). 150 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. [book I. diamond, SMamaut'/ ?«• 3. b. D. to owe, vcrfant'cn. value, ^23cvtt}, m. 3. b. l\ only, allciu'. scarcity, @f('tcnf)cit,/. 1. ^. tear, 'il)vd'nc,/. 1. C. to walk, n)an'l)chi. in, ill. {Dat.) moonlight, monl)'t}Clf. night, *SKacl)t,/. 1. i\ with, mit. (Dat.) disciple, ©cl)U'(cr, m. 3. a. a. garden, *(gvll-'tCU/ »*. 3. a. a. mount of Olives, Ol'btVQ, m. 3. b. b. to say, fa'gcu. to see, fe'l^cn, irr. yonder, t>ort. man, *20tann, m. 3. b. C. light, iicl)t, n. 3. b. f. moon, SOionb, m. 3. b. b. to be about, bcgitl'ucn, irr. to answer, ant'wovtcu. to sit, ftt'JCU, irr. by, an. {Dat.) grave, *(Si-ab, n. 3. b. C. son, *@o()n, m. 3. b. 6. to weep, iDci'ncn. (can), to be able, ihw'WtXi, mix. then, t)cnu. to say, fkl'gen. young man, 2»ftng'Uttg, m. 3. b. b. grief, '3:vau'cv, /. 1 . not, uii()t. to moderate, indfffgen. people, *^o(t, 71. 3. b. e. to call, ncn'ucn, mix. just, gcvfcl)t'. wise, iDci'fe. to reply, cvn)ic't»cvn. (shall), to be obliged, fol'ictt, irr. on this account, Ita'vum. pain, ©cbmcvj, m. 3. b, b. to feel, empftn't^cn, irr. but, a'bcr. to ask, fia'c^cn. what, Ji>cl'ci)cr. {Ace.) advantage, *'2}or'jU9, »*• 3. b. 6. over, \)cv. {Dat.) fool, 'il)or, ?«. 2. b. then, brt. teacher, ic()'vei*, »«. 3. a. a. to behold, fc'I^Clt, irr. bitter, bit'tfV. eye, 2tii'gc, n. 3. a. C. to fall, flut'CU, irr. to the, Jliv. (Dof.) earth, ^V'bC,/. 1. C. but, a'bcr. countenance, 2tlit'li^, n. 3. b. b. toward, {JDat.) heaven, bcf J^im'tttel, m. 3. a. a. to turn, ju'irenbcn, ww'z. CHAPTER VII. ADVERBS. Every adjective in its simple form, may be used as an ad- verb |i as, bie'fct SOTaun i|l cl^v'dcf), this man is honest ; and bie'fcv ?0?aun ^an'bclt (iiv'iid), this man acts honestly. PART ir. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 151 The following are the adverbs which most frequently occur in writing and conversation. § I. DIFFERENT KINDS OF ADVERBS. A. Adverbs WO, where? !»O^CV', whence? WO^iu', whither? fj'UK, ahbicf', here. ^U'\}QX, hither. fed, Dovt, l>afcl(>)t', there. Da'^CV, Dort'ljcv, thence. l)at)in, fcovt'l^in, thither. fctef'feit, fcicf feit^, on this side. jeu'feit, jcn'ffitg, on the oppo- site side. if'gcnl)^, iv'^cnlimo, some- where. niv'9ent)6, where. elsewhere. «n'l>ev6rool)a- , place. an'I)Cf^lt>0hin , to another place. aiUcutl^arben, adevnjc'gcn, or allcrov'ten, everywhere, ia'ucu, fcaiitt'iicu, or fcrin'uen, within. iXVL'^Qxx, l)rau'fen, without. in'meiiDifl, internally. au6'*»cut)ig, externally, out- ward. B. Adverbs of Time. tt)auu, when. fd)On, already, taun, alSDantt', then. frfil), early, mm, ]ii^t, now. \y)ht, late, baft, soon. jc, Ic'mafg, ever. foglcid)', unl>c»:jug'Uc(), imme- nic, nie'mvxfg, never. diately. ttO(l), still, yet niv'geuDnjo, no- or fl.>i'&etn)dvtg, from another ef Place, m'nft(irf), tn'uev^alS, in- wardly. du'ffVlicl)/ «U'ffVl;al[v out- wardly. O'ben, Dro'bcu, above. tarauf, or fcraiif, upon it, thereon. at, off, down. auf uiiD uie'^cv, or auf imD a(v up and down. Cin unb A\\§, in and out. I)iu unb l}Ci*, to and from. l;icr iiub M (bovt)/ here and there. fort, forth. V)Oni, before, fronting. I}ill'tfU, behind. l)Ou irau'ucn, whence. Don (}in'nen, from hence. naf;, uat)'c, near. fern, fa-'uc, far. TOCit ab, far off. \\A l)e bci, hard by. an'mefcub, or gc'gcttmdvtig, present, ab'racfcub, absent. 152 ADVERBS. [book 1. nOffe nidjt, not yet. kijfi'tCU, betimes, al'lcjcit, always, jujci'tcn, jmrci'Icn, or bie? roci'lcu, sometimes. fiu|t, ciu'ltfui?, once, neu'iid), lately, newly. Ie§'tfu6, Ifgt'Iid), Ic^t'(iin , lastly, lately. eiiifVmal^, at some times. toor'mal^, or C'ljcmalef/ for- merly. nacb'mal^, or nacl)^ev'/ after- wards. tt)ic't»cv, wic'fccnnn/ again, fcit^er', fcit, since. iftu'tt, to day. <;cf' tcvn, yesterday. \)Oi-\AC|Un-n, c'tjccicttcni/ the day before yesterday, mit'ta^g, at noon. \)CV'inittac\^, before noon. 1iacl)'mittim5, afternoon. im'UlfV, always. |U"t6/ continually, always, ever. fo C'bcn, just now. lang'c, fil)on lang'e, or (augjl-, long ago, a long time since. \)0r(dii9ft', long ago, &,c. un(du3tt'/ or oljuUingjl', not long ago. bi6l}Cl", hitherto. M'tmlS, at that time, &c. C. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. )a, yes. jicin, no. nicl)t/ not. n)af)V'(ic(), truly, verily. fvci'Iid), ;a t^-ci'Iirt), or ja XCCijl, yes to be sure, surely, yes. adcvDiug^', entirely, by all means, gar uid)t, not at all fei'nctjTOcgg, mit uicfe'fen, by no means. hum, hardly, in tn 'Xbat, indeed, uiifel^rbrtv, doubtless. fd)ifd)tcrMug6', absolutely, trirf'lid), really. im'mcvuKtjV, ever. nim'nicfmel)v, never, gtaub'lid), credibly. lnc((cid)t', perhaps. Venmiib'lid), probably. i>uvd)ai!i?' iiid)t, absolutely not. unglaub'lid), incredibly. D. Adverbs of Various Use. mtx\t, fajl, fdncc, almost. fcciua'l}C, nearly. gcuug', gcmtng', enough. i)Oll, \)6l'lig, completely. obcnl)in', superficially, bol'lcuDg, fully. t^ftlg, partly. un'gefd^v, or ot)n'9ef4()r, about. ale, wic, as. n)ic, how. iranittt', why, fca'tum, therefore. an'DCVff/ otherwise. 9lcid)'fal(g, likewise. ^kuWW, sifid) a6 man DaDon' fagt? Have you by chance heard, what is said of it ? — and accompanies verbs in an in- determinate and conditional construction ; as, 2ic() m6ct)'tc ll)of)( Ic'ffU, I should like to read (if I could). Instead of the adverb Xtebi, well, denoting, of a good quality, in a good manner, not ill, gut is frequently used ; by which means the confusion, that might arise between this signification and the expletive, is obviated. For example: '^d) it>ci6' uicl)f, itto man fcic'fc @acl)'cn a^wt fau'fcn f'ann, I know not, where one may buy these things tccll. In this instance, if irot)i were used, it would, by the generality of readers, be understood as an ex- pletive. When used as an expletive, it is pronounced short, and some, in this case, write IDOl instead of iroi^t. C^Cf'ne or gcrn, willingly r comparative, lie'bcf, more willing- ly : superlative, am licb'jUn, most willingly. By this adverb, the idea, to like, to be fond of, is expressed ; as, a'\XHX^ gcv'nc tl^nn, to do a thing willingly, to like to do it ; n'rtiW gevn cf fen, to eat a thing willingly, that is, to like it ; 154 ADVERBS. [book I. tt'voae 9CVU m5'c\cu, to like a thing. St'roae i\cru fc'f^cn, to see a tiling willingly, to see it with approbation ; hence, to like, to approve. ®i- lift <^cmu'fc lic'bcv al^ glcifd), He likes vegetables better than meat ; literally, he eats more willingly.. @ic fc'i^CU ft> am licb'licil, They see it with most pleasure, that is, they like it best. The use of iic'biV, and am Ucb'|h'U, will be readily understood from that of gcvu. J^in and J^CV. See page 108. S)a, combined with prepositions, and followed by the conjunction itA^, serves as a substitute for the English participle, united with a preposition. Examples : Bi/ nading much he became learned; Sa'tiufcl) l)af5 ev \)icl U\^, «)m•'^c cv <^clcl;vt'. From talking too much, mischief often comes ; 'X!><\X' AWS Dafj mail JU toicl fcl)ltia^t, CUt|lcI)t' oft llu'l^eil. Justice consists in giving every one his oion ; a6 fei'ne gibt. Sod), put after an imperative, has the power of entreating and ex- horting, and answers, in general, to the French done, and, frequently, to the English pray. Examples : ©a'c\cu ©tc mil* Xft^d^, Pray tell me @ci;i @ic bod) fo gilt, Pray, be so good. 'JBat? ^A^Si*^ fV* l>od) ? Pray, what did he say 1 ^av t>ai? Dod) cin idim. What a noise that was ! Occasionally it may be ren- dered by somehojo; as, 3d) faufc mid) &od) ball" n?ic't>cr, I some- how soon found my way again. — In common conversation, it is sometimes used for the affirmative ja, when a negative pre- cedes. besides its affirmative signification, yes, nas an expletive use, in which it may be often translated by, indeed, tndy, certainly, see, I see, I wonder, forsooth. Examples : @ic foill'mcu )A f^'*dt. You certainly are come late, or, I wonder you come so late. PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. ' 156 @te finb jci ied)t gvo^ gcwov'ticn, You, indeed, are grown very tall. Si* jiellt fid) ;a fci^v fon't)Cvbav an, He, forsooth ! behaves in a very singular manner. — ^d vooiji, certainly, yes, certainly. 3ia/ combined with a negative, be it with the particle nicl)t, or ni(, or the adjective f:tu\, may be rendered by the same exple- tive terms, pray, certainly, see, &lc. ; but frequently it strength- ens the expression ; as, ja nict)t, on no account ; )\\ ntc, never, spoken emphatically. 23?it'tfU, before the prepositions ill and Ull'tCV, signifies in the midst of; as, mit'tcu \\\ fci'ncv SKc'De, in the midst of his discourse ; mit'* U\\ un'tCV i>en geiu't>eil, in the midst of the enemies. Stod), signifies an addition, where the English use more. Sflorf) t\\\$, one thing more ; nod) cin'mal, once more; nod) im'incr, still, by continuance, constantly. Sv hitxht nod) im'mCV in iOll'J>On, He still continues in London. A Comparison of things equal, is, in English, made by the repetition of as : for example, * as brave as Leonidas.' In German, the first particle is rendered by fc, and the second by al^, or itie : fo tflp'f^*-' ^^^ ico'niba^. The word than, after the comparative more, is expressed by a(6. Sometimes the English put hut after a comparative degree, instead of than : for example, " There was nothing farther to be done, but to fight." The German alS, must here be retained. *2BtC is occasionally substituted for al^, and then the fo may be omitted ; as, tiXTf)'' fn TOie ieo'nit)(i6. The Negative nid)t is often used by the Germans, where the English would deem it superfluous ; as, €6 \\\ U'bcv ci'lKn ?0?0'nat, feitl)Cm' id) @ie nid)t gcfe't^en tjd'be, It is above a month, since 1 have (not) seen you. In interrogative exclamations, the negative gives emphasis. ^ie 'OH'U C0?(fn'fd)cn fUiD nid)t in Me'fcm ^vie'ge um'sefom* 156 ADVERBS. [book I. men, How many men have (not) perished in this war ! "^Dic jlolj fcl)icil CU uici)t, How proud did he (not) appear ! (The French also make use of the negative. Qud bruit ccs hom- ines n'auraient-ils pas fait, s'ils m'avaitnt attrape d uii tcl ban- quet ! ) Not a, not any, are, in German, commonly expressed by fciu, none ; as, not a single line, fci'uc cin'jigc ^n'U. Two negatives, in the same sentence, are in general im- proper; although they sometimes occur not only in the lan- guage of common life, but also in the best writers. Sometimes, indeed, there may appear to be energy in the repetition of the negative; but, on the whole, it should be rather considered as a species of negligence in composition. About, nearly. This idea, accompanying numbers, is differently expressed. 1. By certain adverbs, viz. tctua'^C, Ct'ira, fajl, un'gefdl)!*, VS>o{}\, In^. S^ f(nt) WO^I livci 3iat}'ve, It is about three years, un'gcfdijv ^el;n ^funt, about ten pounds ; jtrci tn6 Drci '^od)'- en, from two to three weeks. 2. By the use of the preposi- tion, an, W\, gc'.qen. 2(n tic jwan'^ig, nearly twenty ; bei (or gc'gcn) t^icv'^ig, nearly forty. <§ 2. OF THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS. Adverbs are either original words, as, ja, yes ; nein, no ; TOO, where ; TOJf, how ; or adjectives used as adverbs ; or they are formed from nouns or adjectives, or by composition. A. Adverbs derived from Nouns or Adjectives. A noun or adjective is formed into an adverb by adding either the letter g (the ancient characteristic of the genitive case for nouns of all declensions) or the syllable lid) to the noun or adjective. The additional € always makes the word an adverb, without making it an adjective ; while most of the words formed by adding fid) are properly adjectives, which may be used also as adverbs. PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 157 1. The following substantives, denoting parts of the natural day, are changed into adverbs by an additional 6. Substantives. Adverbs. bet* ^ag, the day ; trtgg, or t>Cg "iag^, in the day- time. Die 9lac()t, the night; nac()tef, or tee S(Tacl)tg, in the night. \>n SOlOV'gen, the morning ; mov'oif Ut^, or t»C6 9)?ov'9eng, in the morning. l)Cl* 2t'f>cnt>/ the evening ; ft'[H'n^g, or beg 2t'6ent)^/ in the evening. t>tx ^ov'mittag, the forenoon ; i)Dv'mittaoi^, or beg ^ov'mit= tA^^i in the forenoon. bet* 9tac{)'mittac|, the after- ju\d)'mitta3g, or t»e6 9tafl)'nut' noon ; t'^^'^i in the afternoon. t»CV SOTit'tag/ the noon ; mit'tav^g, or t)eg SQlit'tagg, at noon. So, also, some adjectives become adverbs, by means of an additional g ; as, bercttg', already, from bcvcit'/ ready ; |lct6, con.-^tantly; from |1ct, constant ; bcfou'ticv^, particularly, from bcfon'bcr, particular ; au'&CVg, otherwise, from ail'tcr, other ; VCn)rt?, to the right hand, from vcdit, right: (iiiN, to the left, from liuf, left, &c. Numerals become adverbs by the addi- tion of t\\€ or tcilg ; as, cv'jlcu^, in the first place, or first; Jirci'tCUff, secondly ; bvit'tCU^, thirdly, &c. And the following words ; bcf'tcn^, in the best manner ; mei'|tciu>, mostly ; C'l)e|t; i\X^, by the first opportunity ; ^6(l)')lcug/ at the most ; u'bvi- gcu^/ as for the rest. 2. There are some adverbs formed by the addition of [\<^, which cannot be used as adjectives ; as, frci'Urf), indeed, from |TCi, free ; iDatjV'Iid), truly, from VDaljV/ true ; gut'lid), goodly, irom gut, good. B. Compound Adverbs. Among compound adverbs, those which are composed of a preposition and the adverbs l)icv, l)ie, here, ba, there, WO, where, I) in, thither, l)ev, hither, deserve a particular notice. In these cases, if the preposition begin with a vowel or n, an V is often added to the adverbs t)a and TOO. 14 158 ADVERBS [book I. 1. With M, ^av, instead of tcv, bic'frv, ^ft•fc( be. I>a6ci', by it, with it, thereby. fcavau', on it or that, thereon. tavauf , upon it or that, there- upon. l)avau«>', from thence, it, that. fcfticiu', thereinto, into it or tliat. bavin', therein, in it, vvitliin. baviiad)', after it, thereafter. fca^C'gcn, against it or that. bftinit', with that or it, by it, therewith. bftnCbCtt, near that or it, next to it. l>avum', for it or tiiat, there- fore. l>airi '^cv, against that or it. baju', for that or it, thereto. ba\)OV', before that or it. bavu'bcv, on that account, at it. l»anm'tcv, under it or that. tufxxv', for that. taVDll', of that or it, thereof, therefrom. l>rtjwi|'cl)'cu, between, amidst that. 2. With ijitv, or ijit, are compounded the same prepositions as above. ^ifVrtll', on this or it, 6lc. I)ievauf, upon this or it, &c. 3. With t»o, tt)OV, instead of «>cl'cl)cv, n>a^. WOVCin', on which, whereon. WOvaiif, upon which, where- upon. KDOrin', in which, wherein. WJOmit', with which, where- with. aoMlI'd)', by or through which. »avutn', for which, why. WOgt'gCU, against which. Itt0t)0v', before which. VDOjli', to which, whereto. it»Duad)', according to which. irouc'bcn, next to which. WOVU'bfV, upon which, where- upon. ifoffir', for which, wherefore. JDOvun'tev, under which, among which, &.C. 4. With f;er and ^in, as adverbs. ijcvab'i l)inab', ijttnn'Ut, down, ^craug', out, &,c. ^cvauf, Ijiiiattf'/ up. PART II. CH. 8.] PREPOSITIONS. 159 ^ 3. THE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. Adverbs are invariable, except that some admit the degrees of comparison, as ; Positive. Comparative. Superlative. ^iit, or n)o^I, bef'fev, better ; am (jum) bef teii/* best. well ; u'bcl, ill ; fcl)Itm'mcv,worse: fct)limm'iTcu, worst. VicI, much ; mcl}V, more ; mci'|lcu, most. n)c nig, little, we'nigcV/ less; ttJe'nigjteu, least. few : na'l)?/ near ; tm'i^tx, nearer ; Ildc(/|Ieu, nearest. ^Oc(), high ; l)6'l)CV, higher ; ^ccb'jlcu, highest. e'i)(, before; e'tjcv, sooner; C'ljC|lcu, soonest. gem, readily, tic'bci*, more rea- (icb'tlcil, most rea- or willingly ; dily, or rath- dily, or most wil- er ; lingly- Observation. The syllable till changes adverbs from affirma- tive to negative, in the same manner as in, im, or un, in English ; as, gfaub'ftfl)^ credibly ; tmglaublicl)/ incredibly ; rCfl)t'Iic(), justly; im'vect)t(i(l), unjustly. CHAPTER VIII. PREPOSITIONS. Some prepositions are always separated ; as, nm-n)i('(cn, for the sake of; as, um ^C6' §vie't)CUg wil'lcn, for the sake of peace. t)on=irc'9cn, in the name of; as, Von ®cvid)tg' tre'cieu, in the name of the court. Some are separated or not according to the construction ; as, um:l)Cl'', round about ; as, ^(i) cjiiig itm M^ @d)(of5 l)CV, I walk- ed about the castle ; and 3c() giug imijCt', I walked about, * Or aufg (auf t»a6) 25ef' te. 160 CONJUNCTIONS. [bOOK I. tjiwttv-ijCt' , biutcv-fvfin', behind , as, id) c\in^ ijiw'ttv ttm ^3tan'ue Ijci ur ^^•cin, I walked after the man, I followed the man ; and 3i(l> giuoi 1} inter l^cr', or ijinttvtvdn, I walked be- hind. ABBREVIATION OF PREPOSITIONS. In the familiar or colloquial style, the definite article and the preposition are generally contracted into one word ; as, aiU/ for an t>em. Examples. am, for an tern, rt5, am gcn'ltcv, at the window. an^, an fcag, ang i\d)t, into the light. aiif^, auf bag, aufg J^ang, upon the house. beitn, bri fcm, bcim ^atcv, by the father. MivctjS, t)uvct) bag, blircljg gcn'cr, through the fire. fftv^/ fuv bag, fTlfg Qpclb, for money. im, in bcm. im J^im'mcl, in heaven. itt^, in M^, ing xJBaf'fcr, in the water. toom/ ten bcm, i)Om irbcf, from evil. DCV6, \)0V M^, t)OVg gcn'lUf, before the win- dow. i)Ovm "Xi)n', before the door. 4)ovm, l)ov bcm. iVbcvm, u'bcr bcm. n'bcrm gcu'CV, upon the fire. u'bci-ef, n'bcv M^, iVbcfg 5^ccr, beyond the sea. im'tcrm, un'tcv bcm. lin'tcrm ^op'fc, under the head. jum, ju bcm. jwm ^^act)'C, to the rivulet. JUV/ jn bcf. JUV Sl}'rc, for the honor. Some of these abbreviations occur, not only in the familiar, but in every kind of style ; as, am, im, i)Cm, jnm, jnv. CHAPTER IX. CONJUNCTIONS. The conjunctions a'bcv, and fon'bcvn, which are both Eng- lished but, have a distinct meaning and use in German. PART II. CH. 10, 11.] INTERJECTIONS. 161 ©OU'&Cl'U is used only after a negative, and always expresses a contradiction; as, Sv i|t md)t vcicl), fou'tCVU avm, He is not rich, but poor; S6 fuicvt ilicl)t, fou'J)Cru C^ tbrtUt, It does not freeze, but it thaws. — li'bCi' is used to connect two sen- tences, of which the subsequent contains a limitation or mod- ification of the antecedent; as, <£v i|^ arm, a'bcr jnffic'Dca, He is poor, but contented; Sv )'fxid)t fccutfd)/ a'bcv uicl)t gcldu'ttg, He speaks German, but not fluently. CHAPTER X. INTERJECTIONS. The following is a list of some of the interjections used in German. ad) ! ah ! a^ ! ah ! icillf orn'mcu ! welcome ! (ci't»Cl' ! alas ! ftc'ljc ! lo ! behold ! of} ! ! oh ! f(c'()e t»a ! behold here ! )t>e^ ! rtc'iji I woe ! ffui \ fie ! ci ! l)ui ! heigh ! lic'bcr ! pray ! WOl)(au' ! well then ! t>cl?iVre (Sott ! God forbid ! I}i(f (Sou ! God help ! ijol'Ux ! l;e ! holla! ^ilf J^im'mcl ! Heaven help ! |t ! |UU ! hush ! hist ! iiait ! halt ! or stop ! CHAPTER XI. ADDITIONAL REMARKS, ON THE MODE OF FORMING NEW WORDS. General Remarks. The number of German words has been and may still be increased in two ways : I. The language admits of being enriched out of its own substance. a. One part of speech may be used for another. Thus the infinitive of the verb (c'bcu, to live, is used as a substan- tive, l>a6 U'htn, the life ; and the neuter gender of the adjee- 14* 162 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [noOK I. tive crfja'tcn, sublime, may be used as a noun, tag ®rl)a'bcnf, the sublime. b. A word may be derived from another ; as, giVtlg, kind, from o^nt, good. c. Several words may be compounded into one ; as, ©iCbcvbcvgwcvf, silver mine, composed of ©il'bh'/ silver, ^Cl'9, mountain, and -IBcvt', wirk. II. A number oi foreign words have been introduced into the German language, and have become more or less natural- ized ; as, 9ZatUV', nature; @i;m|?atl)ic' (30^it'9Cful}(), sym- pathy. § 1. OF THE MOST IMPORTANT MODES OF ENRICHING THE LAN- GUAGE FROM WITHIN ITSELF. A. Of the Infinitive Mood and Adjectives, used as Nouns. Among the various modes in which a word may be changed from one part of speech to another, there is none of so much practical importance as the use of infinitives and adjectives as nouns. 1. The Germans use the infinitive of every verb as a noun, in the same manner as the English do the present participle ; as, tiatt gutj'Icn, the feeling; M^ ^6'rCU, the hearing; I»a^ gov'i'cbcn, the searching, &c. 2. An adjective may be used as a noun in each of its three genders, and ought then to have a capital letter for its initial. a. When the adjective in its mascu/inc or feminine gender is used as a noun, it denotes most generally a man or a woman of such description as the aa^ ©taffc, that which is strong ; ^ag Siatuv'lichc, that which is natural ; t)a6 ^'uil|t'Ucl)C, that which is artificial.* Sometimes the simple form of the adjective is used instead of the neuter ; as, Da^ ®clb lUlt) i>a^ §Kctl), the yellow and the red ; or without the article, (Sclb un& Dtott) ftlll) JTOCi ®l-im&'= fiU'tcn, Yellow and red are two primary colors. In a ^evf instances the indefinite article is used before the simple form or the neuter of the adjective ; as, cijl SKot^, a red (color) ; fijl £D?el}'VCVfg, something further. B. Of the Derivation of Words from Others. Among the various modes in which derivative words may be formed, we notice two, as particularly important. 1. In th|^ formation of nouns, by adding to adjectives, nume- rals, nouns, or radical syllables of verbs, the syllables, ci (Cl))/ ijtit, hit, mig, tt}um, fcbaft, uif5 ; as, gifcbcvci', fishery, (§ifd)'fr, fisherman) ; '2?olltom'mcnt)cit, perfection, (iiolIfotii'= men, perfect) ; Siil'tjcit, unity, (cin, one) ; 23ic'I»cvfcit, righ- teousness, (bic't>cr,' righteous) ; 9Tci'c;unOi, inclination, (fldj neiiACn, to incline); S^it'tCVtl^um, chivalry, (SKit'tCV, knight) ; 'ilBiffcnffbaft, science, (rt>if'fcu, to know) ; iant»'ffftaft, land- scape, (ian&, land); ^cf0V9'ni|3, apprehension, (bcfov'c^eu, to apprehend). 2. The formation of adjectives^ by the addition of the syl- lables bar, fatn, en, cni, ig, ictjt, ifcl), (id), ^aft ; as, eijv'bw, * The great advantage that arises from this mode of using every adjective as a noun, to designate certain classes of things, or certain qualities, is evident, particularly in philosophy. 164 PORMAXrON OF NEW WORDS. [bOOK I. decent, (^fj'rc, honor) ; av'bcitfam, industrious, (2(v'(>cif, labor) ; gol'Dcu, golden, (Q3d(D, gold) ; Itcl'llCl'll, of stone, (@fciu, stone) ; fcu'viA/ liery, (gcu'cv, fire) ; tl)6'lid)t, ibolish, (H)Or, fool) ; Mcb'tCfifd), poetical, (£)iclytcr, poet) ; facb'|lfcl), Saxon, (fcCV ©vxd)'f?, the Saxon); hil'Diffl), childish, (^inl>, child); hwi'Ud), childlike ; miUlD'licl), oral, (9[)iimt), ino«ith) ; Ijevj'-- l^ftft, hearty, (-^Crj, heart). C. Of the Composition of Words. A comjwund word is produced by uniting two or more terms into one. Such expressions, therefore, as newspaper, seaport, vainglory, belong to this class. The rules for composition, which are tacitly acknowledg- ed in German, and ought to be uniformly observed, are these two : Rule I. — The several terms which enter into the composi- tion should suggest so many distinct ideas ; and these ought to be so perspicuouc, that, when combined, they shall render the word intelligible at the first glance. Rule II. — The prior term of the compound should define and limit the other. Hence the first component may be called the particular term; and the second, the general. For ex- ample : 93?0Ut)'Ud)t, moonlight ; the general term iicl)t, light, being defined by the more particular term, 93?onl), moon : him'mcriJoH, sorrowful ; the general term \?oU, full, being de- fined by the particular term, kum'mcr, sorrow. ^ To these two rules of composition, are to be added the fol- lowing observations. 1. In compound substantives, the second component, or general term, furnishes the gender ; as, bag 9iatl/l)aU!j, the council-house, from Drr ?Hatl), the council, and t>as -0^111=;, the house ; tcr '2(l"(.>cit6lot)n, wages for work, from Me 2Iv beit, labor, and tur iobil, the reward ; 93tfn'fd)eulic()C, love of man, from Dcr SCHcilfd), man. and tic ixi'hi, love. 2. The compound should be neither too long, nor harsh to the ear. 3. Though one of the tetrn.s be a compound word, yet, when it enters into a new composition, it is supposed to convey only a single idea. For example, Da6 ©il'bcrbei-cttDcrf, the silver mine, consisting of ©ilbef, silver, and 25cr9'n)Cff/ a PART II, CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 165 mine, has for its second term, a compound word, *;Sci\A'weff. This may be resolved into ^tv^, mountain, and ^JBcrf, work i yet, the idea which it suggests as a component of @irbcvt>ci"3it)Cl'f/ is only one. Consequently, words may be twice or oftener compounded, without being disqualified for serving in a new composition according to the second rule; care being taken not to make the compound too long. Bui whenever such words are admitted, a hyphen {:) is resorted to, in order to break their extended appearance : as, Q?cucvar-'gc(l); JCUg'mcijtcr, Master General of the Ordnance; Sfxcicl)^; (S'fUcral'-gff^tnav'fcljvUT, Field-iharshal General of the Empire. 4. A hyphen is, moreover, employed, when either one or both of the components are foreign words ; as, DaiJ 9ixfif()g'; Collegium, the council of the Empire ; ba^ Criminal' '^®iX\<^t, the criminal court of justice ; Dev Justiz' -'^At^ , a council, or counsellor of justice ; Da^ Intdligenz'-'lBUxtt, a paper for ad- vertisements; i>a6 Intdligenz'iComptoir, the advertising of- fice; Dai? Justiz'-Collegium, the court of justice. The foreign words are written either in their own type, as is done in these exaniples, or in the German character; as, 3iiitcllij^cnj'=*35(att. But if the words are not too long, it is rather more usual to write them without the hyphen, as one word ; as, 3;uteUioiciij'blatt. 5, By the process of composition are produced, in the fol- lowing manner, (1) Substantives. a. Both terms being Substantives. Examples : 2)ie 2('f»cnl>; jhtntc, the evening-hour • — from tcr 2('^cn^, the evening, and tit tnn'i>(, the hour; ttl\ 'ZIp'fclbaiim, the apple-tree — t»CV 2ip'fcl, and ^el• '^aum; t)cv'©iMni'tac<, Sunday — Mc @ou'ne, t>Cf "Jag; t>cv (£>LH'tcsticu)l, divine service — (Sett, God, in 3)ifn|l, the service; ^CV J^cl'^flimutt), heroic courage — tn J5cl^, the hero, t>cv 9J?lltt}, courage ; t)ie J^cv'jcueciute, good- ness of heart — bag -OfVJ, tk (Sll'te. b. The first termbeing an Adjeceive. 3)ic ®V06'nnitl}, mag- nanimity — groff, great, t>cv Sffiwt^, spirit; tie ©cbircf'nutt^, heaviness of spirit, melancholy — fc()ir>CV, heavy, ter ?01utt),* spirit; tic Si'c\c»(icb?, self-love — crgcu, own, and tic ii^'bc. * It will be noticed, that in these two last examples, there is a deviation from the first observation (under Rule II.) rela- tive to the gender of compound substantives. 166 FORMATION OP NEW WORDS. [bOOK I. c. A Ntimtral the first term. ITTf 3)vci'fll£i, the tripod — t)Vei, three, ^^l• gu^, the foot; ta6 ^icu'cct, the square — toici* four, t)ic Sc'fc,* the corner; tia^ '2(cl)t'ccf,* the octagon — |l the first term. X>a£« ©c(b|t l^CVtrauCll, self-confidence — ^ac; SBcrtvau'cn ; tie ©c(l>|rpvufmic\, self- examination — bic spvu'fung ; tcv @e(b|Vbetvu9, self-delusion — t>cv ^^ctvug'. e. ^ Verb the first term. 2)CV §Cc()t'bol)en, the fencing- school — fcct)'tCU, to fence, iXV ^o'ttlX, the floor; Hi SHflt'bal)n, the riding-school — rci'tf Jl, to ride, tic ^Sat^ll, the course, the ground ; Da^ ^B3avt'c^(■l^/ pay for waiting, for attendance — irar'tcii, to wait, tatt CS'ciD, money. f. A Particle the first term, such as ab/ au, cill, &c. 3)ic ZCb'VCifC/ the departure; Die 2(u'l:uuft, the arrival; i)Cl* Sin'; ganoi, the entrance. (2) Adjectives. a. A Substantive being the first term. 'Ju'cifuDveid), rich in virtue — bic ^u'3cul», virtue, vcicb, rich; h'aft'\)0ll, full of strength or power — t>ic ^vaft, foil ; ci^'f'alt, cold as ice — tag Sig, talt ; golb'gdb, yellow as gold — bag ©olb, ,qclb ; ^C(l)'ffl)>t>Arj, black as pitch — bafi spcrf), fcbwavj; got'tc^furcb; tig, pious, fearing God — (Sott, God, and fiivcb'tig (an adjec- tive, not usual except in composition) ; Ijulfg'bebuvftig, destitute, wanting help — bic -^Ixi'^i, bcblivftig. b. An Adjective the first term. icicl)t'ffl'tig, thoughtless, flighty ; ^cU'blau, light blue ; frci'TOilUg, voluntary ; alt't'lucj/ wise as an old man. c. A Ntimcral the first term. 2)vci'Ccfi,C|, three-cornered, triangular ; toicv'ccfig, quadrangular, square ; fcc()6'fTlftai, six- footed ; acbt'fcitig, having eight sides. d. A Particle the first term. 'Ztb'f^dngig, dependent ; an'- jtanbig, becoming ; lVbcrmutl}ig, overbearing, insolent ; Jli'"= flinf tig, future ; im'gldubig, unbelieving ; uu'gcvccl)t, unjust. e. A Verb the first term. 3)cnf'»ruvbig, memorable — bfuffll, to think of, and wfif'big, worthy; l^ab'fUffctig/ avaricious — See note on preceding page. PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OP NEW WORDS. 1(>7 Ija'bcn, to have, and ^ic @uc()t, eagei desire ; (ic'ben^rouvbtg, lovely, amiable — lic'bcn, to love, iriir'Mg, worthy; [obtlX^- vocrt^, praiseworthy — lo'ku to praise, VOtXti), deserving. (3) Verbs. a. A Substantive being the first term. 35vaUl>'|'cbci§Cll, to raise contributions, by the menace of fire — DCT 25vanD, fire, fcbat'jcu, to raise contributions; lutl'iranbchi, to walk for pleasure, to take a walk — fcic iuft, pleasure, n)au'^clu, to walk; WCtt'cifcrn, to emuhte — Mc QGBit'tC, the wager, com- petition, cifcni, to be eager or zealous ; irct'tcvlcucbtcu, to lighten without thunder — ^aei better, the weather, the tem- pest, (eud)'tcn, to shine; IjauD'^abcu, to handle — t'n J^aul*, the hand, ^a'bcn, to have. b. An Adjective the first term. S8o^t^riuc^'fn, to accomplish — \)0U, fiali, bvlng'cn, to bring ; \)ofljie'l}Cn, to execute — jic'ljCtt, to draw. c. A Particle the first term. This species of composition has been treated of at large, from page 107 to page 114, (4) Participles. A Substantive being the first term, (a.) The present partici- ple : ebr'licbcuD, loving honor, generous — t'ic S(}'re, honor, iie'bcut), loving; gcfc^'c^cbcnl), legislative — &ag (Scfcp'/ the law, gC'^CU^, giving ; n>arh'l}abcut); having the guard, being on duty, as an officer — t>ic ^IDac{)'c, the guard, balu'iit, having. (b.)The past participle: bdl'mcubfh'dujt, crowned with flowers — t)i( 35(u'mc, the flower, bcfraajt', crowned ; fcbucc'bct>ccft, covered with snow — Dcv @cl)UCC, the snow, bct»ccft', covered ; fee'gcbo= rcn, born of the sea — tie ©ce, the sea, gcbo'rcn/ born. (5) Particles. Compounded loith Particles. ^OX'VOhxt^, forward, JUfUcf', back; tjiuein', into; tjcraug', out of ; mit^ill'/ therefore ; l)a^Cf', thence ; muime^V, now. 6. The components often remain unaltered ; as, 2(p'ff (bauttt, apple-tree ; Ubr'mad^a*, watchmaker ; tu'gfllbrcicb, rich in virtue : but in many instances, the first term undergoes some change, by letters being either added or omitted. 1G8 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [bOOK I. (I) Letters added. (& : as, l»fi- (Sot'tCg^icn|lt, divine service — from (Sctt -^ ®fi')tci?h-aft, power of mind — l>cv ®ci|t ;Me ^0't»C€inott}, agony of death — 1>CV 'ioD. 6 : as, ^ae: ^im'mct^nrf)t, the light of heaven — bci* -^im'-- tttcl ; ^^U^ S fcl^OtjV/ an ass's ear, the corner of a leaf of a book turned down — t>a S'fcl; faet 2{v't'«cit6l}au6, the work- house — Mc 2(r'bcit; in ®clniit6'tag, the birth-day — Die ®c(nivt'; t>ag JP)ulf6'mittcI, means of assistance, resource — l)ic J^iU'fc. n^, cm?: as, Die gvic'Dcn^fcicv, the celebration of peace — ttx gvic'fcc ; fctc J^Cf'jCU^gutC, goodness of heart — Dat; J^CVJ. The above additional letters mark the genitive case, in the first component. C : as, tag J^cr'jeteit, affliction of heart — M€ J^tl'i ; tn spfcr'fccfits, the horse's foot — MS spfcft) ; icx (Sdu'fcbvaten, the roasted goose — bic ®an6, the goose. In some of these examples, the inserted c may be considered as the characteristic letter of the plural number. 11, or CU : as, bag grcu'benfr)l, the festival of joy, the jubi- lee — Die gvcu'tte ; i>a^ Srach'cnblut, dragon's blood — in S)i'ad)'c ; bcf ^cl'Dcnmutl}, heroic courage — tier ^di, the hero; fiag ^iv'tflllcbcil, pastoral life — in -^irt, the herdsman; in '^au'a*U|toIj, vulgar pride — in 25au'cr, the rustic, the clown. The additional ii, or CU, may, in some instances, indicate the genitive case, in others the plural number. n: as, bcv Si'cvfucf)cn, the omelet — bag Si, the egg, and in ^"u'cbcn, the cake; bic ^U'bCVfclH'lft, ideographic writing — id^ 35ilb, the image, figure, and bic ©cln'tft, the writing; bic Q[Bci'bcili|t, craft of women — ba6 QBcib, the woman, and bic ii)l, cunning. The letters n correspond, in these words, with the termina- tion of the plural. PART 11. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 169 i : this occurs only in two very ancient compounds ; tit 9^ac()'tiga(I, the nightingale, and Ccv SSvau'tigam, the bride- groom. (2) Letters omitted. C, in substantives: as, t>tc Sufc'fittc, the final syllable — Oa6 Sn'bC, the end ; ^ie Svt'folgc, the succession — tei* ©ouu'tag, Sunday — tic ©omie ; fccv ^ivfcb'baum, the cherry-tree — t>ic ^iv'|'c()C. eit, in infinitives : as, &ci* ^cd^t'ttObCU, the fencing-school — fect)'tCll, to fence ; fcic 9flcit'brtt)n, the riding-school — rci'tCll, to ride ; tcnf'tttuvt>ici, memorable — tcnf CU, to think of, and iDilV'fcig, worthy; ^ab'fucbtioi, avaricious — t; a' t> en, to have. These omissions take place because only the radical syllable of the first component is employed in composition. 7. It is not settled by rule when and how these changes in the first component are to be made. Analogy and euphony alone determine the question. Sometim.es a diversity occurs in the state of the first component, as it is combined with dif- ferent words ; as, !)iT ^^ail'Cvl)of, the farm, and t)CV ^m'- CVnh'icg, the war of peasants — both from tn 35au'er/ the husbandman, the peasant ; ik Q;l)r'fltvrf)t, reverence, and fcci* S!;'VCnvdu[>cr, the reviler — from tuc St)'vC; tn §cu'crl}crb, the hearth, and fcic §CU'CV6tn'UU|t, a great fire — from MS gcu'Cf; t)a^ -^ev'jCleit), affliction of heart, and fcic J^CV'jCU^angll, anxi- ety of heart — from t»a€^ ■'^fl'J- But even in regard to the same compounds, an uncertainty occasionally prevails: for example, tcv Si'cl)cubaum, or fccr Sicb'baum, the oak-tree — from Die Si'f()C, the oak ; Sft'f log, or Sv'DCuffog, the clod of earth — from iu Sv'l»C. 8. There are a few instances in which a change of significa- tion is produced by the mode of composition ; as, bCV idX^t': tttann, the husbandman, the peasant, and fcev iani»6'mann, the compatriot; J^cil'mittcl, medicine, and J^cil^'inittcl, means of salvation ; gclt»'n)ii-tl}fd)aft, agriculture, and gcl'fcetrwivt^fcljaft, rotation in crops. 15 170 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [bOOK I, 9. The more ancient compounds cannot always be reduced to that analogy, by which the composition of words is now regulated. 10. When it happens that two or more compound words occur in a sentence, having the second component the same, this component is frequently omitted in the first word, or words, and only expressed in the word that is last : as, sp|^af fcil; UUt) •^IPci'bcvlijl, craft of priests and women ; Sl^viCiU^^ uul> §rie'= tciu'jcltcu, times of war and peace ; ^Ct-- ^Ut'-- UUt) gall-ta^, day of prayer, repentance, and fasting. The hyphen is then put after the first word or words. § 2. OF THE INTRODUCTION OF FOREIGN WORDS INTO THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. The German language is sufficiently copious and produc- tive, to furnish native words for any idea that can be expressed at all. Moreover, it is so old, that none of the known languages of the earth can be considered as its parent ; and the radical words as well as the manner of forming new terms, are so peculiar, that the German cannot borrow expressions from foreign languages without violating its own idiom. This being the character of the language, the best German scholars have laid down the general rule, that in speaking and writing, all those terms which are not of genuine German growth, but imported from foreign languages, should be avoided. It was by disregarding this principle, that, particularly from the last half of the sixteenth, until the last half of the eighteenth century, a considerable number of Latin and French terms were intro- duced into the language; many of which are still in common use. But a sounder taste, and a better knowledge of the native riches and powers of the language, have already cleared it of many of those heterogeneous ingredients ; and there is reason to hope that this purifying principle will by degrees succeed in removing all these inconsistencies, without indulging in the blind zeal of an over-hasty and extravagant " purism." According to this principle, we ought to be directed by the following rules. 1. No foreign word should be used, if the same idea may be conveyed by a native term, equally expressive and usual. It is improper, for example, to say fjccuftvcn, instead of CUtfc^ul's PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 171 bigcn, to excuse ; or SOtcticamcnt'/ instead of ^tiVmittd, medicine ; or QtatioiiarmtUj, instead of iaufc'wcl^f, national militia. 2. A genuine German word should be preferred to a for- eign one, if the former, although less usual, is equally expres- sive, and not yet wholly obsolete. Thus, ^ov'ljut, advanced guard, is better than 2ll)^^^t'gav^C ; 2(tac()'t)Ut, rear guard, is better than 2tvievc'9av&C ; and COtit'teltretff U, ' centre of the army, is better than Scu'trum. 3. If we find no word already formed to express a particular idea, we should, instead of resorting to foreign languages, rather try to form a new word, in the true German style, either by derivation, or composition, which have been treated of in the preceding section. a. By derivation, for example, the words ^olf'6't^um/ na- tionality, toolf^'tljumttcl), national, and ^ott'g't^uinlid)f'eit, national peculiarity, have lately been formed from the radical word 'SJplf, people or nation ; and those words have already, in a great measure, displaced the foreign terms, Stfttiouafitat', national', and 9lv;tiona('=Sigcnt{)fim'Iic()fcit. h. In the way of composition, a foreign word may be ren- dered in German, by resolving its meaning into the component ideas. Take for example the French word courrier, which means a messenger who is to proceed with speed. In this instance, the more general idea of a messenger is defined by the par- ticular idea of speed. Messenger, in German, is 23o'tC, and speed, Si'Ic; and these two words being put together accord- ing to Rule II. of the preceding section, form the word Sil'bctC. This is preferable to Sonvicf', which ought not to be considered a German word, as it is needlessly borrowed from a foreign language. — In the same manner the French word diligence, which is frequently used in Germany to denote a carriage which is to travel with despatch, may be rendered by Sll'it>aO(Cn ; from 'iXBa'gcn, carriage, and ^\'k, despatch ; and this German word has already displaced in a great meas- ure the barbarous term S)i'ticicncc. But in seeking native for foreign words, we ought to guard against mere literal translations. It is the sense of the foreign words which is to be rendered in German, and not the man- 172 FORMATIOX OF NEW WORDS. [iJOOK I. ner in which this sense is expressed in the language to which Uiey belong. Thus the French word allec, which is sometimes used in Germany as signifying a walk planted with trees, can- not be rendered simply by (Saiici, walk ; but by ^Sailtn'gaiig/ from Cl*, both the coun- tries ; l>ag gan'jc 3aljV, all the year ; Dci* {^al'bc "idQ, half the day. Obs. 2. In compounds the article agrees with the gender of the last word ; as, J)CV iie'bc^bvicf, the love letter ; fcie '^St': tnfAtjMt, the weathercock ; Dag @tat)t'i;aug, the town-house. Exercises. Give me the book. Bring me a pen. Here is a knife. Lend him the penknife. He has the ink. Write an answer. I saw the friends. to give, ,qc'bcn, irr. penknife, ge'l»Cl*mc|fcv, n. 3.a. 0. book, ^nd), n. 3. b. e. ink, 3)in'tC, /. 1. C. to bring, bviug'eu. to write, fcl)Vei'bctt. pen, gc'DclV /• 1. C. answer, Ztut'irOlt, /. 1. t). here, Ijici*. to see, fc'ljcu, irr. knife, COtcffci', n. 3. a. a. friend, gveuttl), m. 3. b. 6. to lend, (ci'^eu. The article bev is used in German, though not in English, before most nouns in a universal sense, or where a common noun is, as it were,. personified; as, i)a6 ic'bcU/ life; tag Ztl'tCV, age ; ttCl* gvut^'Iiug, spring ; t)Cl* ©om'mCV, summer ; Ux SDlcnfd), man ; bic 9}Tcn'fc()CU, men or mankind ; also before all common nouns in the oblique cases ; as, l>a6 ^iul> l>Cg 95l'U'l»CVg, the brother's child. Also before most adjectives taken substantively ; as, fcag (Su'te, good or goodness; cin CSclc^V'tCV, a learned man; fcfV @c(ct}V'te, the learned. RULE III. Before proper names the article is generally omitted. 1. Before the proper names of places, the article is most commonly omitted, particularly in the nominative ; as, iou'fcon/ 176 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. [bOOK II. spc'tcrsbuvoi, ffuro'pa, Sn^'Ianb. But the following nouns are exceptions to this rule : l»ie ^iivfci'/ Turkey. tcv Spaao^, the Hague. tk iombav^ci^ Lombardy. t)ic ^fl)lt»cij, Switzerland. Mc 9tlC'i>cv(rtn^c, the Nether- fcic icinxn'tc, the Levant, lands. t>tc ^fvxlj/ the Palatinate. Also the Germans say, t)ie ©tabt iCU'Don, the city of Lon- don; fcag ^o'uigveid) gvant'vcicl), the kingdom of France, &c. 2. The proper names of persons generally take no article in the nominative, nor, when they have a change of termination, in the oblique cases ; as, £i'CCV06 Stc'DCU/ Cicero's Orations. In the oblique cases, when there is no change of termination, the article may be used ; as, ^vil'tU^ t^'tctc DCU Sa'f*^*, Bru- tus killed Ceesar. In speaking familiarly of well-known persons, the definite article is sometimes used, even in the nominative case ; as, fcCf 5?rtl-(, Charles ; Die iui'fe, Louisa. A proper name when used as a common noun, requires the article before it ; as fcev spia'tO fci'llC^ ^dt\\it(X^, the Plato of his age. Exercises. Death itself is not so dreadful. Man is rational, man is mortal. He has a house in (the) town. We are going to (the) church. They come from (the) church. Neptune was the god of the seas. I am going to London. I come from Holland, Cicero was an excellent orator. The temple of Solomon was magnificent. Death, 'Job, m. 3. b. 6 mortal, tkv'6tic(). itself, fclbjl. house, J^aiie, n. 3. b. c. not, nic^t. in, in. (Dat.) so, fc town, ©tabt, f. I. b. dreadful, fiivdyutiid). to go, Qt'tfin, followed by in. man, SOTcnfc^, m. 2. b. {Ace.) rational, t)crnunftig. church, ^ir'c^c, /. 1. c. CH. 1 .§!.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 177 to come, f om'UKU. from, tjon. [Dat.) Neptune, CRcptUU'. was, trav. god, (^ott, m. 3, b. C. sea, SOiccr, n. 3. b. 6. to go, gc'l^cn. to, nacl). to come, f om'men. from, \)cn. Cicero, Ci'ccro. excellent, tvctf' (id), orator, SHc^'ncv, m. 3. a. a. temple, "icm'pci, m. 3. a. 0. Solomon, ©a'lomc. magnificent, pi'dctytig. The article is repeated before nouns of different genders ; as, t)ia- ^a'tcr, fcic SOTut'fCV UUt> M^ ^int>, the father, mother, and child : but before nouns each of which requires the same article, it should be put only before the first; as, licr IHocf Ullb J^Ut, the coat and hat. Sometimes, however, the article is repeated before each of several nouns of the same gender, for the purpose of express- ing the importance of each one of them : for example, when different subjects are enumerated in a title, or superscription ; as in that of the fable, 2)Cf guc()6 llUfc Ux SHa'be, The Fox and the Raven. Exercises. The man, woman, and child are gone out. The hare and pigeon. The father, mother, son, and daughter are in the country. The sheep, cow, and dog. I left the book and ruler upon the table. Give me the pen and penknife. The father and son (do) not^ resemble^ each^ other^. man, *90?ann, m. 3. b. c. woman, §VrtU, f- 1. t. child, kmX>, n. 3. b. c to go out, aU6'3Cl)Cn, irr. hare, -OvVff, m. 2. a. pigeon, ^au'bc, /. 1. c. in, auf. [Dat.) country, iailt, n. 3. b. e. sheep, ©c()af, n. 3. b. t\ cow, kill), /. 1. D. dog, J5ml^, m. 3. b. b. to leave, Uffflt, irr. book, 39ucl), n. 3. b. c. ruler, iiiical', n. 3. b. b. {Ace.) upon, auf. {Dat.) table, %'\\d), m. 3. b. h. pen, gc't'CV, /. 1. C. penknife,gc'bcvmc|fcv,n.3. a.a. father, *'^a'tCV, m. 3. a. a. son, (£50(}n, m. 3. b. 6. to resemble, g(ci'd)Cn. each other, firf). 178 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [bOOK II. RULE V. In an emphatic manner of speaking, the article is frequent- ly omitted where it ought to be used, according to Rule II, and Rule IV, particularly in the plural number; as, ®cvfc()'tc im& Uu'.Afi-t'clnc, 20icii'fc()cn uut) 'it^ic'vc fau'Dcu in bcii QODcl'lcu i^V ®rab, The just and the unjust, men and beasts found their grave in the waves. The article is omitted, whenever the substantive expresses a part of a thing, which in English is denoted by the word some, (answering to the French du, de la, de I', dcs) ; as, SSving'cu ©ic luiv 25roi), Bring me some bread ; J^a'bcu ©ie ^apiCl*', 3)iu'te, &c. ? Have you some paper, ink, &.c. ? Exercises. Have you eaten^ bread^ and drunk^ water^ ? Bring me some wine and water. I have bought^ some^ silk^ to-day^. Give me some paper, ink, and pens. bread, 55vo^, n. 3. b. 6. to-day, ijtU'U. to eat, cf'fcu, irr. silk, @et'l>C, /. 1. water, <2Baf'ffV, 7i. 3. a. a. to buy, fau'feu. to drink, tviut'CU, irr. to give, ^C'bfU, irr. wine, 'IBcilt, m. 3. b. i\ paper, spapiev', 7i. 3. b. 6. RULE VII. In some phrases the article is commonly omitted in German, where it is in English either expressed, or has a pronoun put in its place; as, ilbciin'ing'ci' bic'ff^/ the bearer of this; in bcf'tci* DrD'nun^, in the best order ; t)OV Q;u'Mo|linoi ^cg ©c()ail'- fptcfi?, before the conclusion of the drama ; id) l)a'bc CS ill J^dn'bCU, I have it in my hands; ic() l}a'bc fg l^or W^CIl, I have it before my eyes. — The same peculiarity is to be observ- ed in regard to some adjectives and participles ; as, Cf'flCVCV, the former ; IcJj'tcrcr, the latter ; bcfag'tcv, the aforesaid ; eWft(;n'tev, or gfbac()'tci-, the abovementioned ; gcuaun'tCV, the en. 1. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 179 abovenamed ; forgCUtCl'/ the following : also with respect to some proper names; as, OjUu'fcicU/ the East Indies; '2Bc)Utt'* tJieU/ the West Indies. § 2. ARRANGEMENT. The article must be put immediately before the noun to which it belongs, if the noun is not preceded by other words which qualify it; as, ciu SOtauU, a man: bie ^VAU, the woman If the noun is preceded by other qualifying words, the article must be put before them. Thus, if the noun be preceded by an adjective, the article must be placed before the adjective , as, i)Cl* git'tC COtann ; and if the adjective is qualified by an ad- verb or a participial construction, the article precedes this ; as, ci'uc fctjv gu'tc §va«, a very good woman ; t)ic aCIcg hhit' Wie'gCUbC iie'be jum 5Ku(}m, the all-surpassing love of glory. If the adjective, for the sake of emphasis, is put after the noun in the way of apposition, the article immediately precedes the adjective, or the adverb, or participial construction, by which it is qualified ; as, 9tatUf'/ Mc t^ci'Iigc, sacred nature ; UU'fCf gvcunD tev fcbmcvj'lid) Vcnnitfte, our deeply regretted friend ; ^vicg, in ian'in i)CVtjec'VCUbe, war which desolates countries. Exercises. Of the celebrated painter. An ill fed horse. The sea^ connecting- (the) nations^. The^ most^ hearty^ PY^- For- bearance, (the) never tiring. He was a victim of (the) passion, (the) deluding the heart, corrupting the taste, deranging the intellect. celebrated, 6cvut)tnt', never, nic. painter, 9}?a'(cv, m. 3. a. rt. to tire, ermiVtcn. ill, }d)Ud)t. victim, Op'fcv, n. fed, gcfut'tcrt. passion, ici'bcnfd)aft, /. horse, fpfcrt), n. 3. a. a. to delude, t>ctl}6'ren. nation, *'i33o(f, n. 3. b. C. heart, J^fVJ, n. to connect, t)Cvbiu'ten. to corrupt, VCVbev'bcjt. sea, @CC, /. taste, ©Cfcbmacf', m. 3. b. joy, gvcu'be, /. to derange, jcvvut'teu. hearty, ^CVi^'Iid). intellect, ®Ci|l, m. 3. b. e. forbearance, iang'mutl), /. 180 SYNl AX OF THE NOUN. [bOOK II. CHAPTER II. NOUNS. <§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. RULE I. Two or more nouns are put in the same case, 1 . When they are brought together only to show their com- mon relation to another object ; as, (^crccb'tigfcit, 'JDoJ}!'; tljdtigfcit unl> gv6m'intc|t'cit \int> bic 20?ei-t"ma(c ci'ncg Qijvif'Un. Justice, charity, and piety are the characteristics of a Chris- tian. 2. When they are put together to denote the same object, so that one of them either completes or explains* the other ; as, tn SDIo'uat 20?ai, the month of May ; i>(v 5Hat^ l)ci'ncg ^JBvu'bCvef, tt& di(d)t&'Qdct:jXUn, the advice of thy brother, the lawyer. When one noun is qualified by another, the latter is gener- ally put in the genitive case ; as, tit St'CU'tCU DCV SiU'gfUb, the pleasures of youth ; tit §ntc()t Mv Svfcuut'llitj tt& (Su'tCU m\t> S55'fcn/ the fruit of the knowledge of good and evil. An exception is made when the noun which qualifies anoth- er, denotes the object, of which the other is a part, only in a general manner ; especially, if the qualifying noun expresses an object which may be measured, weighed, or numbered. In such instances the qualifying noun remains in the nominative, singular or plural ; as, jct)n SCfcu %\\d) (instead of "iu'cbc^), ten yards of cloth ; eiu ©tficf '^VOfc (instead of ^^ro't'C^), a piece of bread ; cin ©Ux^ *^cin (instead of 'TCci'uce'), a glass of wine ; clu S)ut'jcnD iicl)'tcv, a dozen candles. * When the preceding is explained by the subsequent noun, the latter is said to be in apposition with the former. CH. 2. ^ J.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 181 But the genitive is required if the qualifying noun is more exactly designated by a pronoun or an adjective ; as, jc(]U ®('(cn &ic'|'c^ 'iu'cl)C^, ten yards of this cloth ; JtDCi gvlf'fcr gll'tcu ICci'nr^, two casks of good wine. Observation. Nouns of the masculine and neuter genders, expressing measure, weight, or number, remain, after numerals, in the nominative singular ; as, jwan'jig ^\\€ (instead of §lVfe) idug'C, twenty feet in length ; M'Ci ^0\\ (instead of ^ol'lc) lu'cit, three inches in breadth; jTOCi ^paav (instead of spart've) ©tvum'pfe, three pairs of stockings. Measures of time, as, 3ia^V, year, '5ag, day, and names of coins, as, @cl)irUn3, shil- ling, are excepted. The genitive case is, frequently, supplied by the preposition t)OU, of, with the dative. This is done, 1. When the article is excluded ; as, bcv ll6l*fc'Iic()C %{}i\[ toon Sllg'IauD, the northern part of England ; Die (Svcn'jCU toon granf'l'Cid), the boundaries of France. 2. When quality, condition, or proportion, is implied ; as, fin SOtaun toon '33cv|lan'&e, a man of sense ; cin J^cvv toon eti'lcv Scnfung^art, a gentleman of a noble character ; fi'nc fHci'fe toon jctjn 50tci'lcn, a journey of ten miles ; cin @cl)itf toon jwci t)un'^cvt 'ion'nen, a ship of two hundred tons ; fine ©mn'mc toon jiran'jig ®ul't>cn nni> funf ®i-o|'cf)'cn, a sum of twenty guilders and five groats; fin SOtann toOn ftf^t'jig 3[at)'vcn, a man of eighty years. 3. When the material is mentioned, of which any thing is made ; as, fi'nf Ut)v toon ®oI'&f, the same as, fi'ne gol'bcnc lll)r, a gold watch ; cin '25fct)'fv toon ©il'bfV, a silver cup; cin ©tul^I toon Sl'fcnbfin, an ivory chair. 4. Before the indefinite article, to denote character ; as, fin '2(b'|'c()fn toon ei'ncm SOten'fctjcn, a horrible villain, (literally, a horror of a man) ; fin 2(n6 bunt toon fi'ncm c()V'Iiftfn SEHiin'nf, a pattern of an honest man. 5. To prevent an inelegant repetition of the same endings ; as, bif Ur'facfef toon tctn fon'bcrbavfn SSctra'gcn bc^ ?i3tan'nfg, the reason of the singular conduct of the man, -r- instead of bif Ur'fad)f bfg fon'bcrbarcn ^etva'scne bee a}?au'nct^. 16 1S2 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [bOOK. II. Sometimes it is indifferent, whether V)CU be made use of, or the genitive case : for example, ^cu ©(IKIU t)On 5Kct>'lic{)fcit ha'bcu, or t»cu ©cbcin bfv SKct>'(icliffit Ija'bcu, to have the ap- pearance of honesty ; tn nbvi>'\id)e ^t)(ii tocu Sng'Unfc, or, t>cr n6l•^'Ucl)C "Jl^cil SnjVlrtUt)6, the northern part of England ; ci'iicr t)ou mci'ncn §l•cuu'^cll, or ct'ucr mci'ncv gvcuu'Dc, one of my friends. But where the genitive is not distinguished by the article, or the termination, i)OU must be employed. Before the article it is often superfluous ; as, l)cn ©cl)Ciu i)On ttV Xxi'<\a\i tia'bcn, to have the show of virtue. 2)ev ^u'gCUl», as the genitive case, would be sufficient, without the prepo- sition. Exercises. The friends of right and order are contending against the passions and prejudices of the oppressors and the oppressed. The town of Schwytz is the capital of the canton of Schwytz. You confounded John the Baptist with John the Evangelist. The merits of the first President of the United States. What is the price of a hundred weight of lead ? I see a great number of children. I want three cords of that wood. He gave me a canister of genuine imperial tea. I bought ten pounds of meat. Natives of Europe displaced the aborigines of America. He is a man of high rank and great pretensions, but no merit. A helmet of steel with ornaments of silver. Is he not a model of a good son 1 friend, gl•cun^, m. 3. b. 6. oppressed, untCffcfUrft'. right, di(d)t, m. 3. b. b. town, glcc'fcu, m. 3. a. rt. order, £)vt)'nmi9/ /. 1. fc. capital, JPiaupt'ort, m. 3. b. b. to contend, f^mpfcii, canton, Canton', m. 3. b. h. against, gc'^cn, {Ace.) to confound, \)CVtt)ect)'fcItt. passion, ki't>enfcl)aft, /. 1. t>. John, 3ol}an'ne^. and, nnl». Baptist, 'Jdufcr, m. 3. a. a. prejudice, SBor'UVtljCil, n. 3. with, mit. {Dat.) b. b. Evangelist, €\)(in9efifl',m.2.b. oppressor, UntcrfcrilC'tCtr, m. 3. merit, '35ci-l)icn|l', n. 3. b. 6. a. (U the first, DCl* er'flf. §1.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 183 president, sprdfiteut', m. 2. b. united, Vcvci'uigt. state, ©taat, m. 3. b. X). price, spvcig, m. 3. b. b. hundred weight, Scut'nCV/ m. 3. a. a. lead, 25(ei, «. 3. b. i\ to see, fe'{)CU. great, gvo^. number, SOTcJlg'C, /. 1. C. child, ^^iub, ?j. 3. b. c. to want, brau'ri)cn. cord, ^laftcf, /. 1. a. wood, J^clj, n. 3. b. c. to give, gc'bcn, irr. canister, S5uclyfe, /. 1. C. genuine, dc()t. imperial tea, ^ai'fCVt^CC/ m. 3. a. to buy, fau'fcn. pound, spfunl), ra. 3. b. b. meat, §(cifc(), n. 3 b. b. native, cin'c|cborcn. Europe, Suvo'pa. to displace, Dcvttfdng'Cn. aborigines, Uv'bcit>ol;nCV, m. 3. a. a. man, *SCHauu, m. 3. b. c. high, l)od). rank, Staug, m. 3. b. pretension, *2(n'fVVUc(), m. 3. b. b. but, a'bcv. no, {-'cin. helmet, J^chtt, m. 3. b. b. steel, ©taljf, ???. 3. b. b. with, mit. (Dot.) ornament, ^ic'l'^^f^/ /• !• i** silver, ©il'bev, n. 3. a. a. not, nicl)t. model, SDTuf tCV, n. 3. a. a. good, gut. son, @0^U/ TO. 3. b. b. RULE IV. The genitive case often occurs, where there is apparently no word to govern it. Thus it expresses : 1. Relation of time. 2)c^ TCbcutt?, in the evening ; DCi> yjtOV'gcn^,* in the morning ; bfS 50?it'tage?, at noon ; beg 2Ra(bt^,t in the night ; @onn'abcubi', on Saturday ; ^Ohn'- tii^^, on Monday ; ci'lie^ 'ia'gcg, one day, on a certain day ; ()eii'tigcg ^a'gcg, this day ; ein'mal bc6 SOTo'uatCs?, once in a month; \)icv'mal bc^ 3al)'fCg, four times in a year. * The same idiom prevails in the Greek language; as, ogd^Qov, early in the morning ; rvxToc, in the night. f Here the article corresponds with the termination, and not with the gender, of the substantive ; the addition of g (to Sflacbt/ f. 1. b.) being formerly the characteristic of the geni- tive singular in all declensions. 184 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [bOOK II. 2. Relation of place. Sic'fCt? Dv'tc6, in this place ; 9el)5'= vi.AfJl Di'tciS, in or at a proper place; al'lcf Of'tC, in all places, every where. 3. Way and manner. ©cra'Dcs? (or gcva'tcu) QGBc'gC^, straightways ; |tc'l)cnl'CU §u|'cg>, immediately ; biCfcv (Scjlalt, in this manner ; fol'gcnDcf (Scjltalt'/ in the following manner ; mri'llfg 'Jl)ci(t;, on my part; im'fcvn *it)cil^, on our part; mci'uc^ ^if fcu^, to my knowledge ; mci'uc6 ^cttfnif'cui?, in my opinion; ci'utc\cv 3}TvVfen, in some measure; cicmiffeu 93?vt'|\'U, in a certain degree; nu'DCVVic()tCti'f (3acl)'c, not hav- ing effected one's purpose. Also the following phrases: J^uuci'; eve; flci'bni, to die of hunger; ci'jif^ fcl)mci-j1icl)CU "Jo'DcS jlcfbcu, to die a painful death ; t)CV -^Otf' uung (c'tcu, to live in hope; Dcit ^H'tvaucufi (c'bcu, to live with confidence, ^/«a< is, to entertain a confident opinion with regard to a tiling. With the verb fctu : as, ^JBU'lcug fcill, to intend ; DCV 5X)?ci'mmg fcin, to be of an opinion ; ^C6 ^0'l>cg fciu, to perish. RULE V. The accusative case is employed to denote time, both as to date and duration. — Date : &cn jcl)n'tcn lag uad) X>n @c()(acl)t, the tenth day after the battle ; ^i> WAX i€ ^ag fV'jte %\^X, thus it was (in) the first year; fcCll llCUn'tCU 3lt'U, tlie ninth of July; VO'vigcn 2)tcnf tag, last Tuesday; t»vci mal Me ;H3oc()'c (Ace), three times a week. —Duration: \d) bill fcfll gau'jCU "iag ju J^rtU'fc gciKC'fcn, I have been at home the whole day ; id) »rcv'; lie nod) ei'ncu 50?o'nat in fcr ©tatt bici'bcn, I shall remain yet a month in town; l>cnrci Icu ©ic ci'iicu 'Zlu'gcnblict, stay one moment. The adverb (aiig, long, is frequently subjoined to mark the duration ; as, jct^ll 3at}'l'C laiig, for ten years. After certain adjectives and verbs, signifying weight, mea- sure, extent, age, price, value, such as, grosJ, great, [u'Cit, broad, fc()ircv, heavy, iric'gcii, to weigh, fof'tcu, to coast, the accusa- tive follows. Sl'uCU guS tn-cit, a foot broad ; ci'llCU SOto'liat alt, a month old ; c6 wicgt ci'UfU 3nit'ncr, it weighs a hundred v>'eight. Space and motion are indicated by the accusative. ©i'llCU (aug'cu "^Bcg gc'(}cn, to go a long way ; i>cu ^^cvg bimin'tcv IkUl'fcil, to run down the mountain ; CV gc(}t Cl'UCU gu'tfU ©dH'itt, he walks a good pace. • CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 185 RULE VI. The gender is deviated from, when the meaning of the word is more regarded, than its grammatical nature. 2)ic'fcS gvau'cnjimmei* i)l am frl)6u'|lcn/ wmn ftc ftcl) x\id)t fd)minft, This lady is most handsome when she does not paint herself. §rau'cujimmci' is of the neuter gender, but the pronoun f(C, she, is feminine, because this is the gender which the subject naturally has. Sv litht fctii ^eib nid)t, fon'tcru mi|5t}rtn'Dc(t ftc, He does not love his wife, but treats her ill. '^Dcib is neuter, and the feminine flC answers to it. The English often admits a different number, in the verb, from what its subject, according to strict grammar, would require ; as, " All the company were present ; " " The army of martyrs praise thee." The German, however, does not allow this deviation, but always requires the verb to agree in number with its subject ; as, Mc gau'JC ®cfe(rfc()aft XCXXC On the other hand, in German the singular number is some- times used collectively, in reference to more than one subject, where in English the plural would be employed. For example : 3e^n SO?cu'fcf)eu (ja'kn i^i* k'fccu cin'gcbu|i, Ten persons have lost their life ; according to the English, lives. 50?cl}t (if^ !)un'^cvt SSuv'gcr (ja'bcii i^'vcn STa'mcii «ntcvjeict)'uct, More than a hundred citizens have subscribed their name, — in English, names. !Di( vo'tt)c, blau'c, \\\\i> gel'bc gav'be, the red, blue, and yellow co/or, — in English, co/ors. 3)ie ^vailjo'ftfr^c ltn& 3tand'uifd)C @pra'c()C, the French and Italian language, — in English, languages. In these two last examples, the German idiom may be accounted for by the figure ellipsis, thus ; t)ie vo't(;c (gav'be), bhu'c (gvu-'bc), tmt) gcCbe gav'bc, the red (color), the blue (color), and the yellow color; 2)te §rauj6'= ftfct)C (@vra'c()C) UiiD 3;ta(id'nifc()C @pva'ct)C, The French (lan- guage), and Italian language. Exercises. The people call them time-pleasers, flatterers. We are wholly of your opinion. He walks ten miles, twice a day. Their faces are turned^ to^ (the) East^. In the forenoon I am 16* 186 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN, [bOOK II, commonly at home, but in the afternoon P ride out. He did^ not^ yield' a~ finger's breadth [a finger broad.) people, *'a3o(!', /). 3. b. c. East, SOTov'gcu, m. 3. a. 0. to call, ncu'llCU, 7>iix. to turn, iDCn'Dcn, mix. time-pleaser, ^Ct'tcrfa()nC, /. forenoon, "^Jov'mittag, ?«. 3. 1. C. b. k flatterer, ©cl)mcic()'Icr/ ?n. 3. commonly, gctr>5t)U'tic{). a. a. at home, ju JP>aJi'fc. wholly, ganj. afternoon, 9^acl)'mittag, m. 3. opinion, SOTci'umig, /. 1. &. b. b. to walk, gC'l^CU, irr. to ride out, au^'fCttCtt/ irr. mile, ?Otci'lc, /. 1. C. to yield, wci'cben, irr. day, ^ag, ?«. 3. b. h. not a, fein. face, ®cftc()t', n. 3. b. C. finger, ging'cv, ?«. 3. a. a. to, liacl). (Dat.) broad, bvcit. <5) 2, ARRANGEMENT. The noun, in the nominative case, being the subject of a sentence, is generally placed before the verb. Note. — The subject is to be distinguished from the object : the former governs the verb, and the latter is governed by the verb : for instance, 2)cv ^ft'tev licbt fei'ucu @ot}U, The father loves his son. Here, t)tx ^a'tCV is the subject, which governs the verb, that is to say, the verb must agree with it, in number and person ; fci'nCU ©Ot)u' is the object, which is governed by the verb, because it must, in compliance with the nature of the verb, stand in a particular case. Exceptions to the first Rule. The subject is put after the verb, 1. In a direct question ; as, @cf)VCibt Hv Sfltdnu ? Does the man write? ©d)rcibt, the verb — ^ev SOTaiin, the subject. It is the same, when the question begins with an interrogative pronoun, or interrogative adverb ; as, Q0Bci6' frtgt 6CV ^a'tCl* ? What says the father? ^l£d'd)($ 25ttct) Ue|l in ©cfeiVkv? Which CH 2. <5i 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 187 book does the pupil read ? ^avum' i(Xd)t tei* ^Ud'bc ? Why does the boy laugh ? 'SDegiDc'gcu trciut Die @cl)it»cf'tev ? What does the sister weep for ? 2. When instead of the subject, some other word or phrase, generally for the purpose of emphasis, is placed at the head of the sentence ; particularly in the following cases : a. When the object is placed at the head of a sentence. For instance ; 2)ie'fc6 (Slucf 9Ciuc|V Hi' 'ilu'^enltl^aftc, This happiness the virtuous man enjoys. 3)ci' "iu'gcntiljaftc, is the subject, which follows after the verb gcnicjl'; because the object, bic'ff^ (Slucf, begins the sentence. b. When the dative or accusative case of the person stands first; as, 2)cm 9}?cn'ffl)cn i|l fcag ic'bcn t()eu'ev, To man life is dear; 2)ic'ffu ^uvVbcu tjrttmciu grcuut) t»ic §vanj6'fifcl)e ©pva'djc 9c(el)rt', To this hoy my friend taught the French language. The sentences here begin with a case of person, and the sub- ject is found after the verb. This, and the preceding excep- tion, may perhaps be together comprehended in these words, viz. When any oblique case of declension begins a sentence, the subject must come after the verb. c. When an adjective or pronoun, belonging to the subject or object, begins the sentence. @Ut ijl l>cr "23cin JtuaiV rt't'ft' auc() tbeu'ev, The wine indeed is good, but also dear. The adjective gut, in this instance, belongs to the subject, and, beginning the sentence, displaces the subject, t>Cl' '^ciu. CSut ftn'tct ittcin '33a'tef \>i\\ QOBciu, &lc. My father finds the wine good. Here gut belongs to the object, i)CU "^Dcitt, and has the same influence on the subject. The same is also to be observed of the pronoun, when it belongs to the subject or object ; as, 90?ciu \\\ t><\^ ^(XW^i Mine is the house ; tltCtU belongs to ^al3 .^au^, which is the subject, and is put after the verb. d. When the pronoun c6 begins the sentence : for example, ^i> f 6mmt t)Ci' @pvccl)'cv, The speaker is coming ; €g fa'gm tie ifu'tc, People say. 6. When an infinitive is put at the beginning, either as a member of the sentence, or for the sake of emphasis : for example, Um §Hu'l)c ju genie'fcn, muf'fcu Die CSefct'je erfuttt' 188 SYNTAX OP THE NOUN. [bOOK II. ^^)Cl•'^C^, In order to enjoy peace, must the laios be fulfilled ; v^djcv'dKU irrtClcii Die icii'tc uic()t, Obey will the people not; — for, the laws must, the people will not. f. The participles, with an adverbial power, to express the manner of being, acting, or suffering, and participles generally, when placed at the beginning of a sentence, cause the subject to follow the verb. For instance : QBci'ncnb f^racC) bcv SBa'tir, Weeping the father spoke ; 'ivau'cruD giiig'cu l>ie (Scfal)v'tcu ju fcCtn (Svab'male, Mourning the companions went to the sepul- chre. Thus with the past participle; OcUcbt' unfc viu'cicbctft t)ci-ne6' l>cr J^ctl) fci'iic SOTifbuvgcr uiiD cil'tc in Oa^ @cl)lacl)t'-- fflD, nCU'C ior'bcvn JU CVVing'CU, Beloved and adored, the hero left his fellow citizens and hastened into the field of bat- tle, to obtain new laurels. g. The subject must come after the verb, when an adverb or certain cases of nouns used in an adverbial signification, or absolute cases, commence the sentence. 25alt) f 6mmt l»cr QQBiu'; Ut, Soon winter comes ; ©cl)iicU gel^t ^U ^tit baljiu', Quickly time passes ; Uu'flilfirf Iic()cv '23ci'fc ttaf t>k&, auferDcm', besides; iVbrigCU^, in other respects; t>a, then (which must always precede the verb). — When the con- junctions, auc(), also; ciltlDC'Dcr, either; Jlt>av, indeed, are in the beginning of the sentence, the subject may be put after the verb, by which means a stress falls either upon the sub- ject, or the verb ; as, lind) vtcf t>a^ "SSoIf, The people even exclaimed ; Siitirc'^cv (tej^ tn ^luVbc, o't»CV Cf fcbvcibt. The boy either reads or writes ; ^WAV fc()ci^JlCt t>ie @0U'JIC, a'biV &c.. The sun indeed shines, but, &lc. When the emphasis is on the subject, it should remain before the verb ; as, 2ilicl) t>(l^ ^olf ricf, Even the people cried out. — In old and formal lan- guage, the subject is sometimes placed after the verb, when lint), and, precedes. Hub tjat ^^cflafl'tCV CVlDic'ffU, And the defendant has proved. Here 25cHa9'tCl*, the subject, is after the verb. 4. In quoting, the subject is put after fd'gcn, or any simi- lar verb, when part of the quotation goes before ; as, 3)a^ CSIiirf, fagt l»cv xIBci'fc, ijl t)CVrd'tt)CVifc()/ Fortune, says the wise man, is treacherous. 5. The subject always follows the verb, in the subsequent member of a sentence. Note. — The subsequent member of a sentence is that, which comes after one beginning with a relative pronoun (such as VDA^i what), or a relative adverb (such as XdO, where), or a conditional, causal, or consecutive conjunction (such as itiCUU, if; wall, because; tuX, when). Examples: \S}a^ l»CV ^a'tCf fagt, ti)Ut t»ev ©ot}n, what the father says, the son does. The first member of this sentence begins with the relative pronoun, \X)A^ ; in the second or subsequent member, therefore, the sub- ject, tn ©Otjn, stands after the verb, ttjUt 933o M^ Uia^ i]}, tJCrfam'mcln fid) ik 'Ut'Uv, Where the carrion is, the eagles are collected. Here, the first member commences with the rela- tive adverb, tt»0 ; and the subject in the following member, is after the verb.* xJBcuu bag ^ct'tcf guu'llig blcibt, fo fommt * Strictly speaking, we ought, in the second, here called the subsequent, member, to supply some demonstrative word, corresponding to the relative, in the first ; namely bag, in reference to the preceding trag ; and ba, in correspondence 190 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [bOOK II. mcin gvcuiib iii wc'uigeu ^a'gcn, If the weather continues favorable, my friend comes {or will come) in a few days. This sentence also consists of two members : the first, if the weath- er continues favorable ; the second, my friend comes, or will come ; in the latter, which is the subsequent member, the sub- ject is placed after the verb. So likewise, "^eil bie ^i\t f(l)iicll Dcvjh'Ctdjt', fo bciuU^t' t>ci- QOBci'fc jc'bcii 2iit'9CuMicf, Because time passes quickly, the wise man turns every moment to ac- count. Here are again two members, the antecedent, because time passes ; and the subsequent, the wise man turns every moment to account. The subject in the latter, of course, stands after the verb. 2)a Sd'fav fid) nd't}crtc, cutn)id)'cn t^ic ^cin'De, When Caesar approached {antecedent), i\\(i enemy with- drew [subsequent). — The subsequent member, after an ante- cedent, with a conjunction of the description alluded to, fre- quently begins with the particle fo, concerning which it is proper to refer to Book II. Ch. 8. § 1. This particle serves as a connecting link, between the antecedent and subsequent members.* For example : '2Dd'VC t>ix g(u|3 fdjiff'baV/ (or ^cuii Ux g(uf3 fd)itf' bat* it>d'vc,) fo \v\\x'i( fcei* J^^^u'Dcl blu'= (^cn. If the river were navigable, trade would flourish. — The conjunction t)CftO, and also )Z, when equivalent to tef'tO, con- stitute a subsequent member. Ex. 3c inC^V t\X fragft, t)ef tO tre'nigcf »t>ev'i)C id) rtut'wovteu, The more you ask, the less I shall answer. — A subsequent member is likewise produced, when an infinitive begins the sentence, expressing purpose and design. Um vcid) jii Tvev'tcu, imtcvjictjt' fid) bcu SOTcufd) oft im C|r6'|Ieu SO?ul}'fcligfeitCU, In order to grow rich, man under- goes the greatest hardships. " Man undergoes," «fcc. is the subsequent member, in which the subject must be put after the verb. In order to lay more stress upon the subject in the subse- quent member of the sentence, it is sometimes, by way of exception, placed after the verb. Ex. ^iXX, n)d'vc)l J>U t)ietr with n)0. The subsequent member niay, perhaps, in every instance, be said to depend upon connecting words, which are understood. * Such a link between the antecedent and subsequent members, may always be supposed ; and if not expressed, it is understood. CH. 2. <5i 2,] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 191 gcwe'fcn, mein *;Sru't)cv iDd've uic()t gc|^ov't>ett, Sir, if thou hadst been here, my brother would not have died. 6. The last instance, in which the verb precedes the subject, is where the conjunction ireuU/ if, is to be supplied; as, ^2Ba vc mciii ^vVtcv ijitv gwe'fnt, fo voa'u fcag Uu'glurf iucl)t gcfcbc'tjCU, Had my father been here, the misfortune would not have happened. 'vlCd'l'C meiu '^a'tn ijin gCWC'fCU, stands for, mmw mciu '33a'tev t^iei* gcitc'feu ird'vc, if my father had been here; and the subject, as appears, is after the verb. Exercises. The enemy approached the suburbs. (Do) you^ see^ this temple ? Why did our teacher change his plan ? This measure nobody can excuse. The courageous, God assists. Short was his life, but eternal are his deeds. The command was given. They never saw him weep. The Spartan died composed and smiling. Man commonly believes. Without altercation, they divided the prize. We therefore determined to stay. The papers indeed mention it, but I do not believe it. Not every thing which glistens, is gold, says the proverb. Because he saw it in others, he imitated it. If you had not walked so slowly, you would have overtak- en us. enemy, geiul), /«. I can, icl) Hxxn, mix. to approach, na'^cn. (Dat.) to excuse, eutfdjurfcigetl. suburb, *SOov'|Ut)t, /. 1. b. courageous, mil't^ig. to see, fe't)eil, irr. to assist, lijtl'fm, irr. (Dat.) temple, 'ifm'pcl, m. 3. a. 0. God, (Sott. why, wavum'. short, hivj. to change, dn'bevtt. life, ic'bctt. teacher, ict}'l'eV', m. 3. a. a. but, a'bcr. plan, ^Un, m. 3. b. b. eternal, C'wig. measure, 3C>?a6'veget, /. deed, 'iijat, f. 1. t>. nobody, nic'manl>. command, JSefc^l'/ m. 192 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [book II. to be given, CVCic't}CU, irr. to weep, IDCi'lKU. they, man. never, nic. composed, gcfaiJit'. smiling, ldcl)'cIn^. to die, jtcr'bcil, irr. the Spartan, &cr ©pavta'ncv. commonly, <\Clt>5tjn'llcl). to believe, c^lau'bcu. man, DCf SOtciifcl). without, ol^'uc. altercation, ©tvci'tigteit. to divide, tt)ei'[cu. prize, spreie, m. 3, b. l\ therefore, t)al)ev'. to determine, tiffcl)(ie'fci1, irr. to stay, blei'bcn. paper, 3«i't«n9, / 1. t. to mention, Cl*tt>d(}'ncn. indeed, jtt»av. but, a'bcr. to believe, glaubcil. not, ntcl)t. every thing, al'feg. to glisten, gldu'jfn. gold, (So It). to say, fa'i^cn. proverb, ©^U'icl)'»»OVt, n. because, n)Ci(. in, t)On. others, an'fccvf. to imitate, nacl)'mac()cn. (See Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. F.) slowly, (rtufli'fam. to walk, gC'^cn, irr. (with fciu.) to overtake, ein't;okn. The Substantive, being the object, is generally put after the verb : for example, 3cf) (ie'bc mci'nCU '35a'tCl*, I love ray father ; tncl'neu SBa'tcv is the object. Exceptions : 1. When a stress is laid upon the object, it may be placed at the beginning of the sentence ; as, 2)CU -l^omcv' (c'fc id) mit SBcvgmVoicn uul> 33erouu't)ei'Un9, Homer I read with pleasure and admiration. 2. In certain cases the verb is removed to the end of the sentence ; * then the object naturally comes before it. RULE in The Substantive in the Genitive case, not being the object,+ * See Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. t The genitive may be the object, viz. when it is governed by the verb. See Book II. Ch. 5. § 1. F. Rule ii. CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 193 generally stands after the word by which it is governed ; as, ^CV ©Cijll mci'ncg grcuu'fcCg, the son of my friend. But it is found, 1. Before the substantive that governs it, when it bears an emphasis. £)ct> ^a'tcvti ©c'gcu ban'(t t>eu ^iu'Dcvu J^du'fci*, a'bcr fcfv ^Hyint'tn ^ind) vciffct fie nic'^cl^ A father's blessing builds houses for the children, but a mother'-s curse pulls them down. When the noun in the genitive precedes the governing word, the latter loses its article ; for example, t>c6 ic'6eu5 gvcu'tf, life's joy ; for, ^^e §veu't>e DC6 ic'bcn^, the joy of life. It may happen that the governing word, though put after the genitive, keeps the article ; but then the genitive is deprived of it ; as, ^olf ^ ^ie 93tcug'c, a multitude of people ; §feu't>C tU §ul (c, abundance of joy. This, however, is not to be extended beyond the phrases established by custom. The position of the genitive, before the governing word, should be easy and imaffected ; otherwise it is better to leave that case in its natural place. Thus two, or more, genitive cases, when transposed, produce a heavy and unharmonious sound, as in this example ; ^Cl' a.VD'fcu ^l^ilofo'vt^cn ^mt k'bcu ; better thus, t>a^ ie'bcu ^Cl? gvo'fcu ^l}ilofo'pl;cn ^ant, the life of the great philosopher Kant. And it is worse, when of two genitives, before a third word, one governs the other ; as, ^C6' ^6'Utoi^ tXX gvanf'CU ^'vo'lUing, instead of l>tC ^VO'mill).T t>(& .^O'nig^ bCV gvant'cn, the coronation of the king of the Franks. 2. Before adjectives ; as, i>(S SBcvln'Ccb'ciie? ff()Uri)tg, guilty of the crime ; t>(^ io'bc^ n)UV't>ig, worthy of the praise ; Hv ©or'ge miVDCVtti, undeserving of the care. 3. Before some prepositions.* The Dative has its place commonlv after the verb, and if there be an accusative case besides, it generally depends on * See Book II. Ch. 7. § 2. 17 194 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [bOOK II, emphasis or euphony whether the dative or accusative is to be l)ut first. The emphasis is generally on the last word. Ex. Sr c\ibc ^cm ?Jiau'uc Dai's i23ud), He gives the book to the man, or Sv vjibt Da-o '^mh Dcm SOTau'iic. When it is to be marked with peculiar emphasis, it should be moved from its place, and stand before the verb : as, 2)cm 33Tau'iie oiibt cr Dat; *.5ucl). If the object be a monosyllable, or a short word, and the dative case consist of more syllables, the former should be put first, because a long word commonly finishes the sentence better than a short one ; for example, Sv fvtg'tc Iks tern ^a'tcv, He told this to the father. Two accusatives are sometimes used after the same verb, one expressing a person, and the other a thing. The former is then placed in the same manner as the dative, according to the preceding rule. Examples : ^d) llCU'UC tCU SOlauu gvcuilb, I call the man friend ; '^d) l}ci'fc ci'iicu fol'c()CU DDTami ci'ucn J^cf Dcll/ I call such a man a hero ; <£v If t)vt l)Cn ©cmpvo'lliu^ t»ic ?Hcct)'cufun|t, He teaches Sempronius arithmetic. When the subject, the object, and the case of person meet together, either before or after the verb, they commonly follow in this order : subject, case of person, object. For example, before the verb ; 2)a t>CV §c(l)'l)CVV t>cm geiu'fcc t)CU gfif'^cn (lu'ijcbotcu t}at, Since the general has offered peace to the ene- my. After the verb ; 2tuf l>ie'ff ^ci'fc \)crfc()vif'tc Qh'\a\: fci'= ncu gvcuu'Dcn ®cmioi'tl}uuuci uufc bcual}m' fci'ucu gcin'Dcu al'(c J^cff' miuc» juv Sfiacl)'C, In this manner Caesar procured satisfac- tion for his friends, and deprived his enemies of all hope of revenge. The Dative and Accusative ca6es stand before the adjec- tives,* by which they are governed.! RULE VII. The Vocative case may be put either before or after the verb, at the option of the speaker. * See Book II. Ch. 3. § 1. Rule v. —2 and 3. t Compare Book II. Ch. 3. § 2. Rule ii. CH. 3. <§, 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 195 Exercises. Give me the book. Such men I like. The fruits of the earth. Love's labor is in vain. He is tired of life. He mentioned it to me afterward, but to her he entrusted it first. When they had told me every thing, P appointed^ them a time of meeting. to give, gc'beu, irr. to mention, Cftrd^'llCii. book, *iBuc(), n. 3. b. e. afterwards, fpd'tCV^iu. such, fot'ft)ci--c-e6. but, a'bcv. man, *23trtnn, 3. {\ C. to entrust, VCVtfrtU'CU. to like, Itc'bcn. first, juerjl'. fruit, *§vuf()t, /. 1. 6. when, naft)t>cin'. earth, Sv't'C, /. every thing, ai'U'o. love, iic't'C, /. to tell, fa'gcn. labor, ?!}Tu'l]c, /. to appoint, bc|lim'mcn. in vain, iimfon|I'. time, ^i\i, /. 1. t>. life, k'bcu, n. 3. a. meeting, ^VL\cr gu'tc 9}Tann, mi& t(x bc'fc ('iSIauii understood), the good man, and the bad (man) ; l»ru JirclftCll Mc'fctt •D3io'natC6", the twelfth of this month (lag/ day^ under- stood) ; 35cffcrc 93Tcn'fil)fn/ (}cry(icl)cvc uuD treu'crc t^a'bc irl) nir'gcii&g gcfuii'Dcii, Better men, more hearty and faithful ones, I have nowhere found. RULE III. Every adjective must be used in its declinable form, when- ever it is in its natural position, i. e. immediately before the substantive which it qualifies. The substantive itself may be either expressed or understood. Examples : t)Cr tap'fcrc ^OlaiUl/ the brave man; ci'llC VO'tt^C 5KD'fc, a red rose ; tic ffd'Cll llUt) C|U'tCU '.Bur'cicv, the free and good citizens; Sf cvl^iclt' ci'llC Ztnt'irort, a'bci* nic()C ci'uc oicuctj'miacuDc, fou't»cni ci'iic ab'fd)U= gcut»c (Ztut'lDOVt understood), lie received an answer, yet not a permitting but a refusing one. In all other cases the adjective is used in its simple, inde- clinable form ; as, l»ic 25uv'gcr, gut nub ffCi, the citizens, good and free ; X)CV 9Cnanu \]i tap'fcr, The man is brave ; 2)ic §vuc()'te WCl-'l»eu VCif, The fruits become ripe; @ic WCt^v'tfU fif() tap'fci', They defended themselves bravely. RULE IV. Cardinal numbers are generally not declined, except cill/ Ci'ne, Ciu, or ci'ncv, ci'uc, ci'ucef, one, and the other cardinal numbers when they do not stand before nouns but take the place of nouns ; as, Sv fAI)Vt mit i)icr ^fcv'fcCU, He drives with four horses ; Sv fdt)Vt mit V>ic'VCU, He drives with four. Siu, ei'UC, ciu, is used when it precedes a noun ; as, 3[d) t'auf tc ciu Spfuul> 3"f't'^'l'/ I bought one pound of sugar : ci'UCf, ci UC, ci'uce, is used when it takes the place of a noun ; as, ^d) fauf'tc nur ci uci? (or ciue), I bought only one. RULE V. Some adjectives govern cases. 1. The following adjectives, most of which are in English t CH. 3. <^ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 197 followed by of, govern the genitive : bcfcuvf tig, in want of; 6cn5'tl)toit, in need of; InnDUp', conscious, (with the reciprocal dative, and the genitive of the object; as, 3d) bill miv &cr ©ac()'C nicbt binr>U)fl', I am not conscious of that thing) ; ciu'v^i^CHf, mindful ; td'l}"'9/ capable of, (it is also joined with the prepo- sition jn) ; fvct}, glad, satisfied, (also with the prep, fi'bci', and the accusative) ; gciDal^v'/ informed of, aware of, (also with the accusative : it generally occurs with the verb ir»CV't'Cn, to be- come ; as, ^f )t>viVD tCl* (Scfatjr' [genitive], or, Mc (Sffai^V' [ac- cusative], gcit»at)V', He perceived the danger) ; gctt?dl''tig, ex- pecting ; cicwifj', certain ; 3Ctt)0(}Ut', accustomed to, (also with the accusative) ; fuil'fcic^, skilled in, experienced in ; (o^, free from, rid of; macb'tic(, in possession of; mu'bc, tired of; quitt, rid of ; fvUt, tired of ; f(lnil't»i.Ol, guilty : t(}cir{)aft, partaking of ; U'bevbVUtfi;^, tired with ; tiCftacl^'tios, suspected ; Itevluf tig, having forfeited or lost; t)cll, full of, (also with V»cn) ;* n)CVt^, worth, deserving ; lt>ui*'t)ioi/ worthy ; and the negatives corres- ponding to these adjectives, as, un'ttiurbUV uu'funt»i§, UU'^ 6crDu|]t, uu'gcwoljiit, un'fa^iS/ &.c. 2. The following adjectives, most of which are in English followed by to, govern the dative case ; dl)n'(icl), like, re- sembling ; au'cicmcifcU/ adapted, suitable ; an'aienc()m, agree- able ; bcfaunt', known to ; bcqucm', convenient ; tniug'C, anx- ious, fearful, (as, 50?iv i|I banci'c, I am fearful) ; bcfitrrcr'Ud), troublesome : t»icu'Uc(), serviceable ; furcl)t'(\ir, formidable ; gc(}OV'fam, obedient ; c^cmdfj', suited to ; gctrcu', faithful ; gcino'gcn, inclined to, favorable; g(cicl), like; na'l)C, near; DCl•n^v^u^t', related to ; n6'tt)ig, necessary ; inig'Iid), useful : fd)dt>'(ic(), hurtful; ju'trdglid), conducive, useful; and others, signifying advantage, or disadvantage. — In many instances, the above adjectives take after them prepositions governing their appropriate cases ; such as, fur, for ; gc'gcn, towards, against ; ju, to, &c. 3. TLose which imply measure, weight, age, value, gen- erally with a numeral preceding, require the accusative, and are put after the noun in their simple (indeclinable) form. Of * Sometimes the substantive, dependent on t>o(I, remains undeclined after it ; as, Voll SO^Utlj, instead of 20tu'tl)Cg, full of courage. 17* 19S SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [nOOK II. this kind arc im<\, long; il'Cit, broad; l;oc(), high; Cicf, deep; groi?, great ; fcl)irrr, lieavy ; a(t, old ; If Cl'ti}, worth ; fcbuI'Mg, indebted, owing. For example: jcl^n §^U6 fAug, ten feet long; JirtMf spfuuf fc(5it>cr, weighing twelve pounds; flUlfji^ 3ial}V alt, fifty years old; M'ci 'il^a'lcr ircvttj, worth three dollars; Sf i|t 'Old ^cI^ fil)ld'l'ic(, He owes a great deal of money, iaug, joined in this manner to words denoting time, expresses dura- tion : as, jclni 2iv\l)'lC lang, for ten years ; ci'uc 3«»t ^^"9/ for a time. Obsr7-vatio}is. (1.) The cardinal numbers, and the words iMCf, much (»• many, and TOC'lU^/ little or few, govern the genitive ; and are always put after it. They are frequently combined with the personal pronouns ; as, im'fcv JWcIf, twelve of us ; cn'cv jiraii'jig, twenty of you ; itjv'ct fcrciT^g, thirty of them : im'fcv 'ok'U, many of us; il^'VCV WC'ntgc, few of them. (2.) The word all, in English, commonly has the definite article after it; as, all the world. — Till, in German, is com- monly without the article ; as, al'tc 'SDclt, all the world ; a['= Ic6 (Scf&, all the money. There is only one construction in which this word requires the article, namely, before possessive pronouns, when used substantively ; as, ai'Ic l»ie SDlci'lligCll, all my friends ; al'k^ i»a6 Un'fvigC/ all we possess. The article may also stand before adjectives, which are employed as sub- stantives ; as, at'le Mc (Su'tCU, all the good people ; at'IcS ^a5 256'f^, all the evil. Otherwise it is not necessary, except when a relative follows, nor even then always ; as, a('(c fcic naf()'i tl^Ciligen gorgcu, lt>cl'c()e tavaitg' cnt|hxu'&cn, all the disadvan- tageous consequences, which arose from it. The truth is that in the instances first adduced, the article should not be con- sidered as belonging to dl'U, but to the possessive pronouns. — 'ZtU sometimes follows the word to which it belongs : for example, Die 25ci'fV>ie(c ai'k, all the examples; tic 'ilt}vd'nen al'ii, all the tears; von t»cn iVtuHcicu al'lcn, of all the rest; Mc'fce al'lcn, all this, for al'k^ t>iVfc6; t>a6 al'lce, for ai'ks taS, all that. It is always put after the personal and relative pronouns ; as, tt>ir (Xl'U, all of us ; fte al'lc, all of them ; i>ic icu'te wci'dje al'it jugc'gen wa'rcn, the people who all were present. CH. 3. <^ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 199 Exercises. After Alfred the Great, succeeded his son, Edward the elder. The Romans, brave in war, and wise in their legislation. Ten dollars Saxon money are eighteen florins Rhenish. Although conscious^ of^ his^ guilt^, he^ was^ incapable of remorse. It is pleasant to the eye, but dangerous to the soul. Three good leagues off. He pleased all of us. They are stirring (stir themselves) by thousands. after, ncid). (Dat.) Rhenish, 5Hl}ci'nifc(). great, gro6. although, it>icn)0^i'. to succeed, foCgCJl. guilt, @f()Utt), f. 1. fc. son, @ol)n, m. 3. b. b. conscious, bctrufft'.' old, *alt. incapable, im'fdt^ig. the Roman, fcCV 9il6'mei% remorse, SKeu'e, /. 1. brave, tap'fev. pleasant, an'gcttct^m. in, im. (Dat.) but, d'bu. war, ^l'ii^> m. 3. b. b. dangerous, gefa^f'lid).* wise, TOCi'fe. good, gut. in, in. (Dat.) • league, ©tllU'bC/ / 1. C. legislation, (Scfc^'gcbutig/ /. off, TOCit. 1. b. to please, gefaricu, irr. (Dat.) dollar, %\:jcr ^ul)'nc, Charles the Bold ; '}iU):m'iit^ Ut (Sxt>'^t, Alexander the Great. 200 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [boOK II. 2. When it is connected with the su])stantive by a verb ; in this case the adjective is put after the verb ; as, 3)cr SJcaim i|f gut ; or before it with an emphasis, (Sut ifl tcr SOTvUui. 3. When the adjective stands as it were in apposition to the noun ; for example, ttY ^c(^, radrl)'tig tin gcl'tc unD TOCi'ff iltt SJla'tbC, the hero, powerful in the field, and wise in the council. This stands for »t)c('cl)ef mad)'ti(j im §d't»c, lln^ trci'fc im §Ha'tl}C i\}, who is powerful in the field, and wise in the council. ' 4. Adjectives derived from names of places and countries are, in certain phrases, put after substantives ; as, jcl}n ^fliut) Sng'Uffl), ten pounds English; jTOau'jig dTuwl: iu'bcitif(l\ twenty marks of Lubeck ; t}lltt'fcCVt §U6 SH^ciu'Idut)ifcl), one hundred feet Rhenish. RULE 11. The numerals are placed before other adjectives, preced- ing a substantive ; as, 2)l*ei gU'tC/ ef?V'lic()C aKcu'fcl)en, three good, honest men. When cardinal and ordinal numbers meet before a substan- tive, it depends on the emphas^^, which of them is to be put first : whether, for instance, it be, t)ic ivti CV'jkii, the three first; or, t>ic CV'|tcu Dvci, the first three. This applies also to the words, tie au'i»cvn, the others, Die (c^'tcn, the last, and generally to adjectives in the superlative degree, which may be put either before or after the cardinals. Examples, ik fcvei Ic^'ten, or, Die fe$'ten Dvei, the three last; Die t)tcr an'- Devu, or, Die an'Devn feiev, the other four ; Die fed)^ bef ten, or. Die bef'teu fed}^, the six best; Die jet)n fd)6n'|kn, or, Die fd)CU'|ten jct}n, the ten finest. It is to be noticed that the emphasis, in these instances, falls upon the word, which is put last. — The words al'le, all ; mau'd)C, several ; Ine'le, many ; je'Der, each, stand before both the numerals, and the adjectives. Adjectives usually follow the cases they govern ; as, Die'fei* ®l)'re nJur'Dig, worthy of this honor ; Deg '35er(>ved)'enit fd)urDi!:j, guilty of the crime ; Dettt ^a'Cev dt}n'(id), like the father ; je^u ^I'Un lang, ten yards long ; fcrei Sue? brcit, three feet broad ; CH. 4. <§ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 201 fed)6 spi^nut fc()ltici*, weighing six pounds. They are likewise frequently put after, when they are connected with nouns that are governed by prepositions ; as, Sg i|t JUV UntCl-()al'nmci fct}V Uli^'(icb, It is very useful for entertainment ; ©cIb|l'JufTict'i'ut}Cit i)^ Jitv CSlucffc'Iii^fcit nucntbcl}V'Ucl), Self-content is indispensa- bly necessary to happiness. Exercises. An old man, as vigorous and active as a youth. Their attacks were violent, but calm was his reply. Six beautiful, spirited horses. The three most dangerous. Many honest men. Tired of the confusion. Recollecting his menaces. old, a(t. reply, "Ztut'otovt, /. as, c'bcufo. beautiful, f(i)bn. vigorous, h'df tig. spirited, feu'vig. active, tbd'ttg. horse, SHof^, n. 3. b. 6. as, a[^. dangerous, gcfdj^v'lid). youth, ^uug'ling, m. honest, ct)V'lic(). attack, 'Zlu'gvitf, ju. 3. b. &. confusion, '35ci-n?iv'rung, /. violent, l^cftig. tired, u'bevbl'uffig. but, a'bcr. menace, 3)i-o'l)ung, /. 1. i>. calm, gelaf feu. recollecting, cin'gcDeiit. CHAPTER IV. PRONOUNS. § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. Pronouns agree with the substantives to which they are prefixed, in gender, number, and case; and the relative cor- responds with the antecedent substantive to which it belongs, in gender and number, the case depending upon other cir- cumstances ; as, ^lau'bct uu^, eu'rcu grcun'Dcu, l>c'vcu 2tiif'; rict)tigfcit it)l' fcnnt, Believe us, your friends, whose sincerity you know. Here, the genitive fcc'reil, whose, depends upon 2lufvid)tig'fcit, sincerity. 202 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [bOOK II. The personal pronouns are not combined with substantives, as the others are, but only bear a reference to them, and, iir that reference, they agree with them in number, and the third also in gender; as, 3il) iriK fud) UUl> \\)VX glcicl) lt)Ol;l, {litcraUtj, I will to you and to him equally well), I am equally a friend to you and to him This is likewise to be observed of pronouns demonstrative and interrogative, when they stand by them- selves ; and the connexion between the relative, and its ante- cedent, is of a similar description; as, '2Bct'cl)CV VCU bci'tCU \}<\t C^ gcfagt' ? Which one of the two has said it? X^CV'jCuijJC, n)cf'd)ei' Dif gcjjeuu'bcv fi^t, The one who sits opposite to you. Observations. — 1. Speaking of any inanimate object, the English use the neuter of the pronoun of the third person, it, all such objects being considered as of the neuter gender ; the Germans, having three distinct genders, even for lifeless things, apply the pronouns accordingly. J^icv i)t ciu UCll'cl' ^\\t, Here is a new hat; 6;v i|l fc(;v fciu, (He) It is very fine; "^Bo l)a'beu @ic il)U gctauft' ? Where did you buy (him) it? ^itt is of the masculine gender ; therefore, the masculine pronoun appertains to it. So, xIBie gffdllt' 3()'ncu Dic'fC '^Ctt'tcntlig ? How do you like this weather ? @ic ijt fel;v un'ailgcuci}!!!, (She) It is very unpleasant. The personal pronoun is in the feminine gender, on account of the substantive. 2)a^ ^fci't> 9cl)t l-cc()t gut, a'kv t^ ijl JU t^it'jig, The horse goes very well, but it is too fiery. The neuter, eg, it, is used because brt^ spfevt) is of that gender. 2. The personal, or reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in the dative case, with the definite article after it, frequently supplies the office of a possessive pronoun ; as, Sr ifiilt'tc x\)\\\ lltit DCf J^ailt>, He beckoned to him with his hand ; 3^cl) l^a'be m i r ^aiJ ^ciu \)C-riTnft', I have sprained niyXeg; Sv l}at fi C I; X>i\\ J^a(^ at>'9cfd)uittcu, He has cut his throat; @ic niad)'cu fic() fcaf^ ic'beu fau'cr, They embitter each other's life. 3. A demonstrative pronoun or an equivalent adjective, is sometimes preferred to the pronoun of the third person, espe- cially in the oblique cases, for the sake both of distinction, and of sound. When a nearer object is alluded to, ^ic'fl'l'/ or bcr Icft'tci'C, the latter, is used ; when a distant one, ie'licr, or Cci* ei*'|tci*C, the former ; or the whole sentence is changed. Exam- ples : iui'fc roav bei SCavoU'uc auf ^.Sefud)', a(g fie Me 9lad)'vid)t CH. 4. ^ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 203 (Xijidt'i Louisa was on a visit to Caroline, when she received the news. In this case, f(e may refer either to Louisa, or to Caroline ; and therefore, if we mean the former, it is better to use jc'ue; and if the latter, fcic'fe; instead of the ambiguous fic. £>ic 2(la(l)'fic()t, tun itjm jcig'te, \X)W feiu '25cl•^cl•'bcu, The indulgence he showed him was his ruin. If in this mstance we mean the ruin of the person to whom the indulgence was shown, it would be better, instead of feiu ^CVfcCf'bcu, to say i)A^ ^(Vta'bcil ^Cti U^'tntn, the ruin of the latter ; but if we refer to the one who showed indulgence, we say, fcaS ^CVDCV's ben tCfo CV'ltei'Cll/ the ruin of the former. 2)cvfc('lH' is sometimes substituted for a personal pronoun ; as, '^cnii man tu @afj'anflo|nng noc^ tnct)V ev^i^t', fo iHt-- tnn'jlct bicfcl'bc, or fic, If we heat the solution of salt still more, it evaporates.* 4. The genitive case of the demonstrative pronoun, t>Ct'/ tic, M'S, viz. tcf'fcn, tiC'ven, tcf fen, in the singular, and DC'rCV or tic'vcn, in the plural, is put instead of the possessive, to avoid confusion ; for example, Si'ccro tie^ Mc 9CRit'\)evfd)n)05 vencn t)c^ Satili'na in fccf'ffu -^vui'fe cvoivei'fcn, Cicero ordered the accomplices of Catiline to be seized in his (Catiline's) house. Here t)Cffcn stands for fetucm, and prevents, at once, all misconception ; but fci'ncm, his, might be referred to Cic- ero. 3)cv Con'fnl wanfcltc fid) an ten ©enat', n?ctf cv anf t)cf-' fen SOintl) tvau'te, The consul applied to the senate, because he trusted to its (the senate's) courage. If it were fei'nen, his, (©enaf being of the masculine gender,) it would be un- certain, whether the courage of the consul, or that of the sen- ate, was intended. 5. It has been observed, already, that the neuter of the pro- noun of the third. person often begins a sentence, in connexion * In the ceremonial style which is used in speaking of per- sons of high rank, the pronouns fciefePben, ljOcl)'ti|efe(tteu, ^5fl)lVt)iefelbcn>and allevl}6d)|l't)iefelt)en, with the verb in the plural after them, are used instead of the personal pronouns. The words t)Od), high ; l}od)jl, highest ; and aUevl)od)|V, highest of all, with which fciefel'bcn is compounded, mark the degree of nobility belonging to the person addressed, or spoken of. 304 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [bOOIC II. with a noun of a different gender and number ; for example, ®^ i)t ciu 93Taun, It is a man ; ©g i)l ci'lic ^xm, It is a woman. Stj here corresponds with a masculine, and a feipinine. However, the Englisli language admits the same mode of ex- pression in these instances. The peculiarity of the German appears in the following ; Se? fui& \)lC'(c 33Tcu'fcl)CU t>a, There are many people; S^ vuft 1>CV ^a'tCf, The father is calling ; Se fom'mcn icu'tc, Peo[)le are coming. This frequently answers to the English t/tcrc ; as, There is a quarrel in the house ; ®6 ijl ciu @tl'Clt ilU ^au'fc ; There is a doubt among the learned, ©^ i|t ciu ^m\'\d idl'tCV tiCU ©clctjv'tcn. Some- times this way of opening a sentence is calculated to give it more effect, than if the subject itself were placed at the be- ginning ; for the attention of the hearer is excited by the ex- pectation of the word which is to follow. It is, therefore, often used with the subjunctive mood, to convey a forcible senti- ment : for example, S^ Ic'bc &a6 '33a'tcrlanb ! (Long) live {the) our country ! Sei f oiu'mc niir hn'nci* yw luVt^e ! Let no one come too near me ! The neuters of the demonstrative pronouns are used in a similar manner; as, 35ic6 (instead of Mc'fc^) ijl mciu gvcuufc, This is my friend ; ^t'm^ mciu §ciu&, That is my enemy ; 2)a6 ftu6 ©olta'tCU, Those are soldiers. 6. In regard to the manner, in which the two relative pro- nouns, tt>cl'd)CV and iifr, are used, it may here be remarked, that the genitive of t)Ct' is, in general, preferred to that of wcl'ftcv ; as, 3)cv 9D?ann, fccf'fen id) <^c^ad)'tc, The man I mentioned ; 3)ie SI^'VC, bc'vcn CV fo »t>UV't»i3 ifl, The honor of which h§ is so deserving; 3)lC SOidh UCV, te'vcu '33ci-t>icu'|lc fO gi'O^ ftufc, Those men, whose merits are so great. — 3)ci* must be made use of, when a vocative case precedes ; as, £) '4!)U/ 1>CV l)U CV/ gives force to the sentence. — The j.article rt(6 is sometimes found before n»cl'dKl% as a mere expletive ; 3)ic grcm'tJcn, ale xod'dn cr|t turj'lid) (iter an'gcfommfu fUiD, The strangers, who have but lately arrived here. Now and then it may have an explanatory force, similar to the Latin quippe qui, but, generally speaking, it is superfluous and improper. 7. The relative pronoun Vod'd)«X, mV(U, WCl'djce, (or btv, iit, tag/) is used in preference to the relative pronoun WtV, CH. 1. ^ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 205 XtH'S, if llie object to which it relates is a distinct one ; but if it is vague or only vaguely referred to, the relative pronoun wcr, »t>iU', should be used. Examples : tn ?0?ami, IDCl'cbcv (or J)Cl*) Dic'fc 'i^at gctljau' ijAt, the man who has done this deed; 3cl) wcie; iuc()t wn biCfc "iljat C|Ct(}au' i)At, I know not who has done this deed ; ®i'ncv vou bci'Dcu niufj et> gCt(}vUl' (>vbcn, rt'6cv id) IBCie nid)t, VOii'ditv, one of the two must have done it, but I know not which ; liVUg, YcaS icf) fat), gcfxcl' miv, All (that) I saw pleased me ; al'le tie 6;l>'(cn, iT)ercl)C ffiv t)ic <2Ba()V'l}eit gcjlOf'ten ftut'/ all the excellent (persons) who have died for the truth. The choice between the two interrogative pronouns, )))ct'd)Cf, tt)Cl'c()C, ircI'd)C6/ and iT>cr, ira^, depends, in the same manner, on the distinctness or indistinctness of the object. Examples : ^ici* finb bvei ®cmdr'tc ; it>el'd)ce gefdUt' fcir am bcf'tcn ? Here are three pictures ; which do you like best ? IBaS mein|t t»n ? What do you mean ? ^cu IPCm VC'tiCjl Ml? Of whom do you soeak 1 8. The Relative Pronoun is, in English, sometimes omitted, and understood : in German it must always be expressed ; as, The man I love, 2>eu SOTauu, t>CU (or irtcl'djcu) id) lie'(>C. With aud) or aitd) itn'mcv, following, it signifies whoever, whosoever, whatever, whatsoever ; as, '^n and) tax 20?ann fciu ittag, Whoever may be the man ; "^BaiJ and) tm'mci' bie goCgC fciu mag, Whatever may be the consequence. 9. The Dative Singular- of the Pronouns of the first and second person, mil", &iv, is, in familiar language, often inserted, merely as an expletive : 2)u bijt miv ciu fd)6'iicu (Scfd'Ic, Thou art a fine fellow ; 3;d) lo'bc miv U\\ ^^i'ux'mwx, I give the preference to Rhenish wine ; 3)a6 mag t)iv Cl'uc §rcu'J>e gcitc'; feu feill ! That must have been a (great) joy ! The plural is also thus found, especially in the second person : Sa6 XOW cuc() ei'ne hi|t ! That was a pleasure ! 4)a6 irav n\i{) cin §e|l i That was a festivity ! Or, in speaking to a person with whom we are not familiar, 2)ag wav 3t}'neu ciu Scjt ! That was a fes- tivity ! The third person likewise is to be met with in another connexion ; as, Sin ^vauf'ev, bev i^m jTavb'/ One of his pa- tients who died : here the personal il^tu, to him, represents, in fact, the possessive his. 10. The Possessive Pronoun is, sometimes, put after the genitive case; as, Deg ^a'tev^ fein 25vu'&n*, the father's his 18 206 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. brother ; it^ ^iia'tu'ii fci'uc SOIut'tcr, the boy's Ins mother ; DCV ^VAU il)V S\lU^, the woman's her child, instead of the father's brother, the boy's mother, the woman's child. In these cases the addition of fciu, fci'UC, iljl', is in most cases useless and inelegant, and ought to be avoided. When, in English, an individual object of possession is to be indicated, out of a greater number of the same kind, the possessive pronoun absolute, with of before it, is placed after the substantive ; as, a friend of mine, a servant of yours, an acquaintance of ours, a book of his. In German this must be differently expressed ; as, Sill gl'CUUt) t)DU mil*, a friend of me, or Si'ncv VOll mci'lKU gvcuutcu, one of my friends: Sin ^^f^icu'tCl• von m\e, a servant of us, or Si'llCf 'OOW Ull'fcni ^C= fctcu'tcu, one of our servants ; St'nct> l^Oll fci'ucu ^.SlVd)cni, one of his books ; or Si'lUT mCl'lKl* gvcilu'bC ; Si'llCV UU'ffVCV* ^cDicu'tcu ; Si'nc^ mci'ncv *Su'd)cv. 11. The Demonstrative t>ie'fev, bic'fe, tic'ffS^/ niay relate to what is past, present, or future. 3)ic'fc 9tad)t,may signify this night, that is to say, the night which is now present, or which is to come, and also last night. 12. The substantive pronouns CtJl^aS, something, and uic()t^/ nothing, are som'etimes used by themselves ; as, CSicb tl}in Ct'Jra^, Give him something ; (Sict \\)\W. nic()t^, Give him noth- ing. St'Jt)a6 is also used adjectively before nouns ; as, Ct'lt»a^ 25rOli, some bread ; and adverbially before adjectives and ad- verbs ; as, Sv IcfauD' ftd) ill ci'iicf ct'iDag mi|5'lid)cu W^t, He found himself in a somewhat uneasy situation ; Sv bciliiumt' ftd) et'lt>ag njim'tcrlid), He conducts (himself) somewhat strangely. 9Zid)t^, never occurs as an adjective except before an adjective in the neuter gender being used as a substantive ; as, Sg i)l iiid)tg ^al/fce (X\\ bic'fcm ^crud)'tc, There is no truth {literally nothing true) in this report. 13. Si'uigC, and ct'(id)C, some, joined with numerals, denote an undetermined excess of the number mentioned ; as, cl'uige or Ct'Iid)C Jiuan'jig ^flinb, some twenty pounds, that is, twenty odd pounds. When prefixed to a hundred, or a higher number, they intimate a repetition of the same ; as, ci'llii^C t}iui'tcvt 5!D?eu'fd)cn, some hundreds of men ; Ct'Ud)e tau'fcut) %^. on, Dat. to do, t()Un, irr. the other, fcCV au'fcCVC. to despise, l>crac()'tCU. to bestow, evt^ei'lcil. danger, ©cfal^v', /. 1. t. here, ^ier. to surround, umi'iug'cn. 208 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [book II. paiiitiiiiT, (J5cma('^l^ n. 3. a. a. bettor, I of for. than, al'o. will), mlt. {Dot.) sucli, |'ol'cl)cr-c-c^. rich, tolMHU-. frame, 5Hal)'mcn, m. 3. a. a. to honor, bed} rcn. supposition, '330VvlUg'fcftung, /. 1. ^ to appear, fi()Ci'UCll. mo.st, am mci'jtcu. probable, inrtt;v'f(t)Cinrtc(). or, o'Dcr. how, irif. to find, fiu'fcCU, irr. pen, gc'OCV, /. 1. C. not, nic()t. pointed, fpi^. sufllciently, gcnU3'. to tell, fvVgcu. (iJat.) that, t>A^. bill of exchange, '^Bedj'fct, m. 3. a. a. to arrive, au'f Ommcil/ irr. (with fcin.) after, nacl)l)cm'. place, ^fa^, jn. 3. b. i\ to searcli, Mivcl)fll'cl)Cll. thoroughly, J.u•U^^'^cl). gentleman, J^cvv, m. 2. b. to mention, cvn)dl}'UCU. (Gen.) none, fci'iicr. of, l>on. (Dat.) the two, bci't>c. difficult, fd^iric'rig. task, m-'bcit, /. i. I). own, cr.acncr-c-ce;. word, <2Bovt, 71. 3. b. i\ work, <2Dfrf, 71. 3. b. t\ much, fct}V. to admire, bciDUU'tcni. relation, '33ef»t>anb'tcv. but, a bci'. night, 9Zacl)t, /. 1. 6. I dream, traumt luiv. to be walking, ^C'ijCU, t7-r. through, Mivcl). room, *®cinacl)', n. 3. b. c. book, *35uc(), It. 3. b. c. to contain, cnttjal'tCll, irr. cause, lU-'fAd)C, /. 1. C. of it, &a\)on'. to know, cvfaf^'vcn. § 2. ARRANGEMENT. The Pronoim either stands in the room of a substanti\e, or is connected with it in the character of an adjective ; and has accordingly either the position of the one or the other. Therefore, when used substantively, it may serve as the subject, or as the object, in a sentence, and is placed accord- ingly. The personal pronouns never occur otherwise than as substantives ; and the demonstrative pronouns occasio7ially assume this character. When the latter are employed as ad- jectives, they occupy the place of the article, and go before any other word, that may be joined with the substantive ; as, !DicYc &vci .c\u'tcn icu'tc, These three good people ; 3c'nc vicf ei'|tcu tap'fcni ?D?vUi ncv, Those four first brave men. The CH. 4. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 209 word all, however, may precede them. — In '3Sa'tCf uu'fci*/ our father, which is the beginning of the Lord's Prayer, it might seem, as if the possessive were put after the substantive, ^a'; ttV ; but im'fcf, is there the genitive plural of the pronoun of the first person, in imitation of the Greek. The personal pronoun, in the accusative case, is commonly put before the dative ; as, ®r gibt C^ miv, He gives it to me ; — C6, the accusative case, before the dative tniv. ©cl)ic'fc ^It if}tn, Send them to him; — ftc, them, preceding i()in, to him.* The dative is found before the object ; as, (Sib mil' C^ ; but not so frequently as after it ; and then it is often contracted in familiar language ; as, mil* C6, into miv^, fciv C6, into t>iv6. Farther, the personal pronoun, in the dative, or accusative, is sometimes placed before the subject, when the verb is at the end of the sentence. "^Bcun miv fcatS @(ucf gflU'tHfll i|t, If fortune is propitious to me ; ^cil bid) tciu ^ZJa'tCL* (icbt, Be- cause thy father loves thee. The relative pronoun has its place, naturally, at the begin- ning of that part of the sentence, to which it belongs. The word ail may sometimes stand before it. Exercises. Those last free Romans. They refused it to him. Grant him his request. As long as misfortune persecuted him. the last, in U^'tt. request, ©cfucfe', n. 3. b. 6. free, fi'et. as long as, fo Ung'e a[S. Roman, SK6'ma*, m. 3. a. rt. misfortune, t>a& Uu'gtucf. to refuse, JDci'gern. to persecute, tJCVfoTgen. to grant, gcrod^'tClU • Book II. Ch. 2. § 2. Rule iv. 18» 210 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. CHAPTER V. VERBS. § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT, A. Persons and Numba's. The verb must agree with its subject in numbar and per- son : as, ^iv lie'bcn i^u wic cv un6 gclicbt' ^at, We love him as he has loved us. Ohsei'vations. — 1 . When the verb belongs to two or more substantives of the singular number, it is commonly put in the plural ; as, iic'bc, ^\\% tiiit* €i'fcvfuc()t finb (}cf tigc ici'tcm fc()vlftCU, Love, hatred, and jealousy, are violent passions. Sometimes, the verb stands in the singular after two or more substantives : for example, 5Dtovl) lint) ^cnru'thmg ^cv'frt)C£ im iau'fcc, Murder and destruction reign in the land. It is a sort of elliptical form, which should be thus supplied, 3Kovl> l;cv'fct)et im iau'DC/ unD 33cv«3u'|hmg t)ci-'fcl)ct im iau'Dc. 2. When the subjects are of different persons, the first per- son is preferred to the second ; and the second to the third : consequently, the verb will be in the first person plural, when one of the subjects is of the first person, and in the second, if there is a second and no first person : for example, 3)u, fcciu 25ni'tci- unt> id) »Boricn fpajtc'vcit gc'(?CU, You, your brother, and I will take a walk. *2Boricu is in the first person plural, because one of the subjects (Ml, t)ciu 35vu'fcCV llUt) id)) happens to be in the first person, namely, id). ©U, I)Ciu ^ni'E>er, Ullb bci'ne ©d)n)ef'tcv fciD ^cu'tc eiu'gffaDcu njov'beu, You, your brother, and your sister, have been invited to-day. @cil>, is the second person of the verb, on account of t)ll, the second person, which takes the lead in the absence of the first. 3. The verb is put in the plural number, with a subject in the singular, in titles of address ; as, Su'vc ©itCcKcnj' l}a'6m bcfot}'lcu, Your excellency has ordered ; Su'vc SO^ajCjldt' (or abbreviated ©n). 9}?a|e|Ut) gcru'^cu, Your Majesty is graciously CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OP THE VERB. 3i . pleased ; S^'l'C (or, according to an antiquated form, 3^'fO) (SluVbCU bcmerten, Your Lordship observes. In the above, ija'bm, gcvu'l^CU, bcmev'tcn, are in the plural number. Per- sons of title, or rank, are sometimes spoken of in this form, even when absent ; as, 2)cv J^CIT 25avou' fillb i)ia gnrc'fcu, My Lord Baron has been here. But persons of good taste always say, 3)ci- J^CfV ^^avou' \\l ijitx Qtvoe'^m, RULE II. The personal pronouns are generally to be expressed. Observations. — L The imperative mood takes no pronoun in the second person, except for the sake of emphasis and dis- tinction. But the third person singular and plural, and the first person plural, cannot be used without the pronoun. See the Conjugation of Verbs. 2. When two or more verbs, of the same person, come to- gether, one pronoun (or substantive) may serve for them" all : for example, '^d) le'fc «U& fitrci'bc, I read and write ; Sv htm ju intv, ging a'bcv bal& n>ic'l>ci' trc^, He came to me, but soon went away again ; 'ilBiu l}rt'6cn 3it}'vc Siu1a^un,<^ evijAl'ttn, tanf cu fill* 3l)'i*c (Sfi'tc, uut) n)cv'l)en iin^ t>a^ '35cv<;;uu'gcu tuact)'= en, ©ic JU bffu'c()Cn, We have received your invitation, thank you for your kindness, and will do ourselves the pleasure of calling upon you ; Scv gciul) t'am, UUt> 'onijtn'U M& kufc, The enemy came, and desolated the country. 3. The pronoun of the first person is sometimes omitted in antiquated and formal language, particularly in addressing persons of superior rank ; as, Sii're ©ua'fccu faun f}icrmit' Dfvftfiycvn, I can herewith assure your Lordship ; iDc'vo @fl)vei'bcu ^a'k ntjai'Ull, I have received your letter. This notion seems to have sprung from an imaginary kind of rev- erence, by which he that spoke, or wrote, was too modest to mention his own person, at the same time with the person spoken to. But this awkward form of affected modesty is going out of use. 4. In familiar language, and in poetry, the pronouns of the first and the second person are sometimes omitted ; as, 5Sin (instead of id) bin) fo ganj verlaffcn ^iev, I am so entirely 212 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [book II. forsaken here ; 35i|l (instead of bi\l l)U) mil' ^llt^ Are you kindly disposed toward me 1 Exercises. Exorbitant riches, and extreme poverty, beget ambition and servility, and undermine the freedom and order of so- ciety. Your father, you, and I, have accepted^ the^ invitation^. You and her youngest brother were classmates. I'rge me no further. Stand thou at his right hand, and let him stand'' at^ his- lefts. Let us go- hence^. Be so kind as to hand me that book. exorbitant, u't^cvtttdffii^. riches, (Plural of) *9f{cic^'= tijum, n. 3. b. c. extreme, du'fer|tei'-e-Cg. poverty, IXx'VMXt^, f. to beget, crjcu'gcn. ambition, ®|)v'9ctj, m. 3. b. servility, UntCVtl^d'tiigtcit, /. to undermine, untcrgva'ben. freedom, §rci'l)Cit, /. order, Drls'nnng, /. society, @ifea'fcl)flft, /. father, ^a'tcr. invitation, ®in't(Vt)Ung, /. to accept, an'nc{}incn, irr. young, *juug. brother, 25vu'l)etr. class-mate, @c^ut'ftrcunt, m. 3. b. 6. to urge, tvSng'en. no, uic()t. further, mx'UX. to stand, |tc'l}CU. at, JU. {Dat.) the right hand, X>'\t SHccft'tC, (an adjective used as a noun, J5*nt>/ hand, being under- stood.) to let, (rtf fen. the left hand, Die iinf'C, (an adjective used as a noun). to go, 3c'l)cn. hence, \)ou f}iu'ttcn. so, fo. kind, f^u'tig. as to, miD. to hand, vei'cl)cn. (Imperat.) book, *33uc(), 71. 3. b. e. B. Tenses. 1. To signify past time, the German language has one ab- solute tense, the Perfect ; and two relative tenses, the Imper- fect and the Pluperfect. The Perfect tense is commonly employed to express an action past, without any particular reference to other events ; CH. 2. <§ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 213 as, Sr IjAt ficb gcbcf fcvt, He ha^ become better , 5)ie @d)if fe toon 3[u'liicu ftnt> au'gcfommcii, The vessels from India have arrived. The two relative tenses are used to denote an event in reference to another. The Pluperfect indicates an event in its relation to another successive event ; as, 2ict) irav faum au'gct'Pmmcu (pluperfect), a(iJ Ccv ^rico, cvfldvt' HMIV'^C, I had scarcely arrived when war was declared. The Imperfect designates an event in its relation to another, which is either past, or cotemporary, or correlative («'. e. con- nected by the relation of cause and effect.) Accordingly, with respect to prt5^ events, we cannot say, 3d) 1t»av hium au'Acfi-Miimcu, a(g ^cv ^ricg cvfldvt' lt^!^v'^cu i|t (perfect), but \\Q nmst say, cvflrtVt' IfllV'tC. — If those two events, my arrival, and the declaration of war, are to be represented as contem- poraneous, we ought to say, 3(t) hxut gcva'Dc au, (^U fccv ^vicg cvfldvt' Ifllv'tC, I just arrived when war was declared. Cor- relative events also are to be expressed in the same manner ; as, 2)a i(h fci'nc (Scfiu'nung t'anu'te, tvau'te id) il)m nicfct, As I knew his character, I did not trust him. Sometimes the choice of the perfect or imperfect depends on euphony. 2. In the historical style, the present tense is frequently substituted for the imperfect, to enliven the representation. This is sometimes done in English, but more seldom than in German. 3. The present tense is occasionally applied to a future action. 3id) VCi'fc inov'gcu ab, I (shall) set off to-morrow ; 3n tvci QOBod)'cu fc'l)cu @ic mid) it>ic '^cv t)iev, In three weeks' time you (will) see me here again ; 3d) t'om'ttlC glctd) n)ie't»CV, I (shall) come back immediately. 4. The imperfect subjunctive is frequently used for the simple conditional ; as, 3d) 1T'luifd)'tC, CV fd)Vic'be miv, (in- stead of, ®v iruv'l>c imv fd)vci'bcn,) I wish he would write to 5. The pluperfect subjunctive is frequently used instead of the compound conditional ; as, xB3cnu cv an'gcf cmmcu xok'Xt, fo t;dt'tc man miv z€ ol^'iic B^o'ffl gcfcbvic'bcu (instead of ©0 n)uv'i)C man miv t^ ot^'ne ^'^ci'fd 9cfd)vic'bcu Ija'ticn,) If 214 SYNTAX OP THE VERB. [bOOK II he had arrived, they would without doubt have written it to me. C. The perfect is often used for the compound future ; as, ©o^a(^' id) fci'ncu (Scg'ncv gc()6vt' (^a'bc (instead of gct)6vt' l}a'= 6cn wcr'fc), votv'tt id) mci'ncn Sutfc()hi|5' faffcn, As soon as I have heard (shall have heard) his adversary, I shall form my resolution. 7. In quoting, the verb of the sentence quoted is generally put in the present, perfect, or future, though the imperfect or pluperfect should precede. Ex. 3cl) \)Cvflc()'crte iljttt t>af, tv fid) tv'rc, I assured him that he was mistaken ; @ic frtg'tc ibltt l>ovau6', cv voa'tc fid) nid)t glurf'Ud) ful^'lcu, She foretold him that he tvould not feel happy ; Su bcl^aup'tCtC, CV fci hm^ genJC'ffH; He asserted he had been sick. Exercises. He has begun"* his^ great^ work^, but not^ yet^ finished. He had packed"* alP his^ things^, and was about to depart, when he received^ this^ news^. Had you learned^ our^ language^ before you came"* to^ this- country^ ? When he saw^ the^ consequences® of^ his^ conduct^, he repented (tvas he penitent), and endeavoured to repair (to^ make^ good?) the^ injury^ which^ he"* had^ done^. When he arrived, she® had^ already died. As their whole business was"* carried^ on-^ upon^ credit®, [so) they^ must^ fail when the political affairs of the country were changed. If he had3 known® it^, he^ would^ have"* come^ with^ me'''. When I shall'* have^ learned^ his^ decision®, P wilP com- municate^ it''' to^ you^. great, gvc?. to pack, ^>ac'h'n. work, "IBcrf, n. 3. b. b. about, im SScgviffe. to begin, bcgiu'UCU, irr. to depart, ab JU VCi'fCtt. but, a'bcv. when, afg. yet, nod). news, 9uxd)'rid)t, /. to finish, Ctt'l)i~gett. to receive, fvtjal'tCU, irr. all, oX'U. language, ©pva'd)C, /. thing, <^, n 3. b. C. credit, £vct>it', 7n. 3. b. to come, fom'mcn, irr. to carry on, ful}'rcn. consequence, ScTgc, f. 1. C. . so, fo. conduct, ^^ctVvX'gcu, n. 3. a. I must, id) tmi|5, 7mx. to see, fc'bcu, irr. to fail, ja^I'Ullfdt^ig JCCV'Dett. to repent, VCU'ig »PCl-'&cn. political, cf fcut(id). to endeavour, fid) kmu'^Cii. affair, 2iu'gclccicut)cit, /. 1. l>. injury, ©d)a'Dcn, m. 3. a. a. to be changed, fid) du'tCVlU to do, tt}UU, irr, if, WCUIl. torepair, gut \md)'m, to know, Wiffcit, viix. to arrive, au'fangcn. with, mit. (Dat.) already, bcvcit^'. when, fotH\ll>'. to die, llCf'bCU, irr. (with fciu). decision, Sntfd)ei't»ung, /. as, M, to learn, evfal^'fCU, irr. whole, ganj. to communicate, mift^cilctt. C. Moods. The Indicative and Imperative require no elucidation. The Subjunctive is to be used ; 1. When a state of uncer- tainty is implied. It is, therefore, to be found after some conjunctions, which convey that idea. Such are in many cases ITCUU, if; al& ircun, as if; c(v whether ; l>amit', in order that ; fca|5, that. But the subjunctive mood must not be supposed to be governed by those conjunctions. It solely depends upon the uncertainty, or doubtfulness, with which the action of the verb is conceived. Thus the subjunctive occurs after M^, when any one of these verbs precedes : Int'tcii, to beg ; va't^cn, to advise ; cvmal)'ncn, to exhort ; bcfov'gCtt, to ap- prehend ; flird)'tcn, to fear ; fd)ei'nen, to appear, to seem ; bcfcillg'eil/ to make conditions; tt>un'fd)cn/ to wish; tfollcn, to desire ; Jtrei'fclu, to doubt, &C. For, when we beg, advise, exhort, apprehend, fear, wish, desire, that a thing may be done, a degree of uncertainty exists, as to the event. This is farther manifest from the verb fa'gcu, to say, and similar ones ; as, aut'tDOVtcu, to answer ; bct^aup'tCU, to maintain, &c. When that which is said or maintained, remains, in our opinion, liable to doubt, the subjunctive should follow after 216 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. t>a|5 : for example, 3Qiftn fagt mil', l>rt^' c^ 3cl)on'ncvt (}a'te, They tell me that there has been thunder ; Un'fcv grcunl> bt- ()aup'tct, ^a|? ^ic^ ciu fnicl)t'barc^ 3al)v fctu voa'i>e, Our friend maintains that this will be a fruitful year. When, on the other hand, the idea is considered as positive, and unquestionable, the indicative must be made use of; for instance, when a person speaks of himself; as, 3cl) bcljaup'tc, t>Ai^ c^ t»al)V \\\, I main- tain that it is true. Here the subjunctive would be wrong, because the notion is strongly affirmative. If what a person maintains be not certain in his own conception, he should look for another expression, such as, id) <\(au'bc, id) t»cnt"c, I believe, I thmk. 3d) iT>ci6, taf^ cv Mi} UV't»C e6 tt)lin, WCllU C6 inog'Ud) ird'VC, I should do it, if it were possible. Here Xta'vt, the verb belonging to IDCllU, is in the subjunctive mood, because the preceding sentence contains a conditional future, / should do it. It is evident, that the subjunctive rests upon the opinion that is formed of the certainty or uncertainty in the action of the verb. It is a natural consequence of this, that, in some circumstances, it may be questioned, whether the indicative or the subjunctive be more proper ; the de- cision will be according to the point of view, in which the sentence is contemplated. 2. The subjunctive mood is used when WtWW or fcaf is to be supplied, in the following cases. a. The subjunctive must be used at the beginning of a sentence when the conjunction )r>cun, if, is to be supplied be- fore the imperfect or pluperfect tense; as in the following, tra'fC id) an 3l)'VCV ©tcClc, were I in your place, instead of WfUll id) an 3l)'rci- @tct'fc »rd've, if I were in your place ; l^dt'te cv t>ie @d)dt'jc 1>C6 £v6'fu^, had he the treasures of CrcEsus, for WCliU Cf tiic ©d)dt'je t»Cg Cv^'f"*^ i)dt'te, if he had the treasures of Croesus. — But when the conjunction »t>Cim is to be understood before the present tense, it must be in the indicative mood. Examples ; *5i|? tn rcid), fo gib Xfkl ; bijl Ml atm, fo gib fciu <2De'ui9C6 gev'UC, if thou art rich, give much ; if thou art poor, give thy little cheerfully. J^6're|l Ml Wftg CU. 6. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 217 hb'^t^, l»rt^ fa'ge xnd)t liad), If thou hearest any thing bad, do not repeat it. b. The subjunctive is generally used when t(l^ is to be sup- plied ; as, Sr glaiibt, C6 fci nicl)t m^g'fici), He thinks (that) it is not possible ; 30ian fagt, t»cv ^ai'fcv t^a'be gvic'tcu gemacl)t', They say (tliat) the Emperor has made peace. 3. It frequently has a potential signification, expressing, either a wish ; as, X)Cl* ^im'mct gc'bc i^, May heaven grant it ; (Sott bti)\\'U, God forbid ; — or a permission, and concession ; as, Qt ge'l}C 5t»oi}in' Cl* itol'fc, Let him go where he pleases : — or a supposition ; as, Sg ifd'vc bcf'fcr, iPcim mv 3t)'rcu 5Hat() befofgt' l)at'tcu, It would be better if we had followed your advice ; 3)ic gvaiijo'fcu t)dt'tcu t)te ©cl)(ac()t uid)t gciDou'ucn, wenu fie nid)t ci'nc fo gvo'ff ii'bcrmacbt an icu'tcn gcl^abt' (}dt'; tCll/ The French would not have gained the battle, if they had not had such superior numbers : — or surprise, or wonder ; as, ^^t'U icf)g tOCft nicl)t gcglaubt' ! I should not have thought it! The Infinitive Mood occurs either without the preposition JU/ or tvith it. a. Without Jit. 1. When it stands by itself and unconnected, for example, in a vocabulary ; as, Ue'bcU/ to love ; fe'^en, to see. 2. When it is in the room of a substantive, either as the subject, or as the object ; as, 5Bcvfprcc()'en Ullb cvful'lcu f(nt> jtDci Vcrfdjic'Dcue ©ad)'en, To promise and to fulfill are two different things ; 2)a6 UCii'uc id) fcd)'tcn, That I call to fight, or fighting ; £)a6 ^ci'fe id) gviiu'fam i)cvfv\t)'vcu, That I call to act cruelly, or acting cruelly. 3. When for the purpose of laying peculiar stress on the simple action or condition expressed by the verb, the infinitive is used without art auxiliary ; as, 3id) mei'uc^ 25vu'l>cr6 ifiil'j in n\d)t evfcn'uen? 3d) ftc nid)t crfcu'iien? I not recognise the children of my brother 1 I not recognise them ? 4. After the verbs Hw'nm, to be able ; mb'^tn, to like ; 19 218 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK H. laf fCH/ to permit, or cause ; bliv'fcu, to be permitted ; fol'tcil, to be obliged ; lt)D( Icil, to will ; muf fcil, to be forced ; and U)C^'^Cn, when it is tlie auxiliary to the future tense ; as, 3c() U)Cl''l>C fra'gcu, I shall ask; and similar verbs. 5. After the verbs, bci'fcn, to bid ; ^eCfcn, to help ; U^'l'Cll, to teach; tff'uCU, to learn; l)6'VCn, to hear; fc'l}CU, to see; ftl^'lcu, to feel. For example : 3fl) l}iciJ tl^U ciC'l}CU, I bid him go ; Sv t)ilft mil' fcl)fCi'bcu, He helps me to write, that is, he assists me in writing; 5)Cf ^a'tCV (c()rt l>ag Stiub ICffll, The father teaches the child to read; IBit Icv'UCU tau'JCU, We learn to dance ; 3cl) t}6'l'C flC filuVi'U, I hear them sing ; 3c() fc'l}C i^lt f Cin'mcn, I see him come or coming ; ajie'rcii; as, 2>f() fa()'l'e fpajic'VCU, I drive out for exercise, for an airing. ^iu't>CU, to find, is occasionally followed by the infinitive, where the English put the participle, ©v faufc fte fd)(a'fcil/ He found them sleeping or asleep ; 3icl) failt) ^ag 25ud) auf tcm Xi^dYi lic'^cu, I found the book lying upon the table. The participle might here be used, even in German. (gc'l)en, to go; as, 3cl) .^c'tjc fpajtc'VCU, I take a walk; ®i* gcl}t fd)(a'ffn, He goes to bed, (literally, he goes to sleep) ; and with some other verbs. J^rt'tfn, to have, in these and similar phrases ; ®l' t^at AUt VCi'feu, It is easy for him to travel ; @ic (jcl'bcu 0(Ut fpvcctj'cil, You may well say so ; ^iv l^a'bcu ©fll) auf ^in'fcn jU'^CU, We have money out on interest. ©id) le'<^cn, to lay one's self down, with fcfcfa'fcjl/ to sleep ; as, 3*'^) tc'flC ittic^ fcl){a'fen, I lay myself down to sleep. en. 5. § 1.3 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 219 SOtarf)'cn, when it signifies to cause, or occasion ; as, Sv inacl)t micli Uxdyen, He makes me laugh ; Sv macl)t mid) rccriicu, He makes me cry. 9tci'tcn, to ride on horseback, with fpajic'VCU ; as, 3;cl) vci'tc fpajic'VCll, I take a ride. 'Xtjinx, to do, with nic()tg al^, after it ; as, Sic grau ti)Ht md)t'S ai^ janf'cn, The woman does nothing but quarrel ; 3)Cf CO?anu tl}Ut uid)ti? aliJ fd)ertc», The man does notliing but scold. 6. With JU. 1. After substantives and adjectives, when in English either to, with the infinitive, or of, with the participle, is used : for example, after a substantive, iujl JU fpic'lcU/ an inclination to play ; M'S '^nc\nh'^tn @ic jU fc'bcil, the pleasure of seeing you ; tcr ;lDunfd) Qdobt' JU ircv'tCU, the wish of being praised : — after an adjective, 3d) war fvol} mci'UCU §rcun& me'-- tn JU fc'l)fU, I was happy to see my friend again ; mil'^C JU t^e'^cn, tired of standmg ; ncu'gicvig JU tftf'fcu, curious to know ; bcgic'rig JU Cvfa^'vcU/ anxious to be informed. 2. After verbs, when purpose or design is intimated. 3id) giug ju item SOtau'nc, itjm l»ic Adye i)or'ju)k{(cu m\i> mit it>m i)ai'U'bcv JU f|.H*cd)'cu, I went to the man, to represent the thing to him, and to converse with him about it. And here the par- ticle um is frequently joined with ju, which expresses design Ptill more distinctly ; as, iic'kt Mc Uiv'bdt, um glucf'Ud) jU felu, Love labor (in order) to be happy. 3. After the following verbs and others of a similar signifi- cation : au'fvtuplCU, to begin ; auf t)6vcu, to cease ; btfdyUn, to command: bit'tfU, to beg; cnt>av'tcu, to expect; I}Offcu, to hope; fili-d)'tCU, to fear; M-0't)ru, to threaten; yjIc'aiCU, to be wont ; bt()aup'tCU, to maintain ; cvfcu'UCU, to acknowledge, with the infinitive in the perfect tense ; as, Si* CVtcuut , flil) gdvi't' JU l)a'bcu, He acknowledges himself to have been jnis- taken : bcfcu ncn, to confess, with the infinitive perfect; as, a^ JU fvV-' 220 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II, gen, I have something to tell you : fctll, to he; as, S^ i)^ JU fltVc()'tCll, It is to bo feared ; »rif' fcu, to know how ; as, Sf J»ci6 e^ JU macbcil, He knows how to do it; and these verbs; ljc('; fcii/ nut'jcii, ffom'mcn, when they signify to be of use, to an- swer a purpose. 4. The prepositions ol}'UC, without, and \latt or au|latt', in- stead of, require ju before the infinitive. The English con- strue these with the participle ; as, cij'nc JU wiffcil, without knowing, (French, sans savoir) ; '^Att Jll fcMa'fcu, instead of sleeping ; au)IvUt' JU fcl)VCi'bcn, instead of writing. In English, the infinitive, with to, is put after some verbs, where the Germans prefer the conjunction Jia^/'with the in- dicative or subjunctive : for example, / knew him to he the man, ^ft) iruif tc, tatj cr Cci* 50?aiiu war ; They thought me to be mistaken, ©tc t)acl)'tcn, faj^ id) mid) iv'vctC ; He believed it true, Sr cilaiib'tc, \>a% efi xoiCqx n)d're, — The infinitive with to, is also employed by the English, after such words as, when, where, how, lohich, lohat, whose, whom, when certain verbs, such as, to know, to tell, to be told, and the like, precede. For example. You know how to write it ; I will tell you what to do ; Teach me what to say. In German, the indicative or subjunc- tive of some helping verb, such as, muf5, felt, must, ought, shall, is to be made use of; as, ©if »riffcn, n>ic @ic c^ fd)i-ei'- bcu muf fen. You know how you must write it ; 3;d) n>\[l 31)'j nen fvVgcn, \va^ @te t()un miiffeu, I will tell you what you must do ; iel)'ven ©ie tnicf), voaS id) fa'gcu foil, Teach me what I shall say.* The Infinitive, with JU, is used, where the English employ the participle, with a preposition, such as of, from, and others. For example, t>a6 "^ScrgniVgeu ei'nen gveuuD ju fe'l^en, the pleasure of seeing a friend. Observations. — 1. The Infinitive of the active voice, after certain verbs seems to have a passive signification, while in * In a sentence like this. He knows hoto to make it, if the ob- ject is to express the simple fact that he can make it (no matter hoto), we say, in German, ®v tDei^ eg JU mad)'eu; but if the manner be the prominent object, we say, Sv TOeig IDie er e^ mart)'en foil (or mu^"). en. 6. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 221 fact this peculiarity arises from the omission of the immediate object of these verbs, iaff iijll ni'fcil, Let him call ; may also signify, Let him be called, in which cage it stands for kn^ }('- manicn i^U nt'fcn, Let sotne one call hfm. The same remark applies to other similar expressions ; as, 3)cv 5Hicl)'tCl' l)ic^ it)U tnu'Dcn, The judge ordered him to bind, also to be bound , QBiv fa'l}Cn it)n fc'ola'gcn, We saw him beating, abo beaten. In phrases like these, Sic'fcv ltm'|lant> i)1 JU CVird'gcu, literally, this circumstance is to consider, for, to be considered, the infinitive is used as a noun ; as, 2)ic'fcr Um'tlailt) ijl jum (or ]n inn) Svtrd'gcn, This circumstance is for considering, i. e. worth considering or to be considered. But in the use of this con- struction, care must be taken to avoid ambiguity. 2. The Infinitive of the verbs fcuv'fcil, fodcil, fou'llCU, mo'= gen, laffcn, muf'fcn, woi'kn, 1^6'vcu, fe'(}cn, is substituted for the Past Participle, when an infinitive precedes. 3^^) t)»>Vbe eg nic()t t\)\\\\ MU''fcu (for gc&UVft'), I was not allowed to do it : ®u l;dt'tcit fom'mcu fol'lcn (for OiCfolIf), You ought to have come; Sv (}at ciu J^aui? baii'cn laf'fcn (for gcTaffcn), He has caused a house to be built; 3cl) t^a'bc i^n au'()6veu muf'feu (for gcmulft'), I have been obliged to listen to him ; ^kt'UW Wir aug'9Ct)CU if ol'tcn (for gcmoKt'), Had we been inclined to go out ; 3it l;a'be i()u rei'tcu )V(}cn (for gefe'^cu), I have seen him ride. — ict)'vcn, to teach, and Icv'uen, to learn, like- wise allow the use of this infinitive ; though the past par- ticiple is, at present, more frequently employed ; as, Sv tjat mid) ((trci'bcil lcl)'vcu, or gcfcijvt', He has taught me to write ; 3cl) ^a'bc bci il}m jeic^'ncn (ei-'ucn, or gclcvnt', I have learnt of him to draw. RULE III. The participle, besides its connexion with the verb, is, in Syntax, liable to the rules of the adjective. There are some participles, which may be said to represent pronouns, having a demonstrative signification. Of this de- scription are : bcfagt', aforesaid ; gctacl)t', fVWd^nt', aforemen- tioned ; genannt', aforenamed; foCgcnD, the following. The Present Participle, with JU, to, before it, and used as an adjective, expresses futurity, with the implied notion of necessity or possibility; as, cin forg'fditig ju t)evmci'i>en^er 19* 222 SYNTAX OP THE VERIJ. [bOOK II. ^m'^Ian^, a circumstanco carefully to be avoided ; cin (cic^t JU V>Cl•uui'^Cll^cr Um'|lauJ>, a circumstance that may easily be avoided. The Pa<.t Participle of certain Verbs, is united with the verb foin'mcu, to come, in an active signification, to express the manner of coming; as, Si* f6mmt gcrif'tcn, He comes rid- ing on horseback ; Sr tOmmt c 58cvtn'cct;'cu \r»cl'(cu wit gral^u'bct iriffcn, We would know this crime punished, that is, we wish to have it punished. Cases Absolute. The accusative case joined to past parti- ciples is taken absolutely. Examples : t>ag ®cf(cl)t' uari) C'f'ten cict'c()rt', his face being turned to the east ; fcCU 23firf uacl) t»cm 33a'tcv(antc ainrcu'tct, his looks being turned towards his country ; ^tc Zfu'cicn iiad) ^cm JP>im'mcl ,qcrid)'tct, his eyes being directed towards heaven ; tic'fcu Um'tia^^ l>PVail^'9Cfcl^t, this circumstance being supposed ; tin (S'tmnn' al>'gcvccl)nct, the gain being deducted ; t)icg au^'gcnommcil, this being excepted. Sometimes the past participle is substituted for the impera- tive mood ; as, SHo'ffti auf ^cu "^Dcg gcih'cut', uni> ti& JPiarm^ \)crgcffcu ! Strew roses on the path, and forget sorrow ! 2)ie ©tll'be auf'gcrdumt ! Clear the room ! in which examples 9C|H'eiU', iJergeffcu, and auf gcvaurat, are past participles. Exercises. I asked you if you had^ been^ there^. They praise us that we might^ return-' the^ compliment*. I always^ thought^ that he would^ please^ you.^. Promise me that you wilP follow^ him^, if he sets^ you^ the' example^. If you had^ known^ himi, you could not^ have^ as^ij^i^^feh' a^ question^, ""jj?^ 'i^ Are you satisfied ? then let us go. ^'^.ff0[il^^' (May) wisdom be your guide. Had I not^ told"* it^ to^ them^, they would have^ no* guilt*. To come, to see, and to conquer, were almost simultaneous acts. I saw him paint, and you heard him sing. She does nothing but weep and lament. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 22a It avails nothing to^ say^ it^, if we (do) not venture to^ do^ it^, without waiting^ any^ longer^. I know not how to tell her, without hurting^ her^ feelings^. You have wished to^ see'* it^ accomplished^ ; it is now no more to be altered. Rise up, and move^ your^ hands^. to ask, fi-a'gen. if, ob. there, ba. to praise, lo'btn. that, tvtmit'. compliment, Tlv'tl^hit, f. to return, evwic'fcern. I may, id) lUvlg, mix. to think, t>cui"cn/ mix. always, im'tncr. that, Mf). to please, gcfaMcil/ irr. to promise, feevfprccfe'eit/ irr. (Dat.) to follow, foCgcn. (Dot.) I will, id) tt>i(I, viix. example, 25ei'fpie(, n. 3. b. b. to set, ge'bcn, irr. to know, fcu'iun, mix. I can, id) faun, mix. to ask such a question, ci'ltC fol'dje Sra'ge t^un, irr. satisfied, bcffic'bigt. to let, laf fen, to go, gc'l)en. wisdom, xJBeig'^eit, /. guide, (Sclei'm-in/ /. to tell, fa'gcn. no guilt, fci'ne @d)utb. to come, fom'men. to see, fe'^cn. to conquer, fte'gCtt. almost, bcina'(}c. simultaneous, gkid)'jeitig. act, J^anD'huig, /. 1. b. to paint, ma'lcn. to hear, b6'reiu to sing, fiug'cn. nothing, uid)t^. but, al6. to weep, njci'nen. to lament, fla'gcn. to avail, JTOm'mcn. to venture, ma'gcn. without, ob'ne. any, tl-'C(eu&. long, (aug. to wait, vcxxt'tm. to know, n:>if'fcn, mix. how, iric. feelings, (Scfllfjl', n. 3. b. b. to hurt, t»Ci-(ct'jen. to wish, n)uu'fd)cn. to accomplish, t)0llbting'en,mex. now, nun. more, mct)r. to alter, du'Dcru. to rise up, vauf|te()Cn/ irr. your, def. art. hand, *J5au^, /. 1. b. to move, vc'gen. ^J, D. The Passive Kb*£%.- The passive voice of neuter verbs isj^^ployed impersonally, I in Latin, when the subject of the veirll'is to be expressed in 224 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. an indeterminate manner. Ex. ^^ mvl> gcfau'fcu, They run (Lat. ciirritur) ; S^ XCWK'Xii gctaujt', There was dancing (Lat. saltabatur). E. The Auxiliaries. When the same auxiliary belongs to more than one verb, it need be only once employed ; as, 3c() (}vVtc i€ oicl)5vt' llUt) gcfc'l;cn, I have heard and seen it ; ^ii* l)a'bcu jUcfcfeviCku, gclc'fcn, UU^ gcfpvod)'CU, We have written, read, and talked. It would encumber the sentence, to express the auxiliary more than once in these examples. The English language co- incides in this with the German. But the latter has a peculiarity, which is not found in most other tongues : namely, that in the perfect and pluperfect tenses the auxiliaries tja'bcu and fcilt, when placed at the end of a sentence, may be omitted. For example: 50?ciu gi'cuub (;at wiv gcfagt', t»ci|5 cv 3t)'fcn SSricf gele'fcu, My friend has told me, that he has read your letter. After gclc'fcn, the auxiliary t}rt'(>C, is to be understood. It would be quite as well, if it were expressed, though sometimes the omission has a good effect, by preventing the monotonous repetition of the same auxiliary word. The auxiliary Wff'tcn, though at the end of the sentence, can never be left out. Exercises. The trial is finished, and the sentance is passed. He would have^° been^ taken^ to^ account^ and'* judged^ by^ our6 law''', if he had^ not^ judged^ him^self^ and^ abdica- ted^ his^ power'''. As soon as he had^'' arranged^ his^ affairs^, and"* taken^ leave^ of^ his^ friends''', he^^ departed^^. trial, gftc(l)t'|U*f it, m. to abdicate, iiic'l)cvlcc|cn. to finish, 'cu't>CU. as soon as, fo balD al^. sentence, Ur't()fi(, n. affair, 2(n'9c(c(^cnl}cit,/. 1. l>. to pass, fdClcn. to arrange, bei'ifl)'ti9C«. to take to account, JWV from, \:)^\\. {Dat.) SKccl)'cnfct)aft jic'ljen, irr. his friends, Die ©ci'iiigeu. by, nact). {Dat.) leave, 2tt>'fft)icD/ m. 3. b. 6. law, (gcfc§', n. 3. b. l\ to take, nel)'mcn, irr. to judge, fic^'ten. . to depart, ab'vcifeii. power, SOZftC^t, /. CH 8. ^ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 225 F. The Verb governing Cases. RULE I. The Nominative case, as the object, is required, 1. By the following verbs: feiU/ to be ; ircv'tCll/ to become; bici'bcn, to remain ; ^ci'fcil, to be called, to bear a name ; fcl)ei'iicn, to seem. Examples : gvicD'virf) ir^av cin gvo'fci* §clEi'l)cn\ Frederic was a great general; 30iciu ^2ni'&CV i|lt ©olDat' gCJrDl•'^cn, My brother has become a soldier: QJv blcibt Ciu X^jOX, lt>ic ft im'mcr WAt, He remains a silly man, as he always was ; £>lC'fcr SOtcufd) l}eijl t)ev 0'bcv|U, This man is call- ed the colonel ; S^ fd)Ciut ciu gu'tcr '^U\\\, It seems a good plan. The nouns, after the verbs, are here in the nomina- tive case. 2. By the passive voice of such verbs, as, in the active, govern a double accusative : for example, ncu'UCn, to call, to name — Si* irivfc ciu cl)v'(ic()ef 3D?anu gcnaunt', He is called an honest man ; ()CifCU, to call, to nanie; tau'fcu, to christen — 2)aij ^xwt) i|t J^ciu'firl) gctauft' irov'&cn, The child has been christened Henry ; (J^CtH'vict), is here the nominative case ;) fclKl'tcn, to abuse — Sv n)ivD cin 25ctviVgcv gcfcfcot'tcn, He is abused as a cheat ; fd)im'pfcu, to insult by opprobrious ap- pellations — Sv rcavD cine SDTcm'mc gcfd^tmv'ft'/ He was insulted as a coward. Some verbs occur, in English, with two accu- satives in the active, and two nominatives (namely, one as the subject before, and the other as the object after the verb) in the passive voice ; where, in German, the second accusative is construed with a preposition. Such are the verbs, to ap- point, to choose, to declare, and the like : for example, ©l" 1)1 jum 3)0C'tC>r gcmad)t' irov'Dcu, He has been made a doctor ; Sv \\l jum 5Kid)'tCl- cnuiUUt' wcr'ltcu, He has been appointed judge ; ©r itiuv'te fuv ci'ucu ©pi^'tnibcu evtidvt', He was declared a thief. Here the prepositions ju and fuv, are required, while in English the nominative case is sufficient. Sometimes the verb Icl^'VCll, to teach, is joined with a double accusative, in the active voice; as, jc'manDCU SOTllfif' Ic()'l*cu, to teach a person musick. The dative also is used with the verb (clj'l'cn — ci'UCm Ct'Jraij Ic^'fCU, to teach something to a person. 3. The reflective verbs are followed by a nominative, after 226 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. afg, or wic, «5; for example, Sf bctvagt' fid) a(g ciii l-crf)t'' fd)aifcucr DDTauu, lie conducts himself o*- an honesit man; Sv jei(l)'nct fid) aU ciu gu'tcv ©olDat' aut?, He distinguishes him- self as a good soldier. But it must be observed, that this nominative case is not governed by tlie reflective verb. The phrase is elliptical, and at full length, would be, Sf 6ctvac\t' fid), i\H ciu vcd)t'fd)atfcucv SOIauii fid) bctraj^t', lie conducts himself, as an honest man conducts himself; Si* jcid)'uct fid) (lU^, altf ciu gu'tcv @olDat' fid) aii6'jcid)uct, He distinguishes himself, as a good soldier distinguishes himself The same takes place after verbs which are not reflective; as,!£)cv StluVbc fd)rcilH wk ciu 9[Hauu, The boy writes as a man ; for Scv ^\u\'b( fd)vcibt, irie ciu CDiauu fd)i-cibt, The boy writes as a man writes. If the case be referred to the reflective verb, it must be the accusative : for example, Sr jcij^t fid) al6 ci'UCU tud)'tigcu §cll)'i;cvvu, He shows himself an able general. Exercises. Although he seems'' to' be^ a^ man^ of^ talenf*, he^ vvilP never become^ an^ artist-, but remain^ a^ bungler^. He was at first called^ a^ great^ man^, but afterward insult- ed3 (as) a^ villain^. By the mark (tcJiich) they put^ upon^ this- pawn^, they'' made^ him a knight. He first^ conducted^ himself^ toward others as an unprin- cipled man, and then^ treated^ himself^ as his bitterest enemy. although, obglcic^' villain, '33crbrcd)'cv, m. talent, 2(u'(acCfU. to put, au'bviUj^CU, inix. bungler, ©tum'pcv, m. to make, mad)'cn. to remain, blci'bcu. knight, ©pviug'cv. at first, JUCV|V. to conduct one's self, ftc^ be-' great, gvo^. tva'v^CU, irr. to call, ucu'ucu, mix. first, lim]V. afterward, nad)'()cr. iovirard, gc'gcn. (Ace.) CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX 0» THE VERB. 227 Others, au't>evc. then, iAlin. unprincipled, 9Ctt>if'fcu(o^. bitter, tnt'tCV. to treat, bcl^viu'^chl. enemy, gcin^/ m. 3. b, h. The Genitive case is governed, 1. By verbs which in English are generally followed by the preposition of; as, au'frUoicn/ to accuse of; fce^uv'fcu, to be in need of, (sometimes construed with the accusative case) ; befcbul'DigCU, to accuse of, to charge with; bcvau'bcu, to rob ; flbCfl^c'ttCU, to disburden ; wfiv'btgcu, to deign, to think worthy of The thing that we are accused of, in need of, charged with, robbed of, freed from, thought worthy of, is put in the genitive case, and the person in the accusative : for example, je'inauDcii taS 93Iov'^C6 an'tlagen, to accuse a person of mur- der ; jc'maut>cu ta '33cvvdtf)evci' bffc()urt>i)^cn, to charge a person with treachery ; jc'mant>en fci'ueti ^cvm6'oicn^ Icrau'j bcu, to rob a person of his fortune; jc'mauDCU t>a SOIlV^C libCfljc'bcn, to free a person from- trouble ; jc'uiautcu ^vo'fcr St/vc n)iu*'t>igcu, to think a person worthy of great honor. 2. The following take the genitive case of the thing, and the accusative of the person : but they may also be placed in some other construction ; gcroal^'vCU, to grant ; eutbI6'ffn, to strip ; cntlaffcu, to dismiss ; cntla't'Cn, to disburden ; tntW' tigcU/ to free from, to acquit, to disencumber; CUtfct'jfU, to displace ;• iibcrfiil^'vcu or ubcfwci'fcn, to convict ; ubcvjcu'c|en, to convince ; t)cvficl)'cvu, to assure ; l^ertDci'fcil, to banish. For example : jc'ntaut»cn fei'ue^ 'IBun'f<.()Cg gcirvtl^'rcu, to grant to a person his wish, that which he wishes : ci'UCU SOTauu fci'uc6 Ztm'ti'g CUtfct'jCU, to discharge a man from his office ; ftc^ ei'ucv iA\i cntle'Mcjcn, to disencumber one's self of a burden ; J)eu ©c()ii('l>i9cu fci'ucg '^cvtn'ccl)'cn^ ubcvfiil^'vcn, to convict a guilty person of his crime ; 3d) \)Cl-ficl)'cvC t)ift) mci'ucv grCUUfe's fcljaft, I assure thee of my friendship. Those beginning with flit and iVbcv, may be construed with the preposition V>Oll, and the dative ; as, ;c'inant)fu t»on fci'ucr ii\\\ eutla'&cn, to free a person from his burden ; jc'maiitcu toon ffi'ucm 2)icn'|tc CUt(af; feu, to dismiss a person from his office ; je'mant)CJl VCU fci'llCttt 3vv'tl)Ume ubevjeu'gen, to convince a person of his error. (StvoMj'vm, and i)evft(i)'«vn/ are more frequently joined with 228 SYNTAX OF THE VERll. [bOOK II. the dative of the person, and the accusative of the thing ; as, 3[ct) 0(Ciralj've Mv Dci'iic ^^it'tc, I grant (to) you your request; 3lcl) \)Cift(l)'cvc Ct' ttiv, I assure (it to) you. ^crficl)'crn is like- wise combined with the preposition \)0U ; as, ^d) tnil 'VOW ^Cl• @acl)'c vcv]icl)'cvt, I am assured of the thing. — 'JBclcl}'vcn, has the genitive of tlie thing, in the expression, jc'uuint'CU ci'uc^ bcfl'cvu bcltlj'VCU, to inform a person of what is better, to set him right. But commonly t)OU is made use of — Sf bv\t mirt) t)on t>a ©acl)'c bckijvt'. 3. Several reflective verbs are construed with the genitive case of the thing. Such are, fid) au'lUrtfcu, to claim; as, ficfe ei'nc6 'iti'tcU airmafcu, to claim a title (more frequently with the accusative, fid) ci'ncu 'i.i'td au'mafcn); fid) (ci'iicr ©vtd)'c) att'ncl}mcn, to interest one's self in a thing ; fid) bcDCut'CU, to consider ; fid) [n-fiu'ucu, to think upon ; fid) bct>ic'ucu, to make use of; fid) bcge'bcu, to resign, to give up ; ftd) bcmdd)'; tigen, fid) bemci'jtcvn, to make one's self master of a thing, to gain possession of it; ftd) mt{}\\VU\\, to abstain ; fid) ciltfd)la'; gen, to get rid of a thing ; fid) cntfin'ucn, to recollect ; fic^ cubav'mcn, to have mercy, to have compassion ; fid) criii'iicrn, to remember ; fid) cnrclj'vcn, to resist; fid) fi-cu'CU, to rejoice in, to enjoy ; fid) cictvc'|tcn, to hope for with confidence ; ftrfe vul^'mcu/ to boast of; fid) fd)d'mcn, to be ashamed ; fid) mitcr= faug'fU, UUtCVroin'DCU, to venture on, to undertake ; fid) fCffC'- ^en, to be aware of; fid) njci'gcni, to refuse.* Also some im- personals; as, S^ VCUt or gcveilt' tuid), I repent; SOIid) jain'mfft/ I pity, am sorry for ; Sg VCrlangt' tuid), I desire ; ®t! V>CVlol}u£' ftd) (J)Cf 3}?u'l;e,) It is worth (the trouble). Many of these verbs also admit other cases and prepositions. 4. The verbs fciu, to be, and WCV'bCll, to become, have the genitive case after them, in some phrases ; as, tcv CDici'UUUg fcill/ to be of opinion ; ^il'Icu^ fciu, to purpose ; .^au'DcI^ Ci'uig nJCV'DCU, to agree upon a bargain. 5. The following govern either the genitive, or the accusa- * The reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in most of these verbs, is in the accusative case : rtiriltitfcu has it in the dative when it is construed with the accusative of the thing ; as, 3(ft mtC^t mil* Dice an, This I pretend to. CH. 6. ^ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 229 live, the former being more usual with some of them, and the latter with others ; ac()'teu, to mind, to care about ; t>Ct*UV'fcn/ to want; bcgcf)'rcn, to desire; cntl>el)'vcn, to want, to be with- out; CVJrvi()'UCU, to mention; gcnie'fCU/ to enjoy; \^^('Q(n, to foster, to take care of ; fc()0'JlCU, to spare; (^'•Ot'teu, to mock; tJCrgcffcn, to forget ; »t>av'tCJl, to attend to, to take care of: as, fci'ucS 2im'tC^ iDvXf'tcn, to attend to one's office. — ®ct>cuf'cn, to remember, to think of, has the genitive after it, and some- times the preposition An with the accusative. The combination of the genitive case with verbs was for- merly more frequent, than it is at the present day. It is found in old writings after many verbs, which now take other cases, or are followed by the prepositions. For instance, to express a part of a thing, the mere genitive was put, \Yhere a preposi- tion is now more commonly employed ; as, 2»f5 fcc^ ^l'0'i>c6, Eat of the bread ; "irinfe fcC^ '2Dci'nc5, Drink of the wine; SRiinm t»c^ ©Ctl'Ci'DC^, Take of the corn. In modern language it would commonly be, 3»§ \)0n fcClU 35vo'DC, 'Jviuf'C V)OU t'nn ^ Exercises. He is charged^ (with) (the^) ingratitude^ and accused^ of (the^) slander^, and no one takes pity on him, to'* free^ him^ (from) his^ imprisonment"^. Deprived"* of^ his^ former^ friends^, he^ finds^ no lawyer who will* engage'' in^ his^ cause^. While I mention''' his^ good^ deeds^ in"* which'* we^ rejoice^, P am^ not willing to''' spare^ his^ errors^ of3 which^ he"* is^ convicted^. I (do) not^ recollect^ the circumstances which you men- tioned. Give up the power which you have^ assumed^. We (do) nof* want^ your^ services^. ingratitude, Die Uu'fcaufbav: to free, cnt(e'&igcn. hit, f. former, cl^'malig. to charge, bcfcfeurbi.qcu. to deprive, UxM'btn. slander, ^erfSum'tuug, /. to find, |in'l>en. to accuse, au'Hagen. a lawyer, (in ?fi(d)t&'^eUi:)VUV. no one, nie'manK cause, ©ac()'c, /. to take pity, ^d) txbax'mttu to engage in, ffc^ an'Mifmtn, imprisonment, ^dft, f. irr. 20 230 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. I will, '\d) m[\, mix. to recollect, ftc() Cviu'UCl-U. while, irvtl} l•CU^. circuinstauce, *Um'|l»^U^, m. deed, itjAt, /. 1. ^. 3. b. [\ to rejoice, fi(() fvcu'Cll. to mention, c\Cl»cnt'fn, mix. to mention, Cnrabucil. to give up, ftd) (^CC^C'bcu, irr. to be willing, ^liBil Icug fcin. power, ©oraft', f. error, '35cvif'nuig, /It. to assume, fid) rtu'tnafeu. to be convicted, ubcvwic'fcu to want, [tctuVfcn. fein. service, SieulV, tn. 3. b. b. to spare, fd)!?'!!^!. The Dative case is used, 1. After transitive verbs, which, at the same time, govern the accusative. The accusative is then called the case of the thing, and the dative the case of the person : for exam- ple, (Sc'bcu ©ic ^cm 50Tan'iK ^a6 ''JSiid), Give the book to the man. 3)cm yjiau'uc is the dative case of the person, and t>A^ 55ud), the accusative of the thing. — The following tran- sitives take the dative of the person ;* gc'bcil, to give ; licf^'; men, to take from a person ; fa'gcu, to say, to tell ; crja^'Icu, to tell, to relate; ant'Jl?ovtCU, to answer; bving'cU/ to bring; bcfct;'kn, to command; bcjrtb'lcu, to pay; fcftcil, to cost; bic'tcn, to offer; boi-'geu, to lend; (ci'bcn, to lend; glaii'bcn, to believe ; gouuctl, not to envy, not to grudge ; fUVj^cn/ to complain of, to state in the form of complaint ; Uc'fcni/ to furnish ; Ici'lUu, to show, to render, as, 2)icn')lc lci'|tcn, to render services; cvlaffcu, to remit; CfWic'tCVll, to return, to give in turn, to reply ; gcbic'tfu, to command ; cjclo'bcn, to vow ; fvtaii'beu, to permit ; gcjiat'tcu, to allow ; n^i^cn•a'ttJcn/ to dissuade from : also verbs compounded with Ab ; as, ab'bittfll/ to beg pardon, ci'ncm fi'ucu ficij'kt ab'bittcu, to beg pardon of a person for a fault ; ab'fovDerU/ to demand from ; ab'jiring: cn, to force from ; ab'vatijtn, to dissuade ; ab'ffbtagcu, to re- fuse; ab'fvvcd)en, to give sentence against a person, to deny, ci'nctn ct'irad vib'fpredjcn; ab'faufen, to buy of: some verbs with an; as, au'bictrn, to offer ; au'vat^cu, to advise; au'^cutcn, to signify ; an'Duttf il, to attribute falsely ; an'jci^CU, to an- nounce : and others : some with bei; as, bfi'bviiigcil, to impart; bti'kf^tn, to attribute ; bci'meiffll, to impute : some with ent ; entretf'feU/ to snatch away; entjic'()en, to take away, &-c. : CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 231 some with m'iXV ; as, irifcei'Va't^cn, to dissuade. To these may be added the reflective verbs, ficl) au'mafcu, to claim, to pre- tend to ; ftcl) CtU'()i(t)cn, to fancy, to imagine : as, ^d) Jtia'fc mil' ten %i't(l an, I pretend to the title ; ^d) bifbc mil' &CU Um'-- jlaufc cill, I imagine the circumstance. After ficl) au'mafcu, the genitive of the thing may be put, instead of the accusative (Rule II. 3.), and then the person is put in the accusative; as, Scl) ma'fc mid) beg ^i'tct^ an. 2. After intransitive verbs; as, an'^Clligcn/ to adhere to; aii'Iicgcu, to apply to, to solicit; gc(}6'vcn, and an'oic^orcu, to belong to; bc^Cg'ucU/ to meet, to happen to; tcfcm'nicn, to agree with, said of things that refer to health, sometimes also used in a figurative sense ; bc\)OV'|Ic{)Cll, to impend ; bei'faUcn, to agree with a person in opinion ; bci't'DtntUCn, to come near, to get at; bci'pfKidjtCU, to coincide with in opinion ; bci'llc^Cil, to assist ; t>anf:'eu, to thank ; Me'llCU, to serve ; tvC- ^Cll, to threaten ; CUt|Iic'I}CU, ClUgc'tjCU, to escape ; cntf^>l-CCl)'ru, to answer to, to correspond to; and other compounds with cut ; ciu'fadcn, to occur to the thoughts, or the memory ; ciu'oicl;cu, to enter the mind, to be understood; ciu'fommCU/ to enter the thoughts, to enter the mind; ciu'lcudjtCU, to be evident, to appear; fol'0|Cn, to follow; fi'Cl^'nCU, to do ser- vice without pay ; oictu^'VCU, to be due ; gCt)Ci'l)Cn, to suc- ceed, to prosper; 9Ct}0V'cl)CU, to obey; gcfat'lcU/ to please; gcva'tljcu, .gcltug'eu, to succeed ; oitci'd)Cu, to be like ; gejic'-- nicn, to become, to befit; t)cl'fcn, to help ; uut'jcn, to be use- ful, to be of use ; ob'Iicgcu, (ci'Ufl* @ad)'c), to apply one's self to a thing — also (as an impersonal) to be incumbent upon ; UUtCfUc'gcn, to be overcome, to yield ; fd^a'fcn, to hurt: fd)ci'ncn, to seem; fd>tnci'd)cfn, to flatter; |tcu'cni, to check, to restrain ; tVCt'jCn, to bid defiance ; ircl)'l*cn, to check ; »t>ci'd)CU, aug'n)cid)cn, to give way, to yield ; ftd) vou Cerfct'jCU, to oppose, to resist; Jt>ibCV|k'l)CU, to resist; irol}l': TOOlIcil, to wish well ; Jll'fvlUcu, to fall to ; ju'l}6vCU, to listen to, to hear ; ju'oicl}6vcn, to belong to ; ju't'cinmcu, to become, to be suitable, to belong to, to be due ; ju'VCDCU, to speak to, to exhort ; and other compounds with JU : also these imper- sonals ; Si^ ab'ucf, or a(}n'l>Ct mir, I have a misgiving, I fore- see ; Sg bclicbt', It pleases ; S^ C|cl.Hnd)t', It is wanting ; Su' grant mir, I am fearful ; St^ trdumt mir, I dream ; 6;i< fdici'iu't mir, or S6 Hinmt mir \>ov, It seems to me ; SiJ fd)rDiii'rcIt mir, I 232 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. am giddy ; ®6 fc()ail't>CVt miv, I shudder ; S6 V»CVfc()fa9t' mil' llif()t6, It makes no difference to me. 3. After some verbs which may also be properly used with the accusative: au'fommcn, to come upon — 5Qtiv, or mid), finnmt §ui-cl)t an, Fear comes upon me; DJliv, or ttiicl), ^duc(>f, It seems to me (the accusative is more usual); CD?iv, or mid), C'^clt, I loathe. J^ci'fcn, to bid, to desire, occurs with the da- tive of the person, and the accusative of the thing — '^Bcr l)at Div Da^ cicbf i'jVu ? Who desired you to do that ? but the person may also be put in the accusative, ^IDcv i)i\t Md) t»a6 9Cl}Ci'fcn ? The same may bo said of Iclj'vcu, to teach, which either is followed by two accusatives, one of the thing, and the other of the person ; or by the dative of the person and the accu- sative of the thing. Observation. The dative expresses advantage, or disad- vantage, and answers to the English prepositions to and /or, • as, !Dir fd)Ci'm't Me ©on'ne, For thee the sun shines ; 2)il* lad)'ni Mc gc^^cr, To thee the fields smile; 2)if IjCll'lcu t)ie ^in'bC, To thee (against thee) the winds howl. Exercises. I did for him every thing (which) he commanded"^ me^. I told him so. I advised him to^ resisf* their^ flattery^, and dissuaded him from'^Js^ndihg^ them' any^ thing^. (Do) not-' refused therijs what they demand^ from^ you^, if it belongs- to^ them^. ^^^'•' You can^not-^ get^ af^ him-, as long as she defends^ him^. You will meet with {it will meet yoti) what you have^ de- served • ; it will do^ you^ good^. I apply myself to this business, although it is not incumbent upon me. It seemed to me as if all that he related^ to^ you^ was ain)ed at me. I fancied it to myself, although I shuddered"* at^ the^ thought.^ to do, (ci'ltcu. so, bcie>, {devi. pron.) every thing, al'lc^. to advise, va'thcit, irr. to command, befftj'lcit, irr. flattery, ©d)mcid)elei', /. 1. t>. to tell, fa'gcu. to resist, njitCVjU'ljcn. CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VEHB. 233 to dissuade, ab'i'atljfn, irr, to do good, xtoiji bcfom'meu. any thing, tf'gcnt) Ct'J^ag, to apply one's self, ob'Uegcn. to lend, Ici'^cn. business, <£cfd)aft', n. 3. b. 6. to refuse, \)crit)ci'gcvn. although, iineir»ol}('. to demand, ab'foJ'CVU. to be incumbent, o6'Iicc\cn. if, wcnu. (See Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. F.) to belong, 0|C(}6'VCU. to seem, f({)Ct'ucn, irr. I can, id) t'ann, mix. as if, ft{g ob. to get at, bci fommcn. to relate, erjdf}'(cn. as long as, fo (ang a(^, or to be aimed at, gcl'tCU, irr. folaiig'. to fancy, eiu'biiticn. to defend, l>CVt(}ci't»i9CU. at, \)0f. [Dnt.) I meet, c^ bcgcg'JlCt miv. thought, ©ctivtiifc, m. 3. c. c. to deserve, t)CVDie'ncn. I shudder, tuiv fd)au'&Clt. The Accusative is governed by active verbs ; as, 3d) VWht mciu '33a'tcvlant), I love my country. Neuter .verbs also may sometimes be used actively, and gov- ern an accusative ; as, ®i'ucu gu'tCU ^aiupf fdm'pfcU/ To fight a good fight ; where fdm'pfcu, is joined with the accusative, though it is generally used without any case. There are verbs that take a double accusative ; as, (}Ci'fCU, to call ; ncu'ucn, to name; ^d)i{'tn\, to abuse ; fd)iin'pfcn, to call by an opprobrious name. For example : 3id) l)ci'fc (or licn'uc) il}U ci'ncn J^cCtCU, I call him a hero ; Sv fd)a(t (or fd)imvrtO \^\\ ci'ncn 35ctVlV9CV, He called him a cheat. To which may be added fva'gcn, to ask, as, Si'ncn Ct'n)ag fra'gcn, To ask a per- son something ; but here it is as well to make use of a pre- position ; as, Si'ncn um ct'ina^ fra'gcn/ To ask a person about something. Of lc(}'l"Cn, to teach, and (jci'fcn, to command, which sometimes have a double accusative, mention has al- ready been made (Rule iii. 3.) Exercises. He lived a hero's life, and died a hero's death. He calls himself a self-taught (man), but others dertominate him a bold empiric. to live, tc'ben. to die, |lct'bcn, irr. hero's life, ^d'UnU\>zn, n. 3. hero's death, S^t\:^irKtt>\>, m. 3. a. a. b. 6. 20* 234 SYNTAX OF THE VEllB. [bOOK II to call, itcu'licn. to denominate, ^fi'ffU. self-taught, fclbjVgcfcfjvt. bold, v>cnrc'(^cn. but, a'bcv. empiric, Smpi vitcv vi. 3. a. a. others, an' l)cve. § '^' ARRANGEMENT. A. Indicative Mood. The Indicative Mood generally stands after the subject, and before the object. Except, 1. Those instances, mentioned in Book II. Ch. 2. § 2. Rules I. and II. 2. When the verb must be at the end, that is to say, not only after the subject, but also after the object, and all words connected with it. This is necessary, (1.) When the member of the sentence, to which the verb belongs, commences with a relative pronoun, as, t>ci*, WCl'dKl*/ WCV, Wrtff ; or a relative adverb, as, babev', from whence ; ^al•um', for what ; iravum', »rc^{}a((>' or we^l^ai'beu, »t>c?n)c'oicn, for which reason, for which, wherefore ; * \)0U tDau'Ufll, from whence ; WQ, where ; and the compounds of VOO, as, irot)on', n)ot}ci'', ittomit', raoraue', &c. Examples : 2)ci- ©cl^vift'ilfKcv i|1 ju fcl)at'jcn, rocrc()cv Mc ^cfov'tifvunfl t>cv "IDal^v'bcit 3um ^IDCC'tc bilt, That writer is to be esteemed, who has the pro- motion of truth for his object. 3[r() fcu'lic ci'iicu 33?auu, t>n f(c() mit 5Hcf()t mci'ucn §rcuut» UCUUt, I know a man who justly calls himself my friend. '^iCa* t»cm iaf'tcr imD Dff feu SHci'jcii folgt, bcvci'tct f(cl) ci'nc fcl)mcvj'ticbe fKcu'c, He who follows vice and its charms, prepares for himself a painful repentance. * The signification of these words as relatives, must be dis- tinguished from the other meanings which they bear, either as adverbs or conjunctions. 2)a'{)CV, thence, therefore ; ^a'vum, for that reason, therefore ; tr>avum', n)C6n)c'gcu, why, for what reason, cause the subject to be placed after the verb. CH. 5 -^12.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 235 The verb, in the foregoing examples, is at the end of that member of the sentence, to which the relative pronouns, VO(l'd)(t, 1>CI"/ wn, belong. It is thus with the adverbs alluded to : for instance, 3)CV £>Vt, YDO id) IjCU'te mci'ucu gvcuuti fvv^, The place where to-day I saw my friend. "^Bol^iu' mrtll t>rt^ Ztu'gc miv tr»cn't>ct, cvblicft' man nicfct^ a(g S'(cu&, Wherever one turns one's eye, one perceives nothing but misery. The verbs fat), and VotWhtt, are put last, in consequence of TOO/ and n)ot)iu'. (2) The verb is put at the end, after interrogatives (whether pronouns, adverbs, or conjunctions), when they form indirect questions. Examples : €v fvagt mid), \vn ik': )en 30?ov'gcu bei 3(}'ncn lt>av, He asks me who was with you this morning. QOBiffcu @ie, n>crd)c^ S5ud) cv ^tii'ti in t)cm (Sav'tcn lajj ? Do you know what book he read to-day in the garden ? ©a'gcn @ic mil*, waS ffiv ci'ncn ©runfc cv fftv fcin 'Ztne'btciben an'gibt. Tell me what ground he alleges for his staying out. "^CV, n>crd)Cl*, YOA^ filV cin, interrogative pro- nouns, serve here to form indirect questions,* and the verb stands last. 3id) fann nid)t fa'gcn, trie c^ fid) ju'^ctvagcn l?at, I cannot tell how it has happened ; ^d) mcd)'tc wiffcn, Ob Vic'Ic kn'tc bci jct'jtget l)ctf'fcv "^Dit'tei-nnci auf t»em §d'M fcin toci*'= licn, I should like to know, whether, during the present hot weather, many people will be in the field. ^ic, and Ob, constitute indirect questions, and the verb is at the end. (3) After conditional, causal, and consecutive conjunc- tions. These are: ai$, td, bctoov', c'()C, bi^, t>afcrn'; fcamit' (in order that) ; l>a|5, auf t>at5, (in order that) ; failed, im §al'(c, (in case that); 9lcid)n)ic' ; in&cm' (since, because); nad)t»cm'; nun (when it signifies since, after — 9tnn CiJ cin'mal 9cfd)C'l}cn i)l, Since it once has been done); ob, obfd)On', obglfid)', ob- rtotji', fcit, and fcitt)Cm' ; fin'tcmat (since, whereas) ; fo (when it means, if) ; fo balb, or fo ball* alg ; fo lanci'C or fo lang'calg; fo wcit, or fo racit als ; tt>d()'i'cnD, irdtj'vcnb t»a^"; * It is probably understood by the reader, what is meant by indirect questions : but there will remain no doubt, if we change some of the foregoing into direct questions, to show the difference, viz. ^fv voAt bti 3i)'ncn 1 Who was with youf SaJel'djce 23ucl) (o^ Ci- ? What book did he read 1 236 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II rtxii ; wdxn, Yi>innc\Ui(i)', roennfc^ou' ; trie, irinrol}!', voo-- fcvu', no \\\d)t. To these is to be added the comparative conjunction jt, which, beginning the prior member, removes the verb to the end. Example : 2t U CV itll llufvn^V in ^el• ©tat>t b c m C V f ' t C, When he perceived the tumult in the city; *:5c\)0V' id) t»cu QOBalD cvvcicl)t' ifat'tt, Before I had reached the wood ; b i ^ Mc ©on'iK l>ic cr|tavv'tcu §c('&cv auf - Bfcn W i I' &, till the sun shall loosen the congealed fields ; 2) a t»CV ©cfauD'tC in iou'l>OU an'f'am, When the ambassador ar- rived in London ; 3 c Idng'cr t>cv ^uu|V(cv Mc'fc ®C'v^fultau^C bctvad)' tctc, l>cfto mct^v bewuu'Dcvtc CV flC, The more the artist contemplated these objects, the more he admired them. By the force of the aforesaid conjunctions, the verb is put at the end of the member of the sentence to which it be- longs, and sometimes even after a subordinate member, con- nected with it. For example : 2)a id) l»cn 'DCITaun, it>crd)CV fo t'tid cic&ad)t', cf)'i'C nut) (ic'bc, Since I honor and love the man, who has thought so nobly. In this, the principal mem- ber is, t»a id) t)CU SOTann ctj'vc UU& (ic'bc, with which is con- nected a subordinate or secondary member, n)cI'd)Cl* fo c'i)Cl gCtad)t', and the verb of the former is placed after this. It need not necessarily be so ; for the sentence might also run thus, 2)a id) t>cu 9}taun ctj'vc uiiD lic'bc, i»crd)cv fo c'DcI gc- i>ad)t'. It depends upon euphony and perspicuity, whether the one or the other is to be preferred. The same principles apply to the infinitive, with the preposi- tion jit. The verb, influenced by the above conjunctions, may be put after the infinitive ; as, 9GDeiI id) mid) uid)t JU janf fu n)llu'fd)C, Because I do not like to quarrel ; or before it, IBdi id) ttid)t mm'}d)(, mid) JU janf'CU. When the infinitive, with JW, has other words belonging to it, for instance, cases of de- clension which it governs, it is preferable, on account of the extent which it then assumes, to place it with its dependent words after the verb, lest the sentence should become heavy and intricate. Ex. 5)a id) itiunfd)'te, al'lcinei'nc @ad) ni fobalD' al6 moci'Ud) in ©id)'ci'^cit ju brtng'cn, As I wished to bring all my things in safety, as soon as possible ; here the sentence would be rendered heavy by placing the verb n)uufd)'tc, after the infinitive bl'iug'cil. The infinitive, without the preposition JU, is immediately governed by the verb, as much as a case of declension ; and the verb, under these circumstances, must stand after it ; as, "SBenn ev HS 25ud) lc'j>n mil, If he will read the book; CH. 5. ^ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 237 where it would be less natural to let the infinitive follow after the verb, as, IBdlM fV Will t>rt6 ?Bucl) (cfcit. Exercises. Whoever has a good conscience. He who understands it The color with which the wall is covered. Do you know what is meant by it? Nobody knows whom he aims at. As soon as we had recovered ourselves. Unless all this be a delusion. The more he saw of the country, so much the more he disliked the thought of returning. He is safe if he will follow my advice. whoever, \V(X WHV. to recover one's self, ftcft ev* good, c\ut. ^O'fcil. conscience, ^eittif'fcu, n. 3. a. unless, it>ofmi' nicl)t. he who, von. delusion, 'idtl'l'dnuig, /. to understand, feCVllC'^CU. the more, je mcJjV. color, giir'bc, /. of, Don. (Dat.) with which, »t)omit'. country, iaul>, n. 3. b. C. wall, QGBanI», /. to see, fc'fjcn, i?-r. to cover, ftbcvjie'l^Ctt/ irr. so much the more, ^cftO tnc^t*. to know, IPif'fen, mix. I dislike, iniv int^fdllt', irr. by it, t»amit'. thought, (ScDvlllf'e, m. 3. c. C. to mean, itiei'UCn. to return, juvucf'fc^vcai. nobody, ntc'manJ). safe, ft'cl)ev. at, auf. (Ace.) advice, SHat^, w. 3. b. to aim, ab'jiclcn. to follow, fol'gcil. (i>a<.) as soon as, fo balb (it^. B. Subjunctive Mood. The Subjunctive Blood, as to position, is subject to the same rules, as the indicative. When it denotes a wish, or surprise, it often begins the sentence ; as, ®C'bc C6 tCV J^im'^ tncl! May Heaven grant it! 5DTiH()'tC tic ©ou'lic ltd) )'f()Ci'JlCU ! Oh, that the sun would shine ! J^dt'tC ic()6 t>Ocl) uicl)t gcglaubt', I should not have thought it ! This is always the case when the conditional conjunction, \t(\\\\, if, is omitted : ^d'VC ic^ ^icv 3eit>c')'ni/ Had I been here ; for QCBcuu id) l;icv gcrcc'f^lt Xok'Xi, If I had been here. 238 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. C. Imperative Mood. The Imperative precedes the personal pronoun, which is the subject, io'bt Ml, praise thou ; lo'bc CI*, let him praise ; lo'bcn fte, let them praise. D. Infinitive Mood. The Infinitive comes after the object, and the other words of a sentence, except the indicative and subjunctive, when these, for reasons assigned before, are put last. Examples : Sf it)unff()t t-ic iatci'jufcl)c ©pva'd)C gl•uu^'(ic() ju Icv'ncn, lie wishes to learn the Latin language accurately , ^ic'fcv SJiailU taim Sng'lifcl), granjo'ftfd), £)cutfc{), uu& \)cvfcl)ic>cnc aii'bcic ©J-H-'^'f^^'l '^^^^ Suvo'pa VC'ben, This man can speak English, French, German, and several other tongues of Europe. ici''= ncn and VC'J)CU are infinitives. This rule affects the future tense, because it is com- posed of an infinitive and the third auxiliary. The infini- tive, here, is placed in the same manner, as in the exam- ples above stated, that is to say, after the object and other words ; as, 3cfc xntx'U ttiov'gcu t>k ©e'^ciit) befe'^cu, I shall to-morrow take a view of the country. 25cfc't)eu is the in- finitive, belonging to the auxiliary n)Cl•'^C, with which it constitutes the future tense ; but this connexion does not al- ter its position in the sentence. — When the future in the in- dicative or subjunctive mood must be placed at the end, on account of some preceding word, which requires that colloca- tion, the infinitive that is used in forming the future must be put before the auxiliary ; as, 93?an <cii gvanjc'fcu gvic'Dcn inact)'cii wci-'bc, It is thought that the Emperor will make peace with the French. Here the infinitive marl)'cn, is before the auxiliary rPff'tiC. Wheji the future tense of the passive voice stands in this predicament, the auxiliary verb, in the indicative or subjunctive, is often put before the infinitive, which is done to prevent, by means of the intervening participle, the immediate repetition of n)cv'l>cu : for example, 3cl) cfirav'tc, X)cf't)cn, I e.xpect, that several things will be brought to our house. Sometimes two infinitives stand together, one of which governs the other ; then the governing one should be put CH. 5. <^ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 239 after that which is governed ; as, nod) fct)mei'c^c(nt), fon'bern vn'^ig btfc^'ltnt), jtill'tc ben Z(u'JTUl)V, The old general, neither threatening nor flattering, but calmly commanding, quelled the sedition. When combined with the auxiliary verbs, the past participle has its place after the object and other words ; and is, there- fore, generally found towards the end of the sentence. Sf i\l in ion'bon gewc'fcn, He has been in London — i^ gcn^c'fen, the participle genjc'fen at the end. 3cft ijtx'hi (;cu'tc M^ 25n(fe gc- ie'fen, I have read the book to-day — ^a'k gele'fcn. €r wit^ 5J40 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. mit di(d)t (in ^vo'fcv 50tann geuanut', He is justly called a great man. If the auxiliary, by the power of some pronoun or conjunction, be removed to the end, the past participle stands before it; as, 2)ie lljia'tcn, »t»ct'cl)C \)on tm\ 3)ul)'tcf gc-- fc()irDfVt WCV'bcn, The deeds which are depicted by the poet : the auxiliary JBCV'ticn/ at the end, because of the pronoun \r>ti'd)C ; the participle, gefcHl'fcCVt, before it. ^d) W>cig (g, wtcil id) bcu SOTauu fc(b|l gcfe'l^cu t}a'be, I know it, because I have seen the man myself: the conjunction WtU, removes the verb (ja'bc to the end, and the participle gefc'l}CU, precedes it. — When the past participle and the infinitive of an auxiliary verb come together, the participle is placed before the infini- tive ; as, gcle'fcu ija'bdl; to have read; gclicbt' Wcr'Dcu, to be loved. Should it so happen, that the participle, the infin- itive, and the verb definite, that is to say, either the indica- tive or subjunctive, meet together at the end of a sentence, the arrangement may either be thus, participle, infinitive, indicative or subjunctive, 9tad)bcm' id) t>H^ ^^ud) gclc'fcu ^a'; ben )t>ei*'i)C, After I shall have read the book ; or the verb definite, may be put before the participle and infinitive, 9lad)l»cm' id) Da^ 35ud) mt'tt gctc'feii f)a'bcn. Examples. The lame courier. A much-promising commencement. Three roasted apples. Let us all, hoping (for) the best, and prepared for the worst, persevere in our undertaking. They have accomplished their task. The plant which is describ- ed by Linnaeus, is not the same. Before the clock shall have ceased striking. to be lame, l}iuf'Clt. to prepare, faf'fCU. courier, Vdo'tt, m. 2. a. in, in. (Dat.) much, i)ifl. undertaking, ItntCfnel^'men, n. to promise, \)Ct:fprcd)'cn. 3. a. commencement, 2(n'fiing, m. to persevere, bcl^av'VCn. to roast, v6'|len. task, "Uuf^aU, f. apple *'Zt^V(cl, m. 3. a. a. to accomplish, tjodcn'tcn. let us, {(x[^ii nng. plant, spflan'je. the best, t»ag 33eftf. by, \)on. , to hope, l)Cf fen. to describe, tiefd)l-ei'ben, irr. for, auf. {Ace.) ' the same, (l>ev, Me, 6a6) ndm* the worst, Da^ ©(tlimm'fle. lid)e. ^ CH. 5. <^ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 241 before, c'f^e. to cease striking, m$'^d)lOvauei', He foresaw these events which are now no more to be altered. But the particle is generally put at the end of the first part of a sentence if the latter part is merely con- nected with it by a preposition ; as, €v fat) l)0l'aHi5', i>uv't>cn, He foresaw that these events would follow. In this sentence the particle t)Dl*an6', before, cannot stand after wfiv'licn. When the verb, in consequence of a pronoun, or a conjunction, is brought to the end of the sentence, the particle is not separated from it ; as, 3!)a id) ^i)t (Scfdjcnf mit 2)ant"'bavfeit an'nctjmc, As I received your present with gratitude. The verb an'nc^mc stands last, on account of the conjunction i»a, and remains, for this reason, united with the particle. The infinitive mood, and the past participle have their place after the object, and at or near the end of the sentence ; therefore the particle is not separated, except by JU, in the infinitive, and by ge, in the past participle; as,, tnit JU ne^mcn, mit'gcnomincn. ^n, however, does not always ac- company the infinitive. From what has been said, it ap- pears, that the separation principally occurs in the indicative, subjunctive, and imperative moods. Exercises. May it serve to your advantage. Praise him. He tries to find the philosopher'a stoiM. 31 242 SYNTAX OP THE ADVERB. [book II, I shall now go to rest. They hope that the war will be prolonged. He predicts that one after the other will be arrested. Why should we not- bid"* him^ go*'. He^ indeed"* can-not^ flatter^, but he wishes to console. Give up this plan ! Could I foreknow this 1 They have sent off the girl. lie continued to urge him eagerly. to, Jit. (Dat.) advantage, '33ov't^ei(, m. 3. b. b. to serve, ^ic'ncn. to praise, (o'bcu. to try, f(c() bcmu'{)cn. the philosopher's stone, tCl* @tein t>n Udci'fm. to find, ftn'tcn. to rest, juv SKu'lje. to go, ftft) bege'bcn. to hope, ()of fen. that, Dajj. war, ^vicg, 7n. to be prolonged, ftc& in tie ihi^'< jie'f)cn. to predict, feoraug'f^^gen. after, nacl). {Dat.) to arrest, tevljaf ten. why, raavum'. I shall, id) foU, mix. not, ni(l)t. to go, gc'^cn. to bid, l)ci'fcn. to flatter, fctjmci'c^cln. I can, id) Umn, mix. indeed, jVei'lid). but, a'bci*. to wish, wun'fdjcn. to console, tvo'jtcn. to give up, aufgebctt, irr. plan, 5p(an. to foreknow, iJOVanS'TOilfCJI. to send off, fovt'fd)icfcn. girl, 3}^dD'd)Ctt, n. 3. a. a. to continue, fDVt'fa()l*cn, irr. eagerly, t^cftig. to urge, JU'fc^en. {Dat.) CHAPTER VI. ADVERBS. iOlRANGEMENT. RULE I. An adverb joined to an adjective, must always stand before it ; as, fe^V gut, very good ; nicftt fc^lcc^t, not bad. CH. 6.] SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 243 When the adverb belongs to the verb, it is put after the verb (unless the verb be at the end of the sentence, Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. A.) and, in general, also after the object. Sr be- ^an'^c(t ten (Scgcullanl* feovtvcfflid), He treats the subject excellently ; l>OVtfCtf' (id) is the adverb. Such adverbs, bow- er, as denote time, (for example, off, often ; (}du'floi, fre- quently ; i)CU'tC, to-day; gcf'tCl'U, yesterday, and the like,) are commonly placed immediately after the verb, and before the object. Besides the adverb cannot, with propriety, be placed after the infinitive, or past participle. Moreover, unless the verb be at the end, the adverb cannot stand between the sub- ject and the verb. RULE III. For the sake of emphasis, the adverb may be removed from its place towards the beginning of the sentence ; as, ^d) IjA'bc ijm'U iaS *Blid) gclc'fcu, I have to-day read the book ; which makes the notion of I^CU'tC, to-day, more perceptible than, 3d) ^a'be i>a^ 25ud) ijm'tt gclc'fciu This seems to be the reason why adverbs implying time, are commonly placed before the object : namely, they are thus rendered more distinct. But to make the emphasis so evident that it cannot be mistaken, the adverb should be put at the beginning ; J^CU'tC l}a'bc id) Dag Stae'ljOVU gcfc'ljcn, To-day I have seen the rhinoceros. In this remark are not included the interrogative adverbs, such as, wit, how; irailll, when; »t>anim', why; WC^WC'^Cll, wherefore; \X>0, where ; which, as they can be placed nowhere but in the beginning, derive no particular distinction from that po- sition. There are adverbs that in no place seem to be susceptible of an emphasis, viz. those which express chance, probabili- ty, and similar vague and undefined ideas — lncllcid)t', per- haps ; t)CVmutt)'(id), probably ; n)af}V'fd)Cin(id), very likely ; and others. As no difference arises, in the purport of the sentence, from their situation, they may be put any whepe, even between the subject and the verb, where no other ad- verb is permitted to stand. 55ic'fcr SOtaitU Vicncid)t' Whti (^ rrtf fen, This man perhaps will know it ; ©ciu 25vu't>cr 1>CV- miltt}'Iid) i)at i^m l>ag 9Cfd)Vic'bcn/ His brother probably has 244 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. [book II. written that to him. If they have any effect when thus transposed, it may be, that they rather give force to the subject. The negative, nicl)t, not, has its station commonly after the object ; as, 3)cv SOuxuu t()Ut fci'uc ^flicl)t uicl)t, The man does not do his duty. Here the action of the verb is accompanied by the negative. If it is to be particularly referred to the subject, or object, or any other word, it must be put before such word. 3^ic()t SHcicl)'tl)um, fon'fccvu ^'ifi'if'^fut^fit tnact)t Mc a3?cu'fcl)CU glucf'Uct), Not wealth, but contentment makes nien happy. In this instance, the negative is applied to the subject, and stands before it. U\Jt UUS uid)t t»CU '33cvlu|V it& ©d)iffc!j, foii'Dcvn t>eu "ilob fo \)ie'(ci- trctf Uf()cv ©cc'icute t>ct"'(a',ACU, Do not let us lament the loss of the ship, but the death of so many fine seamen. The negative before the object. Exercises. A very just comparison. He experienced quite a different treatment. She sang this air beautifully. They wore their best dresses yesterday. It is by no means decided. In^ or- der^ to^i ex^^tricate^^ himself^ as^ soon"* as^ possible^ from''' his^ embarrassment^. He will depart to-morrow. They will probably resort to this measure. He has not received your letter. Do not trouble yourselves about the past, but think of the future. very, fcl)r. just, vicl)'tici. comparison, 58cfg(eicl)', m. b. i\ to experience, erfa{}'vcu, ir?\ quite, civinj. different, V»cifc()ie'bCU. treatment, 25ct}aufc'hm9/ /. to sing, flUj^'CU, irr. air, li'vit, f. beautifully, fd)6u. to wear, tva'c\cn, irr. yesterday, c^cf'tCVU. dress, SClcilt, n. 3. b. c. by no means, fci'llCglDCg^. to decide, entfd)Ci'^Cn, irr. in order, uni. as soon as, fo ba(^ mci'iiev @(t}n?cftci-, From my father, my brother, and my sister. Some prepositions govern a genitive, some a dative, some either a genitive or dative, some an accusative, and some either a dative or an accusative. 1. Prepositions governing the Genitive. an|Utt', instead ; as, auflatt' Dc6 "^kVUX^, instead of the father, ©tatt is sometimes separated from ail; as, an ^iu'DC^ Itrttt, instead of a child ; in which case, this last word may also be considered as a substantive, and written with a capital letter, @tatt, place. (l^alb) is only used in compounds: particularly, au'fcvl^alb/ out of; as, au'fcvl}alb t)cg J^aii'fce^/ out of doors; in'ucrljiafb, in, within ; as, iu'ucv()alb trci'ci* "ia'ge, within three days ; O'bcrl^alb, above ; as, D'berl^alb t>CV @tat>t, above the town ; Mn'tcvl;alb, below ; as, im'tcvljalb fccv @trtl>t, below the town. t^al'bcu, or l)al'bcv (when the noun has no article or pronoun before it), on account of, for the sake of; as, Dc^ §vif'l>t'U^ ^al'bcn, for the sake of the peace ; IXi'UX^ ^wi'ha, on ac- count of age; tiei'uci* iaftcv l^aj'beu, on account of your vices, J^al'beu is often joined with the genitive of the per- sonal pronouns, id), I, Du, thou, YbXX, we, &bo., gen. wm'mt, of me, tci'ueiv of theB, uu'fei*/ of us, &c. ; in which case the final V of these genitives is either changed into t/ or a t is 21* 24(5 SYNTAX OF THE TREPOSITION. [bOOK. II. added ; as, mct'lKt()a(bcn, for my sake ; &ci'uct^a(6cn, for thy sake ; fci'llCtljalbCU/ for his or its sake; liu'fcrtljatbcn, for our sake ; cu'vctl^albcu, for your sake ; i^'vctljalbfjl, for her or llieir sake. It is also joined with tc|3, of that, and lt>cf5, of wliat or which; as, i)C|j'l}al[\ on account of that; n)fj3'()alb, on account of which or what. .Mcfl'cits;", on this side of; as, Dicfffitl? Ui %i\^^^i^, on this side of the river. jeu'feiti?", beyond, on the other side ; as, jcu'fcitg &e6 ©rtll'gc^, on the other side of the Ganges. h'aft, by virtue of; as, h'aft mei'uc^ 2tin'tCg, by virtue of my office. laut, according to, conformably ; as, {M\t t)CS 0'bvigfcitUct)Cn 33cfclj(^', according to the command of the government. tnit'tclll or l^cnnit'tcI^t, by, by means of; as, mit'tcljt or toeV' lllit'tcl)t tci'ncg *^ci'ilau^C^, by means of your assistance. Xlu'3Cacl)tct" or oI}u'gcacl)tCt, notwithstanding, sometimes pre- cedes and sometimes follows the noun ; as, uu'gcad^tct CVtn6'9e 1>CV itlning/ by dint of practice ; tCVmo'gC t>c6 glci'ff 6/ by means of diligence. tt>dl}'vcut>, during ; as, it>d(}'veut> ^CV ^ixt, during the time : n)dl)'veut> t>eg itvic'ge^, during the war. WC'gCU, on account of, because of It may stand before or after the noun ; ^cl) tt}at C^ mci'ucg '2$a'tcv^ njc'gen, I did it because of or on account of my father ; irc'gCU fci'uc^ §(ct'fe6, on account of his diligence. QBc'gcn is often joined with the genitive of pronouns, like ^aCbCU : as, mci'; llCtlDCgen, for my sake ; t)C|3'l»CgCU on account of that ; XOi^'- tDCgCll/ on account of which or what, &c. 2. Prepositions governing the Dative. au6, out of; as, atl^ fccm ^Ct'te, out of bed. vlll'fcv, out of, without, besides ; as, au'fcv i)vl>'nuttg, out of or without order ; au'fci* l>ev @tal>t, out of the city or town ; ttu'fcv t>cm J^ftU'l't^ out of the house; au'fcr mil*/ besidea me. CH. 7. § l.j SYNTAX OP THE PREPOSITION. 247 tci, by, near; as, bti fcem -^au'ff/ near the house; 6ci ti(V J^aub, by the hand. ClUgc'gCU, against, towards ; as, l)Cm '2Bin'l>C CUtgc'gCJl, against the wind ; QGBlv xooi'Un un'^tvivi gveuu'bc cntge'gcu gc'^cn, We will go to meet our friend. gcgcmVbcr, opposite to; as, tcm ^aii'^t gegcmVbev, opposite to the house. It may be separated ; as, gc'geu miv iibtV, op- posite to me. mit, with ; as, mit t)Cm ^a'tCV, with the father. Urtct), 1. after, behind ; 2. to or towards, with names of places, and verbs expressing motion ; 3. according to, fol- lowing ; as, Wild) miv, after or behind me ; 2J3ann gC'l^CU @ic nac() bci* @tabt? When do you go to town? fci'ucv ©c-- buvt' nad), according to his birth ; inn ©tVO'ltlC uarf), fol- lowing the stream. ncb|l or fammt, together with ; as, ucbjlt or fammt Um SBa'tcv, together with the father. fcit, since ; as, fcit bCV 3^it/ since the time. t)OU, from, of, by ; as,.i)On miv, from me, of me ; 3)a6 (Scfcictjf ijl \)0U il)m, That poem is by him. i)OV, before ; as, \)0l* miv, before me. JU/ to, at, by, on, in ; as, JU mil*/ to me ; JU icn'tOtt/ at or in London ; ju ^m')'(, at home ; ju "^Baffev, by water ; JU iau'De, on land ; JU gll'fe, on foot. Jttnafl)|l', next to ; as, Si* fa^' mil* JUUflct))^, He sat next to me. JUWi'bCl', contrary to, against ; as, mit JUTOi't)CV, against me. 3. Prepositions governing the Accusative. Mlfct), through ; as, Mvd) ten ^JBalD, through the wood ; MV(fy t>\d), through you. fflf, for ; as, fill* mid), for me ; fur t)Cn ^l*cig, for the price. ge'gcn, against, opposite ; as, gc'gen t>m \S}\l\ii, against the wind ; gC'gCU mid), against me or towards me. gCU (contraction of gc'gCU), towards, is applied to few objects; as, gcu .-Oitn'mcf, towards heaven. It is also used as a nau- tical phrase ; as, 2(t0l*I) gCU 0)1, north by east. foii'ba* 1 "'^^^^'^^ 5 ^^' ^^'"^ ^^ fou'tci* mid), without me. urn, about ; as, tim l>ic ©tatt, about the city ; iim mid), about me. Wi'ter, against, in opposition to ; as, voi'tn mid), fttd), \ij\\, fU, e6, fte, against me, you, him, her, it, them. 248 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [bOOK II. 4. Prepositions governing the Genitive, or Dative ; and the Genitive, or Accusative. jufol'gC/ according to, before the substantive, with the gen- itive : as, jufot'gc 3l)'l'C6 25efet)l6', according to your com- mand : but after the substantive with the dative ; as, 3t)'vcm 35cfcljl' jufol'gc, according to your command. tdug^, along, generally with the dative, sometimes with the genitive ; as, Idupig tcitt 'vIBc'gC/ along the way ; and some- times, (dugg l>Cg ^C'gcg, along the way. tif'nt, without, generally with the accusative ; as, o^'uc JUic^/ without me ; but in some phrases, after the substantive, with the genitive ; as, 3vt»fi'fcl6 Oi)'n(, without doubt. 5. Prepositions governing the Dative, or Accusative.* an, at, in, on, with the dative ; as, an ci'ncm Ot't(, in or at a place ; as, Sv i|t an al'kn Ov'ttn, He is at or in every place : but, an, to, with the accusative : as, Si* gc'f^Ct an al'lc Ox'tt, He goes to every place, anf, in, upon, with the dative ; as, 3)ag V5nd) (tegt auf i>tm %i^dy(, The book lies upon the table : but, auf, into, on, with the accusative ; as, ie'gc ^ag S3ucl) anf Dcn ^if((), Lay the book on the table. ^in'tCV, behind, with the dative ; as, Sv i|^ t}in'tCf mil', He is behind me : but with the accusative, in Si* jlcllt fid) (jin'tei* mid), He places himself behind me. in, in, with the dative ; as, St* i\l in l>cm 3iWmei*, He is in the room: in, into, with the accusative; as, ©I* gc't^Ct in ^a6 ^im'mci*. He goes into the room, nc'ben, next to, with the dative ; as, Si* wo^nt M'bm mft'nfm J^an'fc, He lives next to my house : but with the accusative, in Si* ^ii'ijd m'btn mein -Oant?, He moves next to my house, i. e. He moves into the house next to mine. iVbCl*, above, with the dative ; as, Sv WOt^nt iVtci* mil*, He lives over or above me : but n'tcv, over, with the accusative, in Si* fpving'ct iVbci* mid), He jumps over me. * If they signify motion or rest in a place, the dative is used ; but when motion to a place is expressed, the accusative is used. CH. 7. <^ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 240 Un'tCV, among, under, below, with the dative ; as, ®l* if? UU'tCt txn icu'tcn, He is among the people ; Sv i\l Uii'tcv miv, He is below me ; Sfi licgt itu'tCV t»cm ^i'fcl)C, It lies under the table : but with the accusative, in Sr C(e'l)Ct uii'tCV Me Uxi'U, He goes among the people ; ^v |lcllt fid) uu'tcv mid), He places himself below me ; 3;d) IDCV'ff C6 UU'tCf t)CU 'Xifd)/ I throw it under the table. i)OV, before, with the dative ; as, '33ov t)CV 3fit/ Before the time ; ^or mil' Itanb ctu ^^Baum, Before me stood a tree : but with the accusative, in (£r gcl^t VCV Mc 'i(}ur, He goes before the door ; Sf tvitt l^Ol* DCU §Kid)'tCV, He steps before the judge. jn)ifd)'cu, between, with the dative ; as, Sv gilio; jW)ifd)'cn bit liub mil", He walked between you and me : but w ith the accusative, in Sv bvauoi'te fid) jinifdj'cn bid) unb mic&, He forced himself between you and me. § 2. ARRANGEMENT. The preposition always continues with the case, and is usually prefixed to it. ■^ai'ben, tjaCbcr, entoic'geu, juwi'Dcv, are constantly put after their cases. 2)uvd), uad), gcgcmVt'ev, uu'9cad)tct, nje'gcn, ju, jufol'gc, sometimes before, and sometimes after. See ^ 1. RULE II. The preposition together with its case may be looked upon in the position of words, as an adverb ; accordingly, its place is after the object. 2fd) Ija'bc ciu'CU ^^vtcf am 2)i'Ulfd)'kub Ct^rtl'tCU/ I have received a letter from Germany. RULE III. The preposition with its case may be put before the object, for the purpose of emphasis : 3d) I;a'bc au6 3)cutfd)'(ani) ci'ncu ^^v'icf evbal'tcu — here the words au^ S)CUtfd)1aul> acquire energy from their position. But the stress is most forcible, when the preposition is placed at the beginning of the sen- tence : 2tu(? 3)cutfd)'(aul» Ija'bc id) ei'nen 33rtcf (vijal'Un, Front Germany I have received a letter. 250 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [bOOK II. It cannot be inserted between the subject and the verb, un- less it belongs exclusively to the former ; as, 2)CV SO?auu mit l>cm blrtu'cu 9*loc't'C t}at C6 9Ctl;au', The man with a blue coat (tliat is wearing a blue coat) has done it. 3c'ucv luit t>cni 2>c'j^CU l)at l»ic 'XijAt btc^an^'ClX, That one with the sword (that is, he who has the sword) has committed the deed. It is not said, that the first has done it with the blue coat, or that the second has committed the deed with the sword ; this would be a false construction. But, from the collocation of the words, it is to be understood, that the one, who wears a blue coat, is charged with a certain deed, and the other, who has a sword, has committed the deed. Therefore, if the prepo- sition, with its case, is not exclusively referred to the subject, it cannot be put, where we see it in the examples adduced. If an adverb and preposition meet in the same member of a sentence, the adverb should come before the preposition, especially, when the former consists only of one or two syl- lables ; for example, Sf fdu'Cibt ^nt mit tic'fcv j^C'bCf, He writes well with this pen ; QODiv gc'l^Cll ^Cll'tC auf Uc 3;agl), We go a hunting to-day ; ©ic vci'fctcn ci'ltg M«vc() ion't»OU, They passed hastily through London ; ©v n)ivt> mov'gcn JU mil* hm'= men, He will come to me to-morrow. The adverbs gut, ^Ctt'te, ei'lig, mov'gen, here stand before the preposition. Exercises. Since this event. Contrary to my wishes. Opposite our garden. I have searched after this circumstance in all (the) records. That gentleman with the solemn air has made the remark. They were soon put to flight. since, fcit. (Dat.) to search after, nail)'fovfc()en. event, Sreig'uif, n. 3. b. [\ gentleman, ^cvr, m. wish, *'2Buufc(), m. 3. b. t. solemn air, ZmWmkm, f. contrary, jumi'fcff. remark, ^^cmCf'fuug, /. opposite, gcgeuu't^cr. to make, mad)'en. garden, *®rtV'tCU, m. 3. a. a. soon, ba(f. circumstance, *Um'1^aut, m. to put to flight, in fcic glwc^t 3. b. fc. f(l)la'gcn, irr. record, Uv'funlie, /. CH. 8, ^ 1.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 251 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. The Conjunction fo is employed to connect a sentence when the prior member of it begins with a consecutive, causal, or conditional conjunc- tion. 3)a mv in ixv .^aupt'fact)e ci'nig ftiiD, fo laf'fct un6 nid)t ii'6cr ^(ei'uigt'cltcu uui? eutjirct'eu, As we agree in the essentials, let us not quarrel about trifles. '2Bcun tnrtU ftd) in tun '2Biffciifc()aftcn au(?'jcicl)ucu mil, fo ntu|3 man un'nntcv-- bfOcl)Cncn glcie bcftt'jen, If a person would distinguish himself in the sciences, he must possess unceasing industry. @0 is not always required after the consecutive and causal conjunc- tions, such as M, when ; al$, as ; XDk, as ; wctl, because : but it is rarely left out after the conditional conjunctions, such as, VDtnn, if; obfd)on', obgleid)', n)cnnfd)on', ttxnn^Uidy , although. When the conditional is not given in the prior member, but understood, it is common to make use of fO in the subsequent member ; as, J^dt'tC id) M? gcwnift', fO n)d'VC id) nid)t gctom's men, Had I known that, I should not have come ; which stands for, "vZDcnn id) tag gcmnp' ij^t'U, If I had known that; — there- fore fo must be inserted, in the following member. It is to be recommended after consecutive and causal conjunctions, when the antecedent member is of some length, or consists of several parts. ©0 is also found after the verb in the imperative mood, but no conjunction ; as, '33evtvau'e it)m, fO VDlti) tt tiv ijd'fm, Trust in him, and he will help thee. ©0 is used when cb^Uidi', obfd)On', or a similar word, meaning though, although, precedes : fcod)/ yet, or a synony- mous conjunction, generally follows. Oh tX '^Uid) fnng i)t, fO ^at cv tod) 'oit'it SvfiX^'vnng, Although he is young, he has nevertheless great experience. 253 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. lBOOK II. ^ 2. ARRANGEMENT. RULE I. The conjunction is, in general, placed at the beginning of the sentence, and before the subjeot. RULE II. 1. The following conjunctions join words and sentences without changing the position of the verb. «n^, and ; as, gcu'cv, iuft, ^\:'t(, tinl> <2Baf'fcr f(n^ Die \>itt ©(cmcu'tc, Fire, air, earth, and water are the four elements; •IDti- gc'^cu uni> vt'im mit cinau'Cer, We walk and talk with one another. md), also, too ; as, "33iv fint> fvcij, unt) fiC aucfe, We are glad, and they too ; 3ict) gUtlt'bc Ci? and), I think so too ; J^a'bcu ©ie md) gcljovt ? Have you heard also ? ft'bev, allciu', fou'&cni, but ; as, "^Bir fint» bctvubt', a'bct n\d)t cntmu'tl}igct, We are afflicted, but not dismayed ; IBit fi'a'gcn, adctu' (a'bcv) nic'mant mt'VDovtct, We ask, but nobody answers ; ^iv ijh'vcn nicl)t6 (Su'tct?, a'bcv and) iiic()t6 236'ff6/ We hear no good, but nothing bad : 9ticbt cr, fon'bCVU id), Not he, but I ; 3cl) ba'bc ts nid)t miv gcfc'ljcn, fou'ticni and) 9Cl)6rt', I have not only seen it, but heard it also, t)Od), jc^Od)', but, nevertheless, although, yet; as, ©ic l>fOt)'teu itjm, i»od) CV b(icb |lanl»'t)aft, They threatened him, but he remained constant ; Si' b(ei'bet l»Od) Ittcill §fCimt>, He remains nevertheless my friend ; Cf 9C|tat'tCtC C^, jCDod)' (itod)) un'= gCfUC, He granted it, although reluctantly. fcenn, for, because ; as, @ic n)tf fcn e^, l>cnu id) fag'tc e6 i^'ncn, They know it, for or because I told (it to) them. fut'wcfcer, either, c'l>ef, or ; as, Snt'mcfcef fte ffn& (or f(nl> ftc) farfd)e §rcun'&c, o'I»ci- offcnbiVrc §ciu'i>c, Either they are false friends, or open enemies. tPC'tCV, neither, nod), nor ; as, ©ie ftUt) WC'bet ^UUg'fig ttod) fcuv'jtig, They are neither hungry nor thirsty. jwar, however, indeed ; as, @ic fa'ben cg jtrar, fl'bcf nic^t mit 9led)t, They have it indeed, but not with justice. 2. The conjunctions, a'htv, but, and aU(6, also, may stand any where in the sentence. At the beginning, 2t'bev meitt CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 253 ?Sni'&Cl' irci'gcvt fic(), But my brother declines it. After another conjunction, 2)a a'bcr mem 25vu'Dcv fid) mci'oicrt. After an adverb, fRm\ a'bev bcfrc^lt' es" tic ^fug'tjcit. But now prudence commands it ; or after a preposition with its case, 30?it &ic'fi'n icu'teii a'bcf fviiin icl> nid)tg au'faiioicn, But with these people I can do nothing. And it makes no alteration in the influence of other words upon the constitution of the sentence. Those for instance, which bring the subject after the verb, retain the same power, though a'bci* be inserted after them ; as appears from the preceding examples. It may also be placed after the subject, ^ic gvanjo'fcu a'bcf f)a'l>cn ten Siig'(dut>cni ten ^vic^ tvHavt', After the object, 3)ic graujo'fcii ij.x'btn Dcii Su^'j IdllDcvn ixn ivvicg a'ba tvHhvt'. When not in the beginning of the sentence, it commonly gives energy to the word that precedes it. The personal pronouns are, generally, put be- fore it, when the verb has quitted its original place ; as, 2)a cr a'bn md)t f omtnt, But since he does not come ; !J>a? irun'fitcu wti* a'bcr nid)t, But this we do not wish ; Sag ®elt> l>crIciUA'C id) a'bci'/ But the money I demand. — What has been remarked of a'bci'/ may be applied to dud) ; though perhaps we should say, that aud) has nearly, but not quite the same license of po- sition. Moreover, when aud) is placed at the beginning of a sentence, the subject may be placed after the verb ; which would be wrong after a'bn. Ex. 2tud) glaubt fein '^A'ttt, His father also believes; or liiid) fcin '25a'tCV glaiibt/ Also his father believes. RULE III. The following conjunctions, when taken relatively, require the verb to be placed at the end of the sentence ; but their use will be best understood by examples, as they are not al- ways used as relatives. aU, f as, when, than, like, but. t>cmnad)', ffn'temaf, whereas. bc\)Ov', before. e'^C, before. big, till. fade or im gall, in case. M, when. in fo fern, in so much, if ^a, intern', as, since, whilst. nad)tcm', afler, after that. i>af , that. mil, Diweil', because. ^ dUf H^, Mmit', in order that. o6, whether. t 2C(g has sometimes a comparatire signification. 22 254 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. [book II. a(6 oh, as if. vomn, if, when. VDO, fo, if wofcru', fofcni', Mfmx', if TOO iucl)t, if not. un'9cacl)tct, or o^n'9cad)tct, notwilhstandins. wiewo^I'/ ebvooi^l', obpilcid)', obfcl)ou', j though, although. 3. The following conjunctions require the verb to be placed at the end of the sentence, if used relatively ; but otherwise the verb is put before the nominative. fcal^cv', hence. l)eJ5t)al'bcu, therefore, CelJTOC'gcn, } for which urn l>cf?'»t»illcn, reason. fcavum'/ J trofjCl*', whence n)e|5t}vt[|)' or ^ TOe^'roc'scji/ wm tticf3'n5illcu, wavum', wherefore, > for which reason. 4. The following conjunctions require certain others after them, which frequently cause the nominative to be placed after the verb. tnt'mHv, either, U)e'l>CV, neither, W(ii, because, tA, when, jt, the, foroo^r, as well, \ fo6alt>', as soon, j iXOW, indeed, wmn, if. requires C'HV, or. nOC^, nor. fo. je, or t>ef to, the. rtl6, as. ' rt'bct, rtKetn', but. l)0(^, Dcn'noc^, or jcbocfe', how- ever, yet. gleicfe'JDO^f/ yet, for all that, notwithstanding. ^inge'gcU/ on the contrary. nicfetg Dcf'tO TOc'uigci*/ never- theless. fo* * Observe, the word fo is sometimes a conjunction, some- times an adverb, and sometimes is used as a relative pronoun. Examples. 1. As a conjunction ; @0 t^c iiCbtt, Die tuA Ht'bm, CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION, 255 me, 9kicl)Wic', as, requires fo. fO/ so, fo. nic()t, not, foit'Dcnt/ but. nici)t allcin', ) . , ( fon't>cvn, but. n\d)t miv, ) ^' I fon'Dcvn and), but also. llltZ' \io — icd), txn'nodh however, '^^l^'^'^i'. !> although, <; nevertheless. fo' nid)t^ l»cf' to ittc'niger, nev- ertheless. wcun fc()on, wtmi and), vokvootjl', As the application of conjunctions may be better learned by examples than by rules, the following sentences are sub- joined to exemplify their use. lllfS mv ju 'J('bctt& gcgef fen When we had supped, we ijdt'tvn, (fo) ging'cn voit fpo; took a walk : or having sup- jic'l'cn. ped, &c. ©0 rot() aU ei'ne StO'fe. As red as a rose. Sv i|l dl'tcv a(6 id). He is older than I. €f ^an'Df It a(6 (in tedjt'- He acts like an honest man. fcljajfcuev SOtann. 2iU n im 2(uf VU^V in t)CV When he perceived the tu- ©tvlfct bcmevf te. mult in the city. Si* ijt jroai* mcin 5fiiil> tticl)t, He is not my enemy in- a'[>ci- iod) and) ilicl)t meill deed, but yet he is not my gvcunt). friend. 2((6 id) in ion'fcon antdnt. When I arrived in London. ?Bi^ l)ie @Ou'nc t)ic crjUvv'-- Till the sun shall loosen the ten gel'Dev auf (5fen mvt>, congealed fields. 2)a t>n 25o'te in ion'bon When the messenger arrived an'fiim. in London. SBom 93?0v'gen bi$ Jlim From morning till evening. 2t'6enl>. If you love (those) who love you. 2. As an adverb ; SS i]} fo, voic id) gcfa^t' ijA'bt, It is so, as I said ; 'iBie fo ? How so? 3. As a relative pronoun ; SaS ^nd), fo {mVd)C$) id) gefauft' i^d'bt, The book which I have bought. 256 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. [book II. 3)a ic^ Un Wlann, mi'djn lic'be ; or, 3)a id) ^fu SOTanu cl/re nni lic'bc, ipcl'itev I'o c'i»el gc^au'-- ttlt l)vu-. a'l;cv »rci6 id) ce. xIBof;cr' wtf feu ftc C6 ? ®r it»u|f tc c^ nic()t, t»ii'nim IjiVbc icb ci* il)m gcfa^t'. 5i)c\)iH-' id) Dcu ^JBv\It> cr= vcidit' IjiXf'tc. 2([g icf) Dic'fcn 50Toi-'gen an l)cm gcn'lUv \lmi> (iA*) fal) id) t>ic ©Dtt)a'tcu ill tit ^tafct tom'mcn. 3iit)cm' or weif id) an t)cm gcu'lUr jlvinb, fa^ id), &c. ^H3ic id) an l»cm gcn'ttcv jTaub, &.C. 3)a id) an fccm gcn'tlcv jlrtu^, &c. OBicwcl)!' cv fcf}r h-anf i|t, fo i|I Dod) nod) ^otf'muig \)ovlian'Dcii, M\] ci- lT»ie'^el• auf-- fommcu it)cv't>c, (or t»ir&.) 3;d) lH'vmad)'c Div uid)t al; Iciu' iiu'iii J^au^, fon'ltevn and) ^abc imt« (Sut. 3d) ci-wav'tctc 3f)'vc 2(u'-' fuuft iiid)t, fcefto gvS'fci- ijl mci'uc gvcu'De. 3c vu'bigcv M^ ic'bcu ijt, t)cfto )^cfd)icf'tcv i\l e6 jum 2Rad)'locu{rcn. eiit'ircticv hi]\ Ml toll, o'Dci* t>u ittivjt c^ wcv'tcn. Since I honor and love the man, who acted so nobly. If he will read the book. I saw it ; thence, or for that reason, 1 know it. Whence do they know it ? He did not know it, there- fore T have told (it) him. Before I had reached the wood. When, or as, I stood at the window this morning, or stand- ing at the window this morn- ing, I saw the soldiers coming into town. Whilst I was standing at the window, I saw, &.c. As I happened to stand, or as I stood at the window, &-c. When, or since, I stood at the window, &c. Although he is very ill, yet there is room to hope that he will recover. I leave to thee not only my house, but also my goods and chattels. I did not expect your arri- val, the greater therefore is my joy- The more quiet life is, the more (it it is for reflection. Either thou art mad, or thou wilt become so. * 2)rt, in such cases, is frequently omitted and understood. CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. S57 nodj ie'kn. £>6 iijv glcict) gcfc^vt' feifc, fo gicbt eg Dofl) (or 9Unct)'n)ol}t) nod) wi, M^ i()V uid)t wif'fct. Ob f(c gtcid) vcid) fiul>, (c fSn'ncu ftc t)od) nid)t al'ku icu'tcu ()cl'fen. Obnjoljl' eg unmog'Ud) fd)icn, ttid)tg t»epto iDc'nigev tjevfud)'-- ten wtv eg. SnDcm' id) woon' fpvad). £)6 ev gleid) mein ^et'tev i)lt, fo Ummt ev fcod) nid)t ju mtv. Sv ^at eg entwe'Dev get^an'/ o'fcev wiri) eg nod) tt)iin. ©ie l}at mil- un'rcd)t $(ti)m', ben'nod) will id) it}v t^evgc'ben. ©0 fcid)t'gldutng ev i)^, fo tveu'Iog i|t ci*. ©0 (ang'e ev ftd) in ben ©d)ranf en tn 5gefd)ei't>en(}eit ijidt, WAX id) fein anfi-id)ti9= flev gvcunb. Ob ei- gleid) aft ijl, fo tjat ev t>ocl) t>en Vol'ligen (Sebrand)' fei'nev ©ei'jkgh-afte. Sin tinD inufj nid)t mtv ben ^a'tev, fon'bevn and) bie 3}?ut'= tev el)'ven. ©obalb' (alg) eg i)iev 9efd)(a'= gen I) at. SKad)bem' roiv 2tt'(eg wo(}I untevfud)t' tjat'ten. ®'^e bie (Sloc'te aug'gefd)la* gen ):iat. 3e met)v id) tvinf'e, befto me^v t?a'bc id) Snvjl. 3e Idn'geV/ )e Ue'bev. 33* He fears neither God nor men, neither death nor life. Although you are learned, yet there is still much that you do not know. Although they are rich, yet they cannot help every body. Although it seemed impos- sible, we nevertheless at- tempted it. Whilst I was speaking of it. Although he is my cousin, yet he does not come to (see) me. Either he has done it, or he will do it yet. She has done me wrong, yet I will forgive her. He is equally credulous and treacherous. Whilst he kept himself within the bounds of modesty, I was his most sincere friend. Although he is old, he still has the perfect use of his men- tal faculties. A child must not only hon- or his father, but also his mother. As soon as it has struck four. After having well examined every thing. Before the clock has done striking. The more I drink, the more thirsty I am. The longer, the dearer. 258 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. [BOOK II, Some conjunctions, when at the beginning, cause the subject to be placed after the verb. They are t>a, then ; tal^CV, there- fore ; Dauu, ^avauf , then ; t»arum', for that reason ; t>cinnrt(()',- folg'lid), consequently ; Dcu'llOcl), )Ct>Oc()', nevertheless ; mm, jcgt, now; fo, therefore; ^iugc'gcu, on the contrary; iut>cf'fcu, meanwhile ; tU9lci'(l)CU, likewise ; t'awm, hardly ; mitl^tu', therefore ; iiocl), nor ; ubevtiicg', u'bvigcn^/ besides. 5)a t-'am bcv Tlnnil, Then came the man ; a}?it^in' ivrtftd) t)Cin 23vu't)Cf, Consequently your brother mistakes. Excepting fca, all of them may likewise be put after the verb ; as, 3)Cf SOlami glaubt &at}CV', The man thinks therefore ; 3c() JlPfi'lUe jcDOCl)', I doubt however, gcv'ncr, foIg'Ucl), Ijingc'gcn, inbcf'fcn, inglei'c()e»/ ubevDice', iVbvtgcn^, may even stand between the subject and the verb : J)ci- '33cvfaf'fcv fcv'ucv beljaup'tct, The author more- over maintains. 'Zil'fO/ therefore ; Doct), but ; CUtwe'bCf, either ; WC'tCl*, neither ; JTOav, indeed ; are to be added to the forego- ing : for when they begin a sentence, they may, like these, bring the subject after the verb, though it is not necessary. It is right to say, ZtCfo Dev ^.Svu'&Cf l)at gcfcl)vie'beu, The brother then has written; and, 2(I'fO l)at t»Cl' ^VlffcCf gcfct)ric'bcn. Likewise thus : ^CV SSni'tCV ijdt al'fo gcfc()vic'bcn, and 2)ef ^Svw'DCf al'fo (;at gcfc()rie'bcn. By this transposition, the force of the sentence may be varied, which is no small advantage in composition. The word ndm'Iict), namely, which should be considered as a conjunction, may be included among those last mentioned : but when at the beginning of a sentence, it never causes the subject to be put after the verb. Exercises. If you do not go immediately. Then we rejoiced. She nevertheless forgave him. Consequently his assertion rests on a wrong conclusion. Namely, the question arises, whether we shall remain or not. But the Tyrolese were not discouraged. This supposition also may easily be refuted. if, menn. to rejoice, ft(t treu'en. immediately, fog(cict)'. nevertheless, t)Cn'nocl). to go, gc'ljen, irr. to forgive, ^ei'gC'beu, irr. then, M. tonsequentljr, fcemnacfe'. CH. •] SYNTAX OP THE INTERJECTION. 259 to rest, biVXl'tjtn. assertion, SScl^aup'tUng, /. upon, auf. {Dat.) wrong, fvl(fct). conclusion, @d)(u|3/ m. 3. b. K namely, udm'tid). question, §va'9C, f. to arise, Cut|te'^CU. whether, ot\ to remain, Hci'bcu. or, o'tev. but, a'bev, Tyrolese, XVjXd'Ux, m. 3. a. 0. discouraged, cutmu'tt^igt. supposition, ^Cl'mu'tljung, /. also, auc(). may be, {^^t f(c() (literally, suffers itself.) easily, (cicl^t. to refute, n)il>cvtc'gm. CHAPTER IX. INTERJECTIONS. The interjection stands quite by itself; it neither govemt nor is governed by any other part of speech. Therefore, the nominative and vocative, being independent cases, that is, such as are not governed by a preceding word, are most proper after interjections. '2icl) ! id) itn'glucf lid)£V SDTenfd), Ah me ! unhappy mortal ! Si! t>tx '^d)i\[i \ Ah! the rogue! £)\ V0C6 S'tcube^, Ah ! the misery ! ! t)Cl' greit't>e, Oh ! what joy ! 2(d) ! bC8' lln'Dailtbavcu, Ah ! the ungrateful wretch ! spfui j i>Cg fd)am'(ofen SO?cn'fd)fn ! Fie ! what a shameless man ! The dative of advantage, or disadvantage, occurs after certain terms, that may be called interjections, though they are not strictly of that description; as, QGBoIjI i^m! Happy him ! — '2Dol)I bem 9}len'fct)en, Happy the man ! — ^c^ tnii* I Woe is me ! The position of the interjection is arbitrary ; it may be placed wherever it presents itself, according to the emotion of the speaker or writer. BOOK III. PROSODY. Prosody, containing the principles of syllabic division, quantity, accent, and verse, may be considered as the syntax of phonology, i. e. the doctrine of the sounds of the language, the elements of which form the first part of this grammar. See Book I. Part I. Ch. 4. CHAPTER I. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES.* " In the German language the division of words into sylla- bles is not founded upon derivation^ but on pronunciation ; we therefore follow the principle. Divide as you speak." t 1. The letters d), fcl), p^, and t^, when they form simple consonants, can never be disconnected on account of any alteration of the word in which they occur ; as, %m^, cloth, ^U=ct)C6 (not ^uc:l)e6) ; ^aufcb, exchange, tail-fcljcu, to ex- change, (not tauf;cl)eu/) ; sptjjlofopl), philosopher, spi;ilofo--pl}ClV philosopers; IHftti)/ counsellor, IHd-t^C, counsellors. 2. The consonant n before g or f is not to be pronounced separately, although a vowel should follow the g or f ; because the combination of U with 9 or f affects the pronun- ciation of both letters, by giving them a nasal sound. Thus the true sound of the verbs ftug'rCU, to sing, and bauf'CJi, to thank, would be spoiled by separating them in this manner, * The mode of dividing words into syllables would not have been ranked among the parts of prosody, if this division ivere not founded altogether on principles of elocution. t Heinsius's German Grammar. CH. 2,] QUANTITY. 261 3. A word compounded of several words is divided ac- cording to the words of which it consists. Thus ^fvt'ftatt, workshop, is divided ;XDcrf=|tfttt ; VOlkuiiCU, to perfect, V>o((-'CntCH. 4. A long vowel or a diphthong, followed by a simple or compound consonant, is pronounced with this consonant, if it terminates the word ; as, gvfui, green ; nxci]i, most : hut if a vowel with or without other letters is added to its end, the consonant, which before terminated the word, becomes the initial of the additional syllable ; as, gVlVucv, greener ; SOTei'; \\(V, master. - 5. If a short vowel is followed by a double consonant and a vowel, the two consonants of which the double one consists, are commonly separated in pronunciation and spelling, the first of them being joined with the preceding vowel, and the second with the subsequent vowel ; as, ©cl)if;fc, vessels ; '^Cct^ffV/ weather. 6. A short vowel, followed by one or more consonants and a vowel, is commonly joined in pronunciation with the consonant by which it is followed ; as, ^IDPct^C, week ; Sufc()=C, bushes ; fcl)CV'=JCU/ to jest ; gcu-jlCV, window. Observation. Many German authors divide words into syllables according to derivation, without regarding their prO' nunciation ; and others divide partly according to the former and partly according to the latter. We have in this grammar endeavoured to divide every word conformably to its true pro- nunciation, — taking together for each syllable so many letters as are necessary to produce each of the component sounds of the word. & CHAPTER II. QUANTITY. The quantity of a syllable consists in the duration of its sound. The principal difference between the ancient Greek and Latin languages and the German as well as other modern languages, in respect to quantity, consists in two things. First, there are in the ancient languages but two different 262 QUANTITY. [book III. times of duration by which the quantity of syllables is deter- mined. They are either long or short; and there is but one kind of length and of shortness, the time of two short sylla- bles being e(iual to one long syllable.* In German there is a great variety of longer or shorter syllables : thus in the word QBol^'lumc^cil, habitations, the syllable ^oi) is longer than WMW^t which surpasses in length the final syllable CU. The German also differs from the ancient languages in its not recognising the principle of j^o.s/^/«», that is, the effect of the meeting of two consonants, by which in the ancient lan- guages the preceding syllable is rendered long. For although the concurrence of consonants has some influence upon quantity in German, yet this influence consists in nothing else than the natural effect of several consonants upon pronunciation. They lengthen a syllable by obstructing its utterance. Thus cin (indef. art.) is shorter than cill^, one thing, and this is shorter than cin|T/ once. To facilitate the comprehension of quantity in German, three different times of duration have been adopted by prosodists, the long, the short, and the middle time, which are signified by these three signs, -, o, and u.t One long syllable is accounted equal to two shovt ones : while those of middle length are in themselves shorter than the former, and longer than the latter ; but may sometimes be used as long, and some- times as short syllables. 1. The following syllables are long : all monosyllabic nouns, adjectives, and verbs (if they are not used as auxiliaries) ; moreover, the radical syllable of every word, and those sylla- bles which have the accent ; J as, "33ovt, word ; gut, good ; fein (fci}n)/ to exist; €ffi*CU'Iicl)CVe^, something more pleasant , ant'iDOVtfii, to answer. * Although there were syllables which were sometimes pro- nounced long and sometimes short (ancipites), yet they did not form a medium between long and short, but were pronounced either long or short. t This sign («) is here used to signify the middle time, as weH as the doiditfid, i. e. either short or long. \ The nature of this case will be explained in the next chapter. CH, 3.] ACCENT. 263 2. The following syllables are short : the inseparable parti- cles belonging to compound verbs, as, bc, CUt, cmp, CV, gC, i)CV, jer, (pages 108 — 110); the unaccented ending of words, as C, DC, tc, cl, cm, CU, CV, C^, Ct ; the definite article, and some adjective and adverbial endings, as, cU, lig, tic(), and ifc(). Examples, tHVCt'tcn, to prepare; 'XH'f(, depth; (cr) iit'bU, (he) loves; ir'Dcn, earthen; wa^v'licl), truly; Wci'lnfcC), ef- feminate. 3. The following syllables are of middle length : mono- syllabic pronouns, numerals, prepositions, conjunctions; some adverbs, interjections, and auxiliaries which consist of one syl- lable; the substantive endings, cnt), ling, fcill, ni|5, fcl)aft, ^tit, fcit, (see page 20) ; and the adjective, adverbial, and participial endings, bav, fam, crn, icl)t, ifc()t, cut», clt, cvt, cv|l; as, id), I; iTCi, three; fiiv, for; njcmi, if; mm, now; 0! O!; (cr) t)rtt (gcUcbf), (he) has (loved); '^Sdlim'iciu, little tree; gc^av'Hifcl)t, clad in armour ; juv5f'l»CV|l, first. Observation. It should be remembered, that this classifica- tion of syllables according to their length is only an approxima- tion to a correct representation of their quantity, which in many cases depends on other circumstances besides those before mentioned ; such as the sense of the words, the meeting of certain letters, and other things, which cannot be taught by rules, but must be acquired by induction, as one becomes familiar with the nature of the language. CHAPTER III. ACCENT. Accent consists in laying upon a particular syllable of a word, or upon a certain part of a sentence, a greater stress than upon the rest. Accordingly there are two kinds of ac- cent, that which is laid upon a particular syllable, and that which belongs to a certain part of a sentence. In this sen- tence, 2)ie ®rte'cl)cn tDa'rcu fteg'vcicC), The Greeks were victo- rious, the accent is to be placed on Cgvtc'cl)cn, the Greeks, if the intention of the writer is to exclude the idea that the enemies of the Greeks were victorious ; but it must be 264 ACCENT, [book III laid upon f(CO|'rcirf), victorious, if he meant to assert that the Greeks were not defeated, but gained the victory.* This rule applies pf course, as well to words of one, as of several syl- lables. In order to determine which of several syllables of a word has the accent, we must, according to the above principle, examine which of them is the most important. The rela- tive importance of each syllable, on which the place of the accent depends, is determined by the following rule. The greatest stress, and consequently the accent, lies generally on the radical syllable of the word, unless it be compounded with another word which implies a negation or limitation of the radical word. In this case the word which is joined as a limitation takes the principal accent; and the radical syllable of the main word retains only a secondary accent. Thus the words gc'kn, to give ; ®cfcirff()aft, company ; and most other words, have only one accent, viz. on the radical syllable of each of them (c|ct\ fell). But in the words atlf <\c"beil, to give up, Slci'fcgcfcU'fcbaft, company for travelling, the original words are essentially modified by the additions ailf, SHci'fC ; these therrfore take the principal accent, while only a secon- dary stress remains on the radical word. In speaking, the principal accent is generally expressed by the falling and the secondary accent by the rising inflection of the voice ; in writing, the former is marked by the sign ('), and the latter by the sign ('), after the last letter of the accented syllable. It is to be observed that the accent is not moved from the radical syllable of a word on account of the addition of a syllable which either has no meaning by itself, or, at least, by being joined to another word, takes entirely the nature of those particles which have no meaning except in connexion with other words. This inseparable connexion makes them to be considered as parts of the radical word, rather than as limi- tations of its original meaning. Thus, with respect to com- pound verbs, the inseparable particles, be, gc, ent, &c (pages 108 — 110), do not alter the place of the accent; while all the * Accordingly the question, which of several words in a sentence is to have the accent, cannot be determined by the part of speech to which each of these words belongs, but only by the degree of importance which the meaning of the sen- tence assigns to each of them. CH. 3.] ACCENT. 265 separable particles, as an, on, ab, off, attg, out, produce that effect. Examples : fct'jcu, to place ; Dcvfct'jcu, to displace ; ttb'fct'jcn, to depose ; c;e't)CU, to go ; ubcvgc'ljcn (inseparable), to pass over without noticing; u'bcrgc"l}CU (separable), to go over to a different party. Those words, however, which are compounded with till, form exceptions ; because this negative particle does not occur by itself, and nevertheless produces so great an alteration of the sense that it generally takes the principal accent ; as, frcuiit»'Ucl), friendly ; uirJTeiint>(id), un- friendly ; gad, case; Uil'fall, accident. The verb ant'irov'teu, to answer, composed of the ancient verb wov'tcu, to represent in words, and the inseparable aut, forms a similar exception. In some instances the sense of the sentence and euphony alone can decide which of two syllables ought to have the principal, and which the secondary accent ; whether, for ex- ample, we ought to pronounce Vpirt'oirimcii, or t)Oirfom'mcn, perfect ; uu'cntbcl}v licfe, or iin'ciitbctjv'lid), indispensable. Sometimes even an unaccented syllable may be marked by a particular oratorial accent ; as in this phrase, ^ic'h ^a'bcu itm Cie'fc St)'re ftct) bc'iDov'bcu, a'bci* ^ei'nci* (}at f(c ei-'wov'- ben. Many have aspired to this honor, but no one has obtain- ed it. Foreign words, which are Germanized by omitting the end- ings eg, 06, U6, iu6, 0, a, &c., have the accent commonly on the final syllable ; as, 2(d)i(l' (Achilles) ; £)(i;mp' (Olympus) ; eciifulat' (consulatus) ; ^iv^ll (Virgilius) ; 2tpolI' (Apollo) ; 2)i^lom' (diploma). Observation. Accent must not be confounded with quan- tity. The latter consists in the duration of the sound of a syllable ; while the accent marks the degree of emphasis em- ployed in proriouncing certain syllables or words. If the ac- cent is on a long syllable, it has no influence upon its quanti- ty. But when it happens to fall on a short syllable, the accent does not actually make the syllable a long one, yet it produces a similar effect on its pronunciation ; that is, the rapid and emphatic manner in which the accented syllable is uttered, is followed by a pause preceding the pronunciation of the unaccented syllables ; and this pause, together with the accented syllable, equals the time of a long syllable, according to the above principles of quantity. Examples : SDtut'tfV, mother; QBaf'fcv, water. 23 966 VERSIFICATION. [bOOK IK CHAPTER IV. GERMAN VERSE. The German verse rests on a double foundation, Rhythm, or harmonious measure ; and Consonance, or agreement of sounds, which is exemplified principally in rhyme. In the ancient Greek and Latin poetry, rhythm alone constituted the verse. For although we find rhyme sometimes employed (intentionally, as it seems), it must be considered as an incidental play upon certain sounds, rather than as an element of versification. In German, as in other modern languages, the principle still prevails, that there may be verses without rhyme, but none without rhythm. Nevertheless it is certain, that in some verses the rhythm, and in others the rhyme (oi some other kind of consonance), determines the character of the verse. § 1. O/ Rhythm. The German language is capable of imitating all the an- cient Greek and Roman metres ; accordingly all the classical poetry of the ancients, even the choruses of the dramatic poets, have been translated into German verses of the same kind. But, in indigenous German versification, a freer use has been, and may be made of the rhythmical powers of the language, for adapting the measure entirely to the meaning of the words, without confining the poet to other rules than that measurement of time to which the composer of music i.s likewise subjected. 1. The ancient Metres. In using the ancient metres for German poetry, the above principles of quantity ought to be observed. The accent has no direct influence in ti.io kind of versification ; except so far as it coincides with the principles of quantity, and preserves euphony in general. Each foot of the ancient metres may be rendered in Ger- man either by one or by more words. It will be sufficient td give here examples of all the feet of two and of three syl* lables. CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 267 a. Feet of two syllables. Spondee, - - ^unlt'wcrf , work of art. Pyrrhich'ius, u u @l)6a=vit',* Sybarite. Trochee, - u al'lc, all. • Iambus, o - ©CJralt'/ force. b. Feet of three syllables. Molossus, gc(M}aupt'mauu, commander. Trib'rachys, o o u c^cbcuc-fcit',* blessed. Amibacchi'us, — u Siu'Jttobuci'/ inhabrtant. Bacchi'us, o — ®c»»a(t'tbat, violence. Amphim'acer, -t€ c»r>''gcn ©ouu'tag^ ?D?ov'3cu cmpoi-'jUigt. Our daily labor the still sabbath terminates, as the desired moonlight night (tEr/uhiatex) the heat of noonday. Strive, and hope ! till finally the morning of the eternal Sunday rises. Observation. It is an important principle particularly in ancient metres, that the natural division of every verse into words, should correspond in some measure with its division into feet, and the general character of the verse. Thus, a too frequent repetition of the amphibrachys spoils the character of the hexameter ; as, iicb'licl) ci't6n'teu l>ic §(5'tcu, c^ fc()«)cb'teu tit 'Jdu'jcv im ^vci'fe. Sweetly sounded the flutes, the dancers moved in a circle. This verse might be mended in this manner ; Sovt t6nt §I6'tcnmufif , fcovt fctjwing'cu fid) ^dn'jev im ^vci'fe. There sounds the music of flutes, there the dancers move in a circle. 2. The German Rhythm. The metres which are not bor- rowed from the Greeks, but originally German, are on the * The Sapphic stanza is here divided according to the sim- ple mode of the old grammarians ; because we think it prefera- ble to that of Ausonius. We also think that the uniform caesura after the first syllable of the third foot, as we find it in the odes of Horace, cannot be considered as an improvement on the original metrical construction which prevails in the poeti- eal remains of Sappho. ClI. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 269 whole founded upon the same principles of quantity, and may generally be analyzed into feet, like the ancient metres. But these principles of quantity and metrical division are modified by accent, euphony, and the sentiment that is to be expressed : so that frequently the character of the verse cannot be deter- mined by each of its parts, but only by the whole of a poetical composition. Accordingly in native German poetry we find many deviations from the above stated common rules of quan- tity which ought strictly to be adhered to in imitating the an- cient metres. Thus, a short syllable may be used for a long one particularly when it ends in a vowel, or in a liquid consonant ; as in the Iambic measure of Biirger's Lenore. ^IBic bon'nevten t)ic ^vucf'cn ! How the bridges thunder ! On the other hand, long syllables may be used for short ones, particularly when, from the sense they express, they are com- paratively of little importance in the sentence in which they occur. Thus in Schiller's Blaria Stuart, Mary says, — 2)ovt (coit citt §ifc()'cf t)cu 3Iac()^cn an ; 3)icfc6 e'kufcc galjv'jeug f oun'tc mid) vct'ten ! There a fisher fastens his boat to the shore ; This miserable vessel might rescue me ! Here the first as well as the second syllable of ^ic'ff6 is osed as short, so that this word together with the first syllable of C'(cnl>C forms an anapaest, and all the emphasis falls on C'rcubC (even such a miserable skiff" as this, &c.) But in most cases of this kind it cannot be said strictly, that short syllables are used as long ones, or long syllables as short ones. A good reader will take care, that the measure which would be disturbed by pronouncing a certain syllable according to its natural quantity, be restored by an appropriate pause, or by protracting or shortening the subsequent or pre- ceding words, so as to restore the general character of the verse. The most common measure is the Iambic, frequently in- terspersed with the spondee or anapaest, or a pyrrhichius used as an iambus. The spondee and the anapsest occur among 23* 270 VERSIFICATION. [bOOK III. the iambuses not only in the odd places, as in the Greek tri- meter, but in every place. Examples, S»anf, X>anf tic'fcn frcunblicf) gvu'ncn 25du'men ! (©c^illet:.) O thanks, thanks to these friendly green trees ! u u — Sa, ill bcf gfv'nc Wt ftc() Die SOTac^t '^Bcuu jwci ftcl) vel>'Uc() Ue'ben. {^btijt.) Yes, at a great distance the power is felt, when two love each other truly. Sometimes the iambic measure is interrupted by a trochee, for the sake of greater emphasis. ^ann irt) Dod) fTiv mir() fcIbjlE nicl)t fpvcd)'cn, o^'nc cuc^ @c()n)cr ju t)cvt(a'gcu. (©cf)i(Icv.) I indeed cannot speak for myself without accusing you grievously. Next to the iambic, the trochaic measure is most frequent ; oftentimes mixed with spondees and dactyls ; — — — tj ^ 2)ie TOcit lit'btx cin fvtm'txs iul> Who like to hear the song of another, rather than their own. The amphihrachys also not unfrequently constitutes the character of the verse. Sg ton'ucrn Mc ^h'^tw, ee jit'tcrt iser ^u^, 9licl)t gvatt'ct fcem @(l)ut'jcn auf fcl)n)inl»'Uclbem QCBcg. The heights thunder, the bridge trembles, the hunter is Hot afraid on the dizzy path. Other verses derive their character from the dactyle, the anapajst, or other measures. Besides there is a great number of mixed verses ; in some of them a regular change of cep- CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 271 tain feet is observed, while others, like the hymns of Pindar and the choruses of the Greek drama, vary according to the sentiment of the poet. Most of the regular verses and stanzas, are the same in German and in English ; particularly in modern German poetry, since the bold and high-wrought versification of the twelfth and thirteenth centuries has given way to simpler measures. We will add a specimen of poetry, the rhythm of which is not determined by any certain measure, but by the sense ot the words alone. It is taken from Schiller's Maria Stuart When the queen after a long and close imprisonment had ob- tained permission to walk in the park near the castle, she says to Lady Kennedy, her nurse, who vainly endeavoured to follow the quick step of the queen, — ia|5 mid) l>cv ncu'cn gvci'^cit gcutc'fcn, iajj mlc() ein ^uib fcin, fci eg mlt ! Unb auf bcm giu'ncu ^cy'^tcl) t»cv QDBic'fen spru'fcu ben Iei(()'ten, gettiV^clten ©c()vitt. 25in id) bent ftu'itevn (Sefdng'ni|5 ent|Ue',csen, J^dft f(e mid) uid)t met)v, bte tvau'viaie ®vuft? iie fvei'e, bie l}imm'(ifd)c hift. 2)anf, Sanf Die'fen frennb'lid) gnVuen 95du'mcn, 2>ie mei'ne^ Sfev'fevs ?D?au'ern miv vevjtec'fen ! 3d) mil mid) fret nut) oiluct'Iid) trdit'men, •ICarnm' ang mci'nem fiVfcn Q33al)n mid) wec'fcn ? Umfdngt' mid) nid)t tei* n)ci'te J5im'mef6fd)oo6? 2)ic SSIic'fe, fvei unD fef felloe, €v9e'l)cn fid) in nn'gemeifneu ^Hdn'men. 2)oi-t, n)o t)ie ^vau'en S^e'belbevoic va'^en, gdngt met'nee 5)^ei'd)e6 ^Trdn'je an ; Unl> t>ie'fc QODol'tcn, tie nad) SJlit'tag ja'gcu, ©ic fn'd)en gvAufveid)!? fer'uen D'ccan. ©i'tenbe Molten ! ©fg'Ier bev iuf tc ! '2Dev mit end) wan'tcrtc, mit end) fd)tff' te ! (gfu'fet mil* fveunb'Iid) metrt 3u'gcnt(AnD ! 3d) bin gefang'en, id) tnn in ^JSan'Deu/ 2td), id) ^ab' fei'nen an'bern (Sefaub'teu ! grei in iuften i|l eu'i-e Q5at)u, 3^v feii) nid)t biefev ^^'nigin un'tevtfjan. '272 VERSIFICATION. [bOOK III. Let me enjoy the new freedom, Let me be a child, be one with me ! And on the green carpet of the meadows [Let me) try the light, winged step. Am I arisen from the dark prison. Does the sad vault no longer hold me ? Let me in full and thirsty draughts Drink in the free, the heavenly air. thanks, thanks to these friendly green trees, Which conceal from me the walls of my dungeon ! 1 will dream myself free and happy ; Why wake me from my sweet delusion ? Does not the wide canopy of heaven surround me ? My looks, free and unconfined, Wander over immense spaces. There, where the grey, misty mountains rise, The boundary of my kingdom commences ; And these clouds which hasten towards the south, Seek the distant ocean of France. Hastening clouds, sailors of the air. Would that I could wander and sail with you ! Salute for me friendly the land of my youth ! I am imprisoned, I am in fetters, Alas, I have no other messenger ! Free in the air is your path. You are not subject to this queen. The first three lines consist of alternate dactyles and tro- chees. From the fourth line the emphasis rises, as Mary con- trasts her present freedom with her late imprisonment ; and the metre hastens on in dactyls, to the eighth verse. In the ninth verse the feeling of gratitude changes the measure into the iambic, which continues to the nineteenth. From the twentieth verse her desire of deliverance from captivity in England, awakened by the sight of the distant mountains of Scotland, and the clouds flying towards France, changes the metre again into that of the first three lines, which de- scribe her delight in her deliverance from her dungeon. The alternate dactyles and trochees sometimes terminate with a supernumerary (catalectic) syllable, as mit, @ct)Vitt/ ®i-uft, iuf^. CH. 4. § 2.] VERSIFICATION. 273 § 2. Of Consonance. Under the word consonance we comprehend three princi- pal resemblances between successive sounds of the language, viz rhyme, assonance, and alliteration. 1. jRhi/mc consists in the identity of certain vowels and consonants. This resemblance may exist between one, or two, or three syllables occurring in different words ; as, ©(()ilD, shield, and *Silt», image; ic'bcu, life, and C|c'bfU, to give; miu'uiglid), lovely, and iu')li<ar()t' Scr ©ou'nc spi-ac()t. Out of the night awakes the splendor of the sun. In a monosyllabic rhyme the beginning of the rhyming syllables should not be the same, unless the two words ex- press quite a different meaning. In rhymes of more than one syllable this remark applies to the first of those syllables. — Thus we cannot make itif(}'rcu, to augment, rhyme with \)Cnncl}'vni, to augment : but it is allowable to say, 3e't»ev c^'(f SOtcnfd) l>cve(/rc 2)ic'feJi SO?av'ti;vfi' tn sp|fic{)t uut) Qij'vt ! Let every noble man revere this martyr of duty and honor. 274 VERSIFICATION. [bOOK III, We must notice here two kinds of impure rhymes which occur even in the works of the best poets. They consist in making to rhyme together vowels or consonants of a similar but not the same sound. With respect to vowels, we remark as being made to rhyme together, c, a, and b ; i and u ; ci and eu ; as, ©e'gcu, blessing, wa'gcn, to weigh, and m6'9Cll, to be able ; §fiut), enemy, and gveunt), friend. In regard to con- sonants, the sounds of D and t are particularly liable to be confounded ; as, thus gcl'^Cl•, fields, and ^d'tU, palfrey. 2. Assonance consists in the rhyming of the vowels alone, and consequently differs from the full rhyme by the dis- crepancy between the consonants ; as, milti, mild, and 5liul)/ child ; iie'bc, love, and §vic't)C, peace. Since assonance does not so evidently combine several verses as rhyme, it is commonly oftentimes repeated, so that frequently the same assonance connects a whole poem. — As- sonance is not so frequently used as rhyme. 3. Alliteration consists in the repetition of certain conso- nants particularly at the beginning of words. It is most com- mon that the same consonant which begins the first verse, is repeated in the course of the same, and then at the beginning of the next verse. EAample, ISofjf in teg QOBaf'tes <2Birt)eilcr Qin'^amUit ^Ivt' id) t>cu J^av'fcnflang, ^bvV id) ten J^flt'vnf. Indeed in the wildest solitude of the forest I heard the sound of the harps, I heard the call of the heroes. Alliteration, which was common in the old Scandinavian poetry, is now rarer than the two other kinds of consonance. APPENDIX. As an exercise in reading and translating for beginners, we add here a passage of the New Testament, from the German version of Leander Van Esz. ACTS ix. 1 — 28. 1. ©ati'lus fc()naut»'tc nod) ^nti) unt) COlovD »»t'l>cr Mc 3img'cv Dcg J^cvvn, gtug ju Dcm O'bervvifl^cf. 2. Unl> (ic6 ftd) i>on il?m SBoirmacbtsbi-icfe md) ©ama^'fu^ an Die ©rjnago'gfn gebcu, t'vaft ird'cber ci* SOTdu'nev unt> gvaw'en, tic ev al6 ^iu'ljaugcv Die'fei- iclj'rc f^n'De, gebun'ten narf) 3cvu'falcm fii()'i-cu f^nu'te. 3. 2tuf Dic'fcv SKci'fc, fiton iirt't)c bei 3)amag'fu6, um)U'a(jf'tc itin pl^^'Ud) ein iidjt t>om •^im'mcf. 4. crforc\c|h S^ wivt tiv fd)n)ei' wev'ten, roi'tev ten @tad)'ct au^'jufd)Iac\eu. 6. ^it'tcvut uut aug|V\)oU f^vad) cv : ^nv, was mll]l tu, trtt3 id) tl)uu foil ? 7. 2)ei' J^cvv ant'raortcte it}m : @te't}e auf, unt gc'lje in tie @tatt, ta TOivt til- gcfagt' wcv'teu, wag tu t^im fofI|h ^e^ jKtvjt' lUii'teu fei'ne SHci'fcgefat^vtcn ta; tenn fie t;5i-'ten jwat tic ©ttm'me, fa't)en a'bcv 3^ic maut. 8. ©au'Iug jtaut \)cn tor Sr'te auf, f'onn'te a'bcv, ta ev tie '2lu gen 5ff'ncte, Siiie'mant fi"l)cu. T)a nal}'meu fte i^n an tev J^ant, unt lei'tetcn itjn \u\i[) 3)amag'l:ug. 9. 2)rci ^a'ge laug fal) cv nid)t, unt mijwi we'tev ©pei'fe nod) %i-mi jn fid). 10. 9Iun t»av jn 2)amag'hig ciu 3uug'ev, 9ta'mcn6 2(nam's rt6 ; JU tem fpvad) tcv J^cvv in ci'nev Svfdjci'nung ; ^Ztuani'ae ! ©V fpvad) : J^evv, l;iev bin id). 276 APPENDIX. 11. 3)a fag'tc ^cl• ^nv ju iljm: ®e^' iml>fvjuvVlic() in tit fo'cicnauntc gcra't>c @ti-a'|\' '"i^ cvtuu't>tc\e iuh in 3n'&at> ^m'- fc nach ci'ncm ©an'Iut^ vou '5:rtv'fu^ ; fcnn c'bcn jcjt tc'tct &ie'' fcv DJ^ann, 1^. llnti l-jiU in ci'ncv Srfcl)ci'nunA ci'ncn SOTann, 3(lrt'mfn6 2(nani\Uv jn fid) t}ei-cin'hMnmcn gcfc't^cn, Dcu it^m Die J^dn'Dc auf Icgf, nm i()n iric'Dci- fc'()cnt» ju niac()'cn. 13. 2(nani'ag cnDic'Dcvte 3t}m : -Ofvr, c^ Ija'bcn miv "^Jie'Ic i)on fcicfcm ?0?an'nc cr^at^ft', wit ml 256'ff^ cv tci'nen J^ci'U- gcn jn 3icvu'falfm jn'v\cfuc\t ; 14. lln^ auil) bier l^at cr lion t>cn D'kvpric|krn SBolI'macfet/ %l'it in *^an'E>c jn lc'c\eu, ^ic l>ci'ncn Dta'mcn an'vnfcn. 15. 2)ci' -^cn* fpracl) jn i()m: ®c'l}c nnv {)in ; c'bcn fcie'tn* i|^ miv cin ant^'iTlcfcnoi? "^Dcrfjcnj^, mid) untcr J^ci'Dcn, Dov ^6'nivicn nn^ ten Slin'Dcvn 3f' raclt^ bcfannt' jn macb'cn. 16. 2)cnn id) wtv'tc il)m jfi'oien, wievicl' cv fuv mci'ncn 9ta'= wen Ici'Dcn foil. 17. 2tnani'a!? .qin;.^ aCfo !)in, fam in Dag J^auef, It^'tt Ojin tit ^dn'Dc auf unD fa.q'tc : ^^vn'Dcr ©anl ! Dcv ^tvv, (3e'fn6, ttv Mf anf Dem ^ICc'gC/ Den Dn fa'mef^, evfd)ien') i^at mid) ge- fanDt', Damit' Du wie'Dev fe'l^enD nnD voll Dei? I)ei'(i9cn (Sti'\\t^ rotv'tt]}, 18. ©ogleid)' voax'^, wit wtnn @d)n).>'pcn \)on fci'nen 2In'-- flcn fielen; ev fonn'te ir»if'Dev fe'ljen, flanD anf xmD lits ftd) tan'fen. 19. Saim a|^' er, unD jUvf'te f(d) wie'Dcv. CRcd) ei'nige 'ia'gc Mieb er bci Den 3uncVevn jn 2>amag'hu> ; 20. ItnD fog(cid)' pve'Digte ev Sic'fnm in Den ©vjnago'gen, Dag cv Dev © 1) n (S o t' t e t? fei. 21. lii'lt, Die il)n l)6v'tcn, cv|tann'tcn nnD fpva'd)en : 31^ cv c^ nid)t, Dev ju 3evn'fa(em \)evti('gfn vooli'tt Die, ir»e('d)c je'ncn Sta'men an'rnfen ? 3;a p.cra'De Da'ium i|t ev l)iet)fv' get'om'men, urn fie in '33evt;aft' jn nel/mcn, nnD an Die £>'l>erpvie|Ur jn iibev= Ue'fevn. 22. @an'Ing gcrrann' inDef'fen im'mev meljv an ^vaft, fo Dag ev Die 3n'Den, Die ju 3)ama6'hi^ wol)n'ten, ganj in ^evwiv'vnng fcj'te, inDem ev jlanD'l)aft beljaup'tcte : Die'fev ift Sl)riffntt. 23. erne gevan'me ^tit nad)l)ev' l^iel'tcn Die ^n'Den 9latt) jufam'men, iljn nm'jnlnuigen. 2-1. Ti'bn il)'vc 3^ad)'|Ul(nngen miv'Den Dem @an'[ng be-- tannt'. 3tnjit>ifdVen i)ieit man Xa^ nnD ^nd)t Die ^Ijo'vc be= fejt', nm tt}n jn tcD'ten. 25. 2)a naVmen U)n Die 3iiing'ev Dc6 9^rtcl)te unD lic'fcu il)ii in ci'ncm ^ov'be an Dev SDTan'ev l;inab'. APPENDIX. •277 26. 3)(i cv l^iei-rtuf md) 3icvu'fafcm hm> furt)'tc ev ftd) an tic ^Hjig'ci- au'jiifcl)(icfcu ; a'bcv al'le fuvcl)'tctcu iijn, gtaub'teii iiicl)t, brtf5 ci- ciu 3un(i'ci- fei. 27. S)a lutljm fic() S5av'ua6rtg fci'uev an, fi\t)v'tt i^ii ju Den 2(pof'tcln unt» cvjdijCtc i^'ueii, irie er auf fci'ncv SKci'fc t>cn J^errn gcfc'l^cn uuD iaf^ Dtc'fci' ju il^m gcfc'tct, unb tnic fvci'= niutl^ig fi- jn 2)amrt6'fue fiiv t>cn 9Iamen 3c'fu ftct) evfldrt' ijd'be. 28. '3Jon tcv 3fit an jlanb ev ju 3er«'fa(em in ijevtvan'tem Um'sangc mit ilj'ueu unt) i^evhui'bigte fvei'mut^ig ten 3(ta'men 3e'fu, Dee J^evvn. II. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. ©v'lTc^ ©efpi'5r()'. ®u'ten 0[)tov'gen, mein J^evr, or J^erv 9t. (i. e. the family name), §vau 9t, or Madame, mein gvdu'kin, or 3ung'- fei* 91. or Mademoiselle. (Su'tm 'Xag, mein ^en, k. (Sn'ten 2i'bcnl>. ©n'te S(lacl)t. <2Die be^n'bcn @ie ftcfe ? ©efjv n)ot}l, ic() Danf e 2f^'nen. (£^ i|l miv (ieb @ie jn fe'^en. 3cfe l)of fe ©ie ftnt) n)o^I. 9tid)t fel^r root;!. 3cb Ija'be @ie Ung'e nic^t gc^ fc't)ett. ^0 fln& @ie geae'fen ? 24 JFVrsi Dialogue. Good morning, Sir, or Mr. N., Madam or Mrs. N., Miss N. Good day, Sir, &/C. Good evening. Good night. How do you do? Very well, I thank you. I am glad to see you. I hope you are well. Not very well. I have not seen you for a long time. Where have you been ? 278 APPENDIX. 3c() Inn in spari6' oicmc'fcn. I have been in Paris. \l3i( bcjin'Dct \Ui) 3bl' J^cit How does your brother do ? d' i]\ jicm'Ud) tt)Of)[. He is tolerably well. 3c() ^IvUl'be, CV bcftn'tct ftd) I believe he is well. wclyi. (Sv btfAWi' fid) gcf'tcvu 'Zi'benfcS He was well last night. TOic bcftn't>fn fid) 3()i' J^cri* How are your father and ^a'tcr unb 3l;'i-e '§xa\i mother? 93iut'm- ? Wdti'm ?OTut'tCV bcftn'bct ftd) My mother is not well. nid)t vooijl ©ic befaub' fid) gcftcvn ffU^ She was ill yesterday morn- ntd)t »ot}I. ing. 2)a6 tijut miv leifc. I am sorry for it. 3wci'tC6 (Sefpvdc^'. Second Dialogue. W'J'^l^^Xa^l'' {What o'clock is it? Q& i]l cin U()r. It is one o'clock. (S$ ijl Jtt>Mf U()t. It is twelve o'clock. (S^ ill cm ^iev'tel nad) jtreif. )^^.^^ ^^^^^ past twelve. Ce t|t fin ^iff tcl auf cmg. f * ^ e^ ill Jalb cin U(?r. ht is half past twelve. €ei ijt brci '^icv'td auf Cin^. It wants a quarter of one. C^ ijl cin "SJicv'td anf bvci. It is a quarter past two. 6^ ijt jwau'jig 93tinu'tcn nad) It is twenty minutes past two. jn>ci. Sd ijt jwan'jig SOlinu'tcn bcr It is twenty minutes to eight. ad)t. QDBic i)ic[ ill C6 auf jct)tt ? How much does it wantof ten 1 <£iS fctjlt jct)n 30Iinu'tcn ju" jct)n. CMUnnfjig a)?inu'mi *»f (.^ ^ants ten minutes of ten. (Ss i|l jclju SDtinu'tcn toor 'IBann fUU> @ie gefom'men ? When did you comet APPENDIX. 279 '^(h hm ttn'gcfa(?v urn Diet* Si? fcl)luoi c'bcn ftc'bcu n(}v. J^at c^ fcl}Ou gcfcbla'gcu ? ^s i»ivt> balD afl)t fitta'gcn. ^IDBic vlel \d)[aci,t ci? jc§t ? S^ mu|5 aiif J»cu @cl)lai^ uciiu fciij. iKicfcu, mct)t Jralji- '< I came about four o'clock. It just struck seven o'clock. Has it already struck ? It will soon strike eight. What does it strike now ? It must be about striking nine. That is your time for break- fasting, is it not ? 2)rit'tcg n-cd)'cn faiin. ©pvcit'cu (&?ie init mir. ^erltc'bcu ©ic midi ? ©predVcn ©ic mit ii)m, (i()r.) JPta'bc id) viit'tig aus'gcfpuod)- cu ? ©ic fprcd)'ciifct)v <\nt 2)cutfc{). ©tui) *&?ic in J)cutfd)'(ant) gc-- wc'fcu ? SiTciii, nic'mali?. ^IBic lang'c l^Vtcu ©ic ge= fcrut' ?^ gunf IWo'natc. 2)ag ift nuv ci'uc fur'jc ^eit ; id) wuu'JJcrc mid), Daf; ©ic fd)on I'd gut fpvcd)'cn. ^crl!c'l)cn ©ic wa^ ©ic U'-- fen ? Set) t)cv|lc'(}c mc()v al^ ict) vc'= ttcn faun. Q33ic ncn'ncii ©ic l>a6 aiif 2)ciitrd) ? iaf'fcn ©ic m\$ £»cutfc^ fpi-cd)'-- en. Third Dialogue. Do you speak German, Sir ? I speak it a little I understand it better than I can speak it. Speak with me. Do you understand me? Speak with hirn, (her). Did I pronounce right ? You speak German very well. Have you been in Germany ? No, never. How long have you been learning? Five months. This is but a short time ; I wonder you speak so well already. Do you understand what you read ? I understand more than I can speak. What do you call that in Ger- man ? Let us speak German. 280 APPENDIX. ju (ci- iicn. a^iit ircm fprc(()'cu ©ie ? QOBLn>ctu' fvi'cd)'cii @ic ? ©prccl)Cii ©tc ju mtf ? @pvccl)'cu @ic eiuwe'nig lau'= fcr. That is a good way to learn it. With whom do you speak t What do you say ? Of what do you speak ? Do you speak to me ? Speak a little louder. ^ici-'tce ^cfprdd)'. UdiVS i\\ C6 fill- nIBct'tci- ? <£^ i\t fcl)6u (fcl)6'ucg) %IDct'tcr. @c()cint ^ic ©on'ne ? 3a, mciu Jfjcrv, «ut> eg i|t fcl;v warm. 2)ae; ^XDct'tci- ijl ^cn gan'jen "Xv^g fcl)on gcirc'fcu. QDDie i|t t)ag ^ct'tcv ? Sg ijl jiif()t ju iravm unfc nirfjt ju fa(t. 2)ag defter (;at ftd) gcdn'-- (S^ i|T fc()i- mtn'fcifl. 2)ic OBct'fcu ftut) fcbi- fcict. 3d) fuvd)'tc wiv n>ci-'t>eu fHc'= geii bct'cm'meu. ball) \)ov= u'bcv fcin. QOBiv lt>cl•'^cu 2)on'nci- ^a'bcn. X)cv SDou'iicv vollt. Fourth Dialogue. What kind of weather is it ? It is fine weather. Does the sun shine ? Yes, Sir, and it is very warm. The weather has been fine the whole day. How is the weather ? It is neither too warm nor too cold. The weather has changed. It is very windy. The clouds are very thick. I fear we shall have rain. It drizzles, it will rain. It will soon rain. It begins to rain, to snow It is bad weather. It is dirty (weather). It is dry, wet, rainy, stormy, windy, changeable weather. The weather clears up. This rain will soon be over. We shall have some thunder. The thunder roars. APPENDIX. 281 §iuif tei? (Scfpracl)'. 3:cl) gc't)c uacl) iou'ton. Si- gct)t ucicl) £iciit|'cl)'Iaiit). Sv i»ol}ut III in ©tvit)t -Oaii: iio'Dcir. Sr gfl)t l)Ufc() (u6cv) gi\xiif'-- vci(t) luid) i)Ci- ©c()itieij. ^v i|t ill (ju) Dtca'vet/ SKom, '^tCU ClClDC'flMl. 9}?ci'iie @d)»>cftei- i)l in (ju) 5Hom gone 'feu. a}?clu '^vii'bcv i»av in 2(miUv: I) am' gciDc'feu. 3;d) ge'ljc auf DaiS i^^ll^. Q33o t'om'mcu ©ic tjcv ? 3ct) fcm'me Don Dcm ian'l>c. 3rt) toin'me \)oii (aug) t)ei' @tai>t. 3c() fcm'mc aug (i)oii) l»ci' ©tiM'fe. 935iv foin'mcn l^ou i>n 255v'fc. 3c() 9c'(}e nact) J^au'fc. 3c() fom'me aug (Don) l>ei* ^ii-'cl)e. @ie 9cl)t ill tie ^iv'c()e. ®r 9ft}t iu\d) J^ciu'fe. 3d) tom'mc aug item 3in^'«^fi'« ©ie Hmmt aug t»cv ©tu'bc. 3d) gc'l^e ill ^ie ^"am'mcv, in tic ^ud)'e, in ben Stcl'lei-, K. ©ic fiub in ixt ^ain'mcr, in t)ei- ^ud)'c, in Dcm Kcrfci*/ in i>tm -OofC/ k. F{/iA Dialogue. Where are you going 1 I am going to London. He is going to Germany. Where does he live now? He lives in the town of Hano- ver. He is going through (by the way of) France to Switzer- land. He has been in (at) Naples, Rome, Vienna. My sister has been at Rome. My brother had been in Am- sterdam. I am going to the country. Where do you come from ? I come from the country. I come from (out of) the city. I come out of (from) the street. We come from 'Change. I am going home. I come from church. She is going to church. He is going home. I come out of the room. She comes out of the parlour. I am going into the chamber, into the kitchen, into the cellar, &c. They are in the chamber, in the kitchen, in the cellar, in the yard, &/C. III. GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS. 21. e llnm eijvijli, . . 'linm. . . . 2{iU»riM-t, . . . 'IL % 2iltct? ^Xeilamcut, . 2iiifl 2(utiac(C, . . . 2(ub'3 2(u6gabc, . . . aiii-g. . . . aiK^jKuommcu, 25 ■':Bnd), Sant), . . e. Ca^., or ^ap. eapitct, or ^a|.ntcf, S 2)octor, . . . t. f) tag tjcilli, . . . t). i l)v%6 ifl, . . . ^cl•9f t)ei'gtcict)cn, . . . ©V- S'oaugi'Uum, . .